JP2023053008A - game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine capable of improving attention level of a player to games.

SOLUTION: A game machine includes game state shift means for shifting a game state from a normal control state to a specific control state advantageous to a player, on the basis of a result of an internal lottery that has been performed upon a trigger of an entrance of a game ball to a first start ball entrance unit and a second start ball entrance unit; and second ball entrance unit storage means for storing a plurality of pieces of internal lottery information associated with a result of an internal lottery that has been performed upon a trigger of an entrance of a game ball to the second start ball entrance unit. The game state shift means includes a most advantageous game state shift unit for shifting a game state to a most advantageous game state (block BL24) advantageous to the player, if a result of an internal lottery that has been stored first in the second ball entrance unit storage means is a winning, or after switching from a high probability mode to a low probability mode (block BL26), if a result of an internal lottery stored in the second ball entrance unit storage means is a winning.

SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 1

COPYRIGHT: (C)2023,JPO&INPIT

Description

The present invention relates to a game machine such as a pachinko game machine.

Conventionally, a shooting means for shooting a game ball toward a game area formed in front of a game board is provided, and an internal lottery such as a jackpot lottery is performed by entering a game ball into an operation opening (starting ball entry means). A game machine that executes is known (see, for example, Patent Document 1). For example, when winning a jackpot lottery, the gaming machine shifts the game state from the normal control state to a specific control state advantageous to the player. In this specific control state, the gaming machine pays out a large number of game balls, for example, by shifting the variable winning device to a state in which game balls can enter.
By the way, since the normal control state has a plurality of game states with different probabilities of winning the jackpot lottery, the player can play the game while enjoying the transition of the game state.

JP 2005-074175 A

However, there is a problem that the player's attention to the game is lowered because the transition of the game state is determined by a lottery when the jackpot lottery is won.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION An object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of increasing the attention of a player to a game.

The gaming machine of the present invention comprises a shooting means for shooting a game ball toward a game area formed in front of a game board, and a game ball flowing down the game area can enter, and based on this entering ball, A game machine comprising starting ball entry means capable of executing a predetermined lottery, and game state transition means capable of shifting a game state from a normal control state to a specific control state advantageous to a player based on the result of the predetermined lottery. The normal control state has a first game state, a second game state different from the first game state, and a continuation rate higher than the continuation rate of the second game state. an advantageous third game state, wherein the start ball-entering means comprises a first start ball-entering means and a second start ball-entering means different from the first start ball-entering means, wherein the second start ball-entering means is , a ball-entering impossible state in which a game ball flowing down the game area cannot be entered, and a ball-enterable state in which a game ball flowing down the game area can be entered, A second ball entry means storage means for storing a plurality of lottery information associated with a predetermined lottery result based on the entry of a game ball into the means; After switching the game state of 2 and switching to the second game state, a predetermined lottery associated with a predetermined number of lottery information smaller than the maximum number of a plurality of pieces of lottery information storable in a second ball entering means storage means. A game state switching means is provided for switching from the second game state to the first game state when the result of (1) is notified, and the game state is switched to the second game state by the game state switching means. and after switching from the second game state to the first game state by the game state switching means. , and when winning a predetermined lottery result associated with the lottery information stored in the second ball-entering means storage means, it is possible to shift to the third game state.

According to the present invention, it is possible to improve the attention of the player to the game.

1 is a front view of a pachinko machine according to a first embodiment of the present invention; front view of game board Figure showing the display screen of the pattern display device Block diagram showing the electrical configuration of a pachinko machine Diagram showing the contents of each counter used for internal lottery A diagram showing an electric role success/failure table storing values of random numbers for winning the electric role item open lottery A diagram showing a success/failure table that stores values of random numbers for winning a jackpot A diagram showing a distribution table storing random number values related to distribution destinations of jackpot types Figure showing a flowchart of timer interrupt processing A diagram showing a flow chart of the winning process for the working opening Diagram showing a flowchart of normal processing Diagram showing a flowchart of main processing A diagram showing a flowchart of game round control processing Diagram showing a flowchart of data setting processing Diagram showing a flowchart of fluctuation start processing A diagram showing a flowchart of processing for electric support A diagram showing a flowchart of the electrical data setting process A diagram showing a flowchart of an electric duty fluctuation start process Diagram showing a flowchart of game state transition processing A diagram showing a flowchart of the big winning opening opening/closing process A diagram showing a flowchart of the big winning opening opening process A diagram showing a flowchart of transition processing at the end of the open/close execution mode A diagram showing a flowchart of first support mode setting processing A diagram showing a flowchart of second support mode setting processing A diagram showing the value of the number-of-games counter set in the first support mode setting process or the second support mode setting process Diagram showing a flowchart of fluctuation end processing A diagram showing a flowchart of an electric duty fluctuation end process Block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the audio emission control device and the display control device The figure which shows the flowchart of the timer interruption process performed with a sound emission control apparatus. A diagram showing a flow chart of effect determination processing A diagram showing a flow chart of production pattern determination processing A diagram showing the relationship between the game result and the game state, etc. A diagram showing a flow chart at the time of transition between the win/fail lottery mode and the support mode A diagram showing the display screen of the symbol display device, the first holding lamp section, and the second holding lamp section when the win/fail lottery mode and the support mode are shifted. Shows the display screen of the symbol display device, the first holding lamp section, and the second holding lamp section at the time of transition to the winning lottery mode and the support mode when the "best result" is obtained during the stay in the short-term high-frequency support mode. figure The display screen of the pattern display device, the first holding lamp part, and the second holding lamp part at the time of transition to the winning lottery mode and the support mode when the "best result" is not obtained during the stay in the short-term high-frequency support mode diagram showing A diagram showing a flow chart at the time of transition between the success or failure lottery mode and the support mode when the first reservation lamp unit is not lit A diagram showing the display screen, the first reservation lamp section, and the second reservation lamp section of the pattern display device at the time of transition to the winning lottery mode and the support mode when the first reservation lamp section is not lit. Shows the display screen of the symbol display device, the first holding lamp section, and the second holding lamp section at the time of transition to the winning lottery mode and the support mode when the "best result" is obtained during the stay in the short-term high-frequency support mode. figure The display screen of the pattern display device, the first holding lamp part, and the second holding lamp part at the time of transition to the winning lottery mode and the support mode when the "best result" is not obtained during the stay in the short-term high-frequency support mode diagram showing The front view of the game board according to the second embodiment of the present invention Diagram showing the contents of each counter used for internal lottery A diagram showing a flow chart of the winning process for the working opening A diagram showing a flowchart of game round control processing Diagram showing a flowchart of data setting processing Front view of a game board according to a third embodiment of the present invention A diagram showing a flowchart of first support mode setting processing according to the fourth embodiment of the present invention. A diagram showing a flowchart of an electric duty fluctuation end process A diagram showing a flow chart of effect determination processing Shows the display screen of the symbol display device, the first holding lamp section, and the second holding lamp section at the time of transition to the win-or-fail lottery mode and the support mode in the case of the "most advantageous result" at the time of transition to the short-term high-frequency support mode. figure The display screen of the symbol display device, the first suspension lamp section, and the second suspension lamp when transitioning to the winning lottery mode and the support mode in the case of the "high probability result of the short-term high-frequency support mode" when transitioning to the short-term high-frequency support mode diagram showing part

[First embodiment]
A first embodiment of the present invention will be described below with reference to the drawings.
FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine according to a first embodiment of the present invention.
The pachinko machine 10 is a pachinko game machine which is a kind of game machine. This pachinko machine 10, as shown in FIG. 12.

The gaming machine main body 12 includes an inner frame (not shown) supported by the outer frame 11 so as to be rotatable with one of the left and right side portions as the supporting side, and an inner frame (not shown) disposed in front of the inner frame. A front door frame 13 supported by the inner frame so as to be rotatable forward with one of the left and right side portions as the support side, and a front door frame 13 disposed behind the inner frame and rearward with one of the left and right side portions as the support side. and a back pack unit (not shown) supported by the inner frame so as to be rotatable.

The gaming machine main body 12 has a locking device (not shown) provided at the leading end of the rotation. This locking device has a function of locking the game machine main body 12 with respect to the outer frame 11 so that it cannot be opened, and has a function of locking the front door frame 13 with respect to the inner frame so that it cannot be opened. have. These locked states are released by unlocking the cylinder lock 14 exposed on the front surface of the pachinko machine 10 using an unlock key.

The front door frame 13 has a substantially elliptical window portion 21 provided so as to cover the entire front side of the inner frame, and a window panel 22 fitted into the window portion 21 . In the present embodiment, the window panel 22 is made of transparent and colorless glass, but may be made of synthetic resin or the like to be transparent and colorless.
In addition, the front door frame 13 includes a display lamp portion 23 provided above the window portion 21 as a part of light emitting means configured by various lamp portions and the like provided around the window portion 21, and a display lamp portion 23, and includes speaker units 24 for outputting sound effects according to the game situation, and an upper bulging portion 25 and a lower bulging portion 26 provided below the window portion 21. there is

The upper bulging portion 25 and the lower bulging portion 26 are vertically arranged side by side and both bulge forward.
The upper bulging portion 25 has an upper plate 25a provided inside so as to open upward. The upper plate 25a temporarily stores the game balls paid out by the payout device 71 (see FIG. 4) provided in the back pack unit, and aligns them in a row toward the game ball launching mechanism 81 (see FIG. 4). It has the function of guiding.
The lower bulging portion 26 also has a lower plate 26a provided inside so as to open upward. The lower tray 26a has a function of storing surplus game balls in the upper tray 25a.

Further, the front door frame 13 has a firing handle 27 as a firing means provided on the right side of the lower tray 26a. The shooting handle 27 is operated by a player of the pachinko machine 10 to shoot a game ball from a game ball shooting mechanism 81 provided below the inner frame toward a game area provided above the inner frame. do. The shooting handle 27 changes the shooting intensity of the game ball shot toward the game area, ie, the momentum of shooting, by changing the amount of rotation operation.

FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board.
The game board 31, as shown in FIG. 2, has an inner rail portion 32 and an outer rail portion 33 attached to its surface, and is mounted on an inner frame. The game area described above is formed on the game board 31 so as to be partitioned by the inner rail portion 32 and the outer rail portion 33 . Almost the entire area of this game area can be visually recognized from the front through the window portion 21 .
The inner rail portion 32 and the outer rail portion 33 form a guide rail 34 for guiding game balls to the game area, and this guide rail 34 is launched from the game ball launching mechanism 81 when the player rotates the shooting handle 27. The game ball that has been hit is guided to the upper part of the game area.

The guide rail 34 is formed so that its exit portion is arranged on one side of the game area and faces the center of the upper part of the game area. For this reason, the reaching position of the game ball in the upper part of the game area is shifted from the side where the exit portion of the guide rail 34 is formed to the opposite side as the rotation amount of the shooting handle 27 by the player increases. Shift to the side of the side. In this embodiment, the exit portion of the guide rail 34 is provided on the left side of the game area.

The game board 31 has, in the game area, a plurality of large and small openings which are formed so as to penetrate in the front-rear direction by being subjected to router processing. In addition, the game board 31 includes an upper operation port (first start ball entry portion) 36, a lower operation port (second start ball entry portion) 37, a variable winning device 38, and an out port 39 provided at each opening. have. The game board 31 includes through gates 41 provided on the left and right sides of the central portion, a main display device 42 provided on the upper right side, a variable display unit 43 provided on the central portion, and the like. have. Furthermore, the game board 31 has, in the game area, various members (accessories) such as a large number of nails 44 planted in order to appropriately disperse or adjust the falling directions of the game balls.

Each of the upper operating port 36, the lower operating port 37, and the various winning ports of the variable winning device 38 is provided with detection sensors 40b to 40d (see FIG. 4) for detecting the entry of game balls, and these detection sensors 40b to 40 d is arranged on the back side of the game board 31 . Specifically, the upper working port 36 has a detection sensor 40b, the lower working port 37 has a detection sensor 40c, and the variable winning device 38 has a detection sensor 40d. The pachinko machine 10 pays out a predetermined number of prize balls based on the detection results of the detection sensors 40b-40d. Incidentally, the detection sensors 40b to 40d may be of any kind as long as they can individually detect winning of game balls, and for example, an electromagnetic induction type proximity sensor can be employed.

Specifically, the pachinko machine 10 pays out three prize balls when a ball enters the upper working port 36 and when a ball enters the lower working port 37 . The pachinko machine 10 pays out 15 prize balls when a ball enters the variable prize winning device 38.例文帳に追加In addition, the number of these prize balls is arbitrary, and for example, the number of prize balls in each of the operation ports 36 and 37 may be different.

Out port 39 is provided at the bottom of the game area of game board 31 . Game balls that do not enter various winning holes are discharged from the game area through the out hole 39.例文帳に追加In addition, the out port 39 is provided with a detection sensor 40e (see FIG. 4) for detecting entry of a game ball, and this detection sensor 40e is arranged on the back side of the game board 31. As shown in FIG. Note that the pachinko machine 10 does not pay out prize balls when a ball enters the out hole 39, unlike when a ball enters the various winning holes.

Each through gate 41 is provided with a detection sensor 40f (see FIG. 4) for detecting an entry of a game ball. Note that the pachinko machine 10 does not pay out prize balls when a ball enters each through gate 41, unlike the case where a ball enters a prize winning opening.

Here, the entry ball means that a game ball passes through a predetermined opening. It also includes a mode in which the game area continues to flow down. However, in the following description, in order to distinguish clearly from the entry of game balls into the out port 39, entry of game balls into various winning ports is also expressed as winning. Further, entering the through gate 41 refers to continuing to flow down the game area without being ejected from the game area after passing through the gate provided in the game area. A ball entering the through gate 41 is also referred to as winning a prize, like entering a ball into various winning holes.

The upper operation port 36 and the lower operation port 37 are unitized as an operation port device and installed on the game board 31 . Each operating port 36, 37 is opened upward to allow the game ball flowing down the game area to enter, and the upper operating port 36 is arranged upward and the lower operating port 37 is arranged downward. are arranged vertically side by side. The lower operating port 37 has an electric accessory 37a as a guide piece (support piece) composed of a pair of left and right movable pieces.

The electric accessory 37a is connected to an electric accessory driving section 37b mounted on the back side of the game board 31. As shown in FIG. The electric accessory 37a is set to either a closed state (non-supported state or non-guided state) or an open state (supported state or guided state) by being driven by the electric accessory drive section 37b. The closed state is a state in which the lower operation opening 37 is closed by bringing the upper end of the electric accessory 37a closer to the left and right. The open state is a state in which the lower operation opening 37 is opened by separating the upper end of the electric accessory 37a in the left-right direction.

Here, when the electric accessory 37a is set to the closed state, the distance between the upper end of the electric accessory 37a and the upper operation opening 36 becomes narrower than one game ball. Further, when the electric accessory 37a is set to the open state, the distance between the upper end of the electric accessory 37a and the upper operation opening 36 becomes wider than one game ball. Therefore, the game ball cannot enter the lower operation opening 37 when the electric accessory 37a is set to the closed state, and can enter the lower operation opening 37 when the electric accessory 37a is set to the open state. can.

In addition, instead of the closed state and the open state described above, the electric accessory 37a has a state in which it is difficult for the game ball to enter the lower operation port 37 (a state in which the game ball can be entered unlike the closed state), and a lower It may be configured to switch between the operation port 37 and the state in which the game ball is likely to win. In addition, the lower operation port 37 may be configured to perform such switching not by setting the electric accessory 37a but by displacing the lower operation port 37. 37 may not include the electric accessory 37a.

The variable prize winning device 38 includes a large prize winning port 38a that opens to allow game balls flowing down the game area to enter, an opening and closing door 38b for opening and closing the big prize winning port 38a, and a variable prize winning that drives the opening and closing door 38b. and a drive unit 38c.
In addition, the player can guide the game ball to the variable winning device 38 by adjusting the rotational operation amount of the shooting handle 27 and adjusting the arrival position of the game ball in the upper part of the game area.

Here, the game board 31 has a cover 381 provided so as to cover the front side of the variable winning device 38 . The cover 381 includes a transparent (or semi-transparent) portion 381a formed to make the variable winning device 38 visible from the front side, and an opaque portion 381a formed around the transparent portion 381a. and a portion 381b.
Therefore, the player can see the variable winning device 38 from the front through the transparent portion 381a and the window portion 21. FIG.

The big winning opening 38a is provided in an opening formed in the game area so as to pass through in the front-rear direction by applying router processing. As described above, the big winning opening 38a is equipped with a detection sensor 40d for detecting the entry of a game ball. The pachinko machine 10 pays out a predetermined number of prize balls based on the detection result.

The opening/closing door 38b is formed in a rectangular plate shape, and is provided on the game board 31 so as to be rotatable about one side on the lower side as a central axis. The opening/closing door 38b rotates toward the window panel 22 and protrudes from the game board 31 to open the opening of the big winning opening 38a, and rotates toward the inside of the game board 31. It has a closed state in which the opening of the big winning opening 38a is closed by being buried in the game board 31. - 特許庁
The variable winning driving unit 38c sets the opening/closing door 38b to either an open state or a closed state by driving the opening/closing door 38b.

Specifically, the opening/closing door 38b is normally set to a closed state in which game balls cannot win. When the internal lottery wins the transition to the opening/closing execution mode and the opening/closing execution mode is entered, the opening/closing door 38b is set to an open state in which a game ball can win a prize.
The opening/closing execution mode (specific control state) refers to a mode in which the opening/closing door 38b is set to an open state and a game ball can be entered into the big winning opening 38a. In addition, in the opening/closing execution mode, after the opening/closing door 38b is set to the open state, it is called one round game until it is set to the closed state again.

The main display device 42 has a main display unit 45 and a character object display unit 46, and includes a segment display (not shown) in which a plurality of segment light emitting units are arranged in a predetermined manner, a dot display, or the like. display device.
The main display device 42 is provided on the game board 31 so as to protrude toward the window panel 22 provided on the front side thereof. That is, the main display device 42 can be visually recognized from the front of the pachinko machine 10 through the window panel 22 . Also, the distance between the main display device 42 and the window panel 22 is narrower than one game ball. Thereby, the pachinko machine 10 prevents game balls from falling between the main display device 42 and the window panel 22.例文帳に追加In other words, the pachinko machine 10 prevents game balls from falling in front of the main display device 42 .

The main display portion 45 includes a first result display portion 45a for displaying the result of the internal lottery performed based on the winning at the upper working port 36, and the internal lottery performed based on the winning at the lower working port 37. A second result display section 45b for displaying the result of the lottery is provided (see FIG. 4). The main display unit 45 may further include a round display unit for clearly indicating the number of round games in the opening/closing execution mode when the opening/closing execution mode is entered (or when the opening/closing execution mode is entered). .

The first result display unit 45a executes the variable display of the pattern with the winning of the upper working port 36 as a trigger, and as a result of stopping the variable display, the internal lottery performed based on the winning of the upper working port 36. to display the results of When the result of this internal lottery is the result corresponding to the transition to the opening/closing execution mode, the first result display section 45a displays a predetermined stop result. After that, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the opening/closing execution mode.
The second result display unit 45b executes the variable display of the pattern with the winning of the lower working opening 37 as a trigger, and as a result of stopping the variable display, the internal lottery performed based on the winning of the lower working opening 37. to display the results of When the result of this internal lottery is the result corresponding to the transition to the opening/closing execution mode, the second result display section 45b displays a predetermined stop result. After that, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the opening/closing execution mode.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the upper operation port 36 and the lower operation port 37 function as starting ball entry means for allowing a game ball flowing down the game area to enter, and executing an internal lottery when the game ball enters. do.

The character object display unit 46 performs variable display of the pattern with the winning of each through gate 41 as a trigger, and as a result of stopping the variable display, the internal lottery performed based on the winning of each through gate 41. to display the results of The accessory display unit 46 displays a predetermined stop result when the result of the internal lottery is the result corresponding to the shift to the electric role open state. After that, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the electric role open state. In this electric operation open state, the electric accessory 37a provided in the lower operation opening 37 is opened in a predetermined manner.

In the present embodiment, the main display unit 45 and the character object display unit 46 are configured by a segment display device, a dot display device, or the like. It may also consist of other types of displays such as EL displays, CRTs, dot matrix, and the like. The patterns to be variably displayed on the main display unit 45 and the accessory display unit 46 include a configuration for variably displaying a plurality of types of characters, a configuration for variably displaying a plurality of types of symbols, and a configuration for variably displaying a plurality of types of characters. , or a configuration in which a plurality of colors are switched and displayed can be adopted.

The variable display unit 43 includes a pattern display device 47 that variably displays (variable display or switching display) a pattern, which is one type of pattern. Also, the variable display unit 43 has a center frame 48 arranged so as to surround the pattern display device 47 . The upper portion of the center frame 48 is provided so as to bulge toward the window panel 22 provided on the front side thereof. As a result, the pachinko machine 10 prevents the game balls from falling in front of the display screen G of the pattern display device 47, and does not cause the inconvenience that the visibility of the display screen G is lowered due to the falling of the game balls. It is configured.

The pattern display device 47 is configured as a liquid crystal display device having a liquid crystal display.
The symbol display device 47 starts the variable display of symbols based on the winning of the upper operation port 36 or the lower operation port 37 . That is, when the symbol display device 47 performs the variable display in the first result display section 45a of the main display section 45 and when the second result display section 45b of the main display section 45 performs the variable display, The variable display is executed accordingly.
The pattern display device 47 is not limited to a liquid crystal display device, and may be a plasma display device, an organic EL display device, or other display device such as a CRT.

The center frame 48 includes a first holding lamp portion 49a provided in the lower left region of the pattern display device 47, a second holding lamp portion 49b provided in the lower right region of the pattern display device 47, and a second holding lamp portion 49b. and a third holding lamp portion 49c provided in the region on the right side of the holding lamp portion 49b.

The first reservation lamp part 49a is a part that displays the number of reserved game balls that have won the upper operation opening 36, and is lit according to the number of reserved balls. The first holding lamp portion 49a can hold up to four game balls, and corresponds to the variable display of the first result display portion 45a and the symbol display device 47. FIG.
The second reservation lamp part 49b is a part that displays the number of reserved game balls that have won the lower operation opening 37, and lights up according to the number of reserved games. The second holding lamp portion 49b can hold up to four game balls, and corresponds to the variable display of the second result display portion 45b and the symbol display device 47. FIG.
The third reservation lamp portion 49c is a portion that displays the number of reserved game balls that have won each through gate 41, and lights up according to the number of reserved games. The third holding lamp portion 49 c can hold up to four game balls, and corresponds to the variable display of the accessory display portion 46 .
It should be noted that each of the holding lamp units 49a to 49c may have another configuration such as being displayed as an image on a part of the pattern display device 47. FIG.

FIG. 3 is a diagram showing a display screen of the pattern display device.
As shown in FIG. 3, the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 is divided into three columns of display areas. Column Z3 is displayed. In each pattern row Z1 to Z3, eight kinds of patterns consisting of numbers "1" to "8" are arranged in ascending order from the bottom to the top, and "8" is followed by "1". configured as follows. In addition, in FIG. 3, the center line of each display area is shown by the dashed-dotted line.

The symbol display device 47 periodically scrolls the symbols of each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction (upward in this embodiment) based on the winning of the upper operation port 36 or the lower operation port 37. By starting the variable display of symbols, an effect for a game round is executed on the display screen G. - 特許庁The effect for this game round is switched from the variable display to the stop display in the order of the left symbol row Z1→right symbol row Z3→middle symbol row Z2, and finally, predetermined symbols are stopped and displayed on the effective line L. end with a state
In other words, the game cycle means the period from when the main display unit 45 and the pattern display device 47 start the variable display based on the wins to the operation ports 36 and 37 until the predetermined stop result is displayed.

It should be noted that the pattern display device 47 is not limited to this, and may be arbitrarily selected. For example, the number of symbol rows, the direction of scrolling of each symbol row, the number of symbols of each symbol row, etc. can be changed as appropriate. Also, the patterns in each pattern row may be a combination of a picture and a number instead of only numbers, or may be a picture only.

<Electrical Configuration of Pachinko Machine 10>
FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine.
As shown in FIG. 4, the pachinko machine 10 includes a main control device 60, a sound emission control device 90, and a display control device 100, and these devices are mounted on the back side of the inner frame. In addition, the pachinko machine 10 includes a payout control device 70 for executing payout control for causing the payout device 71 to pay out game balls, and a power source/power source for executing shooting control for causing the game ball shooting mechanism 81 to shoot game balls. and a launch control device 80, which are mounted on the back pack unit.

The main controller 60 includes a main control board 61 that controls the main control (main control) of the game, and a power outage monitoring board 65 that monitors the power supply. Note that the main controller 60 includes a board box that houses the main control board 61 and the like. The substrate box may comprise marking means for marking upon its opening and may comprise marking structures for marking upon its opening. Specifically, as trace means, a circuit board box is formed by connecting a plurality of case bodies, and a connecting part (crimped part) that requires breaking of a predetermined part when separating each case body is provided, or a structure that peels off At this time, it is possible to adopt a structure in which a sealing seal that leaves a trace of being peeled off because the adhesive layer remains on the object to be adhered is attached so as to straddle the boundary between the plurality of case bodies. Also, as the trace structure, it is possible to employ a configuration in which an adhesive is applied to the boundary between these case bodies.

The main control board 61 includes an MPU 62 mounted on the main control board 61 and a ROM 63 and a RAM 64 that constitute the MPU 62 . Here, the MPU 62 is an element in which, in addition to the ROM 63 and RAM 64, a CPU, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, a counter circuit as a random number generator, and the like are combined into a chip.
In this embodiment, the ROM 63 and the RAM 64 are integrated into one chip with respect to the MPU 62, but they may be integrated into individual chips. This also applies to the MPUs of other controllers other than main controller 60 .

The ROM 63 is a memory for storing various control programs and fixed value data, and is non-volatile storage means that does not require power supply from the outside to hold stored information. The ROM 63 has various areas such as a success/failure table storage area 63a, a distribution table storage area 63b, an electric service success/failure table storage area 63c, and a reach table storage area 63d. These areas are described in detail later.
The RAM 64 is a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when executing the control program stored in the ROM 63, and is a volatile storage means that requires external power supply to hold the stored information. is. This RAM 64 has various areas such as a various counter area 64a, a reserved ball storage area 64b, and an electrical work reservation area 64c. These areas are described in detail later.

The MPU 62 has an input port and an output port. An input port of the MPU 62 is connected to a power failure monitoring board 65 provided in the main controller 60 and a plurality of detection sensors 40b to 40f. The output port of the MPU 62 is connected to the power failure monitoring board 65, the payout control device 70, and the sound emission control device 90. Further, the output ports of the MPU 62 include an electric accessory drive unit 37b that opens and closes the electric accessory 37a of the lower operation port 37, a variable winning drive unit 38c that opens and closes the opening and closing door 38b of the variable winning device 38, and a main display. 45 and the character object display unit 46 .

The main control board 61 has a driver circuit. The MPU 62 executes drive control of various drive units and the like through this driver circuit. Specifically, in the electric role open state, the MPU 62 executes drive control of the electric accessory drive unit 37b to open and close the electric accessory 37a. Further, in the open/close execution mode, the MPU 62 executes drive control of the variable winning driving section 38c to open and close the big winning opening 38a. Also, in each game round, the MPU 62 executes display control of the main display section 45 to display the results of the internal lottery performed based on the winnings to the operation ports 36 and 37 . Further, the MPU 62 executes display control of the accessory display section 46 to display the results of the internal lottery performed based on the winning of each through gate 41 .

The blackout monitoring board 65 relays the main control board 61 and the power supply/launch control device 80 having the function of supplying operating power, and monitors the stable 24 volt DC voltage output from the power supply/launch control device 80. . Therefore, the MPU 62 receives power through the blackout monitoring board 65 .
The detection sensors 40b to 40f are provided in one-to-one correspondence with the upper operation opening 36, the lower operation opening 37, various winning openings of the variable winning device 38, the out opening 39, and each through gate 41. The MPU 62 performs prize winning determination (ball entry determination) to various prize winning ports, the out port 39, and each through gate 41 based on the detection results of the detection sensors 40b to 40f. Note that the MPU 62 executes an internal lottery based on the winning determination for the upper operation port 36 or the lower operation port 37 .

The payout control device 70 executes payout control to cause the payout device 71 to pay out prize balls and rental balls (game balls to be lent to players during games) based on commands (control instructions) transmitted from the main control device 60. do.

The power supply/launch control device 80 is connected to, for example, a commercial power supply (external power supply) in a game arcade or the like. Then, the power supply/launch control device 80 generates the operating power required for each of the main control board 61 and the payout control device 70 based on the external power supplied from the commercial power supply, and the generated operation supply power. The power/launch control device 80 includes a power failure power supply unit such as a backup capacitor. This power-off power supply unit supplies power for memory retention to the RAM 64 of the main control unit 60 even when the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is interrupted.

In addition, the power supply/shooting control device 80 executes shooting control for causing the game ball shooting mechanism 81 to shoot game balls. Here, the game ball shooting mechanism 81 includes a shooting rail extending toward the guide rail 34 of the game board 31, a ball feeding device for supplying game balls stored in the upper tray 25a onto the shooting rail, and a and a solenoid that is an electric actuator that shoots the game ball supplied to the guide rail 34 toward the guide rail 34 . The power supply/launch control device 80 supplies a drive signal (launch permission signal) to the solenoid to launch the game ball when a predetermined launch condition is met.

<Electrical Configuration for Execution of Internal Lottery by MPU 62 of Main Control Unit 60>
FIG. 5 is a diagram showing the contents of each counter used for the internal lottery.
As shown in FIG. 5, the MPU 62 executes an internal lottery or the like by using the values (information) of the counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS and C4. Specifically, the MPU 62 uses the big win random number counter C1 for the lottery for the occurrence of the big win, uses the big win type counter C2 for the lottery for the type of the big win, and determines whether to generate the ready-to-win display. , the reach random number counter C3 is used. Also, the MPU 62 uses the random number initial value counter CINI to set the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1, and uses the variation type counter CS to determine the display continuation time on the main display section 45 and the symbol display device 47. Further, the MPU 62 uses the electric accessory open counter C4 for the lottery to determine whether or not the electric accessory 37a of the lower operation port 37 is set to the electric role open state. The counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS and C4 are provided in the various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64 (see FIG. 4).

Each of the counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value each time it is updated and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Each counter is periodically updated, and the updated value is appropriately stored in a lottery counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 64 . Of the values stored in the lottery counter buffer, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 are stored in the RAM 64 at the timing when the game ball enters the upper operating port 36 or the lower operating port 37. is stored in the reserved ball storage area 64b (see FIG. 4) provided as acquired information storage means. In addition, among the values stored in the lottery counter buffer, the value of the electric role product opening counter C4 is stored as the electric work holding information in the electric work holding area 64c of the RAM 64 (Fig. 4).

The reserved ball storage area 64b includes a first result display section reservation area Ra, a second result display section reservation area Rb, and an execution area AE.

The first result display section reservation area Ra provided as the first ball entering section storage means includes four storage areas, a first area Ra1 to a fourth area Ra4. Each of the areas Ra1 to Ra4 is set to have a storage capacity capable of storing a set of values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3. The MPU 62 uses a set of values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 as reservation information in time series to each area Ra1 to Ra4 in accordance with the winning of the game ball to the upper operation port 36. store it. Specifically, when the winning to the upper working port 36 occurs a plurality of times in succession, the MPU 62 outputs the pending information in the order of the first area Ra1→second area Ra2→third area Ra3→fourth area Ra4. Store in chronological order.

As described above, since the first result display portion reservation area Ra includes four storage areas, up to four winnings of game balls to the upper operation opening 36 are reserved. In addition, the first result display reserved area Ra includes storage areas for writing the reserved numbers stored in the areas Ra1 to Ra4.
In addition, the number of reservations related to the upper working port 36 is not limited to four, and may be any number, such as two, three, or five or more, and may be singular. may

The second result display section reservation area Rb provided as the second ball entering section storage means includes four storage areas, a first area Rb1 to a fourth area Rb4. Each of the areas Rb1 to Rb4 is set to have a storage capacity capable of storing a set of values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3. The MPU 62 uses a set of values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 as reservation information in time series to each area Rb1 to Rb4 in accordance with the winning of the game ball to the lower operation port 37. store it. Specifically, when the winning to the lower opening 37 occurs a plurality of times in succession, the MPU 62 outputs the pending information in the order of the first area Rb1→second area Rb2→third area Rb3→fourth area Rb4. Store in chronological order.

As described above, since the second result display portion reservation area Rb has four storage areas, up to four winnings of game balls into the lower operation opening 37 are reserved. In addition, the second result display portion reservation area Rb includes a storage area for writing the number of reservations stored in each of the areas Rb1 to Rb4.
In addition, the number of reserves related to the lower working port 37 is not limited to four, and may be any number, such as two, three, or five or more, and may be singular. may

The execution area AE stores the pending information stored in the storage area of the first result display portion pending area Ra or the second result display portion pending area Rb when starting the variable display of each of the result display portions 45a and 45b. This is the area to move the .

Thus, in this embodiment, the first result display holding area Ra includes a plurality of internal lottery information associated with the results of the internal lottery executed with the entry of the game ball into the upper working port 36 as a trigger. It functions as storage means for the first ball-entering section that stores (holding information).
Further, in the present embodiment, the holding area Rb for the second result display section includes a plurality of internal lottery information (holding information).

The electrician reservation area 64c includes four storage areas, like the first result display reservation area Ra and the second result display reservation area Rb. In addition, the electrical work holding area 64c includes an electrical work execution area (not shown) like the reserved ball storage area 64b. Therefore, the winning of game balls to each through gate 41 is reserved up to four.
The number of pending gates 41 is not limited to four, and may be any number, such as two, three, or five or more. may

<Detailed description of each counter>
The details of each counter will be described below.
First, the electric accessory release counter C4 will be described. For example, the electric accessory release counter C4 adds 1 to the previous value each time it is updated, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value of 65535, thereby becoming a loop counter that loops within the range of 0 to 65535. ing.
The electric accessory release counter C4 is periodically updated, and the updated value is stored in the electric role holding area 64c of the RAM 64 via the lottery counter buffer at the timing when the game ball wins in each through gate 41. be.
Then, based on the value of the electric role product open counter C4 stored in the electric role holding area 64c, the MPU 62 draws a lottery (electric role object release lottery).

FIG. 6 is a diagram showing an electric role right/wrong table storing values of random numbers for winning the electric accessory open lottery.
Among the values of the electric role release counter C4, the value of the random number that wins the electric role release lottery is stored in the electric role right/wrong table storage area of the ROM 63 provided as the electric right/wrong information group storage means, as shown in FIG. 63c (see FIG. 4) is stored as an electric service right/wrong table (electric power right/wrong information group).

Here, the pachinko machine 10 has a plurality of support modes with mutually different frequencies of enabling game balls to enter the lower operation opening 37 by setting the electric accessory 37a to the open state. Specifically, the pachinko machine 10 has a low frequency support mode (low frequency guide state) in which the frequency of setting the electric role product 37a to the open state is relatively low, and the frequency of setting the electric role product 37a to the open state is low. and a relatively high frequency support mode (high frequency guide state).

Specifically, the electric service acceptance/rejection table is divided into the low-frequency support mode acceptance/rejection table (low-frequency acceptance information group) shown in FIG. and a power supply propriety table for mode (high frequency power supply propriety information group).
The MPU 62 executes the electric role release lottery by comparing these electric role right/wrong tables with the value of the electric role product opening counter C4 stored in the electric role holding area 64c.

These electric role success/failure tables have a plurality of results (electric role success/failure results) of a plurality of electric role product open lotteries of "electric role open win" and "electric role open loss result".
Specifically, under the gaming state in which the electric role winning lottery for the low-frequency support mode is referred to, as shown in FIG. There is one random number value. Therefore, under the gaming state in which the electric role propriety table for the low-frequency support mode is referred to in the electric role open lottery, the probability of winning the "electric role open winning" is 1/65536.
On the other hand, in the game state in which the electric role winning lottery for the high-frequency support mode is referred to, as shown in FIG. There are 65535 random numbers. Therefore, under the gaming state in which the electric role right/wrong table for the high-frequency support mode is referred to in the electric role open lottery, the probability of winning the "electric role open winning" is 65535/65536. Here, the value of the random number that becomes "Electricity open winning" stored in the low-frequency support mode table is the "Electricity open winning" stored in the high-frequency support mode table. is included in the random number value.

In addition, the value and the number of random numbers stored in each electric role success/failure table are arbitrary. good. In addition, the value of the random number that becomes "Electricity open winning" stored in the high-frequency support mode table is the same as the "Electricity open winning" stored in the low-frequency support mode table. It does not have to include the random number value for the low frequency support mode.

Compared with the low-frequency support mode, the high-frequency support mode sets the electric accessory 37a to the open state more times when winning the electric accessory opening lottery, and sets the electric accessory 37a to the open state. The opening time of one time is also getting longer. In addition, in the high-frequency support mode, the closing time for setting the electric accessory 37a to the closed state between each opening in the one-time electrical open state is shorter than the opening time of one time. Furthermore, in the high-frequency support mode, compared to the low-frequency support mode, the minimum secured time (role The duration of one fluctuation display in the object display section 46) is shortened.

Therefore, in the high-frequency support mode, game balls are more likely to enter the lower operation opening 37 as compared with the low-frequency support mode. In other words, in the low-frequency support mode, the game ball has a higher probability of winning the upper working opening 36 than the lower working opening 37 . In addition, in the high-frequency support mode, the probability that the game ball will enter the lower operation opening 37 rather than the upper operation opening 36 is higher.
When it is detected that a prize has been entered into the lower operating port 37, a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out. Therefore, in the high-frequency support mode, the player can play the game while not reducing the number of game balls. It can be carried out.

Thus, in this embodiment, the lower working port 37 has a low-frequency support mode and a high-frequency support mode. The low-frequency support mode functions as a non-enterable state in which a game ball flowing down the game area cannot be entered, and the high-frequency support mode allows a game ball flowing down the game area to enter. Acts as a possible state.

Note that the configurations of the low-frequency support mode and the high-frequency support mode are not limited to this. Specifically, the high-frequency support mode may be configured so that the frequency of setting the electric accessory 37a to the open state is relatively high compared to the low-frequency support mode, and the low-frequency support mode and The high-frequency support mode may have the same probability of winning the electric accessory open lottery. For example, a plurality of types of reserved time may be prepared, and the high-frequency support mode may be configured to make it easier to select a shorter reserved time than the low-frequency support mode, and the average of the selected reserved times may be shortened. It may be configured to Furthermore, by combining the conditions of the number of times the electric accessory 37a is set to the open state, the opening time, and the securing time, the high frequency support mode changes the frequency of setting the electric accessory 37a to the open state to the low frequency support mode. may be configured to be relatively high compared to .

Next, the jackpot random number counter C1 will be described. For example, the jackpot random number counter C1 is a loop counter that loops within the range of 0 to 59 by adding 1 to the previous value each time it is updated and returning to 0 after reaching the maximum value of 59. . Also, the jackpot random number counter C1 reads the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time as an initial value each time it loops. The random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter that loops within the range of 0 to 59, like the jackpot random number counter C1.

The jackpot random number counter C1 is periodically updated, and the updated value is transferred to the reserved ball storage area 64b of the RAM 64 via the lottery counter buffer at the timing when the game ball enters the upper operating port 36 or the lower operating port 37. stored in Specifically, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is stored in the reservation area Ra for the first result display portion of the RAM 64 at the timing when the game ball wins in the upper operating port 36, and the game ball wins in the lower operating port 37. It is stored in the reservation area Rb for the second result display section of the RAM 64 at the timing.
Then, the MPU 62 executes a lottery for the occurrence of a big hit (win/fail lottery) based on the value of the big hit random number counter C1 stored in the reserved ball storage area 64b.

FIG. 7 is a diagram showing a success/failure table that stores values of random numbers for winning a jackpot.
Among the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the value of the random number that wins the jackpot is stored in the hit/fail table storage area 63a (see FIG. 4) of the ROM 63 provided as the hit/fail information group storage means, as shown in FIG. (whether or not information group).

Here, the pachinko machine 10 has two win/fail lottery modes of a low probability mode (low probability state) in which it is difficult to win a big win and a high probability mode (high probability state) in which it is easy to win a big win. . The success/failure table includes the success/failure table for the low-probability mode (low-probability success/failure information group) shown in FIG. group).
The MPU 62 executes a lottery for the occurrence of a big hit by comparing these win/fail tables with the value of the big hit random number counter C1 stored in the reserved ball storage area 64b.

These hit/fail tables have lottery results (hit/fail results) of occurrence of a plurality of jackpots, such as "jackpot win", "special loss result", and "ordinary loss result".
Specifically, under the gaming state in which the success/failure table for the low-probability mode is referred to in the lottery for the occurrence of the big win, as shown in FIG. is. Therefore, under the gaming state in which the success/failure table for the low-probability mode is referred to for the lottery for the occurrence of the big win, the probability of winning the "big win" is 1/30.
On the other hand, under the gaming state in which the success/failure table for the high-probability mode is referred to at the time of the lottery for the occurrence of the big win, as shown in FIG. is. Therefore, in a gaming state in which the success/failure table for the high-probability mode is referred to for the lottery for the occurrence of the big win, the probability of winning the "big win" is 1/3.
Here, the value of the random number for "winning the jackpot" stored in the success/failure table for the low-probability mode is included in the value of the random number for "winning the jackpot" stored in the success/failure table for the high-probability mode. .

Thus, in this embodiment, the high-probability mode (second gaming state) executes an internal lottery with a winning probability higher than that of the low-probability mode (first gaming state).

The value and number of random numbers stored in each success/failure table are arbitrary, and it is sufficient that the high probability mode has a higher probability of winning a "big win" than the low probability mode. Further, the value of the random number for "winning the jackpot" stored in the success/failure table for the high-probability mode must not include the value of the random number for "winning the jackpot" stored in the success/failure table for the low-probability mode. Alternatively, it may include a part of the random number values that are stored in the success/failure table for the low-probability mode and become the "big win".

In addition, in each win/fail lottery mode, random numbers other than "big win win" results in a loss without winning a big win.
Here, as described above, the pachinko machine 10 has two types of loss results, ie, the "special loss result (small win result)" and the "normal loss result". All of these outliers are common in that they do not trigger the transition to the lottery mode or the support mode. However, the difference is that the "special deviation result" serves as a trigger for shifting to the opening/closing execution mode, whereas the "normal deviation result" does not trigger a transition to the opening/closing execution mode.

Next, the jackpot type counter C2 will be described. The jackpot type counter C2 is, for example, a loop counter that loops within the range of 0 to 29 by adding 1 to the previous value each time it is updated and returning to 0 after reaching the maximum value of 29. .
The jackpot type counter C2 is periodically updated, and the updated value is stored in the reserved ball storage area 64b of the RAM 64 via the lottery counter buffer at the timing when the game ball enters the upper operating port 36 or the lower operating port 37. stored in Specifically, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is stored in the reservation area Ra for the first result display portion of the RAM 64 at the timing when the game ball wins in the upper operation port 36, and the game ball wins in the lower operation port 37. It is stored in the reservation area Rb for the second result display section of the RAM 64 at the timing.
Then, based on the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the reserved ball storage area 64b, the MPU 62 executes a lottery (distribution lottery) for the jackpot type when the jackpot occurs.

FIG. 8 is a diagram showing an allocation table storing random number values relating to allocation destinations of types of jackpots.
As shown in FIG. 8, the random number value related to the allocation destination of the jackpot type is stored in the allocation table (see FIG. 4) in the allocation table storage area 63b (see FIG. 4) of the ROM 63 provided as the allocation information group storage means. minute information group). The distribution table includes a first distribution table (first distribution information group) shown in FIG. 8(a) and a second distribution table (second distribution information group) shown in FIG. 8(b). ing.
The MPU 62 executes a jackpot type lottery by comparing these distribution tables with the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the reserved ball storage area 64b.

In the first distribution table, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 shifted from the reservation area Ra for the first result display unit to the execution area AE, that is, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 based on the winning to the upper operation port 36 It is a table referred to when performing a lottery for the type of jackpot.
The first distribution table, as shown in FIG. Probability result)” and “Most advantageous result (special allocation result corresponding to high probability)” are assigned as allocation destinations. Specifically, in the first distribution table, among the values “0 to 29” of the jackpot type counter C2, “0 to 9” are distributed to “non-explicit small round high probability results”, and “10 to 19” It is sorted into "high probability result of explicit few rounds", and "20 to 29" is sorted into "best result".

In the second distribution table, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 shifted from the second result display portion reservation area Rb to the execution area AE, that is, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 based on the winning to the lower operation port 37 It is a table referred to when performing a lottery for the type of jackpot.
As shown in FIG. 8(b), the second distribution table assigns only the distribution result of the "best result". Specifically, in the second distribution table, among the values "0 to 29" of the jackpot type counter C2, "0 to 29" are distributed to the "best result".

Next, the reach random number counter C3 will be described. The reach random number counter C3 is, for example, a loop counter that loops within the range of 0 to 238 by adding 1 to the previous value each time it is updated and returning to 0 after reaching the maximum value of 238. .
The reach random number counter C3 is periodically updated, and the updated value is stored in the reserved ball storage area 64b of the RAM 64 via the lottery counter buffer at the timing when the game ball enters the upper operating port 36 or the lower operating port 37. stored in Specifically, the value of the reach random number counter C3 is stored in the first result display portion reservation area Ra of the RAM 64 at the timing when the game ball wins the upper operation port 36, and the game ball wins the lower operation port 37. It is stored in the reservation area Rb for the second result display section of the RAM 64 at the timing.
Then, the MPU 62 executes a lottery (reach generation lottery) to determine whether to generate a reach display based on the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the reserved ball storage area 64b.

The ready-to-win display is an expectation effect that occurs when the winning lottery does not result in a "big win" but results in a "normal failure".
Specifically, the MPU 62 determines the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the reach table and the reserved ball storage area 64b when the result of the win/fail lottery does not result in a "big hit" but results in a "normal loss". By comparing with , a lottery is executed as to whether or not to generate a ready-to-win display, and when the ready-to-win display is to be generated in this lottery, the ready-to-win display is generated. The ready-to-win table is a table that stores values of random numbers related to occurrence of the ready-to-win display, and is stored in the ready-to-win table storage area 63d of the ROM 63 (see FIG. 4).

Here, in the case of "big win winning" in the lottery lottery and "most advantageous result" in the distribution lottery, the symbol display device 47 selects a combination of symbols having the same number as the stop result. Stop display on the effective line L. In addition, if it becomes "jackpot winning" in the winning lottery and is distributed to "unspecified small round high probability result" or "explicit small round high probability result" in the distribution lottery, or "jackpot winning" in the lottery lottery In the event that a "special failure result" is obtained without becoming, the symbol display device 47 selects a "normal failure result" in the winning lottery instead of a combination of symbols having the same number as the stop result. A special combination of symbols having numbers different from each other, which will never be displayed, is stopped on the activated line L. - 特許庁

In the reach display, when the combination of symbols with the same number is finally stopped and displayed (when it becomes a "big win" in the winning lottery and is distributed to the "best result" in the distribution lottery), It occurs regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3. In addition, the reach display is used when the combination of special symbols is finally stopped and displayed ("jackpot winning" in the winning lottery, "unspecified small round high probability result" or "explicit small round high probability" in the distribution lottery) In the case of being sorted to "probable result" or "special losing result" instead of "big hit winning" in the winning lottery), it does not occur regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3.

In the ready-to-win display mode, some of the plurality of symbol rows Z1 to Z3 displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 (for example, the symbol row Z1 and the symbol row Z3) are displayed on the activated line L. By stopping and displaying, the same combination of symbols is displayed to indicate the result of stopping, and in that state, the remaining symbol rows (for example, the symbol row Z2) are variably displayed.
Therefore, by generating the ready-to-win display, the pachinko machine 10 becomes a "big win" in the lottery after the start of the variable display on the pattern display device 47 and before displaying the predetermined stop result, It is possible to make the player expect that he or she has been sorted to the "best result" in the sorting lottery.

Note that the ready-to-win display mode is not limited to this, and a part of the symbol rows are stopped and displayed, and the remaining symbol rows are variably displayed, and a predetermined character or the like is displayed in the background as a moving image. Alternatively, each pattern row may be reduced or hidden, and a predetermined character or the like may be displayed on substantially the entire display screen G as a moving image.

Here, the pachinko machine 10 has an expected effect as a kind of variable display of the pattern display device 47. - 特許庁The expectation effect is such that the player expects that he or she has won a "big win" in the lottery after the start of the variable display on the symbol display device 47 and before the predetermined stop result is displayed. I mean performance. Specifically, the pachinko machine 10 has two types of expectation effects, namely, the aforementioned ready-to-win display and advance notice display.

The notice display will not be "jackpot winning" in the lottery if it becomes "jackpot winning" in the lottery, or if it becomes "special losing result" without becoming "jackpot winning" in the lottery lottery. This is an expected effect that makes the effect more likely to occur than in the case of the "normal deviation result". This advance notice display may make it easier to select an effect with a low appearance rate instead of making the effect more likely to occur, or may be combined.
While the lottery to determine whether or not to generate the ready-to-win display is performed by the main controller 60, the lottery to determine whether to generate the advance notice display is performed by the sound emission control device 90. .

The mode of the advance notice display is that of the plurality of symbol rows Z1 to Z3 displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 47, all of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are variably displayed, and some of the symbol rows (for example, symbol row Z1) is stopped on the activated line L, and a plurality of symbol rows (for example, symbol rows Z2 and Z3) are variably displayed or ready-to-win display is generated, a predetermined character etc. are displayed on the display screen G as moving images. This notice display occurs both when the reach display is generated and when the reach display is not generated, but it is set so that it is more likely to occur when the reach display is generated than when the reach display is not generated. It is
Note that the advance notice display is not limited to this, and for example, the background may be changed, and the pattern rows Z1 to Z3 may be changed and displayed.

Finally, the fluctuation type counter CS will be explained. For example, the fluctuation type counter CS is a loop counter that loops within the range of 0 to 198 by adding 1 to the previous value each time it is updated and returning to 0 after reaching the maximum value 198. .
The fluctuation type counter CS is updated at least once each time a normal process, which will be described later, is executed, and is stored in the lottery counter buffer each time it is updated.
Then, the MPU 62 determines the pattern display duration time on the main display section 45 and the pattern display duration time on the pattern display device 47 based on the value of the variation type counter CS stored in the lottery counter buffer.

<Regarding Various Processing Executed by Main Controller 60>
The MPU 62 of the main control device 60 executes timer interrupt processing and normal processing that advances the game, and main processing that is activated when the power is turned on. Timer interrupt processing, normal processing, and main processing will be described in order below.
In addition to timer interrupt processing, normal processing, and main processing, the MPU 62 executes NMI interrupt processing activated by input of a power failure signal to the NMI terminal (non-maskable terminal), but description of this processing will be omitted.

<Timer interrupt processing>
FIG. 9 is a diagram showing a flowchart of timer interrupt processing.
In timer interrupt processing, the MPU 62 periodically (for example, every 2 msec) executes steps S101 to S105, as shown in FIG.

In step S101, the MPU 62 executes reading processing of the plurality of detection sensors 40b to 40f. In this reading process, the MPU 62 reads the states of the plurality of detection sensors 40b to 40f, determines the states, and stores them in the RAM 64 as winning detection information. When the MPU 62 determines that the detection sensors 40b to 40d corresponding to various winning holes detect the winning of game balls, it sets a prize ball command for instructing the payout of the prize balls, and sets this set prize ball command. A command is transmitted to the payout control device 70 . For example, when the MPU 62 determines that the detection sensor 40d corresponding to the variable winning device 38 has detected the winning of game balls, a prize ball command for instructing 15 prize balls, which is a specific unit number to the payout control device 70.
The payout control device 70 performs payout control to cause the payout device 71 to pay out prize balls based on the prize ball command transmitted from the MPU 62 .

In step S102, the MPU 62 updates the random number initial value counter CINI. Specifically, as described above, the MPU 62 adds 1 to the previous value of the random number initial value counter CINI to update it, and stores the updated value in the lottery counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 64. do. Note that the MPU 62 returns the value of the random number initial value counter CINI to 0 and clears it if it reaches the maximum value when adding 1 to the previous value of the random number initial value counter CINI.

In step S103, the MPU 62 updates the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the electric accessory release counter C4. Specifically, as described above, the MPU 62 adds 1 to each of the previous values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the electric accessary product release counter C4 and updates them. The subsequent value is stored in a lottery counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 64 . Note that the MPU 62 returns the values of the counters C1 to C4 to 0 and clears them when the previous values of the counters C1 to C4 have reached the maximum value when 1 is added thereto.

In step S104, the MPU 62 executes the winning process for through. In this through winning process, when the MPU 62 determines that the detection sensor 40f corresponding to each through gate 41 has detected the winning of the game ball, the electric accessory opening counter C4 updated in step S103 is stored in the electric service reservation area 64c. Also, the MPU 62 sets a command for lighting the third suspension lamp portion 49 c and transmits the set command to the sound emission control device 90 .
In addition, the sound emission control device 90 turns on the third suspension lamp part 49c based on the command transmitted from the MPU 62 . Further, the number of reserved game balls that have won the through gate 41 is, as described above, a maximum of four, and the third reservation lamp portion 49c is lit by the number corresponding to this reserved number.

In step S105, the MPU 62 executes the winning process for the working opening.
The prize winning process for the operating port will be described in detail below.

<Winning process for operating port>
FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a flow chart of the winning process for the working opening.
In the winning process for the working opening, the MPU 62 executes steps S201 to S207 as shown in FIG.

In step S201, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the detection sensor 40b corresponding to the upper working port 36 has detected the winning of the game ball, thereby determining whether the game ball has won the upper working port 36 (start winning). determine whether When the MPU 62 determines in step S201 that the game ball has won in the upper working port 36, in step S202, the number of reserved balls stored in the first result display section reserved area Ra is grasped, and the reserved number is determined. The number is set in a predetermined storage area in the first result display section reservation area Ra as the first start-up reservation storage number RaN. Then, MPU62 performs the process after step S205.

On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S201 that the game ball has not entered the upper operating port 36, in step S203, the detection sensor 40c corresponding to the lower operating port 37 detects the winning of the game ball. is detected, it is determined whether or not the game ball has entered the lower operation opening 37 (start winning).
When the MPU 62 determines that the game ball has not entered the lower operation opening 37 in step S203, it ends the operation opening winning process. Further, when the MPU 62 determines that the game ball has won the lower operation opening 37 in step S203, in step S204, the number of reservations stored in the second result display section reservation area Rb is grasped, The pending number is set in a predetermined storage area in the second result display portion pending area Rb as a second start pending storage number RbN. Then, MPU62 performs the process after step S205.

After executing the process of step S202 or step S204, the MPU 62 determines in step S205 that the number of start suspension memories N (RaN or RbN) set in step S202 or step S204 is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment). Determine whether or not there is
When the MPU 62 determines in step S205 that the number N of start pending memories is not less than the upper limit value, the MPU 62 ends the prize winning process for the operating opening. Further, when the MPU 62 determines in step S205 that the start pending memory number N is less than the upper limit value, the MPU 62 adds 1 to the value of the start pending memory number N and updates it in step S206.

In step S207, the MPU 62 stores a set of values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 updated in step S103 of the timer interrupt process out of the empty storage area of the reservation area for the result display section. The suspension information is stored in the first storage area, that is, the storage area corresponding to the start suspension storage number N updated in step S206.

For example, when the MPU 62 sets the first start pending memory number RaN in step S202, each of the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, and reach random number counter C3 updated in step S103 of the timer interrupt process A set of values is stored as pending information in the first storage area of the empty storage areas in the first result display portion pending area Ra, that is, in the storage area corresponding to the first start pending storage number RaN updated in step S206. For example, when the MPU 62 sets "3" to the first start pending memory number RaN in step S202, the MPU 62 stores "4" in the first start pending memory number RaN updated in step S206. Hold information is stored in a certain fourth area Ra4.

Also, for example, when the MPU 62 sets the second start pending memory number RbN in step S204, the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, and reach random number counter C3 updated in step S103 of the timer interrupt process are stored as suspension information in the first storage area among the empty storage areas of the second result display section storage area Rb, that is, in the storage area corresponding to the second start suspension storage number RbN updated in step S206. do. For example, when the MPU 62 sets "3" to the second start pending memory number RbN in step S204, the MPU 62 stores the second start pending memory number RbN in the storage area corresponding to "4" updated in step S206. Hold information is stored in a certain fourth area Rb4.

Further, in step S207, the MPU 62 sets a command for turning on the first reservation lamp section 49a or the second reservation lamp section 49b, and transmits the set command to the sound emission control device 90. After that, the MPU 62 terminates the prize winning process for the operating port.
In addition, the sound emission control device 90 turns on the first reservation lamp section 49a or the second reservation lamp section 49b based on the command transmitted from the MPU 62 . In addition, the number of reserved game balls that have won the upper operation opening 36 or the lower operation opening 37 is, as described above, a maximum of four pieces, and the first reservation lamp portion 49a or the second reservation lamp portion 49b is this reservation number The corresponding number of lights up.

<Normal processing>
FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a flowchart of normal processing.
The MPU 62 executes a main process, which will be described later, which is activated when the power is turned on, and then executes a normal process, which is the main process for advancing the game. In this normal process, the MPU 62 executes steps S301 to S314 as shown in FIG. Specifically, the MPU 62 periodically executes steps S301 to S309 at a cycle of 4 msec, repeatedly executes steps S308 to S311 when a remaining time occurs, and executes step S312 and subsequent steps according to the determination result of step S308. Execute.

In step S301, the MPU 62 executes timer interrupt processing or external output processing for transmitting commands set in the previous normal processing to each sub-side control device. In this external output process, for example, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the prize ball command is set, and if it determines that the prize ball command is set, the prize ball command is sent to the payout control device 70 Send. Further, for example, the MPU 62 determines whether or not a command for effect such as a command corresponding to the effect for the game round or a command corresponding to the effect for the open/close execution mode is set, and the command for effect is determined. When it is determined that it is set, the command for that effect is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 .

In step S302, the MPU 62 updates the variation type counter CS. Specifically, as described above, the MPU 62 adds 1 to the previous value of the fluctuation type counter CS to update it, and stores the updated value in the lottery counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 64. . In addition, when the MPU 62 has reached the maximum value when adding 1 to the previous value of the fluctuation type counter CS, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS is returned to 0 and cleared.

In step S303, the MPU 62 executes game round control processing for advancing the game round. In the game round control process, the MPU 62 executes a win/fail lottery and a sorting lottery, determines information related to a pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on the pattern display device 47, and determines a pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on the main display unit 45. decision of information related to
In step S304, the MPU 62 executes game state transition processing for shifting the game state. In the game state transition processing, the MPU 62 executes transition processing to each game state such as an opening/closing execution mode, a high probability mode, and a high frequency support mode.
The game round control process in step S303 and the game state transition process in step S304 will be described later in detail.

In step S305, the MPU 62 executes demonstration display execution determination processing. In this demonstration display execution determination process, the MPU 62 determines whether or not a predetermined start waiting period (for example, 30 seconds) for starting a demonstration has elapsed without a new game round being started after the game round has ended. However, when it is determined that the start waiting period has elapsed, a demo command for starting the demo display is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 .
Note that the sound emission control device 90 starts the demonstration display execution process based on the demonstration command transmitted from the MPU 62 .

Here, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the start waiting period has passed by counting the number of times the process of step S305 is executed. For example, if the start waiting period is 30 sec and the interval for repeatedly executing the process of step S305 is 4 msec, the MPU 62 counts the number of times the process of step S305 is executed, and when it reaches 7500 times, the start waiting period is determined to have passed. Note that the configuration for measuring the start waiting period is arbitrary, and for example, the start waiting period may be measured using a real-time clock. In addition, when the MPU 62 starts a new game round while counting the number of execution times of the process of step S305, the count value is reset.

In step S<b>306 , the MPU 62 executes an electric support process for executing drive control of the electric accessory 37 a provided in the lower working port 37 . In this electric role support process, the MPU 62 executes the electric role product opening lottery based on the value of the electric role product opening counter C4 stored in the electric role holding area 64c of the RAM 64, and the electric role product opening lottery. When winning, the opening/closing process of the electric accessory 37a is executed. Further, the MPU 62 performs display control of the accessory display unit 46 so as to display the result of the electric accessory open lottery.
Note that the electric support processing in step S306 will be described later in detail.

In step S307, the MPU 62 executes game ball launch control processing. In this game ball shooting control process, the MPU 62 causes the power supply/shooting control device 80 to execute shooting control for shooting a game ball based on the rotation of the shooting handle 27 by the player. Specifically, the power supply/shooting control device 80 causes the game ball shooting mechanism 81 to shoot a game ball by exciting the solenoid of the game ball shooting mechanism 81 at a predetermined cycle (0.6 sec in this embodiment). . In addition, the solenoid is energized so as to shoot the game ball with a shooting intensity corresponding to the rotation operation amount of the shooting handle 27 . Further, the power supply/shooting control device 80 supplies a drive signal to the solenoid of the game ball shooting mechanism 81 to shoot the game ball when a predetermined shooting condition is met.

In step S308, the MPU 62 determines whether a power failure flag is set in a power failure flag storage area (not shown) of the RAM 64 or not. This power failure flag is set in the RAM 64 when a power failure signal is input from the power failure monitor board 65 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 62 . The power failure monitoring board 65 outputs this power failure signal when it confirms the occurrence of power failure. This power failure flag is cleared when the main process is executed next time.

Here, the pachinko machine 10 sets various flags by substituting 1 in a predetermined area of the RAM 64 or the like, and clears various flags by substituting 0. For example, the pachinko machine 10 sets the power outage flag by substituting 1 in the power outage flag storage area of the RAM 64 and clears the power outage flag by substituting 0 in the power outage flag storage area of the RAM 64 .

When the MPU 62 determines that the power failure flag is set in step S308, the MPU 62 executes the power failure processing of step S312 and subsequent steps without executing the processing of step S309 and subsequent steps. Specifically, in step S312, the MPU 62 prohibits the generation of timer interrupt processing. In step S313, the MPU 62 calculates and stores a RAM determination value (checksum of the RAM 64). In step S314, MPU62 prohibits the access to RAM64. After that, the MPU 62 continues the infinite loop until the power supply is completely cut off and the process cannot be executed.

On the other hand, if the MPU 62 determines in step S308 that the power failure flag has not been set, in step S309 it determines whether the timing for executing the next normal process has come, that is, whether the current normal process has It is determined whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in this embodiment) has passed since the start.
When the MPU 62 determines in step S309 that the timing for executing the next normal process has not yet arrived, that is, when the remaining time has occurred, in step S310 the random number initial value counter CINI is updated, and in step S311. , the fluctuation type counter CS is updated. The MPU 62 repeats steps S308 to S311 until it determines in step S309 that it is time to execute the next normal process.

On the other hand, if the MPU 62 determines in step S309 that the timing for executing the next normal process has come, that is, if the remaining time has not occurred, the next normal process is executed by executing step S301 again. Begin normal processing.

<Main processing>
FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the main processing.
In the main process, the MPU 62 executes steps S401 to S412 as shown in FIG.
In step S401, the MPU 62 executes start-up processing upon power-on. In this start-up process, the MPU 62 waits for a predetermined time (for example, about 500 msec) after the power is turned on in order to wait for the sub-side control board (such as the control board of the sound emission control device 90) to become operable. ) has passed.

In step S402, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the permission prohibition period of 1 sec has elapsed. When the MPU 62 determines that 1 sec has not passed in step S402, it repeats the process of step S402. Further, when the MPU 62 determines that 1 sec has passed in step S402, the MPU 62 executes the processing after step S403.

Here, the MPU 62 determines whether or not 1 sec has passed by counting the number of times the process of step S402 is executed. For example, if the interval for repeatedly executing the processing of step S402 is 0.1 msec, the MPU 62 counts the number of executions of the processing of step S402 and determines that 1 sec has elapsed when the number reaches 10000 times. Note that the configuration for measuring the permission prohibition period is arbitrary. For example, the permission prohibition period may be measured using a real-time clock.

In step S403, MPU62 permits the access to RAM64.
In step S404, the MPU 62 determines whether or not a RAM erase switch (not shown) provided in the power/emission control device 80 is turned on.
When the MPU 62 determines that the RAM erase switch is turned on in step S404, the MPU 62 executes the processes after step S409.
On the other hand, if the MPU 62 determines in step S404 that the RAM erase switch is not turned on, it determines in step S405 whether or not the power failure flag is set in the power failure flag storage area of the RAM 64. do.

When the MPU 62 determines that the power failure flag is not set in step S405, the MPU 62 executes the processing from step S409.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines that the power failure flag is set in step S405, it calculates the RAM determination value in step S406.
At step S407, the MPU 62 confirms the validity of the data stored in the RAM 64 by determining whether the RAM determination value calculated at step S406 is normal. Specifically, the MPU 62 compares the RAM determination value calculated in step S406 with the RAM determination value saved in step S313 (power failure processing) of the normal processing, and if they match, , the RAM determination value is determined to be normal, and if they do not match, the RAM determination value is determined to be abnormal.

When the MPU 62 determines that the RAM determination value is not normal in step S407, the MPU 62 executes the processing from step S409.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines that the RAM determination value is normal in step S407, it clears the power failure flag stored in the power failure flag storage area of the RAM 64 in step S408.

The validity of the data stored in the RAM 64 may be determined by a method different from the method of confirming the consistency of the RAM determination value. The validity of the data stored in the RAM 64 may be confirmed by determining in the main processing whether or not the keyword has been written normally.

As described above, if the MPU 62 determines that the RAM erase switch is turned on in step S404, determines that the power failure flag is not set in step S405, or determines that the RAM determination value is not normal, the processing from step S409 is executed.
Specifically, the MPU 62 clears the work area of the RAM 64 in step S409, and initializes the RAM 64 in step S410.

Therefore, for example, the administrator of the game hall can initialize the data stored in the RAM 64 by turning on the power of the pachinko machine 10 while pressing the RAM erase switch at the start of business of the game hall. Moreover, the pachinko machine 10 initializes the data stored in the RAM 64 when the occurrence of a power failure is not confirmed by the power failure monitoring board 65 or when the RAM determination value is abnormal.

After executing the process of step S408 or step S410, the MPU 62 transmits an initial command to the sub-side control board (such as the control board of the sound emission control device 90) in step S411, and timer interrupt in step S412. Allow the process to occur, and shift to the above-described normal process.
By receiving the initial command transmitted in step S411, the sub-side control board recognizes that communication with the main control board 61 is being performed normally, and executes its own initialization. do.

<Game Round Control Processing>
FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the game round control process.
In the game round control process, the MPU 62 executes steps S501 to S509 as shown in FIG.
In step S501, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the opening/closing execution mode is in progress. When the MPU 62 determines in step S501 that the open/close execution mode is in progress, it ends the game round control process without executing the processes after step S502. Therefore, when it is determined that the open/close execution mode is in progress, the MPU 62 does not start the progress of the game cycle regardless of whether or not the winning of the game ball to the operation ports 36 and 37 is detected.
The MPU 62 determines whether or not the opening/closing execution mode is in progress by referring to the opening/closing execution mode flag stored in the RAM 64 . The same applies to each of the following processes. The MPU 62 sets the opening/closing execution mode flag when shifting to the opening/closing execution mode, and clears the opening/closing execution mode flag when the opening/closing execution mode ends.

On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S501 that the open/close execution mode is not in progress, in step S502, the main display section 45 determines whether the variable display is being performed, that is, the game round is in progress. Determine whether or not
When the MPU 62 determines in step S502 that the main display section 45 is not performing the variable display, the MPU 62 executes the game round start processing in steps S503 to S505.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S502 that the main display section 45 is performing the variable display, the MPU 62 executes the game cycle progressing process in steps S506 to S509.

First, the processing for starting a game round in steps S503 to S505 will be described.
In step S503, the MPU 62 grasps the number of reservations stored in the first result display section reservation area Ra and the number of reservations stored in the second result display section reservation area Rb, and these numbers of reservations is equal to or less than "0". When the MPU 62 determines in step S503 that the total number CRN is equal to or less than "0", it ends the game round control process.

On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S503 that the total number CRN is not "0" or less, in step S504, the first result display section reservation area Ra or the second result display section reservation area A data setting process is executed to set the pending information stored in Rb for completion of game rounds. After that, in step S505, the MPU 62 causes the main display unit 45 and the symbol display device 47 to start variable display, executes a variation start process for finishing the game round, and ends the game round control process.
The data setting process in step S504 and the variation start process in step S505 will be described in detail below.

FIG. 14 is a diagram showing a flowchart of data setting processing.
In the data setting process, the MPU 62 executes steps S601 to S611 as shown in FIG.
In step S601, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the second start reservation memory number RbN in the second result display section reservation area Rb set in step S204 of the operation port winning process is "0" or less. do. When the MPU 62 determines in step S601 that the second start pending memory number RbN is equal to or less than "0", the MPU 62 executes data setting processing for the first result display section in steps S602 to S606, and proceeds to step S601. If it is determined that the second start pending memory number RbN is not equal to or less than "0", data setting processing for the second result display section in steps S607 to S611 is executed.

In this way, the data setting process includes the data setting process for the first result display section for setting the reservation information stored in the reservation area Ra for the first result display section for completing the game cycle, and the data setting processing for the second result display section. and a data setting process for the second result display section for setting the reservation information stored in the reservation area Rb for completion of the game cycle.
When the MPU 62 determines in step S601 that the second start pending storage number RbN is not equal to or less than "0", the MPU 62 does not execute the data setting process for the first result display section. Execute the data setting process for In other words, when the MPU 62 determines that there is reservation information stored in the second result display section reservation area Rb based on the winning of the game ball to the lower operation opening 37, the upper operation opening 36 The reservation information stored in the second result display section reservation area Rb is preferentially played regardless of whether or not there is reservation information stored in the first result display section reservation area Ra based on the winning of the game ball. Set for one digestion.

First, data setting processing for the first result display section in steps S602 to S606 will be described.
In step S602, the MPU 62 subtracts 1 from the value of the first start pending storage number RaN in the first result display portion pending area Ra to update the value.
In step S603, the MPU 62 moves the pending information stored in the first area Ra1 of the first result display portion pending area Ra to the execution area AE.
In step S604, the MPU 62 executes data shift processing for shifting the pending information stored in the storage area of the first result display portion pending area Ra. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the pending information stored in each of the areas Ra1 to Ra4 to the first area Ra1 side. Specifically, the MPU 62 shifts the pending information in the second area Ra2 to the first area Ra1, shifts the pending information in the third area Ra3 to the second area Ra2, and shifts the pending information in the fourth area Ra4 to the third area Ra1. Shift to area Ra3.

At step S605, the MPU 62 clears the second result display flag stored in the RAM 64. FIG. This second result display section flag is a flag for specifying which main display section 45, out of the first result display section 45a and the second result display section 45b, starts the variable display when completing a game round. is. In this step S605, the MPU 62 clears the second result display section flag, so that when the game cycle is completed, the variable display is made on the first result display section 45a based on the winning of the game ball into the upper working hole 36. (first variable display).

In step S606, the MPU 62 sets a shift command for recognizing that the hold information has been shifted, transmits the set shift command to the sound emission control device 90, and ends the data setting process. This command at the time of shift indicates that the hold information stored in the hold area Ra for the first result display unit has been shifted based on the winning of the game ball to the upper operation port 36. It contains information for 90 to recognize.
In addition, the sound emission control device 90 changes the lighting state of the first holding lamp portion 49a based on the shift command transmitted from the MPU 62 . Specifically, the sound emission control device 90 reduces the lighting number of the first reservation lamp portion 49a as the number of reserved game balls that have won the upper operation opening 36 decreases.

Next, data setting processing for the second result display section in steps S607 to S611 will be described.
In step S607, the MPU 62 subtracts 1 from the value of the second start pending storage number RbN in the second result display portion pending area Rb to update it.
In step S608, the MPU 62 moves the pending information stored in the second area Rb1 of the second result display portion pending area Rb to the execution area AE.
In step S609, the MPU 62 executes data shift processing for shifting the pending information stored in the storage area of the second result display portion pending area Rb. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the pending information stored in each of the areas Rb1 to Rb4 to the first area Rb1 side. Specifically, the MPU 62 shifts the pending information of the second area Rb2 to the first area Rb1, shifts the pending information of the third area Rb3 to the second area Rb2, shifts the pending information of the fourth area Rb4 to the third Shift to area Rb3.

At step S610, the MPU 62 sets the second result display section flag in the RAM 64. FIG. In this step S610, the MPU 62 sets the second result display section flag, so that when the game cycle is completed, the second result display section 45b displays a variable display based on the winning of the game ball into the lower operation opening 37. (second variable display).

In step S611, the MPU 62 sets a shift command for recognizing that the hold information has been shifted, transmits the set shift command to the sound emission control device 90, and ends the data setting process. This command at the time of shift indicates that the hold information stored in the hold area Rb for the second result display unit has been shifted based on the winning of the game ball to the lower operation opening 37. It contains information for 90 to recognize.
In addition, the sound emission control device 90 changes the lighting state of the second holding lamp portion 49b based on the shift command transmitted from the MPU 62 . Specifically, the sound emission control device 90 reduces the lighting number of the second reservation lamp portion 49b as the number of reserved game balls that have entered the lower opening 37 decreases.

FIG. 15 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the fluctuation start process.
In the fluctuation start process, the MPU 62 executes steps S701 to S718 as shown in FIG.
In step S701, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the winning lottery mode is the high probability mode.
When the MPU 62 determines in step S701 that the win/loss lottery mode is not the high-probability mode, in step S702, the win/fail table for the low-probability mode (see FIG. 7A) is stored in the win/fail table storage area 63a of the ROM 63. If it is determined in step S701 that the win/loss lottery mode is the high-probability mode, the win/fail table for the high-probability mode (see FIG. 7B) is read out from the win/fail table storage area 63a of the ROM 63 in step S703. read out.

After executing the process of step S702 or step S703, the MPU 62 executes the suitability determination process in step S704. In this success/failure determination process, the MPU 62 compares the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE with the success/failure table read out in step S702 or step S703 to obtain the result of the success/failure lottery (result of success/failure). judge. In addition, as described above, the winning result is one of "big win winning", "special losing result", and "normal losing result". The same is true for

In step S705, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the win/loss result determined in step S704 is "big hit". If the MPU 62 determines in step S705 that the win/loss result is "jackpot winning", it executes the processing from step S706 onwards. , the processing after step S712 is executed.

First, in step S705, the processing (processing after step S706) when it is determined by the MPU 62 that the winning result is "big hit winning" will be described.
In step S706, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the second result display flag is set in the RAM 64. FIG.

When the MPU 62 determines in step S706 that the second result display section flag is not set in the RAM 64, the first result display section 45a based on the winning of the game ball to the upper operation opening 36 starts a variable display. Therefore, in step S707, the first distribution table (see FIG. 8A) is read from the distribution table storage area 63b of the ROM 63. FIG.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines that the second result display section flag is set in the RAM 64 in step S706, the second result display section 45b based on the winning of the game ball to the lower opening 37 , the second sorting table (see FIG. 8B) is read from the sorting table storage area 63b of the ROM 63 in step S708.

After performing the process of step S707 or step S708, MPU62 performs a distribution determination process in step S709. In this distribution determination process, the MPU 62 compares the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE with the distribution table read out in step S707 or step S708 to determine the result of the distribution lottery ( distribution result).

In step S710, the MPU 62 executes a stop result setting process for the jackpot result. In this stop result setting process for the jackpot result, the MPU 62 determines in step S709 the information related to the pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on the first result display section 45a or the second result display section 45b of the main display section 45. A decision is made according to the sorting result, and the decided information is stored in the RAM 64 . Here, the MPU 62 compares the allocation result determined in step S709 with the stop result table for the jackpot result stored in advance in the ROM 63, and determines the pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on the main display unit 45. Determine relevant information. The stop result table for the jackpot result defines the mode of the pattern to be stopped and displayed on the main display unit 45 so as to be different for each sorting result.

In step S711, the MPU 62 sets a flag in the RAM 64 according to the distribution result determined in step S709. Specifically, when the MPU 62 specifies that the distribution result is the "non-explicit small round high-probability result", the MPU 62 sets the non-explicit small-round high-probability result flag and sets the "explicit small round high-probability result , the explicit few-round high-probability result flag is set, and when the ``most favorable result'' is identified, the most favorable result flag is set. Then, MPU62 performs the process after step S716.
In addition, in each of the following processes, the MPU 62 executes determination of the distribution result by referring to these flags.

Next, the process (process after step S712) when it is determined by the MPU 62 that the win/loss result is not the "big hit win" in step S705 will be described.
In step S712, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the win/loss result determined in step S704 is the "special losing result".
If the MPU 62 determines in step S712 that the win/loss result is the "special failure result", it executes the processing from step S713 onwards, and if it determines that the success/failure result is not the "special failure result" in step S712. , the process after step S715 is executed.

In step S713, the MPU 62 executes stop result setting processing for the special outlier result. In this stop result setting process for the special outlier result, the MPU 62 determines information related to the pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on the first result display section 45a or the second result display section 45b of the main display section 45, and The information obtained is stored in the RAM 64 . Here, the MPU 62 determines information related to the pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on the main display section 45 by referring to the stop result table for the special loss result stored in advance in the ROM 63 . The mode of the picture set in the stop result table for the special winning result is different from the mode of the picture set in the stop result table for the big win result.
At step S714, the MPU 62 sets a special out flag in the RAM 64. FIG.
In each of the following processes, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the winning result is the "special losing result" by referring to this special losing flag.

On the other hand, in step S715, the MPU 62 executes the stop result setting process for the normal deviation result. In this stop result setting process for the out-of-normal result, the MPU 62 determines information related to the pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on the first result display section 45a or the second result display section 45b of the main display section 45, and The information obtained is stored in the RAM 64 . Here, the MPU 62 refers to the stop result table for the normal outlier result stored in the ROM 63 in advance, thereby determining information related to the pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on the main display section 45 . The mode of the picture set in the stopping result table for the normal losing result is different from the mode of the picture set in the stopping result table for the jackpot result and the stopping result table for the special losing result.

After executing any of the processes of steps S711, S714, and S715, the MPU 62 executes a process of setting the display duration (display duration) in step S716.
In the display duration setting process, the MPU 62 acquires the value of the variation type counter CS stored in the variation type counter buffer in the lottery counter buffer of the RAM 64 .

In addition, in the display duration setting process, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the symbol display device 47 will display the ready-to-win state. Specifically, when the distribution result determined in step S709 is the "most favorable result", and the success/failure result determined in step S704 is the "normal outlier result", the reach generation lottery When winning, it is determined that the ready-to-win display occurs. In addition, as described above, the MPU 62 compares the reach table stored in advance in the reach table storage area 63d of the ROM 63 with the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the reserved ball storage area 64b. Run a reach generation lottery.

When determining that the reach display occurs, the MPU 62 refers to the reach generation display duration table stored in the reach table storage area 63 d of the ROM 63, so that the fluctuation type counter obtained from the fluctuation type counter buffer A display continuation time corresponding to the value of CS is determined, and the determined display continuation time is set in a display continuation time counter provided in various counter areas 64 a of the RAM 64 .
On the other hand, when it is determined that the reach display does not occur, the MPU 62 refers to the reach non-occurrence display duration table stored in the reach table storage area 63d of the ROM 63, so that the fluctuation type counter A display continuation time corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS acquired from the buffer is determined, and the determined display continuation time is set in a display continuation time counter provided in the various counter areas 64a of the RAM64.

Specifically, the reach non-occurrence display duration table is set so that the display duration is shortened as the pending number increases. Therefore, the display continuation time for consuming the pending information related to the upper working port 36 is set to be shorter as the number of pending items related to the upper working port 36 increases. Further, the display duration time when the pending information related to the lower working port 37 is consumed is set to be shorter as the number of pending items related to the lower working port 37 increases. Further, the reach non-occurrence display duration table is set so that the display duration is shorter when the support mode is the high-frequency support mode than when it is the low-frequency support mode. In other words, if the pending number is the same, the display duration time in the high-frequency support mode is shorter than that in the low-frequency support mode.
Furthermore, the display duration determined by referring to the reach occurrence display duration table is different from the display duration determined by referring to the reach non-occurrence display duration table.

In addition, the reach non-occurrence display duration table may be set to a relationship opposite to the above-described relationship, such as the display duration becomes longer as the number of holds increases, depending on the number of holds and support mode It may be configured so that it does not fluctuate. Alternatively, the display duration table may be set individually for each of the win/fail result and the sorting result.

In step S717, the MPU 62 sets the variation command and the type command. In step S301 of normal processing, the MPU 62 transmits the command for variation and the type command set in step S717 to the sound emission control device 90. FIG.
Note that the sound emission control device 90 executes predetermined processing based on the variation command and the type command transmitted from the MPU 62 . This processing will be described later in detail.

The variation command includes information related to display duration. Also, the variation command does not include information as to whether or not the ready-to-win display will occur.
Here, as described above, the display duration determined by referring to the reach generation display duration table and the display duration determined by referring to the reach non-occurrence display duration table are mutually different.
Therefore, even if the variation command does not include the information on whether or not the ready-to-win display occurs, the ready-to-win display is performed by the sound emission control device 90, which is the sub-side control device, based on the information on the display duration time. It is possible to determine whether or not it occurs. In this sense, it can be said that the variation command indirectly includes information as to whether or not the ready-to-win display will occur. Note that the variation command may directly include information as to whether or not the ready-to-win display will occur.

In addition, the variation command includes information on the lottery mode (low-probability mode or high-probability mode) and information on the support mode (low-frequency support mode or high-frequency support mode). Further, the variable command is variable display information for specifying which of the first result display section 45a and the second result display section 45b is caused to start the variable display when completing a game round. (first variable representation or second variable representation).

The type command includes information regarding the win/fail result. In other words, the type command includes each piece of information related to "big win win", "special loss result", and "normal loss result" as information related to win/fail results. Also, the type command includes information related to the sorting result. In other words, the type command includes each information related to the "non-explicit few rounds high probability result", the "explicit few rounds high probability result", and the "best result" as the information related to the sorting result.
In the following description, the win/fail result and the sorting result are collectively referred to as the game result. In other words, the type command includes information on the game result.

In step S718, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the second result display section flag is set in the RAM 64, and causes the main display section 45 to start variable display based on the determination result. After that, the MPU 62 terminates the fluctuation start process.
Specifically, when the MPU 62 determines that the second result display section flag is not set in the RAM 64, the first Since it indicates that the result display section 45a is to start the variable display, the first result display section 45a is caused to start the variable display.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines that the second result display section flag is set in the RAM 64, the second Since it indicates that the result display section 45b is to start the variable display, the second result display section 45b is caused to start the variable display.

Returning to the description of the game round control process, the game round progressing process of steps S506 to S509 will be described with reference to FIG.
In step S502, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the main display section 45 is performing variable display. Execute the process.

In step S506, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the display continuation time set in step S716 of the fluctuation start process has elapsed. Specifically, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the value set in the display continuation time counter of the RAM 64 has become "0" or less. The value of the display duration counter is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed.

When the MPU 62 determines in step S506 that the display continuation time has not elapsed, in step S507, the MPU 62 executes processing for variable display. In this process for variable display, the MPU 62 updates the display on the main display section 45 during variable display. After that, the MPU 62 ends the game round control process.

On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S506 that the display continuation time has elapsed, in step S508, the MPU 62 executes fluctuation end processing. In this fluctuation end processing, the MPU 62 stores the information (main (information related to the pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on the display unit 45). Then, at the end of the game cycle, the MPU 62 executes display control of the main display section 45 so as to display the pattern corresponding to the specified information on the main display section 45 during variable display (variation end execution processing). Note that the fluctuation end processing will be described later in detail.

Here, the pattern finally stopped and displayed on the main display section 45 differs for each type of game result. Therefore, the manager of the game hall or the like can confirm the game result by looking at the main display section 45 at the end of the game round. According to this, the manager of the game hall can easily check whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is being cheated to behave in the same manner as when winning a lottery for generating a big win. can be done systematically.
The display area of the main display section 45 is narrower than that of the display screen G of the pattern display device 47. Compared to Z1 to Z3, it is difficult for the player to recognize. Therefore, at the end of the game cycle, the player checks the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 instead of the main display unit 45 to determine whether or not the player has won the big win. Attention to the screen G can be increased.

In step S509, the MPU 62 sets a fluctuation end command. The MPU 62 transmits the fluctuation end command set in step S509 to the sound emission control device 90 in step S301 of normal processing. After that, the MPU 62 ends the game round control process.
In addition, the sound emission control device 90 executes processing for ending the effect of the game round based on the variation end command transmitted from the MPU 62 . Here, the sound emission control device 90 may be configured to independently end the effect of the game round without requiring reception of the variation end command.

Thus, in this embodiment, the MPU 62 notifies the result of the internal lottery associated with the plurality of pending information stored in the first result display portion pending area Ra or the second result display portion pending area Rb. .
Further, as described above, when the MPU 62 determines that there is reservation information stored in the second result display section reservation area Rb based on the winning of the game ball to the lower operation opening 37, the upper operation opening Priority is given to the reservation information stored in the second result display section reservation area Rb regardless of whether or not there is reservation information stored in the first result display section reservation area Ra based on the winning of the game ball to 36. It is generally set for digestion of game times. In other words, the MPU 62 puts the results of the internal lottery associated with the plurality of pieces of reservation information stored in the second result display section reservation area Rb into the plurality of pieces of reservation information stored in the first result display section reservation area Ra. The results of the internal lottery associated with the

<Electronic support processing>
FIG. 16 is a diagram showing a flowchart of processing for electric support.
In the electrician support process, the MPU 62 executes steps S801 to S809 as shown in FIG.
In step S801, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the character object display unit 46 is performing variable display, that is, whether or not an electric role game cycle is in progress.

When the MPU 62 determines in step S801 that the character object display unit 46 is not performing the variable display, the MPU 62 executes the processing from step S802 onward.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S801 that the character item display unit 46 is performing the variable display, it executes the processing after step S806.

First, the processing (processing after step S802) when it is determined in step S801 that the character object display unit 46 is not performing variable display will be described.
In step S802, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the opening/closing execution mode is in progress.

When the MPU 62 determines in step S802 that the opening/closing execution mode is in progress, the MPU 62 ends the electric support process without executing the processes after step S803. Therefore, when it is determined that the open/close execution mode is in progress, the MPU 62 does not start the progress of the electric role game cycle regardless of whether or not the winning of the game ball to each through gate 41 is detected.
The MPU 62 determines whether or not the opening/closing execution mode is in progress by referring to the opening/closing execution mode flag stored in the RAM 64 .

On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S802 that the open/close execution mode is not in progress, in step S803, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the number RcN of pending electrical work is "0" or less.
When the MPU 62 determines in step S803 that the number RcN of pending electricians is equal to or less than "0", it ends the electrician support process without executing the processes after step S804.
On the other hand, if the MPU 62 determines in step S803 that the number RcN of the electrical work on hold is not equal to or less than "0", then in step S804, the MPU 62 sends the electrical work on hold information stored in the electrical work holding area 64c. An electric role data setting process is executed for setting for the completion of the role game times. After that, in step S805, the MPU 62 causes the character product display unit 46 to start a variable display, executes an electric role fluctuation start process for completing the electric role game round, and ends the electric role support process.
The electric power data setting process in step S804 and the electric power change start process in step S805 will be described in detail below.

FIG. 17 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the electric service data setting process.
In the electrical service data setting process, the MPU 62 executes steps S901 to S904 as shown in FIG.
In step S901, the MPU 62 subtracts 1 from the value of the number RcN of the electrician pending in the electrician pending area 64c to update it.
In step S902, the MPU 62 moves the electrician pending information stored in the storage area of the electrician pending area 64c to the electrician execution area.
In step S903, the MPU 62 executes data shift processing for shifting the electrician pending information stored in the storage area of the electrician pending area 64c. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the electrician pending information stored in each storage area of the electrician pending area 64c to the electrician execution area side.

In step S904, the MPU 62 sets a shift-time command for recognizing that the shift of the electric work hold information has been executed, transmits this set shift-time command to the sound emission control device 90, and performs electric work data setting processing. exit. This command at the time of shift is a voice indicating that the shift of the electrical work holding information stored in the storage area of the electrical work holding area 64c is executed based on the winning of the game ball to each through gate 41. It contains information for the light emission control device 90 to recognize.
In addition, the sound emission control device 90 changes the lighting state of the third holding lamp portion 49c based on the shift command transmitted from the MPU 62 . Specifically, the sound emission control device 90 reduces the number of lighting of the third reservation lamp portion 49c as the number of the game ball winning the through gate 41 is reduced.

FIG. 18 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the electric duty change start process.
In the electric power fluctuation start process, the MPU 62 executes steps S1001 to S1010 as shown in FIG.
In step S1001, the MPU 62 determines whether the support mode is the high frequency support mode.
The MPU 62 determines whether the support mode is the high frequency support mode by determining whether the high frequency support flag is set in the RAM 64 . This high frequency support flag will be described later in detail.

If the MPU 62 determines in step S1001 that the support mode is not the high-frequency support mode (if it determines that the support mode is the low-frequency support mode), in step S1002, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the electrical work for the low-frequency support mode is appropriate. The table (see FIG. 6A) is read out from the electrical work propriety table storage area 63c of the ROM 63, and if it is determined in step S1001 that the support mode is the high frequency support mode, in step S1003, the high frequency support mode is selected. The electric work propriety table (see FIG. 6B) is read out from the electric work propriety table storage area 63c of the ROM 63. FIG.

After executing the processing of step S1002 or step S1003, the MPU 62 executes electric work propriety determination processing in step S1004. In this electric role right/wrong determination process, the MPU 62 compares the value of the electric role product opening counter C4 stored in the lottery counter buffer of the RAM 64 with the electric role right/wrong table read in step S1002 or step S1003. , Determine the result of the electric role open lottery (electric role right or wrong result).
Note that, as described above, the result of success or failure of the electric call is either "won an electric call open" or "result of an unopened electric call", and even if the support mode is the low-frequency support mode, the high-frequency support mode is selected. The same is true for

In step S1005, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the result of winning the electric role determined in step S1004 is "open winning".
When the MPU 62 determines in step S1005 that the electric role winning result is "electric role open winning", in step S1006, the MPU 62 executes stop result setting processing for electric role open winning. In this stopping result setting process for electric role open winning, the MPU 62 causes the RAM 64 to store information relating to the pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on the character object display section 46 . Here, the MPU 62 refers to the stop result table for electric role open winning stored in advance in the ROM 63 to determine information related to the pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on the character object display section 46 .

On the other hand, if the MPU 62 determines in step S1005 that the result of winning the electric role is not "winning the electric role open" (if it determines that the result is "unable to open the electric role"), in step S1007, Execute the stop result setting process for the result of disconnection of electric power. In this stop result setting process for the electric role release result, the MPU 62 causes the RAM 64 to store information relating to the pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on the character object display section 46 . Here, the MPU 62 refers to the stop result table for the result of unlocked electric power stored in the ROM 63 in advance, thereby determining information related to the pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on the character object display section 46 .

After executing the process of step S1006 or step S1007, the MPU 62 executes a setting process of the electric role display duration (electric role display duration) in step S1008.
In the processing for setting the electric duty display duration time, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the support mode is the high-frequency support mode.

When the MPU 62 determines that the support mode is the high-frequency support mode, the MPU 62 refers to the high-frequency support mode electric duty display duration table stored in the ROM 63 to determine the electric duty display duration. , the determined electric duty display duration time is set in the electric duty display duration counter provided in the various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64. FIG.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines that the support mode is not the high-frequency support mode (when it determines that the support mode is the low-frequency support mode), The electric combination display duration time is determined by referring to the winning combination display duration table, and the determined electric combination display duration time is set in the electric combination display duration counter provided in the various counter areas 64 a of the RAM 64 .

Here, the electric duty display duration table for the high-frequency support mode is set so that the electric duty display duration time is shorter than the electric duty display duration table for the low-frequency support mode. In other words, the duration of the electric role display in the high-frequency support mode is shorter than that in the low-frequency support mode.
In addition, the telephone display duration determined by referring to the telephone display duration table for the high-frequency support mode is determined by referring to the telephone display duration table for the low-frequency support mode. It is different from the combination display duration.
It should be noted that the electric role display continuation time may be configured so as not to vary according to the support mode. Further, the electric role display duration table for the high frequency support mode and the electric duty display duration table for the low frequency support mode may be the same.

In step S1009, the MPU 62 sets a power change command. This electric role change command includes information related to the electric role display duration time. The MPU 62 transmits the electric role change command set in step S1009 to the sound emission control device 90 in step S301 of normal processing.
In addition, the sound emission control device 90 executes a predetermined process based on the electric role change command transmitted from the MPU 62 .

In step S1010, the MPU 62 causes the character object display section 46 to start variable display.
After that, the MPU 62 ends the power fluctuation start process.

Returning to the description of the electric support process, the processes after step S806 will be described with reference to FIG.
In step S801, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the character object display unit 46 is performing variable display, and when it is determined that the character object display unit 46 is performing variable display, the processing after step S806 is performed. to run.

In step S806, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the electric duty display continuation time set in step S1008 of the electric duty change start process has elapsed. Specifically, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the value set in the electric role display continuation time counter of the RAM 64 has become "0" or less. It should be noted that the value of the electric role display continuation time counter is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt processing is executed.

When the MPU 62 determines in step S806 that the electric role display continuation time has not elapsed, in step S807, the MPU 62 executes an electric role change display process. In this electric role variable display processing, the MPU 62 updates the display of the character object display section 46 during variable display. After that, the MPU 62 terminates the electronic support process.

On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S806 that the electric duty display continuation time has passed, in step S808, the MPU 62 executes the electric duty fluctuation ending process. In this electric role variation ending process, the MPU 62 stores the information (the role item (information related to the pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on the display unit 46). Then, at the end of the electric role game cycle, the MPU 62 executes display control of the character object display unit 46 so that the pattern corresponding to the specified information is displayed on the character object display unit 46 during variable display ( power fluctuation end execution processing). Note that the electric duty fluctuation ending process will be described later in detail.

In step S809, the MPU 62 sets an electric duty change end command. In step S301 of the normal processing, the MPU 62 transmits the electric role change end command set in step S809 to the sound emission control device 90. FIG. After that, the MPU 62 terminates the electronic support process.
In addition, the sound emission control device 90 executes a process for ending the effect of the electric role game round based on the electric role variation end command transmitted from the MPU 62 . Here, the sound emission control device 90 may be configured to independently end the performance of the electric role game round without requiring reception of the electric role variation end command.

<Game state transition processing>
FIG. 19 is a diagram showing a flowchart of game state transition processing.
In the game state transition process, the MPU 62 executes steps S1101 to S1114 as shown in FIG.
In step S1101, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the opening/closing execution mode is in progress.
When the MPU 62 determines in step S1101 that the opening/closing execution mode is not in progress, the MPU 62 executes the processing from step S1102 onward.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1101 that the opening/closing execution mode is in progress, the MPU 62 executes the processing from step S1111.

First, the processing (processing after step S1102) when it is determined that the MPU 62 is not in the opening/closing execution mode in step S1101 will be described.
In step S1102, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the variable display on the main display section 45 has ended. When the MPU 62 determines in step S1102 that the variable display on the main display section 45 has not ended, it ends the game state transition processing.
On the other hand, if the MPU 62 determines in step S1102 that the variable display of the main display section 45 has ended, it determines in step S1103 whether the win/fail result corresponds to the transition to the opening/closing execution mode. determine whether Specifically, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the win/loss result is "big win winning" or "special losing result".

When the MPU 62 determines in step S1103 that the result corresponds to the transition to the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 62 sets an opening/closing execution mode flag in the RAM 64, and then executes the processing from step S1104.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1103 that the win/fail result does not correspond to the transition to the opening/closing execution mode (if it determines that the win/fail result is the "normal deviation result"), the game Terminate state transition processing.

In step S1104, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the win/loss result is a "special loss result".
When the MPU 62 determines in step S1104 that the win/loss result is the "special loss result", in step S1105 the MPU 62 sets "2" to the open/close counter SOC provided in the various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64. FIG. This open/close counter SOC is a counter for specifying the total number of times the MPU 62 opens and closes the big winning opening 38a of the variable winning device 38 when shifting to the opening/closing execution mode.

On the other hand, if the MPU 62 determines in step S1104 that the win/loss result is not the "special loss result", that is, if it determines that the win/loss result is "jackpot", in step S1106, the distribution result is a small-round high-probability result ("implicit small-round high-probability result" or "explicit small-round high-probability result").

When the MPU 62 determines in step S1106 that the result of allocation is a small round high probability result, in step S1107 the round counter RC provided in the various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64 is set to "2". Further, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1106 that the distribution result is not a high-probability result for a small number of rounds, that is, when it determines that the distribution result is the "best result", in step S1108, the round counter RC is set to "4". This round counter RC is a counter for specifying the number of round games by the MPU 62 when shifting to the opening/closing execution mode.

Here, the pachinko machine 10 has a plurality of opening/closing execution modes with mutually different end conditions. Specifically, the pachinko machine 10 has, as opening/closing execution modes, a number-of-rounds stipulation mode that shifts to when the win/fail result is a "jackpot win", and an opening/closing number mode to shift to when the win/fail result is a "special losing result". and a prescribed mode.

The round number regulation mode ends on the condition that a predetermined number of round games have been executed. Here, the number of round games corresponds to the value set in the round counter RC.
The opening/closing number regulation mode ends under the condition that the large winning hole 38a has been opened and closed a predetermined total number of times, or that a predetermined number of game balls have won the large winning hole 38a. Here, the total number of openings and closings of the big winning opening 38a corresponds to the value set in the opening/closing counter SOC. This opening/closing number regulation mode does not end under the condition of the number of executions of the round game.

In addition, the pachinko machine 10 executes opening and closing of the big winning opening 38a once per round game. Also, one round game continues until one of the following two conditions is satisfied. In other words, after setting the opening/closing door 38b to the open state, the pachinko machine 10 sets the opening/closing door 38b to the closed state again by satisfying one of the following two conditions.
(1) A predetermined upper limit duration time (upper limit duration) elapses (2) The total winning number of game balls into the big winning opening 38a reaches a predetermined upper limit number

After executing any of the processes of steps S1105, S1107, and S1108, the MPU 62 sets the timer counter T provided in the various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64 as waiting time (waiting period) for opening in step S1109. Set "1000". The value set in the timer counter T is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed. Therefore, the waiting time for opening is 2 seconds. The waiting time for opening is not limited to this and is arbitrary.

As described above, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1103 that the win/fail result corresponds to the transition to the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 62 sets the waiting time for opening to the timer counter T regardless of the type of the game result. set. In other words, the waiting time for opening is the same regardless of the type of game result.
The waiting time for the opening is not limited to this, and for example, it may be configured to be subtly different according to the type of game result to such an extent that the player recognizes the same.
In addition, for example, the waiting time for the opening is greatly different depending on the type of game result, such as when the game result is the "best result" and when it is a game result other than these. It is good also as a structure which makes it different.

At step S1110, the MPU 62 sets an opening command. After that, the MPU 62 terminates the game state transition process. This opening command includes information on the game result that triggered the transition to the opening/closing execution mode. The MPU 62 transmits the opening command set in step S1110 to the sound emission control device 90 in step S301 of normal processing.
Note that the sound emission control device 90 recognizes the transition to the opening/closing execution mode based on the opening command transmitted from the MPU 62, and executes predetermined processing. This processing will be described later in detail.

Next, processing (processing after step S1111) when the MPU 62 determines in step S1101 that the open/close execution mode is in progress will be described.
In step S1111, the MPU 62 executes a big winning opening opening/closing process.

FIG. 20 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the big winning opening opening/closing process.
In the big winning opening opening/closing process, the MPU 62 executes steps S1201 to S1224 as shown in FIG.
In step S1201, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the big winning opening 38a is open.
When the MPU 62 determines in step S1201 that the large winning opening 38a is not open, the MPU 62 executes the processing from step S1202.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1201 that the big winning opening 38a is open, it executes the processing from step S1206.

First, in step S1201, the processing (processing after step S1202) when it is determined by the MPU 62 that the big winning opening 38a is not open will be described.
In step S1202, the MPU 62 determines whether the value of the open/close counter SOC is "0" or less and the value of the round counter RC is "0" or less.
When the MPU 62 determines in step S1202 that both the value of the opening/closing counter SOC and the value of the round counter RC are equal to or less than "0", the MPU 62 ends the big winning opening opening/closing process.

On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1202 that at least one of the value of the open/close counter SOC and the value of the round counter RC is not equal to or less than "0", the MPU 62 starts the timer counter T in step S1203. Determines whether the value is less than or equal to "0".
When the MPU 62 determines in step S1203 that the value of the timer counter T is not equal to or less than "0", the MPU 62 ends the big winning opening opening/closing process.

On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1203 that the value of the timer counter T is equal to or less than "0", in step S1204, it executes a special winning opening opening process.
The special winning opening opening process of step S1204 will be described in detail below.

FIG. 21 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the big winning opening opening process.
In the big winning opening opening process, the MPU 62 executes steps S1301 to S1307 as shown in FIG.
In step S1301, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the win/loss result is a "special losing result".

When the MPU 62 determines in step S1301 that the win/fail result is the "special loss result", in step S1302, the MPU 62 sets "8" to the winning counter PC provided in the various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64, and At S1303, the timer counter T is set to "85". As described above, the timer counter T is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed. Therefore, the time set in the timer counter T is 0.17 sec.

On the other hand, if the MPU 62 determines in step S1301 that the win/fail result is not the "special loss result", in step S1304, it sets the winning counter PC to "8", and in step S1305, the distribution result is a small-round high-probability result ("implicit small-round high-probability result" or "explicit small-round high-probability result").

When the MPU 62 determines in step S1305 that the result of allocation is a small round high probability result, it sets "85" to the timer counter T in step S1303 described above.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1305 that the allocation result is not the small round high probability result, it sets the timer counter T to "15000" in step S1306. As described above, the timer counter T is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed. Therefore, the time set in the timer counter T is 30 seconds.

After executing the processing of step S1303 or step S1306, the MPU 62 executes opening execution processing of the big winning opening 38a in step S1307. In this opening execution process, the MPU 62 sets the open/close door 38b to the open state by executing the drive control of the variable winning driving section 38c. After that, the MPU 62 ends the big winning opening opening process.

The value set in the winning counter PC in step S1302 or step S1304 defines the upper limit of the total winning number of game balls into the big winning opening 38a.
Also, the value set in the timer counter T in step S1303 or step S1306 defines the upper limit duration time from when the opening/closing door 38b is set to the open state to when it is set to the closed state again. Therefore, the MPU 62 sets two types of upper limit duration time with different lengths by setting the timer counter T to "85" or "15000", as described above. Specifically, the MPU 62 has a long-time mode (long-term mode) in which the upper limit duration is set to 30 sec, and a short-time mode (short-term mode) in which the upper limit duration is set to 0.17 sec, which is shorter than that of the long-time mode. aspect).

Here, as described above, the pachinko machine 10 causes the game ball shooting mechanism 81 to shoot a game ball by exciting the solenoid of the game ball shooting mechanism 81 at a cycle of 0.6 sec. Further, as described above, the MPU 62 sets the upper limit of the total winning number of game balls to the big winning opening 38a to eight by setting the winning counter PC to "8".
Therefore, the upper limit duration of the long time mode is sufficiently longer than the product of the upper limit of the total winning number of game balls into the big winning hole 38a and the firing cycle of the game balls, so the upper limit of 8 game balls is easy to win in the big prize opening 38a.
On the other hand, the upper limit duration of the short-time mode is shorter than the product of the upper limit of the total winning number of game balls into the big winning hole 38a and the shooting cycle of the game balls. (shorter than the period), it is difficult to let the game ball enter the big winning hole 38a. Depending on the timing, it is possible to win about one game ball into the big winning hole 38a.

Returning to the explanation of the big winning opening opening/closing process, the processes after step S1205 will be explained with reference to FIG.
MPU62 sets an opening command in step S1205, after performing the big winning a prize opening opening process of step S1204. In addition, the MPU 62 transmits the open command set in step S1205 to the sound emission control device 90 in step S301 of normal processing. After that, the MPU 62 ends the big winning opening opening/closing process.
Based on the open command transmitted from the MPU 62, the sound emission control device 90 recognizes that the opening/closing door 38b has been set to the open state, and executes predetermined processing.

Next, the processing (processing after step S1206) when it is determined by the MPU 62 that the big winning opening 38a is being opened in step S1201 will be described.
In step S1206, the MPU 62 determines whether the value of the timer counter T is "0" or less. That is, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the upper limit continuation time set in the timer counter T in step S1303 or step S1306 of the big winning opening opening process has elapsed.

When the MPU 62 determines in step S1206 that the value of the timer counter T is not equal to or less than "0", it executes the processing from step S1207.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1206 that the value of the timer counter T is equal to or less than "0", it executes the processing from step S1218.

First, processing (processing after step S1207) when the MPU 62 determines in step S1206 that the value of the timer counter T is not equal to or less than "0" will be described.
In step S1207, the MPU 62 determines whether or not a prize has been awarded to the special prize opening 38a. It should be noted that determination of whether or not a prize has been awarded to the large winning opening 38a is executed based on the detection result of the detection sensor 40d corresponding to the large winning opening 38a.

When the MPU 62 determines in step S1207 that no prize has been awarded to the large winning opening 38a, the MPU 62 ends the large winning opening opening/closing process.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1207 that a prize has been awarded to the big prize opening 38a, in step S1208, the value of the prize counter PC is updated by subtracting 1 from it.

In step S1209, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the value of the winning counter PC is "0" or less.
When the MPU 62 determines in step S1209 that the value of the winning counter PC is not equal to or less than "0", the MPU 62 ends the big winning opening opening/closing process.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1209 that the value of the winning counter PC is equal to or less than "0", in step S1210 the closing execution process is executed. In this closing execution process, the MPU 62 sets the open/close door 38b to the closed state by executing the drive control of the variable winning driving section 38c.

In step S1211, the MPU 62 sets a closing command. The MPU 62 transmits the closing command set in step S1211 to the sound emission control device 90 in step S301 of normal processing.
Based on the closing command transmitted from the MPU 62, the sound emission control device 90 recognizes that the opening/closing door 38b has been set to the closed state, and executes predetermined processing.

In step S1212, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the win/loss result is a "special loss result".
When the MPU 62 determines in step S1212 that the win/fail result is the "special loss result", the MPU 62 executes the processes after step S1223, which will be described later.

On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1212 that the win/fail result is not the "special loss result", it executes the processing from step S1213.
In step S1213, the MPU 62 subtracts 1 from the value of the round counter RC to update it.

In step S1214, the MPU 62 determines whether the value of the round counter RC is "0" or less.
When the MPU 62 determines in step S1214 that the value of the round counter RC is not equal to or less than "0", it sets the value of the timer counter T to "500" in step S1215. After that, the MPU 62 ends the big winning opening opening/closing process.

Here, the value set in the timer counter T in step S1215 is the open standby time from when the open/close door 38b is set to the open state to the closed state until the open/close door 38b is set to the open state again. stipulates the time. In addition, in this embodiment, the release waiting time is 1 sec. This opening standby time is the same regardless of the type and progress of the opening/closing execution mode.

On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1214 that the value of the round counter RC is equal to or less than "0", it executes the processing from step S1216.
In step S1216, the MPU 62 sets the timer counter T to "2000" as a waiting time (waiting period) for ending. As described above, the value set in the timer counter T is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed. Therefore, the waiting time for the ending is 4 seconds. Note that the waiting time for the ending is not limited to this and is arbitrary.

The waiting time for the ending is the same regardless of the type of game result, like the waiting time for the opening. That is, the waiting time for this ending is the same regardless of the type of opening/closing execution mode.
The waiting time for the ending is not limited to this. For example, it may be configured to be slightly different according to the type of game result to the extent that the player recognizes the same.
In addition, for example, the waiting time for the ending is greatly different depending on the type of game result, such as when the game result is the "best result" and when the game result is other than this. It is good also as a structure which makes it different.

In step S1217, the MPU 62 sets an ending command. The MPU 62 transmits the ending command set in step S1217 to the sound emission control device 90 in step S301 of normal processing. After that, the MPU 62 ends the big winning opening opening/closing process.
Note that the sound emission control device 90 recognizes the end of the opening/closing execution mode based on the ending command transmitted from the MPU 62, and executes a predetermined process.

Next, the processing (processing after step S1218) when the MPU 62 determines in step S1206 that the value of the timer counter T is "0" or less will be described.
In step S1218, the MPU 62 executes closing execution processing in the same manner as in step S1210 described above.
In step S1219, the MPU 62 sets a closing command as in step S1211 described above.

In step S1220, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the win/loss result is a "special loss result".
When the MPU 62 determines in step S1220 that the win/loss result is not the "special loss result", that is, if it determines that the win/loss result is "big win", it executes the processing from step S1221 onwards.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1220 that the win/fail result is the "special loss result", it executes the processing from step S1223 onwards.

First, the processing (processing after step S1221) when the MPU 62 determines in step S1220 that the win/fail result is not the "special losing result" will be described.
In step S1221, the MPU 62 subtracts 1 from the value of the round counter RC to update it.

In step S1222, the MPU 62 determines whether the value of the round counter RC is "0" or less.
When the MPU 62 determines in step S1222 that the value of the round counter RC is not equal to or less than "0", it executes the processes after step S1215 described above.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1222 that the value of the round counter RC is equal to or less than "0", it executes the above-described processing from S1216 onward.

Next, processing (processing after step S1223) when the MPU 62 determines that the win/fail result is the “special losing result” in step S1212 or step S1220 will be described.
In step S1223, the MPU 62 subtracts 1 from the value of the open/close counter SOC to update it.

In step S1224, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the value of the open/close counter SOC is "0" or less.
When the MPU 62 determines in step S1224 that the value of the open/close counter SOC is not equal to or less than "0", the MPU 62 executes the processes after step S1215 described above.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1224 that the value of the open/close counter SOC is equal to or less than "0", it executes the processes from S1216 onward.

Returning to the description of the game state transition processing, the processing after step S1112 will be described with reference to FIG.
After executing the big winning opening opening/closing process in step S1111, the MPU 62 checks whether the value of the opening/closing counter SOC is "0" or less and the value of the round counter RC is "0" or less in step S1112. judge.

When the MPU 62 determines in step S1112 that at least one of the value of the open/close counter SOC and the value of the round counter RC is not "0" or less, it ends the game state transition processing.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1112 that both the value of the open/close counter SOC and the value of the round counter RC are less than or equal to "0", in step S1113 the value of the timer counter T becomes " 0” or less.

When the MPU 62 determines in step S1113 that the value of the timer counter T is not "0" or less, it ends the game state transition processing.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1113 that the value of the timer counter T is "0" or less, in step S1114, after clearing the opening/closing execution mode flag stored in the RAM 64, Execute transition processing at the end of open/close execution mode.
After that, the MPU 62 terminates the game state transition process.
The transition processing at the end of the opening/closing execution mode will be described in detail below.

FIG. 22 is a diagram showing a flowchart of transition processing when the opening/closing execution mode ends.
In the transition process at the end of the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 62 executes steps S1401 to S1406 as shown in FIG.
In step S1401, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the game result is a "special loss result".

When the MPU 62 determines in step S1401 that the game result is the "special loss result", the MPU 62 terminates the transition processing when the opening/closing execution mode ends without executing the processing after step S1402.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1401 that the game result is not the "special loss result" (when it determines that the game result is a "jackpot win"), in step S1402, the MPU 62 stores the 2 Determine whether the result display section flag is set.

When the MPU 62 determines that the second result display section flag is not set in the RAM 64 in step S1402, the first result display section 45a based on the winning of the game ball to the upper operation port 36 starts the variable display. Therefore, the first support mode setting process in step S1403 is executed. This first support mode setting process is a process of setting the support mode to the low-frequency support mode or the high-frequency support mode after the opening/closing execution mode, which has shifted to the upper working port 36 as a trigger for winning a prize, is ended.

On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines that the second result display section flag is set in the RAM 64 in step S1402, the second result display section 45b based on the winning of the game ball to the lower opening 37 , the second support mode setting process of step S1404 is executed. This second support mode setting process is a process of setting the support mode to the low-frequency support mode or the high-frequency support mode after the opening/closing execution mode, which has shifted to the lower opening 37 with the winning of a game ball as a trigger, ends.
The first support mode setting process in step S1403 and the second support mode setting process in step S1404 will be described in detail below.

FIG. 23 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the first support mode setting process.
In the first support mode setting process, the MPU 62 executes steps S1501 to S1512 as shown in FIG.
In step S1501, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the winning lottery mode is the high probability mode. When the MPU 62 determines in step S1501 that the win/fail lottery mode is the high probability mode, the MPU 62 executes support mode setting processing for the high probability mode in steps S1502 to S1507. If it is determined that the mode is not the probability mode, a support mode setting process for the low probability mode in steps S1508 to S1512 is executed.

First, support mode setting processing for the high probability mode in steps S1502 to S1507 will be described.
In step S1502, the MPU 62 determines whether the support mode is the high frequency support mode.

When the MPU 62 determines in step S1502 that the support mode is the high frequency support mode, the MPU 62 clears the high frequency support flag stored in the RAM 64 in step S1503. Thereby, the MPU 62 sets the support mode to the low-frequency support mode.
In step S1504, the MPU 62 sets the value of the number-of-games counter RTC provided in the various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64 to "0".

On the other hand, if the MPU 62 determines in step S1502 that the support mode is not the high-frequency support mode (if it determines that the support mode is the low-frequency support mode), in step S1505 the high-frequency support flag is set in the RAM 64. The MPU 62 maintains the high frequency support flag if it is already set in the RAM 64 . Thereby, the MPU 62 sets the support mode to the high frequency support mode.
In step S1506, the MPU 62 sets the value of the number-of-games counter RTC provided in the various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64 to "1".
In step S1507, the MPU 62 sets a short-term high-frequency support mode command. The MPU 62 transmits the short-term high-frequency support mode command set in step S1507 to the sound emission control device 90 in step S301 of normal processing.
Note that the sound emission control device 90 executes predetermined processing based on the short-term high-frequency support mode command transmitted from the MPU 62 . This processing will be described later in detail.

After executing the process of step S1504 or the process of step S1507, the MPU 62 ends the first support mode setting process.

Next, support mode setting processing for the low probability mode in steps S1508 to S1512 will be described.
In step S1508, the MPU 62 determines whether the support mode is the high frequency support mode.

When the MPU 62 determines in step S1508 that the support mode is the high frequency support mode, the MPU 62 sets a high frequency support flag in the RAM 64 in step S1509. The MPU 62 maintains the high frequency support flag if it is already set in the RAM 64 . Thereby, the MPU 62 sets the support mode to the high frequency support mode.
At step S1510, the MPU 62 sets the value of the number-of-games counter RTC provided in the various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64 to "34".

On the other hand, if the MPU 62 determines in step S1508 that the support mode is not the high-frequency support mode (if it determines that the support mode is the low-frequency support mode), in step S1511, the data stored in the RAM 64 clear the high-frequency support flag. Thereby, the MPU 62 sets the support mode to the low-frequency support mode.
At step S1512, the MPU 62 sets the value of the number-of-games counter RTC provided in the various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64 to "0".

After executing the process of step S1510 or the process of step S1512, the MPU 62 ends the first support mode setting process.

FIG. 24 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the second support mode setting process.
In the second support mode setting process, the MPU 62 executes steps S1601 to S1611 as shown in FIG.
In step S1601, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the winning lottery mode is the high probability mode. When the MPU 62 determines in step S1601 that the win/fail lottery mode is the high probability mode, the MPU 62 executes support mode setting processing for the high probability mode in steps S1602 to S1606. If it is determined that the mode is not the probability mode, the support mode setting process for the low probability mode in steps S1607 to S1611 is executed.

First, support mode setting processing for the high probability mode in steps S1602 to S1606 will be described.
In step S1602, the MPU 62 determines whether the support mode is the high frequency support mode.

When the MPU 62 determines in step S1602 that the support mode is the high frequency support mode, the MPU 62 sets a high frequency support flag in the RAM 64 in step S1603. The MPU 62 maintains the high frequency support flag if it is already set in the RAM 64 . Thereby, the MPU 62 sets the support mode to the high frequency support mode.
At step S1604, the MPU 62 sets the value of the number-of-games counter RTC provided in the various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64 to "34".

On the other hand, if the MPU 62 determines in step S1602 that the support mode is not the high-frequency support mode (if it determines that the support mode is the low-frequency support mode), in step S1605, the data stored in the RAM 64 clear the high-frequency support flag. Thereby, the MPU 62 sets the support mode to the low-frequency support mode.
In step S1606, the MPU 62 sets the value of the number-of-games counter RTC provided in the various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64 to "0".

After executing the process of step S1604 or the process of step S1606, the MPU 62 ends the second support mode setting process.

Next, support mode setting processing for the low probability mode in steps S1607 to S1611 will be described.
In step S1607, the MPU 62 determines whether the support mode is the high frequency support mode.

When the MPU 62 determines in step S1607 that the support mode is the high frequency support mode, the MPU 62 sets a high frequency support flag in the RAM 64 in step S1608. The MPU 62 maintains the high frequency support flag if it is already set in the RAM 64 . Thereby, the MPU 62 sets the support mode to the high frequency support mode.
In step S1609, the MPU 62 sets the value of the number-of-games counter RTC provided in the various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64 to "34".

On the other hand, if the MPU 62 determines in step S1607 that the support mode is not the high-frequency support mode (if it determines that the support mode is the low-frequency support mode), in step S1610 the high-frequency support flag is set in the RAM 64. The MPU 62 maintains the high frequency support flag if it is already set in the RAM 64 . Thereby, the MPU 62 sets the support mode to the high frequency support mode.
At step S1611, the MPU 62 sets the value of the number-of-games counter RTC provided in the various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64 to "34".

After executing the process of step S1609 or the process of step S1611, the MPU 62 ends the second support mode setting process.

FIG. 25 shows the value of the number-of-games counter set in the first support mode setting process or the second support mode setting process. Specifically, FIG. 25 shows the first variable display and the second variable display that triggered the transition to the opening/closing execution mode, the win/fail lottery mode and the support mode at the time of transition to the opening/closing execution mode, and the first support mode. It is a figure which shows the relationship with the value of the number-of-games counter RTC which is set in the mode setting process or the second support mode setting process.

The value of the number-of-games counter RTC that is set in the first support mode setting process (the process in the case of shifting to the open/close execution mode triggered by the winning of a game ball into the upper operating port 36) is shown in the left column of FIG. In addition, it differs depending on the combination of the lottery mode and the support mode.
In the case of the combination of the low probability mode and the high frequency support mode, the value of the number-of-games counter RTC is 34 times.
In the case of the combination of the high-probability mode and the low-frequency support mode, the value of the number-of-games counter RTC is one.
In the case of combinations other than these, the value of the number-of-games counter RTC becomes zero. In this case, since the high frequency support flag stored in the RAM 64 is cleared, the support mode is set to the low frequency support mode.

In addition, the value of the number-of-games counter RTC set in the second support mode setting process (the process when shifting to the open/close execution mode triggered by the winning of the game ball into the lower opening 37) is shown in the right column of FIG. As shown, it differs depending on the combination of the lottery mode and the support mode.
In the case of the combination of the high-probability mode and the low-frequency support mode, the value of the number-of-games counter RTC is 0 times. In this case, since the high frequency support flag stored in the RAM 64 is cleared, the support mode is set to the low frequency support mode.
In the case of combinations other than these, the value of the number-of-games counter RTC is 34 times.

Here, the high-frequency support mode continues until one game or 34 games, which is the end reference number set in the game counter RTC, is completed. The MPU 62 clears the high-frequency support flag when one or 34 games have been completed. Thereby, the MPU 62 sets the support mode to the low-frequency support mode.
In the following description, the high-frequency support mode that continues until one game, which is the end reference number set in the number-of-games counter RTC, is completed is also referred to as a short-term high-frequency support mode, and is set in the number-of-games counter RTC. The high-frequency support mode that continues until 34 game rounds, which is the end reference number of times, is completed is also referred to as a long-term high-frequency support mode.

The MPU 62 executes these processes in the above-described electric power fluctuation end process of step S808. Note that the electric power fluctuation end processing in step S808 will be described later in detail.

Returning to the description of the transition processing when the opening/closing execution mode ends, the processing after step S1405 will be described with reference to FIG.
After executing the first support mode setting process in step S1403 or the second support mode setting process in step S1404, the MPU 62 sets the high probability mode flag in the RAM 64 in step S1405. The MPU 62 maintains the high-probability mode flag if it has already been set in the RAM 64 . As a result, the MPU 62 sets the win/fail lottery mode to the high probability mode.
In step S1406, the MPU 62 sets "3" to the value of the highly accurate counter STC provided in the various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64. FIG. After that, the MPU 62 terminates the transition processing when the opening/closing execution mode ends.

When ending the transition process at the end of the open/close execution mode, the MPU 62 sets the flags (the non-explicit small round high-probability result flag, the explicit small-round high-probability result flag, and Most advantageous result flag) and special outlier flag are cleared. Further, in step S701 of the fluctuation start process described above, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the high probability mode flag is set in the RAM 64, thereby determining whether or not the win/loss lottery mode is the high probability mode. there is

Here, the high-probability mode continues until three game rounds, which is the end reference number set in the high-probability counter STC, are completed. The MPU 62 clears the high-probability mode flag when three games have been played. As a result, the MPU 62 sets the win/fail lottery mode to the low probability mode.
The MPU 62 executes these processes in the fluctuation end process of step S508 described above. The fluctuation end processing in step S508 will be described in detail below.

FIG. 26 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the fluctuation end processing.
In the fluctuation end process, the MPU 62 executes steps S1701 to S1709 as shown in FIG.
In step S1701, the MPU 62 stores information (main display unit 45, the information relating to the pattern to be finally stopped and displayed) is specified. Then, at the end of the game round, the MPU 62 executes display control of the main display section 45 so as to display the pattern corresponding to the specified information on the main display section 45 during the variable display (variation end execution processing).

In step S1702, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the winning lottery mode is the high probability mode.
When the MPU 62 determines in step S1702 that the lottery mode is not the high probability mode, the MPU 62 executes the processes from step S1706.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1702 that the win/fail lottery mode is the high probability mode, in step S1703, the high probability number set in step S1406 of the transition processing at the end of the opening/closing execution mode The value of the counter STC is decremented by 1 and updated. Here, the variation command set in step S717 described above includes the value of the high-precision number counter STC.
In step S1704, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the highly accurate number counter STC is "0" or less.

When the MPU 62 determines in step S1704 that the high-accuracy number counter STC is not "0" or less, it executes the processing after step S1706.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1704 that the high probability counter STC is "0" or less, it clears the high probability mode flag stored in the RAM 64 in step S1705. As a result, the MPU 62 sets the win/fail lottery mode to the low probability mode.

In this way, when a "big win" is won in the winning lottery, the game state shifts to the high probability mode after the opening/closing execution mode (that is, the round number regulation mode) ends, regardless of the current game state. . The high-probability mode continues until three game rounds, which is the end reference number set in the high-probability counter STC, are completed.
Further, when the winning lottery does not result in a "big hit", that is, when the winning result in the winning lottery is a "special losing result" or "ordinary losing result", the game state does not shift.

After executing the processing of step S1705, if it is determined that the winning lottery mode is not the high probability mode in step S1702, or if it is determined that the highly accurate number counter STC is not "0" or less in step S1704, the MPU 62 determines in step S1706 whether the support mode is the high frequency support mode.
If the MPU 62 determines in step S1706 that the support mode is not the high-frequency support mode (if it determines that the support mode is the low-frequency support mode), the MPU 62 terminates the fluctuation without executing the processing after step S1707. End the process.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1706 that the support mode is the high frequency support mode, in step S1707, the game set in the first support mode setting process or the second support mode setting process The value of the number counter RTC is decremented by 1 and updated. Here, the variation command set in step S717 described above includes the value of the number-of-games counter RTC.

In step S1708, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the number-of-games counter RTC is "0" or less.
When the MPU 62 determines in step S1708 that the number-of-games counter RTC is not equal to or less than "0", it ends the fluctuation end processing without executing the processing after step S1709.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1708 that the number-of-games counter RTC is "0" or less, it clears the high frequency support flag stored in the RAM 64 in step S1709. Thereby, the MPU 62 sets the support mode to the low-frequency support mode. After that, the MPU 62 terminates the fluctuation end processing.

In this way, when the high-frequency support flag is set in the RAM 64 as a result of a "jackpot win" in the winning lottery, the game state is the open/close execution mode (that is, the round number regulation mode) regardless of the current game state. After completion, transition to high-frequency support mode. The high-frequency support mode continues until one game or 34 games, which is the end reference number set in the game counter RTC, is completed.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the transition process and the variation end process at the end of the opening/closing execution mode function as a game state switching section for switching between the low probability mode and the high probability mode.
Specifically, the transition process and the fluctuation end process at the end of the opening and closing execution mode are performed when the result of the internal lottery executed with the entry of the game ball to the upper operation port 36 or the lower operation port 37 as a trigger is won. Switching to high probability mode.
Further, the transition processing and the fluctuation end processing at the end of the opening/closing execution mode are performed by determining the number of pieces of pending information (4 in this embodiment) stored in the second result display portion pending area Rb after switching to the high probability mode. Switching from the high-probability mode to the low-probability mode is triggered by notification of the result of the internal lottery associated with a predetermined number (three in the present embodiment) of pending information, which is less than the high-probability mode.

In this embodiment, the transition process and the fluctuation end process at the end of the opening/closing execution mode are executed as a result of the internal lottery triggered by the entry of the game ball into the upper operation port 36 or the lower operation port 37. When switching to the high-probability mode, and switching from the high-probability mode to the low-probability mode triggered by the notification of the result of the internal lottery associated with a predetermined number (3 in this embodiment) of the pending information, but other than these You may switch a low-probability mode and a high-probability mode based on the conditions of. In short, the game state switching section should switch between the first game state and the second game state.

Further, in the present embodiment, the transition processing and the fluctuation end processing at the end of the opening/closing execution mode are performed by temporarily switching the lower operation port 37 from the low-frequency support mode to the high-frequency support mode after switching to the high-probability mode. It also functions as a state switching unit.

Further, in the present embodiment, the main controller 60 performs opening and closing advantageous to the player based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the upper working opening 36 and the lower working opening 37. It functions as game state transition means for shifting the game state from the normal control state (low probability mode and high probability mode) to the mode.

FIG. 27 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the electric duty fluctuation ending process.
In the electric power fluctuation end process, the MPU 62 executes steps S1801 to S1805 as shown in FIG.
In step S1801, the information (final (information related to the pattern to be stopped and displayed). Then, at the end of the electric role game cycle, the MPU 62 executes display control of the character object display unit 46 so that the pattern corresponding to the specified information is displayed on the character object display unit 46 during variable display ( power fluctuation end execution processing).

In step S1802, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the result of winning the electric role is "Electrical role open winning".
When the MPU 62 determines in step S1802 that the electric role winning result is not "electric role open winning", it ends the electric role variation ending process without executing the processes after step S1803.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1802 that the electric role winning result is "electric role open winning", in step S1803 it determines whether the support mode is the high-frequency support mode. do.

When the MPU 62 determines in step S1803 that the support mode is the high-frequency support mode, in step S1804, the MPU 62 executes high-frequency electric power opening execution processing. In the high-frequency electric role opening execution process, the MPU 62 executes the opening/closing process of the electric role product 37a by executing drive control of the electric role product driving unit 37b.
On the other hand, if the MPU 62 determines in step S1803 that the support mode is not the high-frequency support mode (if it determines that the support mode is the low-frequency support mode), in step S1805, the MPU 62 Execute the role release execution process. In the low-frequency electric role opening execution process, the MPU 62 executes the opening/closing process of the electric role product 37a by executing drive control of the electric role product driving unit 37b.
After executing the high-frequency power supply opening execution process in step S1804 or the low-frequency power supply opening execution process in step S1805, the MPU 62 ends the power supply fluctuation end process.

Here, in the high-frequency electric role opening execution process, when the electric accessory opening lottery is won, the number of times the electric accessory 37a is set to the open state is greater than in the low-frequency electric role opening execution process. , the opening time for setting the electric accessory 37a to the open state is also longer. In addition, in the high-frequency power supply opening execution process, the closed time for setting the electric accessory 37a to the closed state between each opening in one power supply open state is shorter than the opening time of one time. ing.

Therefore, in the high-frequency support mode, game balls are more likely to enter the lower operation opening 37 as compared with the low-frequency support mode. In other words, in the low frequency support mode, the game ball has a higher probability of winning in the upper working opening 36 than in the lower working opening 37 . In addition, in the high-frequency support mode, the probability that the game ball will enter the lower operating port 37 is higher than the upper operating port 36.例文帳に追加
When it is detected that a prize has been entered into the lower operating port 37, a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out. Therefore, in the high-frequency support mode, the player can play the game while not reducing the number of game balls. It can be carried out.

<Electrical Configuration of Audio Light Emission Control Device 90 and Display Control Device 100>
FIG. 28 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the sound emission control device and the display control device.
As shown in FIG. 28, the sound emission control device 90 includes a sound emission control board 91, an MPU 92 mounted on the sound emission control board 91, and a ROM 93 and a RAM 94 that constitute the MPU 92. Here, the MPU 92 is an element in which a CPU, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, etc., as well as the ROM 93 and the RAM 94, are integrated into a chip.

The ROM 93 is a memory for storing various control programs and fixed value data, and is non-volatile storage means that does not require power supply from the outside to hold stored information.
The RAM 94 is a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when executing the control program stored in the ROM 93, and is a volatile storage means that requires external power supply to hold the stored information. is. This RAM 94 has various areas such as a command list storage area 94a.

The MPU 92 has an input port and an output port. The input port of the MPU 92 is connected to the main controller 60 as described above. The output port of the MPU 92 is connected to various lamp units 23, 49a to 49c, the speaker unit 24, and the display control device 100. FIG.
The MPU 92 executes driving control of various lamp units 23 , 49 a to 49 c and the speaker unit 24 based on commands transmitted from the main control device 60 .
Also, the MPU 92 transmits commands resulting from analysis of these commands to the display control device 100 . The sound emission control device 90 is electrically connected to the display control device 100 via a connector unit (connection unit) in which connectors are provided at both ends of a signal line.

The display control device 100 includes a display control board 101 , an MPU 102 , a program ROM 103 and a work RAM 104 that constitute the MPU 102 , a video display processor (VDP) 105 , a character ROM 106 and a video RAM 107 . Here, the MPU 102 is an element in which, in addition to the program ROM 103 and work RAM 104, a CPU, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, and the like are combined into a chip. MPU 102 , VDP 105 , character ROM 106 and video RAM 107 are mounted on display control board 101 .

The MPU 102 analyzes the command transmitted from the sound emission control device 90 and performs predetermined arithmetic processing based on this command to control the VDP 105 . Specifically, MPU 102 controls VDP 105 by generating commands for VDP 105 .

The program ROM 103 is a memory for storing various control programs and fixed value data, and is non-volatile storage means that does not require power supply from the outside for holding stored information.
The work RAM 104 is a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when executing the control program stored in the program ROM 103. The work RAM 104 is a volatile memory that requires power supply from the outside to hold the stored information. It is a memory means.

The VDP 105 is a kind of drawing circuit that directly operates an image processing device as a liquid crystal display driver incorporated in the pattern display device 47 . Since the VDP 105 is made into an IC chip, it is also called a "drawing chip", and its substance should be called a microcomputer chip containing firmware dedicated to drawing processing. The VDP 105 reads image data from the character ROM 106 based on the content of the command generated by the MPU 102 and stores the image data in the video RAM 107 .

The character ROM 106 functions as an image data library for storing character data such as designs displayed on the design display device 47 . The character ROM 106 holds bitmap format image data of various patterns, a color palette table and the like that are referred to when determining the expression color of each dot of the bitmap image.
The video RAM 107 is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on the pattern display device 47 , and the display contents of the pattern display device 47 are changed by rewriting the contents of the video RAM 107 .

<Regarding Timer Interrupt Processing Executed by Sound Emission Control Device 90>
FIG. 29 is a diagram showing a flowchart of timer interrupt processing executed by the sound emission control device.
The MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 executes timer interrupt processing for advancing the game. In this timer interrupt process, the MPU 92 periodically (for example, every 2 msec) executes steps S2001 to S2005 as shown in FIG.

In step S2001, the MPU 92 executes command storage processing. In this command storage process, when the MPU 92 receives a command from the MPU 62 , it stores the command in the RAM 94 . Specifically, the RAM 94 has a ring buffer for storing and reading commands received from the MPU 62 , and the MPU 92 stores the commands in the ring buffer according to the order received from the MPU 62 . The MPU 92 reads commands from the ring buffer in the order in which they are stored in the ring buffer.

In step S2002, the MPU 92 executes effect determination processing based on the command received from the MPU 62. FIG. In the effect determination process, the MPU 92 determines the effect for the game cycle, the effect for the open/close execution mode, and the like.
In step S2003, the MPU 92 executes an effect execution process based on the content of the effect determination process in step S2002. Specifically, in the effect execution process, the MPU 92 executes light emission control of various lamp units 23 and 49a to 49c, and executes sound control of the speaker unit 24. FIG.

In step S<b>2004 , the MPU 92 executes demonstration display execution processing based on the demonstration command received from the MPU 62 . In the demonstration display execution process, the MPU 92 executes the demonstration display when a predetermined start waiting period (for example, 30 sec) for the start of the demonstration elapses without a new game cycle being started after the game cycle ends. . Specifically, in the demonstration display execution process, the MPU 92 executes light emission control of various lamp units 23 and audio control of the speaker unit 24 .

In step S2005, command transmission processing for transmitting the command set in the effect determination processing in step S2002 to the display control device 100 is executed. In this command transmission process, the MPU 92 determines whether it is time to transmit various commands stored as a command list in the command list storage area 94 a of the RAM 94 to the display control device 100 , and transmits various commands to the display control device 100 . , the command is transmitted to the display control device 100 .
After that, the MPU 92 terminates the timer interrupt processing.

<Regarding effect determination processing executed by the sound emission control device 90>
FIG. 30 is a diagram showing a flowchart of effect determination processing.
The MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 executes an effect determination process in order to execute an effect for the game cycle, an effect for the open/close execution mode, and the like. In this effect determination process, the MPU 92 executes steps S2101 to S2116 as shown in FIG.

In step S2101, the MPU 92 determines whether or not the variation command and the type command transmitted from the MPU 62 have been received.
When the MPU 92 determines in step S2101 that each command has not been received, it executes the processing from step S2109 onward.
On the other hand, if the MPU 92 determines in step S2101 that each command has been received, in step S2102 it determines whether the game result is the "best result" based on the content of the type command. determine whether

When the MPU 92 determines in step S2102 that the game result is the "best result", in step S2103, the MPU 92 executes symbol determination processing corresponding to the type of game result. In this symbol determination process, when the MPU 92 determines that the game result is the "most advantageous result", the MPU 92 determines the combination of symbols having the same number as the stop result to be finally stopped and displayed on the activated line L. Determine information. The numbers are randomly determined by lottery or the like.

On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines in step S2102 that the game result is not the "best result", in step S2104, the game result is the "normal result" based on the content of the type command. Determine whether or not
When the MPU 92 determines in step S2104 that the game result is not the "normal failure result", that is, the game result is "special failure result", "non-explicit few round high probability result", and "explicit few round high probability result". If it is either, in step S2105, common symbol determination processing is executed. In this common symbol determination process, the MPU 92 determines information relating to a combination of special symbols as a stop result to be finally stopped and displayed on the activated line L. FIG. Specifically, the MPU 92 selects not a combination of symbols having the same number, but a special combination of symbols having different numbers (for example, "3.4.1") is determined. It should be noted that this special symbol combination is the same regardless of the type of game result.

On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines in step S2104 that the game result is the "normal failure result", in step S2106, the MPU 92 executes symbol determination processing for normal failure. In this normal out-of-symbol determination process, the MPU 92 determines whether or not the ready-to-win display will occur based on the content of the variation command.

When the MPU 92 determines that the ready-to-win display will occur, the MPU 92 determines information relating to the combination of the symbols for the ready-to-win display as the stop result to be finally stopped and displayed on the activated line L. FIG. It should be noted that the combination of symbols for the ready-to-win display is randomly determined by a lottery or the like.
On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines that the ready-to-win display does not occur, the MPU 92 provides information relating to a combination of symbols different from the above-described combination of symbols as a stop result to be finally stopped and displayed on the activated line L. decide. Specifically, the MPU 92 randomly determines a combination of symbols different from any of the combination of symbols having the same number, the special combination of symbols, and the combination of symbols in the ready-to-win display by lottery or the like.

After executing any one of steps S2103, S2105, and S2106, the MPU 92 executes a production pattern determination process in step S2107. In this effect pattern determination process, the MPU 92 selects an effect pattern corresponding to the variation command and the type command by referring to the effect table pre-stored in the ROM 93 . Specifically, the MPU 92 selects an effect continuation time (effect continuation period) and the content of the effect as the effect pattern. In step S2107, the MPU 92 also executes a lottery to determine whether or not to generate an advance notice display.

Further, the MPU 92 executes light emission control of the display lamp unit 23 and voice control of the speaker unit 24 in the above-described effect execution processing of step S2003 based on the selected effect pattern.
The effect pattern determination process in step S2107 will be described in detail below.

<Production Pattern Decision Processing>
FIG. 31 is a diagram showing a flow chart of the effect pattern determination process.
In the effect pattern determination process, the MPU 92 executes steps S2201 to S2210 as shown in FIG.
In step S2201, the MPU 92 determines whether or not the winning lottery mode is the high probability mode based on the content of the variation command.

When the MPU 92 determines in step S2201 that the winning/failure lottery mode is the high probability mode, in step S2202 it determines whether or not a high probability suggestion flag is set in the RAM 94 . This high-probability suggestion flag is a flag for specifying whether or not to suggest to the player that the high-probability mode is set. The MPU 92 sets a high-probability suggestion flag in the RAM 94 when the game result that triggered the transition to the opening/closing execution mode is the "best result" or the "high-probability result of the low-explicit round." Round High Probability Result" is cleared, the high probability suggestion flag stored in the RAM 94 is cleared. Processing for setting or clearing the high probability suggestion flag will be described later.

When the MPU 92 determines in step S2202 that the high-probability suggestion flag is set in the RAM 94, in step S2203, the MPU 92 executes high-probability number of times notification determination processing. In this high-precision number-of-times notification determination process, the MPU 92 determines the notification of the value of the high-precision number-of-times counter STC based on the content of the variation command.
On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines in step S2202 that the high probability suggestion flag is not set in the RAM 94, in step S2204, the support mode is changed to the high frequency support mode based on the content of the variation command. It is determined whether or not.

When the MPU 92 determines in step S2204 that the support mode is the high-frequency support mode, in step S2205, after setting the high-probability suggestion flag in the RAM 94, the high-probability number of times notification determination processing in step S2203 described above is performed. Execute.
In this way, even if the game result that triggered the transition to the opening/closing execution mode is the "non-explicit small round high probability result", if the support mode is the high frequency support mode, the MPU 92 , sets a high-probability suggestion flag in the RAM 94, and executes the high-probability number of times notification determination processing in step S2203.

MPU92, after executing the high probability number of times notification determination processing of step S2203, when it is determined that the lottery mode is not the high probability mode in step S2201 (when it is determined to be the low probability mode), or in step S2204 If it is determined that the support mode is not the high frequency support mode, it is determined in step S2206 whether or not the support mode is the high frequency support mode based on the content of the variation command.

When the MPU 92 determines in step S2206 that the support mode is the high-frequency support mode, in step S2207, the MPU 92 executes game count notification determination processing.
In this number-of-games notification determination process, the MPU 92 determines notification of the value of the number-of-games counter RTC based on the content of the variation command.
After executing the number-of-games notification determination process in step S2207, or when determining that the support mode is not the high frequency support mode in step S2206 (when determining that it is the low frequency support mode), the MPU 92 performs step S2208. , it is determined whether or not the variable display information is the second variable display.

When the MPU 92 determines in step S2208 that the variable display information is the second variable display, the MPU 92 executes the processing from step S2209.
On the other hand, if the MPU 92 determines in step S2208 that the variable display information is not the second variable display (determines that it is the first variable display), it executes the processing from step S2212. In addition, the MPU 92 determines whether or not the short-term high-frequency support mode command transmitted from the MPU 62 is received. Read and clear the short-term high-frequency support mode command from.

In step S2209, the MPU 92 determines whether or not the short-term high-frequency support mode command transmitted from the MPU 62 has been received.
When the MPU 92 determines in step S2209 that the short-term high-frequency support mode command has been received, in step S2210 the MPU 92 executes special game state notification determination processing. In this special game state notification determination process, the MPU 92 determines the notification of the special game state. This special game state will be described later in detail.
On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines in step S2209 that the short-term high-frequency support mode command has not been received, in step S2211 the win/loss lottery mode is the low-probability mode and the support mode is the low-frequency mode. Determine whether or not it is in support mode.

When the MPU 92 determines in step S2211 that the lottery mode is the low-probability mode and the support mode is the low-frequency support mode, the MPU 92 executes the special game state notification determination process of step S2210 described above.
On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines in step S2211 that the lottery mode is the low-probability mode and the support mode is not the low-frequency support mode, it executes the processing from step S2212.
In this way, when the MPU 92 determines that the variable display information is the second variable display in step S2208 during stay in the short-term high-frequency support mode or during stay in the low-probability mode and low-frequency support mode, step A special game state notification determination process of S2210 is executed.

After executing the special game state notification determination process of step S2210, the MPU 92 determines that the variation display information is not the second variation display in step S2208 (if it determines that it is the first variation display), or step S2211. If it is determined that the lottery mode is the low-probability mode and the support mode is not the low-frequency support mode, reach display setting processing is executed in step S2212.
In this ready-to-win display setting process, the MPU 92 determines whether or not to generate a ready-to-win display, and if it determines to generate a ready-to-win display, sets the type of ready-to-win display, effect duration, and the like.
Thereafter, the MPU 92 terminates the effect pattern determination process.

Returning to the description of effect determination processing, the processing after step S2108 will be described with reference to FIG.
In step S2108, the MPU 92, the value of the high probability number counter STC, the value of the number of games counter RTC, and the fluctuation start command including information related to the special game state, step S2103, step S2105, and any process of step S2106 Set a stop result command including information related to the stop result determined in . Then, the MPU 92 stores the variation start command and the stop result command in the command list stored in the command list storage area 94a of the RAM 94. FIG. These fluctuation start command and stop result command are transmitted to the display control device 100 in the command transmission processing of step S2005 described above.

The MPU 102 of the display control device 100 retrieves from the program ROM 103 a data table for starting the variable display and displaying the stop result on the pattern display device 47 based on the variable start command and the stop result command transmitted from the MPU 92 . read out. Then, the MPU 102 outputs a command to the VDP 105 based on this data table each time a predetermined image update timing (for example, every 20 msec) comes. As a result, the symbol display device 47 finally stops and displays the stop result determined by the MPU 92 on the effective line L after starting the variable display.

After executing the processing of step S2108, or when determining in step S2101 that the command for variation and the type command have not been received, the MPU 92 executes processing from step S2109 onward.
In step S2109, the MPU 92 determines whether an opening command has been received.

When the MPU 92 determines in step S2109 that the opening command has not been received, it executes the processing from step S2116.
On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines in step S2109 that an opening command has been received, in step S2110 it determines the type of game result based on the contents of the opening command.

In step S2111, the MPU 92 executes determination processing of the effect for the opening/closing execution mode corresponding to the type of game result determined in step S2110. In the processing for determining the effect for the opening/closing execution mode, if the MPU 92 determines in step S2110 that the game result is the "special loss result" or the "non-explicit small round high probability result", the opening/closing execution mode effect is determined. Effect A is selected as the effect. Further, when the MPU 92 determines that the game result is the “explicit small round high probability result”, the MPU 92 selects the effect B as the effect for the opening/closing execution mode. Further, when the MPU 92 determines that the game result is the "best result", the MPU 92 selects the effect C as the effect for the opening/closing execution mode.
The duration of the effects A and B corresponds to the time when the opening and closing of the big winning opening 38a is executed twice in a short period of time in the open/close execution mode. Further, the duration of the effect C corresponds to the time when the opening and closing of the big winning opening 38a is executed four times in the long-time manner in the opening and closing execution mode.

Further, the MPU 92 executes light emission control of the display lamp unit 23 and voice control of the speaker unit 24 in the above-described effect execution processing of step S2003 based on the selection result of the effects A to C.

In step S2112, the MPU 92 sets an opening/closing execution mode command including information relating to the effect for the opening/closing execution mode selected in step S2111. Then, the MPU 92 stores the open/close execution mode command in the command list stored in the command list storage area 94 a of the RAM 94 . This opening/closing execution mode command is transmitted to the display control device 100 in the command transmission processing of step S2005 described above.

The MPU 102 of the display control device 100 reads from the program ROM 103 a data table for executing the opening/closing execution mode effect on the pattern display device 47 based on the opening/closing execution mode command transmitted from the MPU 92 . Then, the MPU 102 outputs a command to the VDP 105 based on this data table each time a predetermined image update timing (for example, every 20 msec) comes. As a result, the pattern display device 47 executes an effect for the opening/closing execution mode selected by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 .

In step S2113, the MPU 92 determines whether or not the game result is the "highest advantage result" or the "explicit small round high probability result" based on the content of the opening command.

When the MPU 92 determines in step S2113 that the game result is the "highest advantage result" or the "explicit small round high probability result", the MPU 92 sets a high probability suggestion flag in the RAM 94 in step S2114.
On the other hand, if the MPU 92 determines in step S2113 that the game result is not the "most advantageous result" or the "explicit few rounds high probability result" (if the game result is the "non-explicit few rounds high probability result" If determined), the high probability suggestion flag stored in the RAM 94 is cleared in step S2115.

After executing the processing of step S2114 or step S2115, or when determining that the opening command has not been received in step S2109, the MPU 92 executes the processing of step S2116 and subsequent steps.
In step S2116, the MPU 92 executes other processing. In other processes, the MPU 92 executes processes for advancing the effects for the opening/closing execution mode based on the opening command, closing command, and ending command transmitted from the MPU 62, for example. After that, the MPU 92 terminates the effect determination process.

<Regarding the relationship between game results and game status>
The relationship between game results and game states based on the execution of various processes will be described below.
FIG. 32 is a diagram showing the relationship between game results and game states. Specifically, FIG. 32 is a diagram showing the relationship between the game results excluding the "normal failure result" and the game states, etc., in which the game results are arranged in the column direction and the game states, etc. are arranged in the row direction.
The pachinko machine 10, as shown in FIG. It has distribution results of "Few Rounds High Probability Results" and "Most Advantageous Results".

As shown in the second column of the table in FIG. 32, the "special loss result" is the game result selected when the "big win" is not won in the win/loss lottery (symbol x in the figure). Also, the sorting result is the game result selected when "big hit" is won in the winning lottery (symbol ◯ in the figure).
Hereinafter, the relationship between the game results other than the "normal result" and the game state will be described. In this embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 sets the relationship between the game result and the game state as follows. The contents of the game state and the like are arbitrary.

In the case of the "special failure result", the opening/closing execution mode shifts to the opening/closing number regulation mode instead of the round number regulation mode, and the opening/closing of the big winning hole 38a is executed twice in a short period of time. Also, in the "special losing result", the lottery mode does not shift.
In the "unspecified small round high probability result", the opening and closing execution mode shifts to the round number regulation mode in which the round game is performed with two times as the upper limit number of times, and the opening and closing of the big winning opening 38a is executed twice in a short time mode. be done. In addition, in the "non-explicit small round high probability result", the winning lottery mode shifts to the high probability mode.
In this way, the "special loss result" and the "non-explicit small round high probability result" are different in the type of opening and closing execution mode, but are common in that the opening and closing of the big winning opening 38a is executed twice in a short time mode. are doing.

In addition, in the "special failure result" and "non-explicit small round high probability result", the stop result is a combination of special symbols, and the effect for the opening/closing execution mode is effect A. Furthermore, in the "non-explicit small round high probability result", since the high probability suggestion flag stored in the RAM 94 in step S2115 is cleared, the symbol display device 47 displays the high probability No image is displayed on the display screen G to clearly indicate that the mode is the stochastic mode.

Therefore, the player cannot grasp whether the game result is the "special failure result" or the "non-explicit small round high probability result" by checking the stop result or the effect for the opening/closing execution mode. Can not. In other words, even if the distribution lottery results in the "non-explicit small round high probability result" and shifts to the high probability mode, the symbol display device 47 does not perform the winning lottery in the game round after the opening/closing execution mode ends. Disguise as if the mode has not changed.
Therefore, the player can play the game while enjoying the prediction of whether or not the winning lottery mode has shifted to the high-probability mode.
In addition, in the "high frequency support mode", since the high probability suggestion flag is set in the RAM 94 in step S2205, when the distribution lottery becomes "non-explicit small round high probability result" and shifts to the high probability mode Even so, the player can exceptionally grasp that the win/fail lottery mode has shifted to the high-probability mode.

In the "explicit small round high probability result", the opening and closing execution mode shifts to the round number regulation mode in which the round game is performed with two times as the upper limit number, and the opening and closing of the big winning opening 38a is executed twice in a short time mode. be. In addition, in the "explicit small round high probability result", the winning lottery mode shifts to the high probability mode. In addition, in the "clearly limited round high probability result", the stop result is a combination of special symbols, and the effect for the opening/closing execution mode is effect B. Furthermore, in the "express small round high probability result", since the high probability suggestion flag is set in the RAM 94 in step S2114, the symbol display device 47 is in the high probability mode in the game round after the open/close execution mode is finished. An image clearly indicating that is displayed on the display screen G.
Therefore, the player can understand that the game result is the "explicit small round high probability result" by confirming the stop result and the effect for the opening/closing execution mode.

In the "most advantageous result", the opening/closing execution mode shifts to the round number regulation mode in which the round game is performed with four times as the upper limit number of times, and the opening/closing of the big winning opening 38a is executed four times in a long time mode. In addition, in the "most advantageous result", the winning lottery mode shifts to the high probability mode. In addition, in the ``most advantageous result'', the stop result is a combination of symbols having the same number, the success/failure lottery mode shifts to a high probability mode, and the performance for the opening/closing execution mode is performance C. - 特許庁
Furthermore, in the "most advantageous result", since the high probability suggestion flag is set in the RAM 94 in step S2114, the symbol display device 47 clearly indicates that the high probability mode is set in the game round after the opening/closing execution mode ends. The image to be displayed is displayed on the display screen G.
Therefore, the player can understand that the game result is the "best result" by checking the stop result and the effect for the opening/closing execution mode.

As described above, the support mode is set in the first support mode setting process or the second support mode setting process based on the combination of the winning/failure lottery mode, the support mode, and the variable display information (Fig. 25).

<Regarding the flow at the time of transition to lottery mode and support mode>
FIG. 33 is a diagram showing a flow chart at the time of shifting between the lottery mode and the support mode.
As shown in FIG. 33, the pachinko machine 10 is operated when a "jackpot win" is achieved (refer to the solid line arrow in the figure) and when a prescribed number of game rounds is completed without "jackpot win" (see the dotted line arrow in the figure). ) to shift the lottery mode and support mode.
FIG. 33 shows a lottery mode of a high probability mode (high probability) and a low probability mode (low probability), a support mode of a high frequency support mode (high frequency) and a low frequency support mode (low frequency), and a high probability mode (low probability). Blocks BL11 to BL17 show the number of game rounds for staying in the probability mode and the high-frequency support mode.

FIG. 34 is a diagram showing the display screen of the symbol display device, the first suspension lamp section, and the second suspension lamp section when shifting to the win/fail lottery mode and the support mode. Specifically, FIG. 34A is a diagram showing the display screen G during the first variable display when the second holding lamp section is not lit and the low-probability mode and low-frequency support mode are in effect. be. FIG. 34(B) is a diagram showing the display screen G when the first variable display of FIG. 34(A) results in "best result". FIG. 34(C) is a diagram showing the display screen G during the first variable display in the case of the high-probability mode and low-frequency support mode after FIG. 34(B). FIG. 34(D) is a diagram showing the display screen G when the first variable display of FIG. 34(C) results in "best result". FIG. 34(E) is a diagram showing the display screen G during the first variable display in the high-probability mode and high-frequency support mode after FIG. 34(D).
Hereinafter, the flow at the time of shifting to the winning lottery mode and the support mode will be described with reference to FIGS. 33 and 34. FIG.

After the pachinko machine 10 executes the above-described main processing that is activated when the power is turned on, as shown in FIG. 33, the pachinko machine 10 enters the low-probability mode and low-frequency support mode (block BL11). In the low-frequency support mode, the game ball has a higher probability of entering the upper working opening 36 than the lower working opening 37, so that the game ball is shot from the game ball shooting mechanism 81 by rotating the shooting handle 27 by the player. The game ball enters the upper working port 36. - 特許庁Therefore, as shown in FIG. 34(A), the first reservation lamp portion 49a lights according to the number of reserved game balls that have entered the upper operation opening 36, and the game cycle is displayed in the first variable display. On the other hand, since the game ball hardly enters the lower operation opening 37, the second reservation lamp portion 49b is turned off. In addition, in FIG. 34A, the maximum number of lights of the first reservation lamp portion 49a is four.

In block BL11, when the first variable display results in the "best result" (see the solid line arrow in the figure), the symbol display device 47 displays the same stop result as shown in FIG. 34(B). (for example, 7.7.7) are stopped and displayed on the activated line L. Then, the pachinko machine 10 executes the effect for the opening/closing execution mode selected by the MPU92 based on the command for the opening/closing execution mode transmitted from the MPU92.
In the opening/closing execution mode, the opening/closing door 38b is set to an open state in which a game ball can win a prize. Prizes will be awarded to mouth 38a. Here, since the upper operation port 36 is provided on the path for winning the game ball to the big winning port 38a, the game ball is fired from the game ball shooting mechanism 81 by rotating the shooting handle 27 by the player. The ball will enter the upper working port 36 as well.

On the other hand, the pachinko machine 10 stays in the block BL11 as it is when the "most advantageous result" is not obtained in the first variation display in the block BL11 (see the dotted line arrow in the figure).

After that, as shown in FIG. 33, the pachinko machine 10 enters the high probability mode and low frequency support mode (block BL12). Since the MPU 92 executes high-precision number notification determination processing in step S2203 in block BL12, the MPU 102 notifies the value of the high-precision number counter STC based on the contents of the variation start command transmitted from the MPU 92. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 34(C), the MPU 102 displays "3 more rotations during high probability" on the upper left of the display screen G of the pattern display device 47, thereby staying in the high probability mode. It informs that the number of rotations is 3 rotations. It should be noted that the number of game rounds staying in the high-probability mode decreases as the value of the high-probability number counter STC decreases.

In block BL12, when the first variable display results in the "best result" (see the solid line arrow in the figure), as shown in FIG. (for example, 7.7.7) are stopped and displayed on the activated line L. Then, the pachinko machine 10 executes the effect for the opening/closing execution mode selected by the MPU92 based on the command for the opening/closing execution mode transmitted from the MPU92. FIG. 34(D) shows the case where the "most advantageous result" is obtained in the first variation display of the first rotation after shifting to block BL12, so the MPU 102 causes the symbol display device 47 to display "Two more rotations in high accuracy" is displayed on the upper left of the screen G.
On the other hand, the pachinko machine 10 proceeds to block BL11 when three game rounds have been completed without "winning a jackpot" in block BL12 (see the dotted line arrow in the figure).

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 33, the pachinko machine 10 enters the high probability mode and high frequency support mode (block BL13). In block BL13, the MPU 92 executes high-probability number-of-games notification determination processing in step S2203, and executes game number-of-times notification determination processing in step S2207. , the value of the high-precision number counter STC and the value of the game number counter RTC are notified. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 34(E), the MPU 102 displays "3 more rotations during high probability" on the upper left of the display screen G of the pattern display device 47, thereby allowing the game to stay in the high probability mode. It informs that the number of rotations is 3 rotations. In addition, the MPU 102 displays "One chance time left" at the bottom of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47, so that the number of game rotations during which the high-frequency support mode (short-term high-frequency support mode) stays is It informs that it is one rotation. In addition, the number of game rotations staying in the high probability mode decreases as the value of the high probability number counter STC decreases, and the number of game rotations staying in the high frequency support mode is the value of the game number counter RTC. decreases with the decrease of

In the high-frequency support mode, the game ball has a higher probability of entering the lower working port 37 than the upper working port 36, so the game ball is shot from the game ball shooting mechanism 81 by rotating the shooting handle 27 by the player. The game ball enters the lower operation opening 37. - 特許庁Therefore, the second reservation lamp portion 49b lights up according to the number of game balls that have entered the lower operation opening 37 and is reserved. In addition, in the high-frequency support mode, the game ball shot from the game ball shooting mechanism 81 by the player rotating the shooting handle 27 also enters the upper operation port 36.例文帳に追加In other words, the upper working port 36 and the lower working port 37 are arranged on the same path.
Therefore, the first reservation lamp portion 49a lights up according to the number of reserved game balls that have entered the upper operation opening 36. As shown in FIG. Note that in FIG. 34(E), the maximum number of lights of the first suspension lamp portion 49a and the second suspension lamp portion 49b is four.

FIG. 35 shows the display screen of the pattern display device at the time of transition to the winner lottery mode and the support mode when the "best result" is obtained during the stay in the short-term high-frequency support mode, the first suspension lamp part, and the second suspension It is a figure which shows a lamp|ramp part. Specifically, FIG. 35(A) is a view showing the display screen G in the case where the first variation display of the first rotation after the shift to block BL13 results in "best result". FIG. 35(B) is a diagram showing the display screen G during the second variable display in the high-probability mode and low-frequency support mode after FIG. 35(A). FIG. 35(C) is a view showing the display screen G when three game rounds have been completed without the "best result". FIG. 35(D) is a diagram showing the display screen G when the second variable display of FIG. 35(C) results in "best result". FIG. 35(E) is a diagram showing the display screen G during the first variable display in the high-probability mode and high-frequency support mode after FIG. 35(D).
Hereinafter, the flow at the time of shifting to the win/fail lottery mode and the support mode will be described with reference to FIGS. 33 and 35. FIG.

In block BL13, when the first variable display results in the "best result" (see the solid line arrow in the figure), as shown in FIG. (for example, 7.7.7) are stopped and displayed on the activated line L. Then, the pachinko machine 10 executes the effect for the opening/closing execution mode selected by the MPU92 based on the command for the opening/closing execution mode transmitted from the MPU92. FIG. 35(A) shows the case where the "most advantageous result" is obtained in the first variation display of the first rotation after moving to block BL13. "Two more rotations in high accuracy" is displayed on the upper left of the screen G.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 33, the pachinko machine 10 enters the high probability mode and low frequency support mode (block BL14). Since the MPU 92 executes high-precision number notification determination processing in step S2203 in block BL14, the MPU 102 notifies the value of the high-precision number counter STC based on the contents of the variation start command transmitted from the MPU 92. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 35(B), the MPU 102 displays "3 more rotations during high probability" on the upper left of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47, so that the game stays in the high probability mode. It informs that the number of rotations is 3 rotations. It should be noted that the number of game rounds staying in the high-probability mode decreases as the value of the high-probability number counter STC decreases.

Here, when the MPU 62 determines that there is the reservation information stored in the second result display section reservation area Rb based on the winning of the game ball to the lower operation opening 37, the game to the upper operation opening 36 Regardless of whether or not there is any pending information stored in the first result display holding area Ra based on the winning of the ball, the pending information stored in the second result holding area Rb is preferentially played. set for digestion of Therefore, the game cycle is during the second variable display.

The pachinko machine 10 enters the low-probability mode and low-frequency support mode as shown in FIG. mode (block BL15). MPU 102, in block BL15, when the reservation information stored in the second result display section reservation area Rb remains based on the winning of the game ball to the lower operation opening 37, that is, when the second variable display is in progress , based on the content of the variation start command transmitted from the MPU 92, it is notified that it is in the special game state. Specifically, in block BL15, the MPU 92 executes special game state notification determination processing in step S2210, so the MPU 102 displays the upper left corner of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 as shown in FIG. 35(C). The special game state is notified by displaying "Big Chance Zone!!" In addition, in FIG. 35(C), since the rest of the pending information stored in the second result display portion pending area Rb is one in the second variable display, the second pending lamp portion 49b is turned off. .
On the other hand, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to block BL12 again when "big hit" is won in block BL14 (see the solid line arrow in the figure).

In block BL15, when the second variable display results in the "best result" (see the solid line arrow in the figure), as shown in FIG. (for example, 7.7.7) are stopped and displayed on the activated line L. Then, the pachinko machine 10 executes the effect for the opening/closing execution mode selected by the MPU92 based on the command for the opening/closing execution mode transmitted from the MPU92.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 33, the pachinko machine 10 enters the high probability mode and high frequency support mode (block BL16). In block BL16, the MPU 92 executes high-probability number-of-games notification determination processing in step S2203, and executes game number-of-times notification determination processing in step S2207. , the value of the high-precision number counter STC and the value of the game number counter RTC are notified. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 35(E), the MPU 102 displays "3 more rotations during high probability" on the upper left of the display screen G of the pattern display device 47, thereby staying in the high probability mode. It informs that the number of rotations is 3 rotations. Further, the MPU 102 displays "34 rotations remaining in the chance time" at the bottom of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47, so that the number of game rotations during which the high-frequency support mode (long-term high-frequency support mode) stays is It informs that it is 34 revolutions. In addition, the number of game rotations staying in the high probability mode decreases as the value of the high probability number counter STC decreases, and the number of game rotations staying in the high frequency support mode is the value of the game number counter RTC. decreases with the decrease of

Then, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to block BL16 again when the first variable display or the second variable display results in a "jackpot win" (see the solid line arrow in the figure).
On the other hand, in the block BL15, the pachinko machine 10 does not obtain the "best result" in the second variation display (see the dotted line arrow in the figure), and in the block BL16, the first variation display or the second When 34 rounds of the game are completed without becoming "big win" in the variable display (see the dotted line arrow in the figure), the process proceeds to block BL11.

In this way, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the long-term high-frequency support mode when the second variation display shows the "best result" in the special game state of the block BL15 (see the solid line arrow in the figure). . Therefore, the special game state is a state in which the transition to the long-term high-frequency support mode occurs when the second variable display results in the "best result".
In addition, in FIG. 34(E), since the number of lighting of the second holding lamp portion 49b is four at maximum, in the example of FIG. becomes.
Therefore, the winning probability of the second variable display in the special game state is 1/30 per rotation. In other words, in the example of FIG. 35, the pachinko machine 10 does not shift to the special game state unless the number of lighting of the second suspension lamps 49b is four or more during stay in the short-term high-frequency support mode.

FIG. 36 shows the display screen of the symbol display device at the time of transition to the winning lottery mode and the support mode when the "best result" is not obtained during the stay in the short-term high-frequency support mode, the first holding lamp part, and the second It is a figure which shows a reservation lamp part. Specifically, FIG. 36(A) is a view showing the display screen G when the first variation display of the first rotation after the shift to block BL13 does not result in the "best result". FIG. 36(B) is a view showing the display screen G when two game rounds have been completed without the "best result". FIG. 36(C) is a diagram showing the display screen G when the second variable display of FIG. 36(B) results in "best result". FIG. 36(D) is a diagram showing the display screen G during the second variable display in the case of the high-probability mode and high-frequency support mode after FIG. 36(C).
Hereinafter, the flow at the time of shifting to the winning lottery mode and the support mode will be described with reference to FIGS. 33 and 36. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 33, the pachinko machine 10, in the block BL13, when the first variation display does not result in the "best result" (see the dotted line arrow in the figure), the high probability mode and low frequency support mode (block BL17). Since the MPU 92 executes high-precision number notification determination processing in step S2203 in block BL17, the MPU 102 notifies the value of the high-precision number counter STC based on the content of the variation start command transmitted from the MPU 92. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 36(A), the MPU 102 displays "2 more rotations during high probability" on the upper left of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47, thereby allowing the game to stay in the high probability mode. It informs that the number of rotations is 2 rotations. It should be noted that the number of game rounds staying in the high-probability mode decreases as the value of the high-probability number counter STC decreases.

Here, when the MPU 62 determines that there is the reservation information stored in the second result display section reservation area Rb based on the winning of the game ball to the lower operation opening 37, the game to the upper operation opening 36 Regardless of whether or not there is any pending information stored in the first result display holding area Ra based on the winning of the ball, the pending information stored in the second result holding area Rb is preferentially played. set for digestion of Therefore, the game cycle is during the second variable display.

The pachinko machine 10 enters the low-probability mode and low-frequency support mode as shown in FIG. mode (block BL15). MPU 102, in block BL15, when the reservation information stored in the second result display section reservation area Rb remains based on the winning of the game ball to the lower operation opening 37, that is, when the second variable display is in progress , based on the content of the variation start command transmitted from the MPU 92, it is notified that it is in the special game state. Specifically, in block BL15, the MPU 92 executes special game state notification determination processing in step S2210, so the MPU 102 displays the upper left corner of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 as shown in FIG. 35(C). The special game state is notified by displaying "Big Chance Zone!!" In FIG. 36(B), since the remaining hold information stored in the hold area Rb for the second result display section is two including one in the second variable display, the second hold lamp section 49b The number of lighting of is one.
On the other hand, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to block BL12 again when "big win" is won in block BL17 (see the solid line arrow in the figure).

In block BL15, when the second variable display results in the "best result" (see the solid line arrow in the figure), as shown in FIG. (for example, 7.7.7) are stopped and displayed on the activated line L. Then, the pachinko machine 10 executes the effect for the opening/closing execution mode selected by the MPU92 based on the command for the opening/closing execution mode transmitted from the MPU92.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 33, the pachinko machine 10 enters the high probability mode and high frequency support mode (block BL16). In block BL16, the MPU 92 executes high-probability number-of-games notification determination processing in step S2203, and executes game number-of-times notification determination processing in step S2207. , the value of the high-precision number counter STC and the value of the game number counter RTC are notified. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 36(D), the MPU 102 displays "3 more rotations during high probability" on the upper left of the display screen G of the pattern display device 47, thereby allowing the game to stay in the high probability mode. It informs that the number of rotations is 3 rotations. Further, the MPU 102 displays "34 rotations remaining in the chance time" at the bottom of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47, so that the number of game rotations during which the high-frequency support mode (long-term high-frequency support mode) stays is It informs that it is 34 revolutions. In addition, the number of game rotations staying in the high probability mode decreases as the value of the high probability number counter STC decreases, and the number of game rotations staying in the high frequency support mode is the value of the game number counter RTC. decreases with the decrease of

Then, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to block BL16 again when the first variable display or the second variable display results in a "jackpot win" (see the solid line arrow in the figure).
On the other hand, in the block BL15, the pachinko machine 10 does not obtain the "best result" in the second variation display (see the dotted line arrow in the figure), and in the block BL16, the first variation display or the second When 34 rounds of the game have been completed without becoming "big win" in the variable display (see the dotted line arrow in the figure), the process proceeds to block BL11.

In this way, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the long-term high-frequency support mode when the second variation display shows the "best result" in the special game state of the block BL15 (see the solid line arrow in the figure). . Therefore, the special game state is a state in which the transition to the long-term high-frequency support mode occurs when the second variable display results in the "best result".
In addition, in FIG. 34(E), since the number of lighting of the second holding lamp portion 49b is four at maximum, in the example of FIG. becomes.
Therefore, the winning probability of the second variable display in the special game state is 1/30 per rotation. In other words, in the example of FIG. 36, the pachinko machine 10 does not shift to the special game state unless the number of lighting of the second suspension lamp portion 49b is set to 3 or more during stay in the short-term high-frequency support mode.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the game state transition processing is performed after switching from the high probability mode to the low probability mode in the transition processing at the end of the opening/closing execution mode and the variation end processing, and then the second result display holding area Rb. functions as a most advantageous game state transition unit that transitions the game state to a long-term high frequency support mode (most advantageous game state) advantageous to the player when winning the result of the internal lottery associated with the hold information stored in the do.
In other words, the game state transition processing, after switching from the high probability mode to the low probability mode in the transition processing at the end of the opening and closing execution mode and the fluctuation end processing, triggered by the entry of the game ball into the lower operation opening 37 A most advantageous game state transition unit for transferring a game state to a long-term high-frequency support mode (most advantageous game state) more advantageous to a player than a low probability mode and a high probability mode when winning as a result of an executed internal lottery. function as

In addition, in the present embodiment, the game state transition processing is, after switching from the high probability mode to the low probability mode in the transition processing at the end of the opening and closing execution mode and the variation end processing, the game ball entering the lower operation opening 37 If you win the result of the internal lottery executed as a trigger, the game state is shifted to the long-term high-frequency support mode (most favorable game state) that is more advantageous to the player than the low probability mode and the high probability mode. , based on conditions other than this, the game state may be shifted to a long-term high-frequency support mode that is more advantageous to the player than the low-probability mode and the high-probability mode. In short, the game state transition process is, when winning the result of the internal lottery executed triggered by the entry of the game ball into the upper working port 36 and the lower working port 37, the upper working port 36 and the lower working port 37 , based on the combination of the low-probability mode and the high-probability mode, the game state may be shifted to the long-term high-frequency support mode which is more advantageous to the player than the low-probability mode and the high-probability mode.

Further, in this embodiment, the continuation rate of the long-term high-frequency support mode is set to be higher than the continuation rate of the high-probability mode.
Here, the continuation rate refers to the probability of continuing to stay in the game state. The transition processing and fluctuation end processing at the end of the opening/closing execution mode are switched to the high probability mode when winning the result of the internal lottery executed with the entry of the game ball into the upper operation port 36 or the lower operation port 37 as a trigger. , Triggered by notification of the result of the internal lottery associated with a predetermined number (three times in this embodiment) of the pending information that is smaller than the number of the plurality of pending information stored in the second result display portion pending area Rb. to switch from high-probability mode to low-probability mode. Therefore, the continuation rate of the high-probability mode is until the result of the internal lottery associated with a predetermined number of pending information less than the number of the plurality of pending information stored in the second result display portion pending area Rb is reported. This is the probability of winning the result of the internal lottery executed with the entry of the game ball into the upper operation port 36 or the lower operation port 37 as a trigger. Therefore, the continuation rate of the high-probability mode is the probability of winning the lottery of 1/3 within 3 rotations.

On the other hand, the continuation rate of the long-term high-frequency support mode is the sum of the probability of winning the lottery of 1/3 within 3 spins and the probability of winning the lottery of 1/30 within the remaining 31 spins. Therefore, the continuation rate of the long-term high-frequency support mode is set to be higher than the continuation rate of the high-probability mode.

In addition, in the present embodiment, by setting the continuation rate of the long-term high-frequency support mode to be higher than the continuation rate of the high-probability mode, the long-term high-frequency support mode can be played more than the low-probability mode and the high-probability mode. Although the game state is advantageous to the player, the game state may be advantageous to the player by setting conditions other than the continuation rate. In short, the most advantageous game state should be a game state more advantageous to the player than the first game state and the second game state.

FIG. 37 is a diagram showing a flowchart at the time of shifting to the win/fail lottery mode and the support mode when the first holding lamp section is not lit.
As shown in FIG. 37, the pachinko machine 10 is operated when a "jackpot win" is achieved (see the solid line arrow in the figure) and when a prescribed number of game rounds is completed without "jackpot win" (see the dotted line arrow in the figure). ) to shift the lottery mode and support mode.
FIG. 37 shows a lottery mode of high probability mode (high probability) and low probability mode (low probability), support mode of high frequency support mode (high frequency) and low frequency support mode (low frequency), and high Blocks BL21 to BL26 show the number of game rounds for staying in the probability mode and the high-frequency support mode.

FIG. 38 is a diagram showing the display screen of the symbol display device, the first reservation lamp section, and the second reservation lamp section at the time of transition to the winning lottery mode and the support mode when the first reservation lamp section is not lit. Specifically, FIG. 38A is a diagram showing the display screen G during the first variable display when the second holding lamp section is not lit and the low probability mode and low frequency support mode are in effect. be. FIG. 38(B) is a diagram showing the display screen G when the first variable display of FIG. 38(A) results in "best result". FIG. 38(C) is a diagram showing the display screen G during the first variable display in the case of the high-probability mode and low-frequency support mode after FIG. 38(B). FIG. 38(D) is a diagram showing the display screen G when the first variable display of FIG. 38(C) results in "best result". FIG. 38(E) is a diagram showing the display screen G during the first variable display in the high-probability mode and high-frequency support mode after FIG. 38(D).
Hereinafter, the flow at the time of shifting to the lottery mode and the support mode will be described with reference to FIGS. 37 and 38. FIG.

After the pachinko machine 10 executes the above-described main processing that is activated upon power-on, as shown in FIG. 37, the pachinko machine 10 enters the low-probability mode and low-frequency support mode (block BL21). In the low-frequency support mode, the game ball has a higher probability of entering the upper working opening 36 than the lower working opening 37, so that the game ball is shot from the game ball shooting mechanism 81 by rotating the shooting handle 27 by the player. The game ball enters the upper working port 36. - 特許庁Therefore, as shown in FIG. 38(A), the first reservation lamp portion 49a lights according to the number of reserved game balls that have entered the upper operation opening 36, and the game cycle is displayed in the first variable display. On the other hand, since the game ball hardly enters the lower operation opening 37, the second reservation lamp portion 49b is turned off. In addition, in FIG. 38(A), the number of lighting of the 1st reservation lamp part 49a is 0 pieces.

In block BL21, when the first variable display results in the "best result" (see the solid line arrow in the figure), the symbol display device 47 displays the same stop result as shown in FIG. 38(B). (for example, 7, 7, 7) are stopped and displayed on the activated line L. Then, the pachinko machine 10 executes the effect for the opening/closing execution mode selected by the MPU92 based on the command for the opening/closing execution mode transmitted from the MPU92.
In the opening/closing execution mode, the opening/closing door 38b is set to an open state in which a game ball can win a prize. Prizes will be awarded to mouth 38a. Here, since the upper operation port 36 is provided on the path for winning the game ball to the big winning port 38a, the game ball is fired from the game ball shooting mechanism 81 by rotating the shooting handle 27 by the player. The ball will enter the upper working port 36 as well.

On the other hand, the pachinko machine 10 stays in the block BL21 as it is when the "most advantageous result" is not obtained in the first variation display in the block BL21 (see the dotted line arrow in the figure).

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 37, the pachinko machine 10 enters the high probability mode and low frequency support mode (block BL22). Since the MPU 92 executes high-precision number notification determination processing in step S2203 in block BL22, the MPU 102 notifies the value of the high-precision number counter STC based on the contents of the variation start command transmitted from the MPU 92. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 38(C), the MPU 102 displays "3 more rotations during high probability" on the upper left of the display screen G of the pattern display device 47, thereby staying in the high probability mode. It informs that the number of rotations is 3 rotations. It should be noted that the number of game rounds staying in the high-probability mode decreases as the value of the high-probability number counter STC decreases.
In addition, in FIG. 38(C), in the opening/closing execution mode of FIG. 38(B), since the game ball did not enter the upper operation opening 36, the number of lighting of the first holding lamp portion 49a becomes 0. ing.

In block BL22, when the first variable display results in the "best result" (see the solid line arrow in the figure), as shown in FIG. (for example, 7.7.7) are stopped and displayed on the activated line L. Then, the pachinko machine 10 executes the effect for the opening/closing execution mode selected by the MPU92 based on the command for the opening/closing execution mode transmitted from the MPU92. FIG. 38(D) shows the case where the "most advantageous result" is obtained in the first variation display of the first rotation after shifting to block BL22, so the MPU 102 causes the symbol display device 47 to display "Two more rotations in high accuracy" is displayed on the upper left of the screen G.
On the other hand, the pachinko machine 10 moves to block BL21 when three game rounds have been completed without "winning a jackpot" in block BL22 (see the dotted line arrow in the figure).

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 37, the pachinko machine 10 enters the high probability mode and high frequency support mode (block BL23). In block BL23, the MPU 92 executes high-probability number-of-games notification determination processing in step S2203, and executes game number-of-games notification determination processing in step S2207. , the value of the high-precision number counter STC and the value of the game number counter RTC are notified. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 38(E), the MPU 102 displays "3 more spins during high probability" on the upper left of the display screen G of the pattern display device 47, thereby staying in the high probability mode. It informs that the number of rotations is 3 rotations. In addition, the MPU 102 displays "One chance time left" at the bottom of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47, so that the number of game rotations during which the high-frequency support mode (short-term high-frequency support mode) stays is It informs that it is one rotation. In addition, the number of game rotations staying in the high probability mode decreases as the value of the high probability number counter STC decreases, and the number of game rotations staying in the high frequency support mode is the value of the game number counter RTC. decreases with the decrease of

In the high-frequency support mode, the game ball has a higher probability of entering the lower working port 37 than the upper working port 36, so the game ball is shot from the game ball shooting mechanism 81 by rotating the shooting handle 27 by the player. The game ball enters the lower operation opening 37. - 特許庁Therefore, the second reservation lamp portion 49b lights up according to the number of game balls that have entered the lower operation opening 37 and has been reserved. In addition, in the high-frequency support mode, the game ball shot from the game ball shooting mechanism 81 by the player rotating the shooting handle 27 also enters the upper operation port 36.例文帳に追加In other words, the upper working port 36 and the lower working port 37 are arranged on the same path.
Therefore, the first reservation lamp portion 49a lights up according to the number of reserved game balls that have entered the upper operation opening 36. As shown in FIG. In addition, in FIG. 38(E), during the stay in the short-term high-frequency support mode and in the opening/closing execution mode of FIG. The number of lighting of is 0. In addition, the maximum number of lights of the second suspension lamp portion 49b is four.

Here, when the MPU 62 determines that there is the reservation information stored in the second result display section reservation area Rb based on the winning of the game ball to the lower operation opening 37, the game to the upper operation opening 36 Regardless of whether or not there is any pending information stored in the first result display holding area Ra based on the winning of the ball, the pending information stored in the second result holding area Rb is preferentially played. set for digestion of Therefore, the game cycle is during the second variable display.

MPU 102, in block BL23, when the reservation information stored in the second result display section reservation area Rb remains based on the winning of the game ball to the lower operation opening 37, that is, when the second variable display is in progress , based on the content of the variation start command transmitted from the MPU 92, it is notified that it is in the special game state. Specifically, since the MPU 92 executes the special game state notification determination process in step S2210 in the block BL23, the MPU 102, as shown in FIG. The special game state is notified by displaying "Big Chance Zone!!"

FIG. 39 shows the display screen of the symbol display device, the first suspension lamp portion, and the second suspension at the time of transition to the success or failure lottery mode and the support mode when the "best result" is obtained during the stay in the short-term high-frequency support mode. It is a figure which shows a lamp|ramp part. Specifically, FIG. 39(A) is a view showing the display screen G in the case where the second variable display of the first rotation after shifting to block BL23 results in "best result". FIG. 39(B) is a diagram showing the display screen G during the second variable display in the high probability mode and high frequency support mode after FIG. 39(A).
Hereinafter, the flow at the time of shifting to the win/fail lottery mode and the support mode will be described with reference to FIGS. 37 and 39. FIG.

In block BL23, when the second variable display results in the "best result" (see the solid line arrow in the figure), as shown in FIG. (for example, 7.7.7) are stopped and displayed on the activated line L. Then, the pachinko machine 10 executes the effect for the opening/closing execution mode selected by the MPU92 based on the command for the opening/closing execution mode transmitted from the MPU92.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 37, the pachinko machine 10 enters the high probability mode and high frequency support mode (block BL24). In block BL24, the MPU 92 executes high-probability number-of-games notification determination processing in step S2203, and executes game number-of-games notification determination processing in step S2207. , the value of the high-precision number counter STC and the value of the game number counter RTC are notified. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 39(B), the MPU 102 displays "3 more spins during high probability" on the upper left of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47, thereby allowing the game to stay in the high probability mode. It informs that the number of rotations is 3 rotations. Further, the MPU 102 displays "34 rotations remaining in the chance time" at the bottom of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47, so that the number of game rotations during which the high-frequency support mode (long-term high-frequency support mode) stays is It informs that it is 34 revolutions. In addition, the number of game rotations staying in the high probability mode decreases as the value of the high probability number counter STC decreases, and the number of game rotations staying in the high frequency support mode is the value of the game number counter RTC. decreases with the decrease of

Then, in the block BL24, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the block BL24 again when the first variable display or the second variable display results in a "jackpot win" (see the solid line arrow in the figure).
On the other hand, in the block BL24, the pachinko machine 10 completes 34 spins without a "jackpot win" in the first variation display or the second variation display (see the dotted arrow in the figure). moves to block BL21.

In this way, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the long-term high-frequency support mode when the second variation display shows the "best result" in the special game state of the block BL23 (see the solid line arrow in the figure). . Therefore, the special game state is a state in which the transition to the long-term high-frequency support mode occurs when the second variable display results in the "best result".
The winning probability of the second variable display in the special game state during stay in the short-term high-frequency support mode is 1/3.

FIG. 40 shows the display screen of the symbol display device at the time of transition to the winning lottery mode and the support mode when the "best result" is not obtained during the stay in the short-term high-frequency support mode, the first holding lamp part, and the second It is a figure which shows a reservation lamp part. Specifically, FIG. 40(A) is a view showing the display screen G when the second variable display of the first rotation does not result in the "best result" after moving to block BL23. FIG. 40(B) is a view showing the display screen G when two rounds of the game are completed without the "best result". FIG. 40(C) is a diagram showing the display screen G when the second variable display of FIG. 40(B) results in "best result". FIG. 40(D) is a diagram showing the display screen G during the second variable display in the high-probability mode and high-frequency support mode after FIG. 40(C).
Hereinafter, the flow at the time of shifting to the win/fail lottery mode and the support mode will be described with reference to FIGS. 37 and 40. FIG.

In block BL23, if the second variation display does not result in the "best result" (see the dotted line arrow in the figure), the pachinko machine 10 enters the high-probability mode and low-frequency support mode as shown in FIG. (block BL25). Since the MPU 92 executes high-precision number notification determination processing in step S2203 in block BL25, the MPU 102 notifies the value of the high-precision number counter STC based on the content of the variation start command transmitted from the MPU 92. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 40(A), the MPU 102 displays "two more spins during high probability" on the upper left of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47, thereby allowing the game to stay in the high probability mode. It informs that the number of rotations is 2 rotations. It should be noted that the number of game rounds staying in the high-probability mode decreases as the value of the high-probability number counter STC decreases.

The pachinko machine 10 enters the low-probability mode and low-frequency support mode as shown in FIG. mode (block BL26). The MPU 102, in block BL26, when the reservation information stored in the second result display section reservation area Rb remains based on the winning of the game ball to the lower operation opening 37, that is, when the second variable display is being performed. , based on the content of the variation start command transmitted from the MPU 92, it is notified that it is in the special game state. Specifically, since the MPU 92 executes the special game state notification determination process in step S2210 in the block BL26, the MPU 102, as shown in FIG. The special game state is notified by displaying "Big Chance Zone!!" In addition, in FIG. 40(B), since the rest of the pending information stored in the second result display portion pending area Rb is two including one in the second variable display, the second pending lamp portion 49b The number of lighting of is one.
On the other hand, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to block BL22 again when "big hit" is won in block BL25 (see the solid line arrow in the figure).

In block BL26, when the second variable display results in the "best result" (see the solid line arrow in the figure), as shown in FIG. (for example, 7.7.7) are stopped and displayed on the activated line L. Then, the pachinko machine 10 executes the effect for the opening/closing execution mode selected by the MPU92 based on the command for the opening/closing execution mode transmitted from the MPU92.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 37, the pachinko machine 10 enters the high probability mode and high frequency support mode (block BL24). In block BL24, the MPU 92 executes high-probability number-of-games notification determination processing in step S2203, and executes game number-of-games notification determination processing in step S2207. , the value of the high-precision number counter STC and the value of the game number counter RTC are notified. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 40(D), the MPU 102 displays "3 more rotations during high probability" on the upper left of the display screen G of the pattern display device 47, thereby staying in the high probability mode. It informs that the number of rotations is 3 rotations. Further, the MPU 102 displays "34 rotations remaining in the chance time" on the right side of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47, so that the number of rotations of the game to stay in the high-frequency support mode (long-term high-frequency support mode) is It informs that it is 34 revolutions. In addition, the number of game rotations staying in the high probability mode decreases as the value of the high probability number counter STC decreases, and the number of game rotations staying in the high frequency support mode is the value of the game number counter RTC. decreases with the decrease of

Then, in the block BL24, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the block BL24 again when "jackpot win" is obtained in the first variable display or the second variable display (see the solid line arrow in the figure).
On the other hand, in the block BL26, the pachinko machine 10 does not obtain the "best result" in the second variation display (see the dotted line arrow in the figure), and in the block BL24, the first variation display or the second When the 34 rounds of the game are completed without becoming "big win" in the variable display (see the dotted line arrow in the figure), the process proceeds to block BL21.

In this way, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the long-term high-frequency support mode when the second variation display shows the "best result" in the special game state of the block BL26 (see the solid line arrow in the figure). . Therefore, the special game state is a state in which the transition to the long-term high-frequency support mode occurs when the second variable display results in the "best result".
In addition, in FIG. 38(E), the number of lighting of the second holding lamp portion 49b is the maximum four, so in the example of FIG. becomes.
Therefore, the winning probability of the second variable display in the special game state is 1/30 per rotation. In other words, in the example of FIG. 40, the pachinko machine 10 does not shift to the special game state of block BL26 unless the number of lighting of the second suspension lamp portion 49b is set to 3 or more during stay in the short-term high-frequency support mode.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the first holding lamp portion 49a is not lit, the game state transition processing is performed after switching to the high probability mode in the transition processing at the end of the opening/closing execution mode and the fluctuation end processing. When the result of the internal lottery associated with the reservation information stored in the reservation area Rb for the second result display part is won first, the game state is set to a long-term high frequency support mode (most advantageous game state) advantageous to the player. It functions as a most advantageous game state transition unit that transitions.

Here, as described above, the high-probability mode executes an internal lottery with a winning probability higher than that of the low-probability mode. The probability of winning increases when the result is reported (block BL25), and the probability of winning decreases when the result of the internal lottery associated with the remaining pending information is reported in the subsequent low probability mode (block BL26). ). Also, when the result of the internal lottery associated with the first hold information is notified in the high probability mode, the winning probability increases (block BL23). According to this, the player most expects to win when notified of the result of the internal lottery associated with the first pending information in the high-probability mode.

According to this embodiment, the following functions and effects can be obtained.
(1) The game state transition process is executed when a game ball enters the lower operation opening 37 after switching from the high probability mode to the low probability mode in the transition process at the end of the open/close execution mode and the fluctuation end process. The game state is shifted to a long-term high-frequency support mode more advantageous to the player than the low-probability mode and the high-probability mode when winning the internal lottery. According to this, the player pays attention to the result of the internal lottery executed with the entry of the game ball into the lower operation opening 37 as a trigger. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can increase the attention of the player to the game.

(2) The transition process and the variable end process at the end of the opening/closing execution mode are performed after switching to the high-probability mode, by performing a predetermined number of The high-probability mode is switched to the low-probability mode when the result of the internal lottery associated with the hold information is notified. According to this, the player expects non-winning when notified of the result of the internal lottery associated with the predetermined number of pending information in the high probability mode, and then the remaining pending information in the low probability mode. If you are notified of the results of the internal lottery associated with the , you expect to win. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can increase the attention of the player to the game.

(3) The pachinko machine 10 selects the results of the internal lottery associated with the plurality of pieces of reservation information stored in the second result display section reservation area Rb from the plurality of pieces of reservation information stored in the first result display section reservation area Ra. Since the notification is given with priority over the result of the internal lottery associated with the information, regardless of whether the reservation information is stored in the first result display reservation area Ra, the second result display reservation area Rb The result of the internal lottery associated with a plurality of pieces of pending information stored in can be preferentially notified. Therefore, the player pays attention only to the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the lower working hole 37, so the pachinko machine 10 increases the player's attention to the game. can be improved.

(4) Since the high-probability mode executes an internal lottery with a higher probability of winning than the low-probability mode, when the result of the internal lottery associated with a predetermined number of pending information is notified in the high-probability mode, will be higher, and the odds of winning will be lower when the subsequent low probability mode announces the results of the internal lottery associated with the remaining pending information. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can increase the attention of the player to the game.
(5) Since the continuation rate of the long-term high-frequency support mode is higher than the continuation rate of the high-probability mode, the player receives the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the lower operation opening 37. Will pay more attention. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can increase the attention of the player to the game.
(6) Since the upper working port 36 and the lower working port 37 are arranged on the same path, the player can shoot the game ball on the same path, thereby You can enter the game ball in. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 allows the player to play comfortably.

(7) In the game state transition process, when the result of the internal lottery executed with the entry of the game ball into the upper working port 36 or the lower working port 37 is won, the upper working port 36 and the lower working port 37 and, based on the combination of the low-probability mode and the high-probability mode, the game state is shifted to the long-term high-frequency support mode which is more advantageous to the player than the low-probability mode and the high-probability mode. According to this, when the player wins the result of the internal lottery executed with the entry of the game ball into the upper working port 36 or the lower working port 37, the upper working port 36 and the lower working port 37 and combinations with low-probability and high-probability modes. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can increase the attention of the player to the game.

(8) When the first holding lamp portion 49a is not turned on, the game state transition processing is, after switching to the high probability mode in the transition processing at the end of the open/close execution mode and the fluctuation end processing, displaying the second result first. When the result of the internal lottery associated with the reservation information stored in the reservation area Rb is won, or after switching from the high probability mode to the low probability mode in the transition processing at the end of the opening and closing execution mode and the fluctuation end processing , the game state is changed to a long-term high-frequency support mode which is more advantageous to the player than the low-probability mode and the high-probability mode when winning the internal lottery result triggered by the entry of the game ball into the lower operating port 37. to migrate. According to this, the player pays attention to the result of the internal lottery executed with the entry of the game ball into the lower operation opening 37 as a trigger. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can increase the attention of the player to the game.

(9) When the first holding lamp portion 49a is not turned on, the transition processing at the end of the opening/closing execution mode and the fluctuation end processing are stored in the holding area Rb for the second result display portion after switching to the high probability mode. The high-probability mode is switched to the low-probability mode when the result of the internal lottery associated with a predetermined number of pieces of reservation information less than the number of the pieces of reservation information is notified. According to this, when the player is notified of the result of the internal lottery associated with the predetermined number of hold information from the second time onward in the high probability mode, the player expects not to win, and then in the low probability mode Winning is expected when the result of the internal lottery associated with the remaining pending information is notified, or when the result of the internal lottery associated with the first pending information is notified in the high probability mode. . Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can increase the attention of the player to the game.

[Second embodiment]
A second embodiment of the present invention will be described below with reference to the drawings.
In the following description, the same reference numerals are given to the parts that have already been described, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 41 is a front view of a game board according to the second embodiment of the invention.
In the first embodiment, the game board 31 has the first reservation lamp portion 49a. On the other hand, in this embodiment, the game board 31A differs from the first embodiment in that it does not include the first reservation lamp portion 49a.
In the description of the game board 31A, components having the same functions as those of the first embodiment, but having different shapes and arrangements are given the same reference numerals.

The variable winning device 38 drives a large winning opening 38a that opens upward to allow game balls flowing down the game area to enter, an open/close door 38b for opening and closing the large winning opening 38a, and an open/close door 38b. A variable winning drive unit 38c is provided.
The player hits to the right by maximizing the rotation amount of the shooting handle 27, and moves the reaching position of the game ball in the upper part of the game area from the side where the exit portion of the guide rail 34 is formed to the opposite side. By shifting to the side, the game ball can be led to the variable winning device 38 avoiding the variable display unit 43 (right-handed route).

Here, the game board 31A has a first route (left-handed route) that makes it easy for the game ball to enter the upper operating port 36 and makes it difficult for the game ball to enter the lower operating port 37, There is also a second route (right-handed route) that makes it easy for the game ball to enter the lower operation port 37 and makes it difficult for the game ball to enter the upper operation port 36.例文帳に追加

Here, the game board 31A has a cover 381 provided so as to cover the front side of the variable winning device 38. As shown in FIG. The cover 381 includes a transparent (or semi-transparent) portion 381a formed to make the variable winning device 38 visible from the front side, and an opaque portion 381a formed around the transparent portion 381a. and a portion 381b.
Therefore, the player can see the variable winning device 38 from the front through the transparent portion 381a and the window portion 21. FIG.

The big winning opening 38a is provided in an opening formed in the game area so as to pass through in the front-rear direction by applying router processing. As described above, the big winning opening 38a is equipped with a detection sensor 40d for detecting the entry of a game ball. The pachinko machine 10 pays out a predetermined number of prize balls based on the detection result.

The opening/closing door 38b is formed in a rectangular plate shape, and is provided on the game board 31A so as to close the opening of the big winning opening 38a. The opening/closing door 38b advances toward the window panel 22 and protrudes from the game board 31A, thereby closing the opening of the big winning opening 38a. It also has an open state in which the opening of the big winning opening 38a is opened by being buried in 31A.
The variable winning driving unit 38c sets the opening/closing door 38b to either an open state or a closed state by driving the opening/closing door 38b.

Specifically, the opening/closing door 38b is normally set to a closed state in which game balls cannot win. Then, when the internal lottery wins the transition to the opening/closing execution mode and the opening/closing execution mode is shifted to, the opening/closing door 38b is set to an open state in which a game ball can win a prize.
The opening/closing execution mode (specific control state) refers to a mode in which the opening/closing door 38b is set to an open state and a game ball can be entered into the big winning opening 38a. In addition, in the opening/closing execution mode, after the opening/closing door 38b is set to the open state, it is called one round game until it is set to the closed state again.

The variable display unit 43 includes a pattern display device 47 that variably displays (variable display or switching display) a pattern, which is one type of pattern. Also, the variable display unit 43 has a center frame 48 arranged so as to surround the pattern display device 47 . The upper portion of the center frame 48 is provided so as to bulge toward the window panel 22 provided on the front side thereof. As a result, the pachinko machine 10 prevents the game balls from falling in front of the display screen G of the pattern display device 47, and does not cause the inconvenience that the visibility of the display screen G is lowered due to the falling of the game balls. It is configured.

The pattern display device 47 is configured as a liquid crystal display device having a liquid crystal display.
This symbol display device 47 starts the variable display of symbols based on the winning to the upper operation port 36 or the lower operation port 37 . That is, when the symbol display device 47 performs the variable display in the first result display section 45a of the main display section 45 and when the second result display section 45b of the main display section 45 performs the variable display, The variable display is executed accordingly.
The pattern display device 47 is not limited to a liquid crystal display device, and may be a plasma display device, an organic EL display device, or another display device such as a CRT.

The center frame 48 includes a second holding lamp portion 49b provided in the lower right region of the pattern display device 47 and a third holding lamp portion 49c provided in the upper region of the pattern display device 47. .

The second reservation lamp part 49b is a part that displays the number of reserved game balls that have won the lower operation opening 37, and lights up according to the number of reserved games. The second holding lamp portion 49b can hold up to four game balls, and corresponds to the variable display of the second result display portion 45b and the symbol display device 47. FIG.
The third reservation lamp portion 49c is a portion that displays the number of reserved game balls that have won each through gate 41, and lights up according to the number of reserved games. The third holding lamp portion 49 c can hold up to four game balls, and corresponds to the variable display of the accessory display portion 46 .
Note that each of the holding lamp portions 49b and 49c may have another configuration such as being displayed as an image on a part of the pattern display device 47, which will be described later.

<Electrical Configuration for Execution of Internal Lottery by MPU 62 of Main Control Unit 60>
FIG. 42 shows the contents of each counter used for the internal lottery.
As shown in FIG. 42, the MPU 62 executes an internal lottery by using the values (information) of the counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS and C4. Specifically, the MPU 62 uses the big win random number counter C1 for the lottery for the occurrence of the big win, uses the big win type counter C2 for the lottery for the type of the big win, and determines whether to generate the ready-to-win display. , the reach random number counter C3 is used. Further, the MPU 62 uses the random number initial value counter CINI to set the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1, and uses the variation type counter CS to determine the display continuation time on the main display section 45 and the symbol display device 47. Further, the MPU 62 uses the electric accessory open counter C4 for the lottery to determine whether or not the electric accessory 37a of the lower operating port 37 is set to the electric role open state. The counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 are provided in the various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64 (see FIG. 4).

Each of the counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value each time it is updated and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Each counter is periodically updated, and the updated value is appropriately stored in a lottery counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 64 . Of the values stored in the lottery counter buffer, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 are stored in the RAM 64 at the timing when the game ball enters the upper operating port 36 or the lower operating port 37. is stored in the reserved ball storage area 64b (see FIG. 4) provided as acquired information storage means. Further, among the values stored in the lottery counter buffer, the value of the electric accessary product release counter C4 is stored in the electric role holding area 64c (see FIG. 4) of the RAM 64 at the timing when the game ball wins the through gate 41. be done.

The reserved ball storage area 64b includes a first result display section reservation area Ra, a second result display section reservation area Rb, and an execution area AE.

The first result display section reservation area Ra provided as the first ball entering section storage means includes one storage area. The first result display portion reservation area Ra is set to have a storage capacity capable of storing a set of values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3. The MPU 62 uses a set of values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 as reservation information in accordance with the winning of the game ball to the upper operation port 36 in the reservation area Ra for the first result display unit. Store.

The second result display section reservation area Rb provided as the second ball entering section storage means includes four storage areas, a first area Rb1 to a fourth area Rb4. Each of the areas Rb1 to Rb4 is set to have a storage capacity capable of storing a set of values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3. The MPU 62 uses a set of values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 as reservation information in time series to each area Rb1 to Rb4 in accordance with the winning of the game ball to the lower operation port 37. store it. Specifically, when the winning to the lower opening 37 occurs a plurality of times in succession, the MPU 62 outputs the pending information in the order of the first area Rb1→second area Rb2→third area Rb3→fourth area Rb4. Store in chronological order.

As described above, since the second result display portion reservation area Rb has four storage areas, up to four winnings of game balls into the lower operation opening 37 are reserved. In addition, the second result display portion reservation area Rb includes a storage area for writing the number of reservations stored in each of the areas Rb1 to Rb4.
In addition, the number of reserves related to the lower working port 37 is not limited to four, and may be any number, such as two, three, or five or more, and may be singular. may

The execution area AE stores the pending information stored in the storage area of the first result display portion pending area Ra or the second result display portion pending area Rb when starting the variable display of each of the result display portions 45a and 45b. This is the area to move the .

The electrician reservation area 64c includes four storage areas, like the first result display reservation area Ra and the second result display reservation area Rb. In addition, the electrical work holding area 64c includes an electrical work execution area (not shown) like the reserved ball storage area 64b. Therefore, the winning of game balls to each through gate 41 is reserved up to four.
The number of pending gates 41 is not limited to four, and may be any number, such as two, three, or five or more. may

Further, in this embodiment, the main controller 60 executes processing different from that in the first embodiment. Specifically, in the present embodiment, the prize winning process and the game round control process for the activation port are different from those in the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the contents of the prize winning process and the game cycle control process for the operation port in this embodiment will be described.

<Winning process for operating port>
FIG. 43 is a diagram showing a flow chart of the winning process for the working opening.
In the winning process for the working opening, the MPU 62 executes steps S201 to S208A as shown in FIG.

In step S201, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the detection sensor 40b corresponding to the upper working port 36 has detected the winning of the game ball, thereby determining whether the game ball has won the upper working port 36 (start winning). determine whether When the MPU 62 determines in step S201 that the game ball has entered the upper operation port 36, in step S208A, the jackpot random number counter C1 and jackpot type counter C2 updated in step S103 of the timer interrupt process, and the reach A set of each value of the random number counter C3 is stored as reservation information in the reservation area Ra for the first result display section. After that, the MPU 62 terminates the prize winning process for the operating port.

On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S201 that the game ball has not entered the upper operating port 36, in step S203, the detection sensor 40c corresponding to the lower operating port 37 detects the winning of the game ball. is detected, it is determined whether or not the game ball has entered the lower operation opening 37 (start winning).
When the MPU 62 determines that the game ball has not entered the lower operation opening 37 in step S203, it ends the operation opening winning process. Further, when the MPU 62 determines that the game ball has won the lower operation opening 37 in step S203, in step S204, the number of reservations stored in the second result display section reservation area Rb is grasped, The pending number is set in a predetermined storage area in the second result display portion pending area Rb as a second start pending storage number RbN.

In step S205A, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the second start pending memory number RbN set in step S204 is less than the upper limit (4 in this embodiment).
When the MPU 62 determines in step S205A that the second start pending memory number RbN is not less than the upper limit value, the MPU 62 terminates the winning process for the operating opening. Further, when the MPU 62 determines in step S205A that the second start-holding memory number RbN is less than the upper limit value, in step S206A, the value of the second start-holding memory number RbN is updated by adding 1. .

In step S207, the MPU 62 stores a set of values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 updated in step S103 of the timer interrupt process in the second result display holding area Rb. The hold information is stored in the first storage area of the areas, that is, the storage area corresponding to the second start hold storage number RbN updated in step S206.
For example, when the MPU 62 sets "3" to the second start pending memory number RbN in step S204, the MPU 62 stores the second start pending memory number RbN in the storage area corresponding to "4" updated in step S206. Hold information is stored in a certain fourth area Rb4.

Further, in step S207, the MPU 62 sets a command for lighting the second suspension lamp portion 49b and transmits the set command to the sound emission control device 90. FIG. After that, the MPU 62 terminates the prize winning process for the operating port.
In addition, the sound emission control device 90 turns on the second suspension lamp part 49b based on the command transmitted from the MPU 62 . In addition, the number of reserved game balls that have won the lower operation opening 37 is, as described above, a maximum of four, and the second reservation lamp portion 49b is lit by the number corresponding to this reserved number.

<Game Round Control Processing>
FIG. 44 is a diagram showing a flowchart of game round control processing.
In the game round control process, the MPU 62 executes steps S501 to S509 as shown in FIG.
In step S501, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the opening/closing execution mode is in progress. When the MPU 62 determines in step S501 that the game is in the opening/closing execution mode, it ends the game round control process without executing the processes after step S502. Therefore, when it is determined that the open/close execution mode is in progress, the MPU 62 does not start the progress of the game cycle regardless of whether or not the winning of the game ball to the operation ports 36 and 37 is detected.
The MPU 62 determines whether or not the opening/closing execution mode is in progress by referring to the opening/closing execution mode flag stored in the RAM 64 . The same applies to each of the following processes. The MPU 62 sets the opening/closing execution mode flag when shifting to the opening/closing execution mode, and clears the opening/closing execution mode flag when the opening/closing execution mode ends.

On the other hand, if the MPU 62 determines in step S501 that the open/close execution mode is not in progress, in step S502 it determines whether the main display section 45 is performing variable display. Determine whether or not
When the MPU 62 determines in step S502 that the main display section 45 is not performing the variable display, the MPU 62 executes the game round start processing in steps S503A to S505.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S502 that the main display section 45 is performing the variable display, the MPU 62 executes the processing for game turn progress in steps S510A to S509.

First, the processing for starting a game cycle in steps S503A to S505 will be described.
In step S503A, the MPU 62 determines whether or not pending information is stored in the first result display portion pending area Ra or the second result display portion pending area Rb. When the MPU 62 determines in step S503A that the reservation information is not stored in the first result display section reservation area Ra or the second result display section reservation area Rb, it ends the game round control process.

On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S503A that the pending information is stored in the first result display portion pending area Ra or the second result display portion pending area Rb, in step S504A, A data setting process is executed for setting the reservation information stored in the reservation area Ra for the first result display section or the reservation area Rb for the second result display section for completion of the game cycle. After that, in step S505, the MPU 62 causes the main display unit 45 and the symbol display device 47 to start variable display, executes a variation start process for finishing the game round, and ends the game round control process.
The data setting process in step S504A will be described in detail below.

FIG. 45 is a diagram showing a flowchart of data setting processing.
In the data setting process, the MPU 62 executes steps S601 to S611 as shown in FIG.
In step S601, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the second start reservation memory number RbN in the second result display section reservation area Rb set in step S204 of the operation port winning process is "0" or less. do. When the MPU 62 determines in step S601 that the second start pending memory number RbN is equal to or less than "0", the MPU 62 executes data setting processing for the first result display section in steps S603 and S605, and proceeds to step S601. If it is determined that the second start pending memory number RbN is not equal to or less than "0", data setting processing for the second result display section of steps S607 to S611 is executed.

In this way, the data setting process includes the data setting process for the first result display section for setting the reservation information stored in the reservation area Ra for the first result display section for completing the game cycle, and the data setting processing for the second result display section. and a data setting process for the second result display section for setting the reservation information stored in the reservation area Rb for completion of the game cycle.
When the MPU 62 determines in step S601 that the second start pending storage number RbN is not equal to or less than "0", the MPU 62 does not execute the data setting process for the first result display section. Execute the data setting process for In other words, when the MPU 62 determines that there is reservation information stored in the second result display section reservation area Rb based on the winning of the game ball to the lower operation opening 37, the upper operation opening 36 The reservation information stored in the second result display section reservation area Rb is preferentially played regardless of whether or not there is reservation information stored in the first result display section reservation area Ra based on the winning of the game ball. Set for one digestion.

First, data setting processing for the first result display section in steps S603 and S605 will be described.
In step S603, the MPU 62 moves the pending information stored in the first result display pending area Ra to the execution area AE.
At step S605, the MPU 62 clears the second result display flag stored in the RAM 64. FIG. This second result display section flag is a flag for specifying which of the first result display section 45a and the second result display section 45b is caused to start the variable display when completing a game round. is. In this step S605, the MPU 62 clears the second result display section flag, so that when the game cycle is completed, the variable display is made on the first result display section 45a based on the winning of the game ball into the upper working hole 36. (first variable display).

Next, data setting processing for the second result display section in steps S607 to S611 will be described.
In step S607, the MPU 62 subtracts 1 from the value of the second start pending storage number RbN in the second result display portion pending area Rb to update it.
In step S608, the MPU 62 moves the pending information stored in the second area Rb1 of the second result display portion pending area Rb to the execution area AE.
In step S609, the MPU 62 executes data shift processing for shifting the pending information stored in the storage area of the second result display portion pending area Rb. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the pending information stored in each of the areas Rb1 to Rb4 to the first area Rb1 side. Specifically, the MPU 62 shifts the pending information of the second area Rb2 to the first area Rb1, shifts the pending information of the third area Rb3 to the second area Rb2, shifts the pending information of the fourth area Rb4 to the third Shift to area Rb3.

At step S610, the MPU 62 sets the second result display section flag in the RAM 64. FIG. In this step S610, the MPU 62 sets the second result display section flag, so that when the game cycle is completed, the second result display section 45b displays a variable display based on the winning of the game ball into the lower operation opening 37. (second variable display).

In step S611, the MPU 62 sets a shift command for recognizing that the hold information has been shifted, transmits the set shift command to the sound emission control device 90, and ends the data setting process. This command at the time of shift indicates that the hold information stored in the hold area Rb for the second result display unit has been shifted based on the winning of the game ball to the lower operation opening 37. It contains information for 90 to recognize.
In addition, the sound emission control device 90 changes the lighting state of the second holding lamp portion 49b based on the shift command transmitted from the MPU 62 . Specifically, the sound emission control device 90 reduces the lighting number of the second reservation lamp portion 49b as the number of reserved game balls that have entered the lower opening 37 decreases.

Returning to the description of the game round control process, the game round progressing process of steps S510A to S509 will be described with reference to FIG.
In step S502, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the main display section 45 is performing variable display. Execute the process.

In step S510A, the MPU 62 clears the pending information stored in the first result display pending area Ra. In other words, when the MPU 62 determines in step S502 that the main display section 45 is performing the variable display, the MPU 62 does not store the reservation information in the first result display section reservation area Ra.

In step S506, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the display continuation time set in step S716 of the fluctuation start process has elapsed. Specifically, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the value set in the display continuation time counter of the RAM 64 has become "0" or less. The value of the display duration counter is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed.

When the MPU 62 determines in step S506 that the display continuation time has not elapsed, in step S507, the MPU 62 executes processing for variable display. In this process for variable display, the MPU 62 updates the display on the main display section 45 during variable display. After that, the MPU 62 ends the game round control process.

On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S506 that the display continuation time has elapsed, in step S508, the MPU 62 executes fluctuation end processing. In this fluctuation end processing, the MPU 62 stores the information (main (information related to the pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on the display unit 45). Then, at the end of the game cycle, the MPU 62 executes display control of the main display section 45 so as to display the pattern corresponding to the specified information on the main display section 45 during variable display (variation end execution processing).

Here, the pattern finally stopped and displayed on the main display section 45 differs for each type of game result. Therefore, the manager of the game hall or the like can confirm the game result by looking at the main display section 45 at the end of the game round. According to this, the manager of the game hall can easily check whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is being cheated to behave in the same manner as when winning a lottery for generating a big win. can be done systematically.
The display area of the main display section 45 is narrower than that of the display screen G of the pattern display device 47. Compared to Z1 to Z3, it is difficult for the player to recognize. Therefore, at the end of the game cycle, the player checks the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 instead of the main display unit 45 to determine whether or not the player has won the big win. Attention to the screen G can be increased.

In step S509, the MPU 62 sets a fluctuation end command. The MPU 62 transmits the fluctuation end command set in step S509 to the sound emission control device 90 in step S301 of the normal process. After that, the MPU 62 ends the game round control process.
In addition, the sound emission control device 90 executes processing for ending the effect of the game round based on the variation end command transmitted from the MPU 62 . Here, the sound emission control device 90 may be configured to independently end the effect of the game round without requiring reception of the variation end command.

According to this embodiment, similarly to the case where the first holding lamp portion 49a is not lit in the first embodiment, the game state transition processing is performed in the transition processing at the end of the opening/closing execution mode and the fluctuation end processing. After switching to the high-probability mode, a long-term high-frequency support mode ( It functions as a most advantageous game state transition unit that shifts the game state to the most advantageous game state.

Here, as described above, the high-probability mode executes an internal lottery with a winning probability higher than that of the low-probability mode. The probability of winning increases when the result is reported (block BL25), and the probability of winning decreases when the result of the internal lottery associated with the remaining pending information is reported in the subsequent low probability mode (block BL26). ). Also, when the result of the internal lottery associated with the first hold information is notified in the high probability mode, the winning probability increases (block BL23). According to this, the player most expects to win when notified of the result of the internal lottery associated with the first pending information in the high-probability mode.

According to this embodiment, the following functions and effects can be obtained.
(1) The game state transition process is executed when a game ball enters the lower operation opening 37 after switching from the high probability mode to the low probability mode in the transition process at the end of the open/close execution mode and the fluctuation end process. The game state is shifted to a long-term high-frequency support mode which is more advantageous to the player than the low-probability mode and the high-probability mode when winning the internal lottery. According to this, the player pays attention to the result of the internal lottery executed with the entry of the game ball into the lower operation opening 37 as a trigger. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can increase the attention of the player to the game.

(2) The transition process and the variable end process at the end of the opening/closing execution mode are performed after switching to the high-probability mode, by performing a predetermined number of The high-probability mode is switched to the low-probability mode when the result of the internal lottery associated with the hold information is notified. According to this, the player expects non-winning when notified of the result of the internal lottery associated with the predetermined number of pending information in the high probability mode, and then the remaining pending information in the low probability mode. If you are notified of the results of the internal lottery associated with the , you expect to win. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can increase the attention of the player to the game.

(3) Since the high-probability mode executes an internal lottery with a higher probability of winning than the low-probability mode, when the result of the internal lottery associated with a predetermined number of pending information is notified in the high-probability mode, the probability of winning will be higher and the odds of winning will be lower when the subsequent low probability mode announces the results of the internal lottery associated with the remaining pending information. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can improve the attention of the player to the game.
(4) Since the continuation rate of the long-term high-frequency support mode is higher than the continuation rate of the high-probability mode, the player receives the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the lower operation opening 37. Will pay more attention. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can improve the attention of the player to the game.
(5) The player can make it easier for the game ball to enter the upper working hole 36 by shooting the game ball in the left-handed route, and by shooting the game ball in the right-handed route. , the entry of the game ball into the lower operation opening 37 can be easily generated. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can surely reflect the player's intentions and allow the player to play comfortably.

(6) In the game state transition process, when the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the upper working port 36 or the lower working port 37 is won, the upper working port 36 and the lower working port 37 and, based on the combination of the low-probability mode and the high-probability mode, the game state is shifted to the long-term high-frequency support mode which is more advantageous to the player than the low-probability mode and the high-probability mode. According to this, when the player wins the result of the internal lottery executed with the entry of the game ball into the upper working port 36 or the lower working port 37, the upper working port 36 and the lower working port 37 and combinations with low-probability and high-probability modes. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can increase the attention of the player to the game.

(7) The game state transition process is associated with the reservation information first stored in the second result display section reservation area Rb after switching to the high probability mode in the transition process at the end of the opening/closing execution mode and the variation end process. When winning the result of the internal lottery, or after switching from the high probability mode to the low probability mode in the transition processing at the end of the opening and closing execution mode and the fluctuation end processing, the entry of the game ball to the lower operation port 37 is prohibited. When the result of the internal lottery executed as a trigger is won, the game state is shifted to a long-term high-frequency support mode more advantageous to the player than the low-probability mode and the high-probability mode. According to this, the player pays attention to the result of the internal lottery executed with the entry of the game ball into the lower operation opening 37 as a trigger. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can increase the attention of the player to the game.

(8) The transition process and the variable end process at the end of the opening/closing execution mode are performed after switching to the high-probability mode, by performing a predetermined number of The high-probability mode is switched to the low-probability mode when the result of the internal lottery associated with the hold information is notified. According to this, when the player is notified of the result of the internal lottery associated with the predetermined number of hold information from the second time onward in the high probability mode, the player expects not to win, and then in the low probability mode Winning is expected when the result of the internal lottery associated with the remaining pending information is notified, or when the result of the internal lottery associated with the first pending information is notified in the high probability mode. . Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can increase the attention of the player to the game.

[Third Embodiment]
A third embodiment of the present invention will be described below with reference to the drawings.
In the following description, the same reference numerals are given to the parts that have already been described, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 46 is a front view of a game board according to the third embodiment of the invention.
In the first embodiment, the game board 31 has the through gates 41 provided on the left side of the central portion and the right side of the central portion.
On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the game board 31B is different from the first embodiment in that it has one through gate 41 provided above the upper operating port 36 .

According to this embodiment, when a game ball is entered into the through gate 41 in order to set the electric accessory 37a to the open state, the game ball is always entered into the upper operation opening 36. The situation is the same as in the case of turning on the first reservation lamp portion 49a in the first embodiment.
Specifically, the game state transition process is stored in the second result display holding area Rb after switching from the high probability mode to the low probability mode in the transition process at the end of the opening/closing execution mode and the fluctuation end process. It functions as a most advantageous game state transition section for shifting the game state to a long-term high-frequency support mode (most advantageous game state) advantageous to the player when the result of the internal lottery associated with the reservation information is won.
In other words, the game state transition process is triggered by the entry of a game ball into the lower operation opening 37 after switching from the high probability mode to the low probability mode in the transition process at the end of the opening/closing execution mode and the fluctuation end process. A most advantageous game state transition unit for transferring the game state to a long-term high-frequency support mode (most advantageous game state) more advantageous to the player than the low probability mode and the high probability mode when the result of the executed internal lottery is won. function as

According to this embodiment, the following functions and effects can be obtained.
(1) The game state transition process is executed when a game ball enters the lower operation opening 37 after switching from the high probability mode to the low probability mode in the transition process at the end of the open/close execution mode and the fluctuation end process. The game state is shifted to a long-term high-frequency support mode more advantageous to the player than the low-probability mode and the high-probability mode when winning the internal lottery. According to this, the player pays attention to the result of the internal lottery executed with the entry of the game ball into the lower operation opening 37 as a trigger. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can increase the attention of the player to the game.

(2) The transition process and the variable end process at the end of the opening/closing execution mode are performed after switching to the high-probability mode, by performing a predetermined number of The high-probability mode is switched to the low-probability mode when the result of the internal lottery associated with the hold information is notified. According to this, the player expects non-winning when notified of the result of the internal lottery associated with the predetermined number of pending information in the high probability mode, and then the remaining pending information in the low probability mode. If you are notified of the results of the internal lottery associated with the , you expect to win. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can increase the attention of the player to the game.

(3) The pachinko machine 10 selects the results of the internal lottery associated with the plurality of pieces of reservation information stored in the second result display section reservation area Rb from the plurality of pieces of reservation information stored in the first result display section reservation area Ra. Since the notification is given with priority over the result of the internal lottery associated with the information, regardless of whether the reservation information is stored in the first result display reservation area Ra, the second result display reservation area Rb The result of the internal lottery associated with a plurality of pieces of pending information stored in can be preferentially notified. Therefore, the player pays attention only to the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the lower working hole 37, so the pachinko machine 10 increases the player's attention to the game. can be improved.

(4) Since the high-probability mode executes an internal lottery with a higher probability of winning than the low-probability mode, when the result of the internal lottery associated with a predetermined number of pending information is notified in the high-probability mode, will be higher, and the odds of winning will be lower when the subsequent low probability mode announces the results of the internal lottery associated with the remaining pending information. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can increase the attention of the player to the game.
(5) Since the continuation rate of the long-term high-frequency support mode is higher than the continuation rate of the high-probability mode, the player receives the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the lower operation opening 37. Will pay more attention. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can increase the attention of the player to the game.
(6) Since the upper working port 36 and the lower working port 37 are arranged on the same path, the player can shoot the game ball on the same path, thereby You can enter the game ball in. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 allows the player to play comfortably.

(7) In the game state transition process, when the result of the internal lottery executed with the entry of the game ball into the upper working port 36 or the lower working port 37 is won, the upper working port 36 and the lower working port 37 and, based on the combination of the low-probability mode and the high-probability mode, the game state is shifted to the long-term high-frequency support mode which is more advantageous to the player than the low-probability mode and the high-probability mode. According to this, when the player wins the result of the internal lottery executed with the entry of the game ball into the upper working port 36 or the lower working port 37, the upper working port 36 and the lower working port 37 and combinations with low-probability and high-probability modes. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can increase the attention of the player to the game.

[Fourth Embodiment]
A fourth embodiment of the present invention will be described below with reference to the drawings.
In the following description, the same reference numerals are given to the parts that have already been described, and the description thereof will be omitted.

In this embodiment, the main controller 60 executes processing different from that in the third embodiment. Specifically, in this embodiment, the first support mode setting process and the electric duty fluctuation end process are different from those in the third embodiment. The contents of the first support mode setting process and the electric duty fluctuation end process in this embodiment will be described below.

FIG. 47 is a diagram showing a flowchart of first support mode setting processing according to the fourth embodiment of the present invention.
In the first support mode setting process, the MPU 62 executes steps S1501 to S1512 as shown in FIG.
In step S1501, the MPU 62 determines whether the winning lottery mode is the high probability mode. If the MPU 62 determines in step S1501 that the win/fail lottery mode is the high probability mode, the MPU 62 executes support mode setting processing for the high probability mode in steps S1502 to S1513C. If it is determined that the mode is not the probability mode, a support mode setting process for the low probability mode in steps S1508 to S1512 is executed.

First, support mode setting processing for the high probability mode in steps S1502 to S1513C will be described.
In step S1502, the MPU 62 determines whether the support mode is the high frequency support mode.

When the MPU 62 determines in step S1502 that the support mode is the high frequency support mode, the MPU 62 clears the high frequency support flag stored in the RAM 64 in step S1503. Thereby, the MPU 62 sets the support mode to the low-frequency support mode.
In step S1504, the MPU 62 sets the value of the number-of-games counter RTC provided in the various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64 to "0".

On the other hand, if the MPU 62 determines in step S1502 that the support mode is not the high-frequency support mode (if it determines that the support mode is the low-frequency support mode), in step S1505 the high-frequency support flag is set in the RAM 64. The MPU 62 maintains the high frequency support flag if it is already set in the RAM 64 . Thereby, the MPU 62 sets the support mode to the high frequency support mode.
At step S1506, the MPU 62 sets the value of the number-of-games counter RTC provided in the various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64 to "1".

In step S1507, the MPU 62 sets a short-term high-frequency support mode command. The MPU 62 transmits the short-term high-frequency support mode command set in step S1507 to the sound emission control device 90 in step S301 of normal processing.
Note that the sound emission control device 90 executes predetermined processing based on the short-term high-frequency support mode command transmitted from the MPU 62 .

In step S1513C, the MPU 62 executes processing for setting the special electric worker opening time.
In this special electric role open time setting process, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the distribution result is the "best result".
When the MPU 62 determines in step S1513C that the distribution result is the "best result", it sets the special electric worker open time flag in the RAM 64. FIG.
On the other hand, if the MPU 62 determines in step S1513C that the distribution result is not the "most favorable result" If it is determined to be present), the special electric worker open time flag stored in the RAM 64 is cleared. This special electrician opening time flag is a flag for specifying execution of special electrician opening execution processing. The special electric role opening execution processing will be described later in detail.

After executing the process of step S1504 or the process of step S1513C, the MPU 62 ends the first support mode setting process.

Next, support mode setting processing for the low probability mode in steps S1508 to S1512 will be described.
In step S1508, the MPU 62 determines whether the support mode is the high frequency support mode.

When the MPU 62 determines in step S1508 that the support mode is the high frequency support mode, the MPU 62 sets a high frequency support flag in the RAM 64 in step S1509. The MPU 62 maintains the high frequency support flag if it is already set in the RAM 64 . Thereby, the MPU 62 sets the support mode to the high frequency support mode.
At step S1510, the MPU 62 sets the value of the number-of-games counter RTC provided in the various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64 to "34".

On the other hand, if the MPU 62 determines in step S1508 that the support mode is not the high-frequency support mode (if it determines that the support mode is the low-frequency support mode), in step S1511, the data stored in the RAM 64 clear the high-frequency support flag. Thereby, the MPU 62 sets the support mode to the low-frequency support mode.
At step S1512, the MPU 62 sets the value of the number-of-games counter RTC provided in the various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64 to "0".

After executing the process of step S1510 or the process of step S1512, the MPU 62 ends the first support mode setting process.

FIG. 48 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the electric duty fluctuation ending process.
In the electric duty change ending process, the MPU 62 executes steps S1801 to S1805 as shown in FIG.
In step S1801, the information (final (information related to the pattern to be stopped and displayed). Then, at the end of the electric role game cycle, the MPU 62 executes display control of the character object display unit 46 so that the pattern corresponding to the specified information is displayed on the character object display unit 46 during variable display ( power fluctuation end execution processing).

In step S1802, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the result of winning the electric role is "Electrical role open winning".
When the MPU 62 determines in step S1802 that the electric role winning result is not "electric role open winning", it ends the electric role variation ending process without executing the processes after step S1803.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1802 that the electric role winning result is "electric role open winning", in step S1803 it determines whether the support mode is the high-frequency support mode. do.

When the MPU 62 determines in step S1803 that the support mode is the high-frequency support mode, in step S1806C it determines whether or not the special electric worker open time flag is set in the RAM 64 .
When the MPU 62 determines in step S1806C that the special electric worker opening time flag is set in the RAM 64, it sets a special electric worker opening execution command in step S1807C. The MPU 62 transmits the special electric role opening execution command set in step S1807C to the sound emission control device 90 in step S301 of the normal processing.
In addition, the sound emission control device 90 executes a predetermined process based on the special electric role release execution command transmitted from the MPU 62 . This processing will be described later in detail.
In step S1808C, the MPU 62 executes a special electrician opening execution process. In the special electric role opening execution process, the MPU 62 executes the opening/closing process of the electric role product 37a by executing drive control of the electric role product driving unit 37b.

On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1806C that the special electric service opening time flag is not set in the RAM 64, it executes high-frequency electric service opening execution processing in step S1804. In the high-frequency electric role opening execution process, the MPU 62 executes the opening/closing process of the electric role product 37a by executing drive control of the electric role product driving unit 37b.
After executing the special electrician opening execution process in step S1808C or the high-frequency electricty electricty opening execution process in step S1804, the MPU 62 ends the electrician fluctuation ending process.

On the other hand, if the MPU 62 determines in step S1803 that the support mode is not the high-frequency support mode (if it determines that the support mode is the low-frequency support mode), in step S1805, the MPU 62 Execute the role release execution process. In the low-frequency electric role opening execution process, the MPU 62 executes the opening/closing process of the electric role product 37a by executing drive control of the electric role product driving unit 37b. After that, the MPU 62 terminates the power fluctuation end process.

Here, in the high-frequency electric role opening execution process, when the electric accessory opening lottery is won, the number of times the electric accessory 37a is set to the open state is greater than in the low-frequency electric role opening execution process. , the opening time for setting the electric accessory 37a to the open state is also longer. In addition, in the high-frequency power supply opening execution process, the closed time for setting the electric accessory 37a to the closed state between each opening in one power supply open state is shorter than the opening time of one time. ing.

Therefore, in the high-frequency support mode, game balls are more likely to enter the lower operation opening 37 as compared with the low-frequency support mode. In other words, in the low-frequency support mode, the game ball has a higher probability of winning the upper working opening 36 than the lower working opening 37 . In addition, in the high-frequency support mode, the probability that the game ball will enter the lower operation opening 37 rather than the upper operation opening 36 is higher.
When it is detected that a prize has been entered into the lower operating port 37, a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out. Therefore, in the high-frequency support mode, the player can play the game while not reducing the number of game balls. It can be carried out.

Further, in the special electric role opening execution process, when the electric role item opening lottery is won, the number of times the electric role item 37a is set to the open state is larger than that in the high-frequency electric role opening execution process. The opening time for setting the object 37a to the open state is also longer. Specifically, the opening time of the special electric service opening execution process is set to 5 seconds (long-term electric service opening time). Also, the release time of the high-frequency electric service release execution process is set to 2 seconds (short-term service release time). In addition, in the special electric role opening execution process, the closing time for setting the electric accessory 37a to the closed state between each opening in one electric role open state is shorter than the opening time of one time. .
Therefore, in the special electric role opening execution process, the game ball is more likely to enter the lower operation opening 37 as compared with the high-frequency electric role opening execution process.

Further, in the present embodiment, the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 execute processing different from that in the third embodiment. Specifically, in this embodiment, the effect determination process is different from that in the third embodiment. The contents of the effect determination process in this embodiment will be described below.

<Regarding effect determination processing executed by the sound emission control device 90>
FIG. 49 is a diagram showing a flowchart of effect determination processing.
The MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 executes an effect determination process in order to execute an effect for the game cycle, an effect for the open/close execution mode, and the like. In this effect determination process, steps S2101 to S2116 are executed in substantially the same manner as in the third embodiment. The present embodiment differs from the first embodiment in that the MPU 92 executes steps S2117C to 2119C before executing step S2116, as shown in FIG.

In step S2117C, the MPU 92 determines whether or not the special electrician release execution command transmitted from the MPU 62 has been received.
When the MPU 92 determines in step S2117C that it has received the special electric worker release execution command, it executes a special electric worker release notification process in step S2118C.
In this special electric role opening notification process, the MPU 92 decides to inform the special electric role opening.
Further, the MPU 92 executes light emission control of the display lamp unit 23 and audio control of the speaker unit 24 in the above-described effect execution processing of step S2003 based on the determination of the special electric role opening notification.

In step S2119C, a special electric service opening notification command related to the special electric service opening notification process determined in the special electric service opening notification process of step S2118C is set. Then, the MPU 92 stores the special electric service release notification command in the command list stored in the command list storage area 94a of the RAM 94. FIG. This special electric role release notification command is transmitted to the display control device 100 in the above-described command transmission processing of step S2005.

The MPU 102 of the display control device 100 reads from the program ROM 103 a data table for executing the special electric role opening notification effect on the symbol display device 47 based on the special electric role opening notification command transmitted from the MPU 92 . Then, the MPU 102 outputs a command to the VDP 105 based on this data table each time a predetermined image update timing (for example, every 20 msec) comes. As a result, the symbol display device 47 executes the special electric role opening notification effect.

After executing the process of step S2119C, or if it is determined in step S2117C that the special electrician opening execution command has not been received, the MPU 92 executes the process of step S2116 and subsequent steps, as in the third embodiment. do.

<Regarding the flow at the time of transition to lottery mode and support mode>
FIG. 50 shows the display screen of the symbol display device, the first suspension lamp section, and the second suspension during the transition to the winning lottery mode and the support mode when the "best result" is obtained when transitioning to the short-term high-frequency support mode. It is a figure which shows a lamp|ramp part. Specifically, FIG. 50(A) is a diagram showing the display screen G during the first variable display when the second holding lamp section is not lit and in the low probability mode and low frequency support mode. be. FIG. 50(B) is a diagram showing the display screen G when the first variable display of FIG. 50(A) results in "most advantageous result". FIG. 50(C) is a diagram showing the display screen G during the first variable display in the high-probability mode and low-frequency support mode after FIG. 50(B). FIG. 50(D) is a diagram showing the display screen G when the first variable display of FIG. 50(C) results in "best result". FIG. 50(E) is a diagram showing the display screen G during the first variable display in the high-probability mode and high-frequency support mode after FIG. 50(D).
Hereinafter, the flow at the time of shifting to the winning lottery mode and the support mode will be described with reference to FIGS. 33 and 50. FIG.

After the pachinko machine 10 executes the above-described main processing that is activated when the power is turned on, as shown in FIG. 33, the pachinko machine 10 enters the low-probability mode and low-frequency support mode (block BL11). In the low-frequency support mode, the game ball has a higher probability of entering the upper working opening 36 than the lower working opening 37, so that the game ball is shot from the game ball shooting mechanism 81 by rotating the shooting handle 27 by the player. The game ball enters the upper working port 36. - 特許庁Therefore, as shown in FIG. 50(A), the first reservation lamp portion 49a is lit according to the number of reserved game balls that have entered the upper operation opening 36, and the game cycle is displayed in the first variable display. On the other hand, since the game ball hardly enters the lower operation opening 37, the second reservation lamp portion 49b is turned off. In addition, in FIG. 50A, the maximum number of lights of the first reservation lamp portion 49a is four.

In block BL11, when the first variable display results in the "best result" (see the solid line arrow in the figure), the symbol display device 47 displays the same stop result as shown in FIG. 50(B). (for example, 7.7.7) are stopped and displayed on the activated line L. Then, the pachinko machine 10 executes the effect for the opening/closing execution mode selected by the MPU92 based on the command for the opening/closing execution mode transmitted from the MPU92.
In the opening/closing execution mode, the opening/closing door 38b is set to an open state in which a game ball can win a prize. Prizes will be awarded to mouth 38a. Here, since the upper operation port 36 is provided on the path for winning the game ball to the big winning port 38a, the game ball is fired from the game ball shooting mechanism 81 by rotating the shooting handle 27 by the player. The ball will enter the upper working port 36 as well.

On the other hand, the pachinko machine 10 stays in the block BL11 as it is when the "most advantageous result" is not obtained in the first variation display in the block BL11 (see the dotted line arrow in the figure).

After that, as shown in FIG. 33, the pachinko machine 10 enters the high probability mode and low frequency support mode (block BL12). Since the MPU 92 executes high-precision number notification determination processing in step S2203 in block BL12, the MPU 102 notifies the value of the high-precision number counter STC based on the contents of the variation start command transmitted from the MPU 92. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 50(C), the MPU 102 displays "3 more rotations during high probability" on the upper left of the display screen G of the pattern display device 47, thereby staying in the high probability mode. It informs that the number of rotations is 3 rotations. It should be noted that the number of game rounds staying in the high-probability mode decreases as the value of the high-probability number counter STC decreases.

In block BL12, when the first variable display results in the "best result" (see the solid line arrow in the figure), as shown in FIG. (for example, 7.7.7) are stopped and displayed on the activated line L. Then, the pachinko machine 10 executes the effect for the opening/closing execution mode selected by the MPU92 based on the command for the opening/closing execution mode transmitted from the MPU92. FIG. 50(D) shows the case where the "most advantageous result" is obtained in the first variation display of the first rotation after shifting to block BL12, so the MPU 102 causes the symbol display device 47 to display "Two more rotations in high accuracy" is displayed on the upper left of the screen G.
On the other hand, the pachinko machine 10 proceeds to block BL11 when three game rounds have been completed without "winning a jackpot" in block BL12 (see the dotted line arrow in the figure).

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 33, the pachinko machine 10 enters the high probability mode and high frequency support mode (block BL13). In block BL13, the MPU 92 executes high-probability number-of-games notification determination processing in step S2203, and executes game number-of-times notification determination processing in step S2207. , the value of the high-precision number counter STC and the value of the game number counter RTC are notified. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 50(E), the MPU 102 displays "high probability middle 3 rotations" on the upper left of the display screen G of the pattern display device 47, thereby staying in the high probability mode. It informs that the number of rotations is 3 rotations. In addition, the MPU 102 displays "One chance time left" at the bottom of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47, so that the number of game rotations during which the high-frequency support mode (short-term high-frequency support mode) stays is It informs that it is one rotation. In addition, the number of game rotations staying in the high probability mode decreases as the value of the high probability number counter STC decreases, and the number of game rotations staying in the high frequency support mode is the value of the game number counter RTC. decreases with the decrease of

In the high-frequency support mode, the game ball has a higher probability of entering the lower working port 37 than the upper working port 36, so the game ball is shot from the game ball shooting mechanism 81 by rotating the shooting handle 27 by the player. The game ball enters the lower operation opening 37. - 特許庁Therefore, the second reservation lamp portion 49b lights up according to the number of game balls that have entered the lower operation opening 37 and has been reserved. In addition, in the high-frequency support mode, the game ball shot from the game ball shooting mechanism 81 by the player rotating the shooting handle 27 also enters the upper operation port 36.例文帳に追加Therefore, the first reservation lamp portion 49a lights up according to the number of reserved game balls that have entered the upper operation opening 36. As shown in FIG. In FIG. 50(E), the maximum number of lights of the first reservation lamp portion 49a and the second reservation lamp portion 49b is four.

Further, when the MPU 92 determines in step S1513C that the distribution result is the "best result", in block BL13, the special electric role opening notification process is executed in step S2118C. Based on the contents of the special electric role opening notification command transmitted from, the special electric role opening information production is executed. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 50(E), the MPU 102 displays "Opening for a long time!" It informs that it is set to high-frequency support mode of open time.
The subsequent flow is the same as in the third embodiment (see FIGS. 33, 35, and 36).

FIG. 51 shows the display screen of the symbol display device at the time of transition to the winning lottery mode and the support mode in the case of the "explicit small round high probability result" at the time of transition to the short-term high frequency support mode, the first holding lamp part, and It is a figure which shows a 2nd reservation lamp part. Specifically, FIG. 51(A) is a diagram showing the display screen G during the first variable display when the second holding lamp section is not lit and in the low probability mode and low frequency support mode. be. FIG. 51(B) is a diagram showing the display screen G when the first variable display of FIG. 51(A) results in "best result". FIG. 51(C) is a diagram showing the display screen G during the first variable display in the high-probability mode and low-frequency support mode after FIG. 51(B). FIG. 51(D) is a diagram showing the display screen G when the first variation display in FIG. FIG. 51(E) is a diagram showing the display screen G during the first variable display in the case of the high-probability mode and high-frequency support mode after FIG. 51(D).
Hereinafter, the flow at the time of shifting to the win/fail lottery mode and the support mode will be described with reference to FIGS. 33 and 51. FIG.

After the pachinko machine 10 executes the above-described main processing that is activated when the power is turned on, as shown in FIG. 33, the pachinko machine 10 enters the low-probability mode and low-frequency support mode (block BL11). In the low-frequency support mode, the game ball has a higher probability of entering the upper working opening 36 than the lower working opening 37, so that the game ball is shot from the game ball shooting mechanism 81 by rotating the shooting handle 27 by the player. The game ball enters the upper working port 36. - 特許庁Therefore, as shown in FIG. 51(A), the first reservation lamp portion 49a lights according to the number of reserved game balls that have entered the upper operation opening 36, and the game cycle is displayed during the first variable display. On the other hand, since the game ball hardly enters the lower operation opening 37, the second reservation lamp portion 49b is turned off. In addition, in FIG. 51A, the maximum number of lights of the first reservation lamp portion 49a is four.

In block BL11, when the first variable display results in the "best result" (see the solid line arrow in the figure), the symbol display device 47 displays the same stop result as shown in FIG. 51(B). (for example, 7, 7, 7) are stopped and displayed on the activated line L. Then, the pachinko machine 10 executes the effect for the opening/closing execution mode selected by the MPU92 based on the command for the opening/closing execution mode transmitted from the MPU92.
In the opening/closing execution mode, the opening/closing door 38b is set to an open state in which a game ball can win a prize. Prizes will be awarded to mouth 38a. Here, since the upper working port 36 is provided on the path for the game ball to enter the big winning port 38a, the game ball is fired from the game ball shooting mechanism 81 by rotating the shooting handle 27 by the player. The ball will enter the upper working port 36 as well.

On the other hand, the pachinko machine 10 stays in the block BL11 as it is when the "most advantageous result" is not obtained in the first variation display in the block BL11 (see the dotted line arrow in the figure).

After that, as shown in FIG. 33, the pachinko machine 10 enters the high probability mode and low frequency support mode (block BL12). Since the MPU 92 executes high-precision number notification determination processing in step S2203 in block BL12, the MPU 102 notifies the value of the high-precision number counter STC based on the contents of the variation start command transmitted from the MPU 92. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 51(C), the MPU 102 displays "3 more rotations during high probability" on the upper left of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47, thereby allowing the game to stay in the high probability mode. It informs that the number of rotations is 3 rotations. It should be noted that the number of game rounds staying in the high-probability mode decreases as the value of the high-probability number counter STC decreases.

In block BL12, when the first variable display results in "clearly small round high probability result" (see the solid line arrow in the figure), as shown in FIG. , a special combination of symbols (for example, "3, 4, 1") is stopped and displayed on the activated line L. Then, the pachinko machine 10 executes the effect for the opening/closing execution mode selected by the MPU92 based on the command for the opening/closing execution mode transmitted from the MPU92. Note that FIG. 51(D) shows the case where the first variation display of the first rotation after the transition to block BL12 results in the "high probability result of a small number of explicit rounds", so the MPU 102 is a symbol display device. In the upper left corner of the display screen G of 47, "Two more rotations in high accuracy" is displayed.
On the other hand, the pachinko machine 10 proceeds to block BL11 when three game rounds have been completed without "winning a jackpot" in block BL12 (see the dotted line arrow in the figure).

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 33, the pachinko machine 10 enters the high probability mode and high frequency support mode (block BL13). In block BL13, the MPU 92 executes high-probability number-of-games notification determination processing in step S2203, and executes game number-of-times notification determination processing in step S2207. , the value of the high-precision number counter STC and the value of the game number counter RTC are notified. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 51(E), the MPU 102 displays "3 more rotations during high probability" on the upper left of the display screen G of the pattern display device 47, thereby allowing the game to stay in the high probability mode. It informs that the number of rotations is 3 rotations. In addition, the MPU 102 displays "One chance time left" at the bottom of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47, so that the number of game rotations during which the high-frequency support mode (short-term high-frequency support mode) stays is It informs that it is one rotation. In addition, the number of game rotations staying in the high probability mode decreases as the value of the high probability number counter STC decreases, and the number of game rotations staying in the high frequency support mode is the value of the game number counter RTC. decreases with the decrease of

In the high-frequency support mode, the game ball has a higher probability of entering the lower working port 37 than the upper working port 36, so the game ball is shot from the game ball shooting mechanism 81 by rotating the shooting handle 27 by the player. The game ball enters the lower operation opening 37. - 特許庁Therefore, the second reservation lamp portion 49b lights up according to the number of game balls that have entered the lower operation opening 37 and has been reserved. In addition, in the high-frequency support mode, the game ball shot from the game ball shooting mechanism 81 by the player rotating the shooting handle 27 also enters the upper operation port 36.例文帳に追加Therefore, the first reservation lamp portion 49a lights up according to the number of reserved game balls that have entered the upper operation opening 36. As shown in FIG. In addition, in FIG. 51(E), the maximum number of lights of the first reservation lamp portion 49a is four. Also, the number of lighting of the second reservation lamp portion 49b is two.

Also, when the MPU 92 determines in step S1513C that the distribution result is not the "most favorable result" If so), the MPU 102 does not execute the special electric role opening notification effect because the special electric role opening notification process is not executed in step S2118C in block BL13. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 51(E), the MPU 102 does not display "Long open!" It informs that it is set to high-frequency support mode of open time.
The subsequent flow is the same as in the third embodiment (see FIGS. 33, 35, and 36).

Thus, in the present embodiment, the high-frequency support mode is a high-frequency support mode (first ball-enterable state) with a short-term opening time in which game balls flowing down the game area can be temporarily entered. A high frequency of long-term open time that allows game balls flowing down the game area to enter temporarily, and allows more game balls to enter than the high-frequency support mode of short-term open time. It has a support mode (second entry possible state).
In addition, the high-frequency support mode of the long-term opening time is set to a longer duration than the high-frequency support mode of the short-term opening time, so that more games can be played than the high-frequency support mode of the short-term opening time. It is possible to enter the ball.

In this embodiment, the high-frequency support mode for the long-term open time is set to a longer duration than the high-frequency support mode for the short-term open time. For example, by increasing the number of times the electric accessory 37a is set to the open state, more game balls than in the high-frequency support mode of the short-term electric role open time can be entered. It may be possible to enter the ball. In short, the second ball-enterable state should allow more game balls to enter than the first ball-enterable state.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the transition processing and the fluctuation end processing at the end of the opening/closing execution mode are the result of the internal lottery executed with the entry of the game ball into the upper operation port 36 after switching to the high probability mode. , the lower working port 37 is switched from the low-frequency support mode to the high-frequency support mode with short-term open time or the high-frequency support mode with long-term open time.
Specifically, the transition processing and the fluctuation end processing at the end of the opening and closing execution mode are executed when the game ball enters the upper operation port 36. In the case of the "non-explicit small round high probability result" (first winning result), the lower operation port 37 is switched from the low frequency support mode to the high frequency support mode of the short-term opening time, and the "best result" When (second winning result) is obtained, the lower operation port 37 is switched from the low-frequency support mode to the high-frequency support mode with long-term open time.

In this embodiment, the transition process and the fluctuation end process at the end of the opening and closing execution mode are executed when the game ball enters the upper operation port 36. ” or “Unexplained small round high probability result”, switch to high-frequency support mode for short-term opening time, and if “best result”, high-frequency support for long-term opening time However, based on the results of internal lottery other than this, the mode may be switched to the short-term open time high-frequency support mode or the long-term open time high-frequency support mode. In short, the transition processing and the fluctuation end processing at the end of the opening and closing execution mode are based on the result of the internal lottery executed with the entry of the game ball into the upper operation port 36, and the lower operation port 37 is set to the low frequency support mode. , to a high-frequency support mode with short-term open time or a high-frequency support mode with long-term open time.

According to this embodiment, the same actions and effects as those of the third embodiment can be obtained, and the following actions and effects can be obtained.
(8) Transition processing and fluctuation end processing at the end of the opening/closing execution mode are, after switching to the high probability mode, shifting the lower operating port 37 from the low-frequency support mode to the high-frequency support mode with short-term open time or long-term open time. Switch to time high frequency support mode. In addition, the game state transition process is a long-term process that is more advantageous to the player than the low-probability mode and the high-probability mode when winning the result of the internal lottery executed with the entry of the game ball into the lower operation opening 37 as a trigger. The game state is shifted to the high-frequency support mode. According to this, the player expects to be switched to the high-frequency support mode of the long-term opening time in the transition process and the fluctuation end process at the end of the opening/closing execution mode. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can improve the attention of the player to the game.

(9) The high-frequency support mode of the long-term open time is set to have a longer duration than the high-frequency support mode of the short-term open time, so that more than the high-frequency support mode of the short-term open time Since it is possible to enter a game ball, it is possible to simplify the configuration of the high-frequency support mode for the short-term opening time and the high-frequency support mode for the long-term opening time.
(10) Transition processing and fluctuation end processing at the end of the opening/closing execution mode support the lower operation port 37 at a low frequency based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the upper operation port 36. Since the mode is switched to the high-frequency support mode of the short-term opening time or the high-frequency support mode of the long-term opening time, the player can perform the internal lottery executed with the entry of the game ball into the upper working port 36 as a trigger. attention will be paid to the results of Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can increase the attention of the player to the game.

(11) The transition process and the fluctuation end process at the end of the opening and closing execution mode are performed when the result of the internal lottery executed with the entry of the game ball into the upper operation port 36 is "explicit small round high probability result" or "non In the case of a clear small round high probability result” (first winning result), the lower operation port 37 is switched from the low frequency support mode to the high frequency support mode with short-term opening time, and the “best result” (first 2 winning result), the lower operation port 37 is switched from the low-frequency support mode to the high-frequency support mode with a long-term opening time, so that the player can enter the opening/closing execution mode with the "best result". It is expected that switching to the high-frequency support mode of the long-term open time is possible in the transition process at the time of termination and the variable termination process. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can increase the attention of the player to the game.

In the present embodiment, the transition process and the fluctuation end process at the end of the opening/closing execution mode are the result of the internal lottery executed with the entry of the game ball into the upper operation port 36 after switching to the high probability mode. , the lower working port 37 is switched from the low-frequency support mode to the high-frequency support mode with short-term open time or the high-frequency support mode with long-term open time.
On the other hand, for example, the transition processing and the fluctuation end processing at the end of the opening and closing execution mode are performed when the result of the internal lottery executed with the entry of the game ball into the upper operation opening 36 is won. Based on the content of the expected effect (for example, the type of reach display) executed by the control device 90 and the display control device 100, the lower operation port 37 is switched from the low-frequency support mode to the high-frequency support mode with a short-term opening time or You may switch to the high frequency support mode of long-term electric work opening time.

Specifically, for example, the content of the expectation effect executed by the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 includes a first reach display (first expectation effect) and a second reach display different from the first reach display. 2, the transition processing and the fluctuation end processing at the end of the open/close execution mode are performed when the first reach display is executed by the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100, and the lower operation opening 37 is opened. When the low-frequency support mode is switched to the high-frequency support mode with the short-term electric service open time, and the second reach display is performed by the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100, the lower operation port 37 is set to the low-frequency support mode. , may be switched to a high-frequency support mode with a long-term open time.
Thus, in this modification, the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 enter the opening/closing execution mode based on the result of the internal lottery executed with the entry of the game ball into the upper operation opening 36 as a trigger. It functions as an expected performance executing means for executing an expected performance making the player expect that the game state will be changed.
In this modified example, the content of the expected effect is the type of ready-to-win display, but it may be the degree of expectation of the ready-to-win display, or the content of other expected effect such as the type of advance notice display.

According to this modified example, the following functions and effects can be obtained in place of (10) and (11) in the fourth embodiment.
(12) Transition processing and fluctuation end processing at the end of the opening/closing execution mode are performed when the result of the internal lottery executed with the entry of the game ball into the upper operation port 36 as a trigger is won, the sound emission control device 90 and Based on the content of the expected effect executed by the display control device 100, the lower operation port 37 is switched from the low-frequency support mode to the high-frequency support mode with short-term open time or the high-frequency support mode with long-term open time. Therefore, the player pays attention to the content of the expected effect executed by the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 . Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can increase the attention of the player to the game.

(13) Transition processing and fluctuation end processing at the end of the opening/closing execution mode are performed when the first reach display is performed by the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100, and the lower operation opening 37 is changed from the low frequency support mode. When switching to the high-frequency support mode for the short-term service opening time and executing the second ready-to-reach display by the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100, the lower working port 37 is opened from the low-frequency support mode for the long-term service. Switch to time high frequency support mode. According to this, when the player wins the result of the internal lottery executed with the entry of the game ball into the upper operating hole 36 as a trigger, the player uses the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 to select It is expected that the reach display will be executed, and that the switching to the high-frequency support mode of the long-term opening time will be performed in the transition processing at the end of the opening/closing execution mode and the fluctuation end processing. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can increase the attention of the player to the game.

[Modification of each embodiment]
It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiments, and includes modifications, improvements, etc. within the scope of achieving the object of the present invention.
(1) In each of the above-described embodiments, the pachinko machine 10 executes opening and closing of the big winning hole 38a once per round game. On the other hand, the pachinko machine 10 may open and close the big winning opening 38a a plurality of times for one round game.
(2) In each of the above embodiments, the pachinko machine 10 sets the opening/closing door 38b to the open state, and then the predetermined upper limit duration (upper limit duration) elapses, or the game to the big winning opening 38a When the total winning number of balls reaches a predetermined upper limit number, the door 38b is closed again. On the other hand, for example, the upper limit number may vary according to the upper limit duration time, and the condition for setting the open/close door 38b to the closed state again is arbitrary.

(3) In each of the above embodiments, the pachinko machine 10 sets the opening/closing door 38b to the open state, and then the total winning number of game balls into the big winning opening 38a reaches eight, which is the predetermined upper limit number. As a result, the opening/closing door 38b is set to the closed state again. On the other hand, for example, the pachinko machine 10 may set the upper limit number to any number other than eight. Further, for example, the pachinko machine 10 may set different upper limit numbers according to the distribution results. Further, for example, the pachinko machine 10 may set different upper limit numbers for each round in one open/close execution mode.

(4) In each of the above embodiments, the pachinko machine 10 opens and closes when the total winning number of game balls into the big winning opening 38a reaches a predetermined upper limit after setting the opening/closing door 38b to the open state. The door 38b was set to the closed state again. On the other hand, for example, the pachinko machine 10 is provided with an end trigger port for setting the opening/closing door 38b to a closed state when a game ball enters the game ball, and when a predetermined time elapses, this end trigger port is provided. It may be configured to allow the ball to enter the trigger hole.
(5) In each of the above-described embodiments, after the pachinko machine 10 sets the opening/closing door 38b to the open state, the predetermined upper limit duration (upper limit duration) elapses, and the opening/closing door 38b is closed again. was set to On the other hand, for example, after setting the opening/closing door 38b to the open state, the pachinko machine 10 opens the opening/closing door 38b when a predetermined time elapses from the time when the winning to the big winning opening 38a occurs. It may be set to the closed state again.

(6) In each of the above embodiments, the pachinko machine 10 sets the opening/closing door 38b to the closed state after setting the opening/closing door 38b to the open state. On the other hand, for example, after setting the opening/closing door 38b to the open state, the pachinko machine 10 may shift to the next round game without setting the opening/closing door 38b to the closed state again.
(7) In each of the above-described embodiments, the upper limit duration of the short time mode is set shorter than the game ball launch cycle. On the other hand, for example, the upper limit duration of the short-time mode is a time equal to or longer than the shooting cycle of the game ball, and not more than n times (n=1, 2, or 3) the shooting cycle of the game ball. It may be set to time.

(8) In each of the above embodiments, the pachinko machine 10 has two types of open/close execution modes.
Specifically, the pachinko machine 10 has an opening/closing execution mode in which the round game is executed twice with the upper limit duration of the short-time mode, and an opening/closing execution mode in which the round game is executed 15 times with the upper limit duration of the long-time mode. had. On the other hand, the pachinko machine 10 may have an opening and closing execution mode different from these regarding the form of the upper limit duration time and the number of round game executions. In addition, the pachinko machine 10 differs in the mode of the upper limit duration time, instead of setting a plurality of types of opening/closing execution modes, by varying the degree of opening of the opening/closing door 38b, such as half-opening or full-opening. , a configuration in which a plurality of types of opening/closing execution modes are set. Furthermore, the upper limit duration time may be set so that the exact upper limit duration time is different, although the same pattern appears to the player.

(9) In each of the above embodiments, the game result and the effect for the opening/closing execution mode are set in advance so as to correspond one-to-one. On the other hand, for example, the effect for the opening/closing execution mode may be set by randomly selecting from a plurality of types of effects without corresponding to the game result, or may be selected from a plurality of types of effects by lottery or the like. , and the selection rate may be changed according to the game result.

(10) In each of the above-described embodiments, the MPU 92 is effective when the game result is any of the "special loss result", "non-explicit small round high probability result", and "explicit small round high probability result" Information relating to a special combination of symbols is determined as a stop result to be finally stopped and displayed on the line L, and this special combination of symbols is the same regardless of the type of game result.
On the other hand, the MPU 92 may randomly determine the information related to the stop result so that it is difficult for the player to grasp the game result.

(11) In each of the above embodiments, the MPU 62 uses the jackpot random number counter C1 for the jackpot generation lottery, and uses the jackpot type counter C2 for the jackpot type lottery when the jackpot is generated. On the other hand, when a big win occurs, the MPU 62 may use the big win random number counter C1 for the lottery of the type of the big win. In this case, the jackpot type counter C2 may not be provided in the various counter areas 64a of the RAM64.

(12) In each of the above embodiments, the pachinko machine 10 has two types of loss results, ie, the "special loss result" and the "normal loss result", and the MPU 62 stores the value of the random number that wins the jackpot. A lottery for generating a big hit is executed by comparing the success/failure table and the value of the big hit random number counter C1 stored in the reserved ball storage area 64b. In other words, the MPU 62 used the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 to execute the lottery for the "special losing result". On the other hand, the MPU 62 uses a new counter different from the jackpot random number counter C1 provided in the various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64 to execute the lottery related to the "special loss result". A lottery related to "result" may be executed.

(13) In each of the above-described embodiments, under the game state in which the success/failure table for the low-probability mode is referred to in the lottery for the occurrence of the big win, the value of the random number that becomes the "special loss result" is two, and the occurrence of the big win. Under the game state in which the success/failure table for the high-probability mode is referred to in the lottery of (1), the value of the random number that becomes the "special loss result" is one. In other words, the probability of a "special failure result" is set to be higher in the low-probability mode than in the high-probability mode. On the other hand, the probability of becoming a "special outlier result" may be set lower in the low probability mode than in the high probability mode, and set to be the same in the low probability mode and the high probability mode. may have been Also, the probability of the "special failure result" may be set to 0 in at least one of the low-probability mode and the high-probability mode.

(14) In each of the above-described embodiments, the pachinko machine 10 creates advantageous game states and disadvantageous game states for the player by setting the win/fail lottery mode and the support mode. By setting the states, the player may create favorable and unfavorable playing states. For example, the pachinko machine 10 may create an advantageous game state and a disadvantageous game state for the player by varying the number of game rounds for continuing the high-frequency support mode after the end of the opening/closing execution mode. Further, for example, the pachinko machine 10 may create an advantageous game state and a disadvantageous game state for the player depending on whether or not to shift to the high frequency support mode after the end of the opening/closing execution mode. Further, for example, the pachinko machine 10 may create advantageous and unfavorable game states for the player by varying the number of game rounds in which the high-probability mode is continued after the end of the opening/closing execution mode. .

(15) In each of the above-described embodiments, the pachinko machine 10 stores the reservation information related to the upper working opening 36 in the first result display section reservation area Ra, and stores the reservation information related to the lower working opening 37 in the second result display section. By storing in the reserved area Rb, the reserved information regarding the upper working port 36 and the reserved information regarding the lower working port 37 are separately stored. On the other hand, the pachinko machine 10 may store the hold information relating to the upper working opening 36 and the holding information relating to the lower working opening 37 together.
(16) In each of the above-described embodiments, the MPU 62 preferentially sets the reservation information related to the lower operation opening 37 for completing the game round regardless of whether or not there is the reservation information related to the upper operation opening 36. . On the other hand, the MPU 62 may set the reservation information related to the upper operation port 36 and the reservation information related to the lower operation port 37 for completion of the game cycle in the winning order of the respective reservation information.

(17) In each of the above embodiments, the main controller 60 transmits a command to the audio light emission control device 90, and the audio light emission control device 90 transmits a command as a result of analyzing the command to the display control device 100. The control of the display control device 100 was executed by. In response to this, the main control device 60 transmits a command to the display control device 100, and the display control device 100 transmits a command as a result of analyzing the command to the sound emission control device 90, thereby performing sound emission control. Control of device 90 may be performed. The commands sent from the main control device 60 to the sound emission control device 90 and the commands sent from the sound emission control device 90 to the display control device 100 are not limited to the commands described in the above embodiments, and are arbitrary. .
(18) In each of the above embodiments, the pachinko machine 10 includes the main control device 60, the sound emission control device 90, and the display control device 100 as separate control devices. On the other hand, for example, the audio emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 may be provided as the same control device, and at least one of the audio emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 is the main control device. It may be provided as the same control device as the control device 60 .

(19) In each of the above-described embodiments, the symbol display device 47 periodically scrolls the symbols of each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction based on the winning of the upper operation port 36 or the lower operation port 37. Then, by starting the variable display of symbols, an effect for a game cycle is executed on the display screen G.例文帳に追加On the other hand, the effects for game rounds are not limited to the effects described in the above embodiments, and are optional. For example, the pachinko machine 10 may execute an effect for a game cycle by operating a combination of a movable decorative member provided on the game board 31 and the symbol display device 47 . Further, for example, the pachinko machine 10 may execute an effect for a game round by operating a combination of light-emitting means provided on the game board 31 and the symbol display device 47 . Further, for example, the pachinko machine 10 may execute a game round effect by combining these decorative members and light emitting means with the pattern display device 47 to operate.

(20) In each of the above-described embodiments, the pachinko machine 10 executes an internal lottery (win/fail lottery and sorting lottery) based on the winning to the upper working port 36 or the lower working port 37, and then the main display section 45 And the symbol display device 47 executes the variable display, and displays the result of the internal lottery performed based on the winning in the upper operation port 36 or the lower operation port 37 as a result of stopping the variable display. On the other hand, for example, the main display unit 45 and the pattern display device 47 start the variable display before executing the internal lottery, and as a result of stopping the variable display, the internal lottery performed after the start of the variable display may display the results of In this case, after starting the variable display, before stopping the variable display, an internal lottery may be executed and the stop result and the like may be set.

(21) In each of the above embodiments, the pachinko machine 10 is provided with the main display unit 45, and the main display unit 45 executes the variable display of the pattern and displays the result of the internal lottery as a result of stopping the variable display. Was. On the other hand, for example, the main display unit 45 may display the same stop result as the stop result of the variable display regardless of the result of the internal lottery. The result of the lottery may be made unidentifiable.
Further, for example, the pachinko machine 10 does not have to include the main display section 45 .

(22) In each of the above embodiments, the symbol display device 47 periodically scrolls the symbols of each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction based on the winning of the upper operation port 36 or the lower operation port 37. Then, by starting the variable display of symbols, an effect for a game cycle is executed on the display screen G.例文帳に追加On the other hand, the symbol display device 47 may execute an effect for a game round on the display screen G by displaying a symbol (design) that indicates the result of the internal lottery.

For example, the pattern display device 47 displays a predetermined area in at least one of an area narrower than the area for displaying the patterns of each of the pattern rows Z1 to Z3 and a peripheral area of the area for displaying the patterns of each of the pattern rows Z1 to Z3. When the variable display of the symbols in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is stopped, a symbol indicating the result of the internal lottery may be displayed in the predetermined area. The symbols to be displayed in the predetermined area may be variably displayed or may not be displayed during the variably displayed symbols of each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3.

Here, the pattern displayed in the predetermined area may employ letters, colors, or patterns that are difficult for the player to distinguish, or may employ a combination of these. In addition, even if characters, colors, and patterns that are difficult for the player to identify are not used, mutually similar patterns or combinations thereof may be used to make it difficult for the player to identify. According to this, the administrator of the game parlor, for example, looks at the pattern display device 47 without looking at the main display section 45 at the end of the game round, in the same way as in the case of winning a big win lottery. It is possible to easily confirm whether or not a fraudulent act is being performed to cause the pachinko machine 10 to perform the behavior of .

(23) In each of the above embodiments, the pachinko machine 10 was configured to operate independently, but it may be configured to transmit and receive information by linking with an external device such as a mobile phone. . For example, a game machine is configured so that an optical code can be output by a player operating a button or the like provided on the game machine, and information on the optical code is transmitted to a camera provided on a mobile phone or the like. The game machine may be configured so that the information of the game machine can be transmitted to the web server by capturing and reading the image at the , and accessing the website. In addition, the gaming machine is configured so that the information of the web server can be received by the player accessing the website and entering the password issued by operating the button etc. provided on the gaming machine into the gaming machine. You may

(24) In each of the above-described embodiments, the pachinko machine 10 has been exemplified and explained as the gaming machine of the present invention. On the other hand, the gaming machine of the present invention may be a pachinko machine of another type different from the pachinko machine 10. For example, the gaming machine of the present invention may be configured such that when a game ball enters a specific area, It may be a pachinko machine that opens an electric accessory a predetermined number of times, or a pachinko machine that generates a jackpot right when a game ball enters a specific area. Also, the gaming machine of the present invention may be an arrangement ball machine or other types of gaming machines such as majang ball machines.

[Group of Inventions Extracted from Each Embodiment]
The features of the group of inventions extracted from the above embodiments will be described below. Of the features of the group of inventions, the corresponding configurations in each of the above-described embodiments are shown in parentheses, but the features of the group of inventions are not limited to the above-described embodiments, and the features of the group of inventions. Modifications, improvements, etc., and combinations of features within the range that can achieve the purpose are included in the features of the present invention group.

<Characteristic group A> Characteristic A1.
A shooting means (shooting handle 27) for shooting a game ball toward a game area formed in front of the game board, a game ball flowing down the game area is entered, and an internal lottery is performed when the game ball enters. Based on the starting ball entry means (upper operation port 36 and lower operation port 37) to be executed and the result of internal lottery executed with the entry of the game ball to the start ball entry means as a trigger, it is advantageous for the player. A game machine (pachinko machine 10) comprising game state transition means (main controller 60) for shifting the game state from the normal control state to the specific control state,
The normal control state is
A first gaming state (low probability mode);
A second game state (high probability mode) different from the first game state,
The starting ball entry means is
a first starting ball entry portion (upper working port 36);
A second start-up ball entry portion (lower operation port 37) different from the first start-up ball entry portion,
The second starting ball entry part is
A state (low-frequency support mode) in which a game ball flowing down the game area cannot be entered, and
A ball entry possible state (high frequency support mode) in which a game ball flowing down the game area can be entered,
The game state transition means is
a game state switching unit for switching between the first game state and the second game state (transition processing and variation end processing at the end of the opening/closing execution mode);
After switching to the second game state by the game state switching unit, the ball entering state switching unit (opening/closing execution transition processing and fluctuation end processing at the end of the mode),
After switching from the second game state to the first game state in the game state switching unit, the result of the internal lottery executed with the entry of the game ball into the second start ball entry unit as a trigger A most advantageous game state transition unit (game state transition processing) for transferring the game state to the most advantageous game state more advantageous to the player than the first game state and the second game state when winning. A gaming machine characterized by:

Here, the non-enterable state of the second start-up ball entry section is not only a state in which a game ball flowing down the game area cannot be entered completely, but also a state in which a game ball flowing down the game area can be temporarily entered. It may include the state of In addition, the ball-enterable state of the second start-up ball-entering part is not only a state in which a game ball flowing down the game area can be completely entered, but also a game ball flowing down the game area is temporarily disabled. It may also include the state of In short, in the ball-enterable state, compared with the ball-enterable state, the game ball flowing down the game area should be easier to enter the second start ball-entering portion.

According to the feature A1 of the present invention group, the most advantageous game state transition unit switches the game state from the second game state to the first game state by the game state switching unit, and then the game ball to the second start ball entry unit. The game state is shifted to the most advantageous game state more advantageous to the player than the first game state and the second game state when winning the result of the internal lottery executed with the entry of a ball as a trigger. According to this, the player pays attention to the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the second starting ball entering section. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of the player to the game.

Feature A2.
In the gaming machine described in feature A1 of the invention group,
Storage means for the second ball entry unit (second 2 Equipped with a result display area reservation area Rb),
After switching to the second game state, the game state switching unit associates the game state with a predetermined number of internal lottery information that is smaller than the number of the plurality of internal lottery information stored in the second ball-entering unit storage means. Switching from the second game state to the first game state triggered by notification of the result of the internal lottery received,
After switching from the second game state to the first game state by the game state switching unit, the most advantageous game state transition unit performs the internal lottery stored in the second ball entry unit storage means. This game machine is characterized by shifting a game state to a most advantageous game state advantageous to a player when winning the result of an internal lottery associated with information.

According to feature A2 of the present invention group, after switching to the second game state, the game state switching unit selects a predetermined number less than the number of pieces of internal lottery information stored in the second ball-entering unit storage means. Triggered by notification of the result of the internal lottery associated with the internal lottery information, the game state is switched from the second game state to the first game state. According to this, when the player is notified of the result of the internal lottery associated with the predetermined number of internal lottery information in the second game state, he/she expects that he/she will not win the lottery, and then enters the first game state. When the result of the internal lottery associated with the rest of the internal lottery information is reported by the player, the player expects to win the lottery. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of the player to the game.

Feature A3.
In the gaming machine described in feature A2 of the invention group,
Storage means for the first ball-entering unit (second 1 result display unit holding area Ra),
The result of the internal lottery associated with the plurality of internal lottery information stored in the second ball-entering unit storage means is associated with the plurality of internal lottery information stored in the first ball-entering unit storage unit. A game machine characterized in that notification is given with priority over the result of an internal lottery.

According to feature A3 of the present invention group, the gaming machine stores, in the first ball-entering unit storage means, the internal lottery results associated with a plurality of pieces of internal lottery information stored in the second ball-entering unit storage means. Since the result of the internal lottery associated with the plurality of internal lottery information is reported with priority, regardless of whether or not the internal lottery information is stored in the storage means for the first ball entering section, the second lottery The result of the internal lottery associated with the plurality of internal lottery information stored in the storage means for the ball portion can be preferentially notified. Therefore, the player pays attention only to the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the second start ball entry section. can be improved.

Feature A4.
In the gaming machine described in feature A2 or feature A3 of the present invention group,
A game machine characterized in that, in the second game state, an internal lottery with a winning probability higher than that in the first game state is executed.

According to feature A4 of the present invention group, the second gaming state executes an internal lottery with a winning probability higher than that of the first gaming state. The probability of winning is high when the result of the internal lottery that has been received is notified, and the probability of winning is low when the result of the internal lottery associated with the remaining internal lottery information is notified in the subsequent first game state. Become. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of the player to the game.

Feature A5.
In the gaming machine described in feature A4 of the invention group,
The game state switching unit switches the game state to the second game state when the result of the internal lottery executed with the entry of the game ball to the first start ball entry unit or the second start ball entry unit as a trigger is won. switch to
The gaming machine is characterized in that the continuation rate of the most advantageous game state is higher than the continuation rate of the second game state.

Here, the continuation rate refers to the probability of continuing to stay in the game state. The game state switching unit switches to the second game state when winning the internal lottery result triggered by the entry of the game ball into the first start ball entry unit or the second start ball entry unit, and switches to the second game state. Triggered by notification of the result of the internal lottery associated with a predetermined number of internal lottery information smaller than the number of the plurality of internal lottery information stored in the storage means for the 2-ball entry part, the second game state is changed to the first. Switch to the game state of . Therefore, the continuation rate of the second gaming state informs the result of the internal lottery associated with the predetermined number of internal lottery information that is smaller than the number of the plurality of internal lottery information stored in the second ball entry storage means. It is the probability of winning the result of the internal lottery executed with the entry of the game ball into the first start ball entry section or the second start ball entry section.

According to feature A5 of the present invention group, since the continuation rate of the most advantageous gaming state is higher than the continuation rate of the second gaming state, the player is encouraged to enter the game ball into the second start ball entering section. Further attention will be given to the results of the internal lottery that was triggered. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of the player to the game.

Feature A6.
In the gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A5 of the invention group,
The ball-enterable state is
A first ball-enterable state (high-frequency support mode with short-term electric role open time) in which a game ball flowing down the game area can be temporarily entered;
A second ball-enterable state (long-term ball-enterable state) in which game balls flowing down the game area are temporarily allowed to enter and more game balls than the first ball-enterable state are allowed to enter Open time high frequency support mode) and
The ball-entering state switching unit switches the second start-up ball-entering unit from the non-enterable state to the first possible state or the A game machine characterized by switching to a second ball-enterable state.

According to feature A6 of the group of the present inventions, the ball-entering state switching unit switches the second starting ball-entering unit from the ball-entering impossible state to the first ball-entering state after the game state switching unit switches to the second game state. Switch to the possible state or the second ball-enterable state. Further, the most advantageous gaming state transition section changes the first gaming state and the second gaming state when winning the internal lottery result triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second start ball entering section. The game state is shifted to the most advantageous game state more advantageous to the player than the game state. According to this, the player expects to be switched to the second ball-enterable state by the ball-enterable state switching unit. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of the player to the game.

Feature A7.
In the gaming machine described in feature A6 of the invention group,
The second ball-enterable state is set to have a longer duration than the first ball-enterable state, thereby allowing more game balls to enter than the first ball-enterable state. A game machine characterized by

According to the feature A7 of the present invention group, the second ball-enterable state is set to have a longer duration than the first ball-enterable state, so that the number of game balls is greater than that of the first ball-enterable state. can be entered, the configurations of the first enterable state and the second enterable state can be simplified.

Feature A8.
In the gaming machine described in feature A6 or feature A7 of the present invention group,
The ball entry state switching unit switches the second start ball entry unit from the non-enterable state based on the result of an internal lottery executed with the entry of a game ball into the first start ball entry unit. A gaming machine characterized by switching to the first ball-enterable state or the second ball-enterable state.

According to feature A8 of the present invention group, the ball entry state switching unit selects the second start ball entry unit based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the first start ball entry unit. is switched from the ball-unable to enter state to the first ball-enterable state or the second ball-enterable state, the player can enter the internal lottery executed with the entry of the gaming ball into the first start ball-entering section as a trigger. will pay attention to the results of Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of the player to the game.

Feature A9.
In the gaming machine described in feature A8 of the invention group,
The result of the internal lottery executed with the entry of the game ball to the first start ball entry section as a trigger is
The first winning result (“explicit small round high probability result” or “non-explicit small round high probability result”);
A second winning result ("best result") different from the first winning result;
The ball-entering state switching unit switches the second starting ball-entering unit from the ball-entering impossible state to the first ball-enterable state when the first winning result is obtained, and the second winning state is achieved. A game machine characterized by switching the second starting ball-entering section from the state where the ball-entering is impossible to the state where the ball-entering is possible when a result is obtained.

According to feature A9 of the present invention group, the ball-entering state switching unit switches the second start-up ball-entering unit from the ball-entering impossible state to the ball-entering possible state when the first winning result is obtained, When the second winning result is obtained, the second starting ball entry part is switched from the state where the ball cannot be entered to the second ball entry possible state, so that the player can switch the entering state as the second winning result. It is expected that it will be switched to the second ball entry possible state at the part. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of the player to the game.

Feature A10.
In the gaming machine described in feature A6 or feature A7 of the present invention group,
An expectation that makes the player expect that the game state will be shifted to the specific control state based on the result of the internal lottery executed with the entry of the game ball into the first start ball entry section. Equipped with expected effect execution means (sound emission control device 90 and display control device 100) for executing the effect,
The ball-entering state switching unit, when winning the result of the internal lottery executed with the entry of the game ball into the first starting ball-entering unit, the expected effect executed by the expected effect executing means. a gaming machine characterized in that the second start-up ball-entering section is switched from the ball-entering impossibility state to the first ball-entering possible state or the second ball-entering possible state based on the content of .

According to the feature A10 of the present invention group, the ball entry state switching unit, when winning the result of the internal lottery executed with the entry of the game ball to the first start ball entry unit as a trigger, the expected effect execution means Since the second start ball-entering portion is switched from the ball-entering impossibility state to the ball-entering possible state or the ball-entering possible state based on the content of the expected effect executed in , the player can expect the expected effect Attention will be paid to the content of the expected performance executed by the execution means. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of the player to the game.

Feature A11.
In the gaming machine described in feature A10 of the invention group,
The contents of the expected effect executed by the expected effect executing means are
a first expected effect (first reach display);
Provided with a second expected effect (second reach display) different from the first expected effect,
The ball-entering state switching unit switches the second start-up ball-entering unit from the ball-entering impossible state to the first ball-entering possible state when the expected effect execution means executes the first expected effect. When the second expected effect is executed by the expected effect executing means, the second starting ball-entering section is switched from the ball-enterable state to the second ball-enterable state. game machine.

According to feature A11 of the present invention group, the ball-entering state switching unit switches the second starting ball-entering unit from the state where the ball cannot be entered to the first ball-entering state when the expected effect executing means executes the first expected effect. When the state is switched to the ball possible state and the second expected performance is executed by the expected performance executing means, the second starting ball entering part is switched from the ball entering impossible state to the second ball entering possible state. According to this, when the player wins the result of the internal lottery executed with the entry of the game ball into the first start ball entering section, the expected effect executing means performs the second expected effect. After execution, it is expected that the ball-entering state switching unit will switch to the second ball-enterable state. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of the player to the game.

Feature A12.
In the gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A11 of the present invention group,
The gaming machine, wherein the first starting ball-entering section and the second starting ball-entering section are arranged on the same path.

According to the feature A12 of the present invention group, the first starting ball-entering part and the second starting ball-entering part are arranged on the same path, so that the player can shoot the game ball on the same path. By, it is possible to enter the game ball into the first start ball entering section and the second start ball entering section. Therefore, the gaming machine can allow players to play games comfortably.

Feature A13.
In the gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A11 of the present invention group,
A first route (left-handed route) that makes it easy for the game ball to enter the first start ball entry part and makes it difficult for the game ball to enter the second start ball entry part;
A second route (right-handed route) that makes it easy for the game ball to enter the second start ball entry part and makes it difficult for the game ball to enter the first start ball entry part. A game machine characterized by

According to feature A13 of the present invention group, the player can make it easier for the game ball to enter the first starting ball entering section by launching the game ball along the first path. By causing the game ball to be launched along the second path, it is possible to make it easier for the game ball to enter the second starting ball entering section. Therefore, the gaming machine can reliably reflect the player's intentions and allow the player to play games comfortably.

According to the characteristic group A of the present invention, since it is possible to improve the attention of the player to the game, the following problems can be solved.

Conventionally, a shooting means for shooting a game ball toward a game area formed in front of a game board is provided, and an internal lottery such as a jackpot lottery is performed by entering a game ball into an operation opening (starting ball entry means). A game machine that executes is known. For example, when a jackpot lottery is won, the gaming machine shifts the game state from the normal control state to a specific control state that is advantageous for the player. In this specific control state, the gaming machine pays out a large number of game balls, for example, by shifting the variable winning device to a state in which game balls can enter.
By the way, since the normal control state has a plurality of game states with different probabilities of winning the jackpot lottery, the player can play the game while enjoying the transition of the game state.

However, there is a problem that the player's attention to the game is lowered because the transition of the game state is determined by a lottery when the jackpot lottery is won.

<Feature B Group> Feature B1.
A shooting means (shooting handle 27) for shooting a game ball toward a game area formed in front of the game board, a game ball flowing down the game area is entered, and an internal lottery is performed when the game ball enters. Based on the starting ball entry means (upper operation opening 36 and lower operation opening 37) to be executed and the result of the internal lottery executed with the entry of the game ball into the starting ball entry means as a trigger, it is advantageous for the player. A game machine (pachinko machine 10) comprising game state transition means (main controller 60) for shifting the game state from the normal control state to the specific control state,
The normal control state is
A first gaming state (low probability mode);
A second game state (high probability mode) different from the first game state,
The starting ball entry means is
a first starting ball entry portion (upper working port 36);
A second start-up ball entry portion (lower operation port 37) different from the first start-up ball entry portion,
The game state transition means is
a game state switching unit for switching between the first game state and the second game state (transition processing and variation end processing at the end of the opening/closing execution mode);
When winning the result of the internal lottery executed with the entry of the game ball to the first start ball entry section or the second start ball entry section, the first start ball entry section and the second start ball entry section A most advantageous gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state and the second gaming state based on the combination of the starting ball-entering portion and the first gaming state and the second gaming state. A game machine characterized by comprising a most advantageous game state transition section (game state transition processing) for transitioning the game state to .

According to feature B1 of the present invention group, the most advantageous gaming state transition section is based on the result of an internal lottery executed when a game ball enters the first start ball entry section or the second start ball entry section. When winning, from the first game state and the second game state based on the combination of the first start ball entry portion and the second start ball entry portion and the first game state and the second game state Also, the game state is shifted to the most advantageous game state advantageous to the player. According to this, when the player wins the result of the internal lottery executed with the entry of the game ball into the first start ball entry section or the second start ball entry section, the first start entry Attention will be paid to the combination of the ball portion and the second starting ball entry portion with the first and second playing states. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of the player to the game.

Feature B2.
In the gaming machine described in feature B1 of the invention group,
The second starting ball entry part is
A state (low-frequency support mode) in which a game ball flowing down the game area cannot be entered, and
A ball entry possible state (high frequency support mode) in which a game ball flowing down the game area can be entered,
The game state transition means is
After switching to the second game state by the game state switching unit, the ball entering state switching unit (opening/closing execution mode end transition processing and variable end processing),
The most advantageous game state transition unit switches from the second game state to the first game state by the game state switching unit, and is triggered by the entry of a game ball into the second start ball entry unit. A game characterized by shifting the game state to the most advantageous game state which is more advantageous to the player than the first game state and the second game state when winning the result of the internal lottery executed as machine.

Here, the non-enterable state of the second start-up ball entry section is not only a state in which a game ball flowing down the game area cannot be entered completely, but also a state in which a game ball flowing down the game area can be temporarily entered. It may include the state of In addition, the ball-enterable state of the second start-up ball-entering part is not only a state in which a game ball flowing down the game area can be completely entered, but also a game ball flowing down the game area is temporarily disabled. It may also include the state of In short, in the ball-enterable state, compared with the ball-enterable state, the game ball flowing down the game area should be easier to enter the second start ball-entering portion.

According to the feature B2 of the group of inventions, the most advantageous game state transition unit switches the game state from the second game state to the first game state by the game state switching unit, and then the game ball to the second start ball entry unit. The game state is shifted to the most advantageous game state more advantageous to the player than the first game state and the second game state when winning the result of the internal lottery executed with the entry of a ball as a trigger. According to this, the player pays attention to the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the second starting ball entering section. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of the player to the game.

Feature B3.
In the gaming machine described in feature B2 of the invention group,
Storage means for second ball entry unit (second 2 Equipped with a result display area reservation area Rb),
After switching to the second game state, the game state switching unit associates the game state with a predetermined number of internal lottery information that is smaller than the number of the plurality of internal lottery information stored in the second ball-entering unit storage means. Switching from the second game state to the first game state triggered by notification of the result of the internal lottery received,
After switching from the second game state to the first game state by the game state switching unit, the most advantageous game state transition unit performs the internal lottery stored in the second ball entry unit storage means. This game machine is characterized by shifting a game state to a most advantageous game state advantageous to a player when winning the result of an internal lottery associated with information.

According to feature B3 of the present invention group, after switching to the second game state, the game state switching unit selects a predetermined number less than the number of the plurality of pieces of internal lottery information stored in the second ball-entering unit storage means. Triggered by notification of the result of the internal lottery associated with the internal lottery information, the game state is switched from the second game state to the first game state. According to this, when the player is notified of the result of the internal lottery associated with the predetermined number of internal lottery information in the second game state, he/she expects that he/she will not win the lottery, and then enters the first game state. When the result of the internal lottery associated with the rest of the internal lottery information is reported by the player, the player expects to win the lottery. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of the player to the game.

Feature B4.
In the gaming machine described in feature B3 of the invention group,
Storage means for the first ball entry unit (second 1 result display unit holding area Ra),
The result of the internal lottery associated with the plurality of internal lottery information stored in the second ball-entering unit storage means is associated with the plurality of internal lottery information stored in the first ball-entering unit storage unit. A game machine characterized in that notification is given with priority over the result of an internal lottery.

According to feature B4 of the present invention group, the gaming machine stores, in the first ball-entering unit storage means, the internal lottery results associated with a plurality of pieces of internal lottery information stored in the second ball-entering unit storage means. Since the result of the internal lottery associated with the plurality of internal lottery information is reported with priority, regardless of whether or not the internal lottery information is stored in the storage means for the first ball entering section, the second lottery The result of the internal lottery associated with the plurality of internal lottery information stored in the storage means for the ball portion can be preferentially notified. Therefore, the player pays attention only to the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the second start ball entry section. can be improved.

Feature B5.
In the gaming machine described in Feature B3 or Feature B4 of the present invention group,
A game machine characterized in that, in the second game state, an internal lottery with a winning probability higher than that in the first game state is executed.

According to feature B5 of the present invention group, the second gaming state executes an internal lottery with a winning probability higher than that in the first gaming state. The probability of winning is high when the result of the internal lottery that has been received is notified, and the probability of winning is low when the result of the internal lottery associated with the remaining internal lottery information is notified in the subsequent first game state. Become. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of the player to the game.

Feature B6.
In the gaming machine described in feature B5 of the invention group,
The game state switching unit switches the game state to the second game state when the result of the internal lottery executed with the entry of the game ball to the first start ball entry unit or the second start ball entry unit as a trigger is won. switch to
The gaming machine is characterized in that the continuation rate of the most advantageous game state is higher than the continuation rate of the second game state.

Here, the continuation rate refers to the probability of continuing to stay in the game state. The game state switching unit switches to the second game state when winning the internal lottery result triggered by the entry of the game ball into the first start ball entry unit or the second start ball entry unit, and switches to the second game state. Triggered by notification of the result of the internal lottery associated with a predetermined number of internal lottery information smaller than the number of the plurality of internal lottery information stored in the storage means for the 2-ball entry part, the second game state is changed to the first. Switch to the game state of . Therefore, the continuation rate of the second gaming state informs the result of the internal lottery associated with the predetermined number of internal lottery information that is smaller than the number of the plurality of internal lottery information stored in the second ball entry storage means. It is the probability of winning the result of the internal lottery executed with the entry of the game ball into the first start ball entry section or the second start ball entry section.

According to feature B6 of the present invention group, since the continuation rate of the most advantageous gaming state is higher than the continuation rate of the second gaming state, the player is encouraged to enter the game ball into the second start ball entering section. Further attention will be given to the results of the internal lottery that was triggered. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of the player to the game.

Feature B7.
In the gaming machine according to any one of feature B1 to feature B6 of the present invention group,
The gaming machine, wherein the first starting ball-entering section and the second starting ball-entering section are arranged on the same path.

According to feature B7 of the present invention group, the first starting ball-entering part and the second starting ball-entering part are arranged on the same path, so that the player can shoot the game ball on the same path. By, it is possible to enter the game ball into the first start ball entering section and the second start ball entering section. Therefore, the gaming machine can allow players to play games comfortably.

Feature B8.
In the gaming machine according to any one of feature B1 to feature B6 of the present invention group,
A first route (left-handed route) that makes it easy for the game ball to enter the first start ball entry part and makes it difficult for the game ball to enter the second start ball entry part;
A second route (right-handed route) that makes it easy for the game ball to enter the second start ball entry part and makes it difficult for the game ball to enter the first start ball entry part. A game machine characterized by

According to feature B8 of the present invention group, the player can make it easier for the game ball to enter the first starting ball entering section by launching the game ball along the first path. By causing the game ball to be launched along the second path, it is possible to make it easier for the game ball to enter the second starting ball entering section. Therefore, the gaming machine can reliably reflect the player's intentions and allow the player to play games comfortably.

According to the characteristic group B of the present invention, since it is possible to improve the attention of the player to the game, the following problems can be solved.

Conventionally, a shooting means for shooting a game ball toward a game area formed in front of a game board is provided, and an internal lottery such as a jackpot lottery is performed by entering a game ball into an operation opening (starting ball entry means). A game machine that executes is known. For example, when winning a jackpot lottery, the gaming machine shifts the game state from the normal control state to a specific control state advantageous to the player. In this specific control state, the gaming machine pays out a large number of game balls, for example, by shifting the variable winning device to a state in which game balls can enter.
By the way, since the normal control state has a plurality of game states with different probabilities of winning the jackpot lottery, the player can play the game while enjoying the transition of the game state.

However, there is a problem that the player's attention to the game is lowered because the transition of the game state is determined by a lottery when the jackpot lottery is won.

<Characteristic group C> Characteristic C1.
A shooting means (shooting handle 27) for shooting a game ball toward a game area formed in front of the game board, a game ball flowing down the game area is entered, and an internal lottery is performed when the game ball enters. Based on the starting ball entry means (upper operation opening 36 and lower operation opening 37) to be executed and the result of the internal lottery executed with the entry of the game ball into the starting ball entry means as a trigger, it is advantageous for the player. A game machine (pachinko machine 10) comprising game state transition means (main controller 60) for shifting the game state from the normal control state to the specific control state,
The normal control state is
A first gaming state (low probability mode);
A second game state (high probability mode) different from the first game state,
The starting ball entry means is
a first starting ball entry portion (upper working port 36);
A second start-up ball entry portion (lower operation port 37) different from the first start-up ball entry portion,
The second starting ball entrance portion is
A state (low-frequency support mode) in which a game ball flowing down the game area cannot be entered, and
A ball entry possible state (high frequency support mode) in which a game ball flowing down the game area can be entered,
The game machine is
Storage means for second ball entry unit (second 2 Equipped with a result display area reservation area Rb),
The game state transition means is
After switching between the first gaming state and the second gaming state, and after switching to the second gaming state, the number of the plurality of internal lottery information stored in the second ball-entering unit storage means Triggered by notification of the result of the internal lottery associated with a predetermined number of internal lottery information, the game state switching unit (transition at the end of the open/close execution mode) switches from the second game state to the first game state. processing and variable termination processing);
After switching to the second game state by the game state switching unit, the ball entering state switching unit (opening/closing execution mode end transition processing and change end processing),
After switching to the second game state by the game state switching unit, when winning the result of the internal lottery associated with the internal lottery information stored in the storage means for the second ball entry unit for the first time, Alternatively, after switching from the second game state to the first game state by the game state switching unit, the internal lottery associated with the internal lottery information stored in the second ball entry unit storage means A gaming machine comprising a most advantageous game state transition section (game state transition processing) for shifting a game state to a most advantageous game state advantageous to a player when a result is won.

Here, the non-enterable state of the second start-up ball entry section is not only a state in which a game ball flowing down the game area cannot be entered completely, but also a state in which a game ball flowing down the game area can be temporarily entered. It may include the state of In addition, the ball-enterable state of the second start-up ball-entering part is not only a state in which a game ball flowing down the game area can be completely entered, but also a game ball flowing down the game area is temporarily disabled. It may also include the state of In short, in the ball-enterable state, compared with the ball-enterable state, the game ball flowing down the game area should be easier to enter the second start ball-entering portion.

According to the feature C1 of the present invention group, the most advantageous game state transition unit, after switching to the second game state by the game state switching unit, first uses the internal lottery stored in the storage means for the second ball entry unit. When the result of the internal lottery associated with the information is won, or after switching from the second game state to the first game state in the game state switching unit, the game ball is entered into the second start ball entry unit. When winning the result of the internal lottery executed with this as a trigger, the game state is shifted to the most advantageous game state which is more advantageous to the player than the first game state and the second game state. According to this, the player pays attention to the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the second starting ball entering section. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of the player to the game.

Further, after switching to the second game state, the game state switching unit is associated with a predetermined number of internal lottery information that is less than the number of the plurality of internal lottery information stored in the second ball-entering unit storage means. Triggered by notification of the result of the internal lottery, the game state is switched from the second game state to the first game state. According to this, when the player is notified of the result of the internal lottery associated with the predetermined number of internal lottery information for the second and subsequent times in the second gaming state, the player expects that he or she will not win the lottery. When the result of the internal lottery associated with the remaining internal lottery information is notified in the game state of , or the result of the internal lottery associated with the first internal lottery information is notified in the second game state In that case, you will expect to be elected. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of the player to the game.

Feature C2.
In the gaming machine described in feature C1 of the invention group,
Storage means for the first ball entry unit (second 1 result display unit holding area Ra),
The result of the internal lottery associated with the plurality of internal lottery information stored in the second ball-entering unit storage means is associated with the plurality of internal lottery information stored in the first ball-entering unit storage unit. A game machine characterized in that notification is given with priority over the result of an internal lottery.

According to feature C2 of the present invention group, the gaming machine stores, in the first ball-entering unit storage means, the internal lottery results associated with a plurality of pieces of internal lottery information stored in the second ball-entering unit storage means. Since the result of the internal lottery associated with the plurality of internal lottery information is reported with priority, regardless of whether or not the internal lottery information is stored in the storage means for the first ball entering section, the second lottery The result of the internal lottery associated with the plurality of internal lottery information stored in the storage means for the ball portion can be preferentially notified. Therefore, the player pays attention only to the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the second start ball entry section. can be improved.

Feature C3.
In the gaming machine described in feature C1 or feature C2 of the invention group,
A game machine characterized in that, in the second game state, an internal lottery with a winning probability higher than that in the first game state is executed.

According to feature C3 of the present invention group, the second game state executes an internal lottery with a winning probability higher than that in the first game state. The winning probability increases when the result of the internal lottery associated with the lottery information is notified, and when the result of the internal lottery associated with the remaining internal lottery information is notified in the first game state after that. the odds of winning are lower. Further, when the result of the internal lottery associated with the first internal lottery information is reported in the second game state, the probability of winning increases. According to this, the player most expects winning when the result of the internal lottery associated with the first internal lottery information is notified in the second game state. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of the player to the game.

Feature C4.
In the gaming machine described in feature C3 of the invention group,
The game state switching unit switches the game state to the second game state when the result of the internal lottery executed with the entry of the game ball to the first start ball entry unit or the second start ball entry unit as a trigger is won. switch to
The gaming machine is characterized in that the continuation rate of the most advantageous game state is higher than the continuation rate of the second game state.

Here, the continuation rate refers to the probability of continuing to stay in the game state. The game state switching unit switches to the second game state when winning the internal lottery result triggered by the entry of the game ball into the first start ball entry unit or the second start ball entry unit, and switches to the second game state. Triggered by notification of the result of the internal lottery associated with a predetermined number of internal lottery information smaller than the number of the plurality of internal lottery information stored in the storage means for the 2-ball entry part, the second game state is changed to the first. Switch to the game state of . Therefore, the continuation rate of the second gaming state informs the result of the internal lottery associated with the predetermined number of internal lottery information that is smaller than the number of the plurality of internal lottery information stored in the second ball entry storage means. It is the probability of winning the result of the internal lottery executed with the entry of the game ball into the first start ball entry section or the second start ball entry section.

According to feature C4 of the present invention group, since the continuation rate of the most advantageous gaming state is higher than the continuation rate of the second gaming state, the player is encouraged to enter the game ball into the second start ball entering section. Further attention will be given to the results of the internal lottery that was triggered. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of the player to the game.

Feature C5.
In the gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C4 of the invention group,
The ball entry possible state is
A first ball-enterable state (high-frequency support mode for short-term electric role open time) in which a game ball flowing down the game area can be temporarily entered;
A second ball-enterable state (long-term ball-enterable state) in which game balls flowing down the game area are temporarily allowed to enter and more game balls than the first ball-enterable state are allowed to enter Open time high frequency support mode) and
The ball-entering state switching unit switches the second start-up ball-entering unit from the non-enterable state to the first possible state or the A game machine characterized by switching to a second ball-enterable state.

According to feature C5 of the present invention group, the ball-entering state switching unit switches the second start-up ball-entering unit from the ball-entering impossible state to the first ball-entering state after switching to the second game state by the game state switching unit. Switch to the possible state or the second ball-enterable state. Further, the most advantageous gaming state transition section changes the first gaming state and the second gaming state when winning the internal lottery result triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second start ball entering section. The game state is shifted to the most advantageous game state more advantageous to the player than the game state. According to this, the player expects to be switched to the second ball-enterable state by the ball-enterable state switching unit. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of the player to the game.

Feature C6.
In the gaming machine described in feature C5 of the invention group,
The second ball-enterable state is set to have a longer duration than the first ball-enterable state, thereby allowing more game balls to enter than the first ball-enterable state. A game machine characterized by

According to the feature C6 of the present invention group, the second ball-enterable state is set to have a longer duration than the first ball-enterable state, so that the number of game balls is greater than that of the first ball-enterable state. can be entered, the configurations of the first enterable state and the second enterable state can be simplified.

Feature C7.
In the gaming machine described in feature C5 or feature C6 of the invention group,
The ball-entering state switching unit switches the second starting ball-entering unit from the ball-entering impossible state based on the result of an internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the first starting ball-entering unit. A gaming machine characterized by switching to the first ball-enterable state or the second ball-enterable state.

According to the feature C7 of the present invention group, the ball entry state switching unit selects the second start ball entry unit based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the first start ball entry unit. is switched from the ball-unable to enter state to the first ball-enterable state or the second ball-enterable state, the player can enter the internal lottery executed with the entry of the gaming ball into the first start ball-entering section as a trigger. will pay attention to the results of Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of the player to the game.

Feature C8.
In the gaming machine described in feature C7 of the invention group,
The result of the internal lottery executed with the entry of the game ball to the first start ball entry section as a trigger is
The first winning result (“explicit small round high probability result” or “non-explicit small round high probability result”);
A second winning result ("best result") different from the first winning result;
The ball-entering state switching unit switches the second starting ball-entering unit from the ball-entering impossible state to the first ball-enterable state when the first winning result is obtained, and the second winning state is achieved. A game machine characterized by switching the second starting ball-entering section from the state where the ball-entering is impossible to the state where the ball-entering is possible when a result is obtained.

According to feature C8 of the present invention group, the ball-entering state switching unit switches the second start-up ball-entering unit from the ball-entering impossible state to the ball-entering possible state when the first winning result is obtained, When the second winning result is obtained, the second starting ball entry part is switched from the state where the ball cannot be entered to the second ball entry possible state, so that the player can switch the entering state as the second winning result. It is expected that it will be switched to the second ball entry possible state at the part. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of the player to the game.

Feature C9.
In the gaming machine described in feature C5 or feature C6 of the invention group,
An expectation that makes the player expect that the game state will be shifted to the specific control state based on the result of the internal lottery executed with the entry of the game ball into the first start ball entry section. Equipped with expected effect execution means (sound emission control device 90 and display control device 100) for executing effect,
The ball-entering state switching unit selects the desired effect executed by the expected effect executing means when the result of the internal lottery executed with the entry of the game ball into the first starting ball-entering unit as a trigger is won. A gaming machine characterized by switching the second starting ball-entering section from the state where the ball-entering is impossible to the state where the ball-entering is impossible to the state where the ball-entering is possible or the state where the ball-entering is possible.

According to feature C9 of the present invention group, the ball-entering state switching unit switches to the expected effect executing means when winning the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the first start ball-entering unit. Since the second start ball-entering portion is switched from the ball-entering impossibility state to the first ball-entering possible state or the second ball-entering possible state based on the content of the expected performance executed by the player, the player can execute the expected performance. Attention will be paid to the content of the expected performance executed by the means. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of the player to the game.

Feature C10.
In the gaming machine described in feature C9 of the invention group,
The content of the expected effect executed by the expected effect executing means is
a first expected effect (first reach display);
A second expected effect (second reach display) different from the first expected effect is provided,
The ball-entering state switching unit switches the second start-up ball-entering unit from the ball-entering impossible state to the first ball-entering possible state when the expected effect executing means executes the first expected effect. When the second expected effect is executed by the expected effect executing means, the second starting ball-entering section is switched from the state where the ball cannot be entered to the second ball-enterable state. game machine.

According to the feature C10 of the present invention group, the ball-entering state switching unit changes the second start-ball-entering unit from the state where the ball cannot be entered to the first ball-entering state when the expected effect executing means executes the first expected effect. When switching to the ball possible state and executing the second expected effect by the expected effect execution means, the second start ball entering part is switched from the ball entering impossible state to the second ball entering possible state, so that the player can: When winning the result of the internal lottery executed with the entry of the game ball into the first start ball entering section as a trigger, the second expected production is executed by the expected production execution means, and the ball entry state switching section executes the second expected production. It expects to be switched to the second ball-enterable state. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of the player to the game.

Feature C11.
In the gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C10 of the invention group,
The gaming machine, wherein the first starting ball-entering section and the second starting ball-entering section are arranged on the same path.

According to the feature C11 of the present invention group, the first starting ball-entering part and the second starting ball-entering part are arranged on the same path, so that the player can shoot the game ball on the same path. By, it is possible to enter the game ball into the first start ball entering section and the second start ball entering section. Therefore, the gaming machine can allow players to play games comfortably.

Feature C12.
In the gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C10 of the invention group,
A first route (left-handed route) that makes it easy for the game ball to enter the first start ball entry part and makes it difficult for the game ball to enter the second start ball entry part;
A second route (right-handed route) that makes it easy for the game ball to enter the second starting ball entering part and makes it difficult for the game ball to enter the first starting ball entering part. A game machine characterized by

According to feature C12 of the present invention group, the player can make it easier for the game ball to enter the first starting ball entering section by launching the game ball along the first path. By causing the game ball to be launched along the second path, it is possible to make it easier for the game ball to enter the second starting ball entering section. Therefore, the gaming machine can reliably reflect the player's intentions and allow the player to play games comfortably.

According to the characteristic group C of the present invention, since it is possible to improve the attention of the player to the game, the following problems can be solved.

Conventionally, a shooting means for shooting a game ball toward a game area formed in front of a game board is provided, and an internal lottery such as a jackpot lottery is performed by entering a game ball into an operation opening (starting ball entry means). A game machine that executes is known. For example, when winning a jackpot lottery, the gaming machine shifts the game state from the normal control state to a specific control state advantageous to the player. In this specific control state, the gaming machine pays out a large number of game balls, for example, by shifting the variable winning device to a state in which game balls can enter.
By the way, since the normal control state has a plurality of game states with different probabilities of winning the jackpot lottery, the player can play the game while enjoying the transition of the game state.

However, there is a problem that the player's attention to the game is lowered because the transition of the game state is determined by a lottery when the jackpot lottery is won.

<Feature D Group> Feature D1.
A shooting means (shooting handle 27) for shooting a game ball toward a game area formed in front of the game board, a game ball flowing down the game area is entered, and an internal lottery is performed when the game ball enters. Based on the starting ball entry means (upper operation opening 36 and lower operation opening 37) to be executed and the result of the internal lottery executed with the entry of the game ball into the starting ball entry means as a trigger, it is advantageous for the player. A game machine (pachinko machine 10) comprising game state transition means (main controller 60) for shifting the game state from the normal control state to the specific control state,
The normal control state is
A first gaming state (low probability mode);
A second game state (high probability mode) different from the first game state,
The starting ball entry means is
a first starting ball entry portion (upper working port 36);
A second start-up ball entry portion (lower operation port 37) different from the first start-up ball entry portion,
The second starting ball entrance portion is
A state (low-frequency support mode) in which a game ball flowing down the game area cannot be entered, and
A ball entry possible state (high frequency support mode) in which a game ball flowing down the game area can be entered,
The ball-enterable state is
A first ball-enterable state (high-frequency support mode for short-term electric role open time) in which a game ball flowing down the game area can be temporarily entered;
A second ball-enterable state (long-term ball-enterable state) in which game balls flowing down the game area are temporarily allowed to enter and more game balls than the first ball-enterable state are allowed to enter Open time high frequency support mode) and
The game state transition means includes a game state switching unit (transition processing and variation end processing at the end of the opening/closing execution mode) for switching between the first game state and the second game state;
After switching to the second game state by the game state switching unit, the second start ball entering unit is changed from the state where the ball cannot be entered to the state where the ball can be entered or the state where the ball can be entered. A ball entry state switching unit that temporarily switches (transition processing and fluctuation end processing at the end of the opening and closing execution mode);
After switching from the second game state to the first game state in the game state switching unit, the result of the internal lottery executed with the entry of the game ball into the second start ball entry unit as a trigger A most advantageous game state transition unit (game state transition processing) for shifting the game state to a most advantageous game state more advantageous to the player than the first game state and the second game state when winning. A gaming machine characterized by:

Here, the non-enterable state of the second start-up ball entry section is not only a state in which a game ball flowing down the game area cannot be entered completely, but also a state in which a game ball flowing down the game area can be temporarily entered. It may include the state of In addition, the ball-enterable state of the second start-up ball-entering part is not only a state in which a game ball flowing down the game area can be completely entered, but also a game ball flowing down the game area is temporarily disabled. It may also include the state of In short, in the ball-enterable state, compared with the ball-enterable state, the game ball flowing down the game area should be easier to enter the second start ball-entering portion.

According to the feature D1 of the present invention group, the most advantageous game state transition unit switches the game state from the second game state to the first game state by the game state switching unit, and then the game ball to the second start ball entry unit. The game state is shifted to the most advantageous game state more advantageous to the player than the first game state and the second game state when winning the result of the internal lottery executed with the entry of a ball as a trigger. According to this, the player pays attention to the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the second starting ball entering section. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of the player to the game.

Further, after switching to the second game state by the game state switching unit, the ball-entering state switching unit switches the second start-up ball-entering unit from the ball-entering impossible state to the first ball-entering possible state or the second ball-entering state. switch to enabled. Further, the most advantageous gaming state transition section changes the first gaming state and the second gaming state when winning the internal lottery result triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second start ball entering section. The game state is shifted to the most advantageous game state more advantageous to the player than the game state. According to this, the player expects to be switched to the second ball-enterable state by the ball-enterable state switching unit. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of the player to the game.

Feature D2.
In the gaming machine described in feature D1 of the invention group,
The second ball-enterable state is set to have a longer duration than the first ball-enterable state, thereby allowing more game balls to enter than the first ball-enterable state. A game machine characterized by

According to feature D2 of the group of the present invention, the second ball-enterable state is set to have a longer duration than the first ball-enterable state, so that the number of game balls is greater than that of the first ball-enterable state. can be entered, the configurations of the first enterable state and the second enterable state can be simplified.

Feature D3.
In the gaming machine described in feature D1 or feature D2 of the invention group,
The ball entry state switching unit switches the second start ball entry unit from the non-enterable state based on the result of an internal lottery executed with the entry of a game ball into the first start ball entry unit. A gaming machine characterized by switching to the first ball-enterable state or the second ball-enterable state.

According to feature D3 of the group of inventions, the ball entry state switching unit selects the second start ball entry unit based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the first start ball entry unit. is switched from the ball-unable to enter state to the first ball-enterable state or the second ball-enterable state, the player can enter the internal lottery executed with the entry of the gaming ball into the first start ball-entering section as a trigger. will pay attention to the results of Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of the player to the game.

Feature D4.
In the gaming machine described in feature D3 of the invention group,
The result of the internal lottery executed with the entry of the game ball to the first start ball entry section as a trigger is
The first winning result (“explicit small round high probability result” or “non-explicit small round high probability result”);
A second winning result ("best result") different from the first winning result;
The ball-entering state switching unit switches the second starting ball-entering unit from the ball-entering impossible state to the first ball-enterable state when the first winning result is obtained, and the second winning state is achieved. A game machine characterized by switching the second starting ball-entering section from the state where the ball-entering is impossible to the state where the ball-entering is possible when a result is obtained.

According to feature D4 of the present invention group, the ball-entering state switching unit switches the second start-up ball-entering unit from the ball-entering impossible state to the ball-entering possible state when the first winning result is obtained, When the second winning result is obtained, the second starting ball entry part is switched from the state where the ball cannot be entered to the second ball entry possible state, so that the player can switch the entering state as the second winning result. It is expected that it will be switched to the second ball entry possible state at the part. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of the player to the game.

Feature D5.
In the gaming machine described in feature D1 or feature D2 of the present invention group,
An expectation that makes the player expect that the game state will be shifted to the specific control state based on the result of the internal lottery executed with the entry of the game ball into the first start ball entry section. Equipped with expected effect execution means (sound emission control device 90 and display control device 100) for executing effect,
The ball-entering state switching unit selects the desired effect executed by the expected effect executing means when the result of the internal lottery executed with the entry of the game ball into the first starting ball-entering unit as a trigger is won. A gaming machine characterized by switching the second starting ball-entering section from the state where the ball-entering is impossible to the state where the ball-entering is impossible to the state where the ball-entering is possible or the state where the ball-entering is possible.

According to feature D5 of the present invention group, the ball-entering state switching unit switches to the expected effect executing means when winning the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the first start ball-entering unit. Since the second start ball-entering portion is switched from the ball-entering impossibility state to the first ball-entering possible state or the second ball-entering possible state based on the content of the expected performance executed by the player, the player can execute the expected performance. Attention will be paid to the content of the expected performance executed by the means. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of the player to the game.

Feature D6.
In the gaming machine described in feature D5 of the invention group,
The content of the expected effect executed by the expected effect executing means is
a first expected effect (first reach display);
A second expected effect (second reach display) different from the first expected effect is provided,
The ball-entering state switching unit switches the second start-up ball-entering unit from the ball-entering impossible state to the first ball-entering possible state when the expected effect executing means executes the first expected effect. When the second expected effect is executed by the expected effect executing means, the second starting ball-entering section is switched from the state where the ball cannot be entered to the second ball-enterable state. game machine.

According to feature D6 of the present invention group, the ball-entering state switching unit switches the second start-ball-entering unit from the state where the ball cannot be entered to the first ball-entering state when the expected effect execution means executes the first expected effect. When switching to the ball possible state and executing the second expected effect by the expected effect execution means, the second start ball entering part is switched from the ball entering impossible state to the second ball entering possible state, so that the player can: When winning the result of the internal lottery executed with the entry of the game ball into the first start ball entering section as a trigger, the second expected production is executed by the expected production execution means, and the ball entry state switching section executes the second expected production. It expects to be switched to the second ball-enterable state. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of the player to the game.

Feature D7.
In the gaming machine described in any one of features D1 to D6 of the present invention group,
The gaming machine, wherein the first starting ball-entering section and the second starting ball-entering section are arranged on the same path.

According to feature D7 of the present invention group, the first starting ball-entering section and the second starting ball-entering section are arranged on the same path, so that the player can shoot the game ball along the same path. By, it is possible to enter the game ball into the first start ball entering section and the second start ball entering section. Therefore, the gaming machine can allow players to play games comfortably.

Feature D8.
In the gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D6 of the present invention group,
A first route (left-handed route) that makes it easy for the game ball to enter the first start ball entry part and makes it difficult for the game ball to enter the second start ball entry part;
A second route (right-handed route) that makes it easy for the game ball to enter the second start ball entry part and makes it difficult for the game ball to enter the first start ball entry part. A game machine characterized by

According to feature D8 of the present invention group, the player can make it easier for the game ball to enter the first starting ball entering section by launching the game ball along the first path. By causing the game ball to be launched along the second path, it is possible to make it easier for the game ball to enter the second starting ball entering section. Therefore, the gaming machine can reliably reflect the player's intentions and allow the player to play games comfortably.

According to the characteristic group D of the present invention, since it is possible to improve the attention of the player to the game, the following problems can be solved.

Conventionally, a shooting means for shooting a game ball toward a game area formed in front of a game board is provided, and an internal lottery such as a jackpot lottery is performed by entering a game ball into an operation opening (starting ball entry means). A game machine that executes is known. For example, when winning a jackpot lottery, the gaming machine shifts the game state from the normal control state to a specific control state advantageous to the player. In this specific control state, the gaming machine pays out a large number of game balls, for example, by shifting the variable winning device to a state in which game balls can enter.
By the way, since the normal control state has a plurality of game states with different probabilities of winning the jackpot lottery, the player can play the game while enjoying the transition of the game state.

However, there is a problem that the player's attention to the game is lowered because the transition of the game state is determined by a lottery when the jackpot lottery is won.

INDUSTRIAL APPLICABILITY As described above, the present invention can be suitably used for game machines such as pachinko game machines.

10... Pachinko machine, 36... Upper operation opening, 37... Lower operation opening, 38... Variable winning device, 38a...
Special winning opening 38b Open/close door 38c Variable winning driving unit 39 Out opening 51 Symbol display device 60 Main control device 62 MPU 90 Sound emission control device 92 MPU 10
0... Display control device, 102... MPU.

The present invention relates to a game machine such as a pachinko game machine.

Conventionally, a shooting means for shooting a game ball toward a game area formed in front of a game board is provided, and an internal lottery such as a jackpot lottery is performed by entering a game ball into an operation opening (starting ball entry means). A game machine that executes is known (see, for example, Patent Document 1). For example, when winning a jackpot lottery, the gaming machine shifts the game state from the normal control state to a specific control state advantageous to the player. In this specific control state, the gaming machine pays out a large number of game balls, for example, by shifting the variable winning device to a state in which game balls can enter.
By the way, since the normal control state has a plurality of game states with different probabilities of winning the jackpot lottery, the player can play the game while enjoying the transition of the game state.

JP 2005-074175 A

However, there is still room for improvement in the transition of game states .

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION An object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of increasing the attention of a player to a game.

In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 comprises shooting means for shooting game balls toward a game area formed in front of a game board, and game balls flowing down the game area can enter. A starting ball entry means capable of executing a predetermined lottery based on the ball entry, and shifting the game state from the normal control state to a specific control state advantageous to the player based on the result of the predetermined lottery. possible game state transition means, and the normal control state continues to stay at a predetermined continuation rate based on the first game state and the result of the predetermined lottery, and the game state is changed from the first game state. a second game state that makes it easier to win the predetermined lottery, and based on the result of the predetermined lottery, continue to stay at a continuation rate higher than the predetermined continuation rate, and keep the player from the second game state a third game state that is advantageous to the player, wherein the starting ball-entering means comprises a first starting ball-entering means and a second starting ball-entering means different from the first starting ball-entering means; The second start ball entry means includes a ball entry impossible state in which a game ball flowing down the game area cannot be entered, and a ball entry possible state in which a game ball flowing down the game area is allowed to enter, The game state transition means includes game state switching means for switching between the first game state and the second game state, and the game state is switched from the second game state to the first game state by the game state switching means. After being switched to the game state of (1), the game state is shifted to the third game state only when the result of the predetermined lottery based on the entry of the game ball into the second start ball entry means is won.

According to the gaming machine of claim 1, the shooting means for shooting game balls toward the game area formed in front of the game board, and the game balls flowing down the game area can enter, A starting ball entry means capable of executing a predetermined lottery based on the ball entry, and a game state transition capable of transitioning the game state from a normal control state to a specific control state advantageous to the player based on the result of the predetermined lottery. means, the normal control state continues to stay at a predetermined continuation rate based on the first game state and the result of the predetermined lottery, and the predetermined lottery is higher than the first game state. a second game state that makes it easier to win the game, and based on the result of the predetermined lottery, the player continues to stay at a continuation rate higher than the predetermined continuation rate, and is more advantageous to the player than the second game state. said starting ball-entering means comprises a first starting ball-entering means and a second starting ball-entering means different from said first starting ball-entering means, said second starting ball-entering means The means includes a ball-entering impossible state in which a game ball flowing down the game area cannot be entered, and a ball-enterable state in which a game ball flowing down the game area can be entered, and the game state transition means is provided with game state switching means for switching between the first game state and the second game state, and the game state is switched from the second game state to the first game state by the game state switching means. After that, the game state is shifted to the third game state only when winning the predetermined lottery result based on the game ball entering the second starting ball entering means. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's attention to the game can be improved.

1 is a front view of a pachinko machine according to a first embodiment of the present invention; front view of game board Figure showing the display screen of the pattern display device Block diagram showing the electrical configuration of a pachinko machine Diagram showing the contents of each counter used for internal lottery A diagram showing an electric role success/failure table storing values of random numbers for winning the electric role item open lottery A diagram showing a success/failure table that stores values of random numbers for winning a jackpot A diagram showing a distribution table storing random number values related to distribution destinations of jackpot types Figure showing a flowchart of timer interrupt processing A diagram showing a flow chart of the winning process for the working opening Diagram showing a flowchart of normal processing Diagram showing a flowchart of main processing A diagram showing a flowchart of game round control processing Diagram showing a flowchart of data setting processing Diagram showing a flowchart of fluctuation start processing A diagram showing a flowchart of processing for electric support A diagram showing a flowchart of the electrical data setting process A diagram showing a flowchart of an electric duty fluctuation start process Diagram showing a flowchart of game state transition processing A diagram showing a flowchart of the big winning opening opening/closing process A diagram showing a flowchart of the big winning opening opening process A diagram showing a flowchart of transition processing at the end of the open/close execution mode A diagram showing a flowchart of first support mode setting processing A diagram showing a flowchart of second support mode setting processing A diagram showing the value of the number-of-games counter set in the first support mode setting process or the second support mode setting process Diagram showing a flowchart of fluctuation end processing A diagram showing a flowchart of an electric duty fluctuation end process Block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the audio emission control device and the display control device The figure which shows the flowchart of the timer interruption process performed with a sound emission control apparatus. A diagram showing a flow chart of effect determination processing A diagram showing a flow chart of production pattern determination processing A diagram showing the relationship between the game result and the game state, etc. A diagram showing a flow chart at the time of transition between win-fail lottery mode and support mode A diagram showing the display screen of the symbol display device, the first holding lamp section, and the second holding lamp section at the time of transition to the win/fail lottery mode and the support mode. Shows the display screen of the symbol display device, the first holding lamp section, and the second holding lamp section at the time of transition to the winning lottery mode and the support mode when the "best result" is obtained during the stay in the short-term high-frequency support mode. figure The display screen of the pattern display device, the first holding lamp part, and the second holding lamp part at the time of transition to the winning lottery mode and the support mode when the "best result" is not obtained during the stay in the short-term high-frequency support mode diagram showing A diagram showing a flow chart at the time of transition between the success or failure lottery mode and the support mode when the first reservation lamp unit is not lit A diagram showing the display screen of the symbol display device, the first reservation lamp section, and the second reservation lamp section at the time of transition to the winning lottery mode and the support mode when the first reservation lamp section is not lit. Shows the display screen of the pattern display device, the first holding lamp section, and the second holding lamp section at the time of transition to the winning lottery mode and the support mode when the "best result" is obtained during the stay in the short-term high-frequency support mode. figure The display screen of the pattern display device, the first holding lamp part, and the second holding lamp part at the time of transition to the winning lottery mode and the support mode when the "best result" is not obtained during the stay in the short-term high-frequency support mode diagram showing The front view of the game board according to the second embodiment of the present invention Diagram showing the contents of each counter used for internal lottery A diagram showing a flow chart of the winning process for the working opening A diagram showing a flowchart of game round control processing Diagram showing a flowchart of data setting processing Front view of a game board according to a third embodiment of the present invention A diagram showing a flowchart of first support mode setting processing according to the fourth embodiment of the present invention. A diagram showing a flowchart of an electric duty fluctuation ending process A diagram showing a flow chart of effect determination processing Shows the display screen of the symbol display device, the first holding lamp section, and the second holding lamp section at the time of transition to the win-or-fail lottery mode and the support mode in the case of the "most advantageous result" at the time of transition to the short-term high-frequency support mode. figure The display screen of the pattern display device, the first suspension lamp section, and the second suspension lamp when transitioning to the winning lottery mode and support mode in the case of "clearly small round high probability result" when transitioning to short-term high frequency support mode diagram showing part

[First embodiment]
A first embodiment of the present invention will be described below with reference to the drawings.
FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine according to a first embodiment of the present invention.
The pachinko machine 10 is a pachinko game machine which is a kind of game machine. As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 comprises an outer frame 11 forming an outer shell of the pachinko machine 10, and a game machine main body attached to the outer frame 11 so as to be rotatable forward (front side). 12.

The gaming machine main body 12 includes an inner frame (not shown) supported by the outer frame 11 so as to be rotatable with one of the left and right side portions as the supporting side, and an inner frame (not shown) disposed in front of the inner frame. A front door frame 13 supported by the inner frame so as to be rotatable forward with one of the left and right side portions as the support side, and a front door frame 13 disposed behind the inner frame and rearward with one of the left and right side portions as the support side. and a back pack unit (not shown) supported by the inner frame so as to be rotatable.

The gaming machine main body 12 has a locking device (not shown) provided at the leading end of the rotation. This locking device has a function of locking the game machine main body 12 with respect to the outer frame 11 so that it cannot be opened, and has a function of locking the front door frame 13 with respect to the inner frame so that it cannot be opened. have. These locked states are released by unlocking the cylinder lock 14 exposed on the front surface of the pachinko machine 10 using an unlock key.

The front door frame 13 has a substantially elliptical window portion 21 provided so as to cover the entire front side of the inner frame, and a window panel 22 fitted in the window portion 21 . In the present embodiment, the window panel 22 is made of transparent and colorless glass, but may be made of synthetic resin or the like to be transparent and colorless.
In addition, the front door frame 13 includes a display lamp portion 23 provided above the window portion 21 as a part of light emitting means configured by various lamp portions and the like provided around the window portion 21, and a display lamp portion A speaker unit 24 is provided on both the left and right sides of 23 and outputs sound effects according to the game situation, and an upper bulging portion 25 and a lower bulging portion 26 provided below the window portion 21. there is

The upper bulging portion 25 and the lower bulging portion 26 are vertically arranged side by side and both bulge forward.
The upper bulging portion 25 has an upper plate 25a provided inside so as to open upward. The upper plate 25a temporarily stores the game balls paid out by the payout device 71 (see FIG. 4) provided in the back pack unit, and aligns them in a row toward the game ball launching mechanism 81 (see FIG. 4). It has the function of guiding.
The lower bulging portion 26 also has a lower plate 26a provided inside so as to open upward. The lower tray 26a has a function of storing surplus game balls in the upper tray 25a.

Further, the front door frame 13 has a firing handle 27 as a firing means provided on the right side of the lower tray 26a. The shooting handle 27 is operated by a player of the pachinko machine 10 to shoot a game ball from a game ball shooting mechanism 81 provided below the inner frame toward a game area provided above the inner frame. do. The shooting handle 27 changes the shooting intensity of the game ball shot toward the game area, ie, the momentum of shooting, by changing the amount of rotation operation.

FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board.
As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 31 has an inner rail portion 32 and an outer rail portion 33 attached to its surface, and is mounted on an inner frame. The game area described above is formed on the game board 31 so as to be partitioned by the inner rail portion 32 and the outer rail portion 33 . Almost the entire area of this game area can be visually recognized from the front through the window portion 21 .
The inner rail portion 32 and the outer rail portion 33 constitute a guide rail 34 for the game ball to the game area, and the guide rail 34 is launched from the game ball shooting mechanism 81 when the player rotates the shooting handle 27. The game ball that has been hit is guided to the upper part of the game area.

The guide rail 34 is formed so that its exit portion is arranged on one side of the game area and faces the center of the upper part of the game area. For this reason, the reaching position of the game ball in the upper part of the game area is shifted from the side where the exit portion of the guide rail 34 is formed to the opposite side as the rotation amount of the shooting handle 27 by the player increases. Shift to the side of the side. In this embodiment, the exit portion of the guide rail 34 is provided on the left side of the game area.

The game board 31 has, in the game area, a plurality of large and small openings which are formed so as to penetrate in the front-rear direction by being subjected to router processing. In addition, the game board 31 includes an upper operation port (first start ball entry portion) 36, a lower operation port (second start ball entry portion) 37, a variable winning device 38, and an out port 39 provided at each opening. have. The game board 31 includes through gates 41 provided on the left and right sides of the central portion, a main display device 42 provided on the upper right side, a variable display unit 43 provided on the central portion, and the like. have. Furthermore, the game board 31 has, in the game area, various members (accessories) such as a large number of nails 44 planted in order to appropriately disperse or adjust the falling directions of the game balls.

Each of the upper operating port 36, the lower operating port 37, and the various winning ports of the variable winning device 38 is provided with detection sensors 40b to 40d (see FIG. 4) for detecting the entry of game balls, and these detection sensors 40b to 40 d is arranged on the back side of the game board 31 . Specifically, the upper working port 36 has a detection sensor 40b, the lower working port 37 has a detection sensor 40c, and the variable winning device 38 has a detection sensor 40d. The pachinko machine 10 pays out a predetermined number of prize balls based on the detection results of the detection sensors 40b-40d. Incidentally, the detection sensors 40b to 40d may be of any kind as long as they can individually detect winning of game balls, and for example, an electromagnetic induction type proximity sensor can be employed.

Specifically, the pachinko machine 10 pays out three prize balls when a ball enters the upper working port 36 and when a ball enters the lower working port 37 . The pachinko machine 10 pays out 15 prize balls when a ball enters the variable prize winning device 38.例文帳に追加In addition, the number of these prize balls is arbitrary, and for example, the number of prize balls in each of the operation ports 36 and 37 may be different.

Out port 39 is provided at the bottom of the game area of game board 31 . Game balls that do not enter various winning holes are discharged from the game area through the out hole 39.例文帳に追加In addition, the out port 39 is provided with a detection sensor 40e (see FIG. 4) for detecting entry of a game ball, and this detection sensor 40e is arranged on the back side of the game board 31. As shown in FIG. Note that the pachinko machine 10 does not pay out prize balls when a ball enters the out hole 39, unlike when a ball enters the various winning holes.

Each through gate 41 is provided with a detection sensor 40f (see FIG. 4) for detecting an entry of a game ball. Note that the pachinko machine 10 does not pay out prize balls when a ball enters each through gate 41, unlike the case where a ball enters a prize winning opening.

Here, the entry ball means that a game ball passes through a predetermined opening. It also includes a mode in which the game area continues to flow down. However, in the following description, in order to distinguish clearly from the entry of game balls into the out port 39, entry of game balls into various winning ports is also expressed as winning. Further, entering the through gate 41 refers to continuing to flow down the game area without being ejected from the game area after passing through the gate provided in the game area. A ball entering the through gate 41 is also referred to as winning a prize, like entering a ball into various winning holes.

The upper operation port 36 and the lower operation port 37 are unitized as an operation port device and installed on the game board 31 . Each operating port 36, 37 is opened upward to allow the game ball flowing down the game area to enter, and the upper operating port 36 is arranged upward and the lower operating port 37 is arranged downward. are arranged vertically side by side. The lower operating port 37 has an electric accessory 37a as a guide piece (support piece) composed of a pair of left and right movable pieces.

The electric accessory 37a is connected to an electric accessory driving section 37b mounted on the back side of the game board 31. As shown in FIG. The electric accessory 37a is set to either a closed state (non-supported state or non-guided state) or an open state (supported state or guided state) by being driven by the electric accessory drive section 37b. The closed state is a state in which the lower operation opening 37 is closed by bringing the upper end of the electric accessory 37a closer to the left and right. The open state is a state in which the lower operation opening 37 is opened by separating the upper end of the electric accessory 37a in the left-right direction.

Here, when the electric accessory 37a is set to the closed state, the distance between the upper end of the electric accessory 37a and the upper operation opening 36 becomes narrower than one game ball. Further, when the electric accessory 37a is set to the open state, the distance between the upper end of the electric accessory 37a and the upper operation opening 36 becomes wider than one game ball. Therefore, the game ball cannot enter the lower operation opening 37 when the electric accessory 37a is set to the closed state, and can enter the lower operation opening 37 when the electric accessory 37a is set to the open state. can.

In addition, instead of the closed state and the open state described above, the electric accessory 37a has a state in which it is difficult for the game ball to enter the lower operation port 37 (a state in which the game ball can be entered unlike the closed state), and a lower It may be configured to switch between the operation port 37 and the state in which the game ball is likely to win. In addition, the lower operation port 37 may be configured to perform such switching not by setting the electric accessory 37a but by displacing the lower operation port 37. 37 may not include the electric accessory 37a.

The variable prize winning device 38 includes a large prize winning port 38a that opens to allow game balls flowing down the game area to enter, an opening and closing door 38b for opening and closing the big winning prize port 38a, and a variable prize winning that drives the opening and closing door 38b. and a drive unit 38c.
In addition, the player can guide the game ball to the variable winning device 38 by adjusting the rotational operation amount of the shooting handle 27 and adjusting the arrival position of the game ball in the upper part of the game area.

Here, the game board 31 has a cover 381 provided so as to cover the front side of the variable winning device 38 . The cover 381 includes a transparent (or semi-transparent) portion 381a formed to make the variable winning device 38 visible from the front side, and an opaque portion 381a formed around the transparent portion 381a. and a portion 381b.
Therefore, the player can see the variable winning device 38 from the front through the transparent portion 381a and the window portion 21. FIG.

The big winning opening 38a is provided in an opening formed in the game area so as to pass through in the front-rear direction by applying router processing. As described above, the big winning opening 38a is equipped with a detection sensor 40d for detecting the entry of a game ball. The pachinko machine 10 pays out a predetermined number of prize balls based on the detection result.

The opening/closing door 38b is formed in the shape of a rectangular plate, and is provided on the game board 31 so as to be rotatable about one side on the lower side as a central axis. The opening/closing door 38b rotates toward the window panel 22 and protrudes from the game board 31 to open the opening of the big winning opening 38a, and rotates toward the inside of the game board 31. There is also a closed state in which the opening of the big winning opening 38a is closed by being buried in the game board 31.例文帳に追加
The variable winning driving unit 38c sets the opening/closing door 38b to either an open state or a closed state by driving the opening/closing door 38b.

Specifically, the opening/closing door 38b is normally set to a closed state in which game balls cannot win. Then, when the internal lottery wins the transition to the opening/closing execution mode and the opening/closing execution mode is shifted to, the opening/closing door 38b is set to an open state in which a game ball can win a prize.
The opening/closing execution mode (specific control state) refers to a mode in which the opening/closing door 38b is set to an open state and a game ball can be entered into the big winning opening 38a. In addition, in the opening/closing execution mode, after the opening/closing door 38b is set to the open state, it is called one round game until it is set to the closed state again.

The main display device 42 has a main display unit 45 and a character object display unit 46, and includes a segment display (not shown) in which a plurality of segment light emitting units are arranged in a predetermined manner, a dot display, or the like. display device.
The main display device 42 is provided on the game board 31 so as to protrude toward the window panel 22 provided on the front side thereof. That is, the main display device 42 can be visually recognized from the front of the pachinko machine 10 through the window panel 22 . Also, the distance between the main display device 42 and the window panel 22 is narrower than one game ball. Thereby, the pachinko machine 10 prevents game balls from falling between the main display device 42 and the window panel 22.例文帳に追加In other words, the pachinko machine 10 prevents game balls from falling in front of the main display device 42 .

The main display portion 45 includes a first result display portion 45a for displaying the result of the internal lottery performed based on the winning at the upper working port 36, and the internal lottery performed based on the winning at the lower working port 37. A second result display section 45b for displaying the result of the lottery is provided (see FIG. 4). The main display unit 45 may further include a round display unit for clearly indicating the number of round games in the opening/closing execution mode when the opening/closing execution mode is entered (or when the opening/closing execution mode is entered). .

The first result display unit 45a executes the variable display of the pattern with the winning of the upper working port 36 as a trigger, and as a result of stopping the variable display, the internal lottery performed based on the winning of the upper working port 36. to display the results of When the result of this internal lottery is the result corresponding to the transition to the opening/closing execution mode, the first result display section 45a displays a predetermined stop result. After that, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the opening/closing execution mode.
The second result display unit 45b executes the variable display of the pattern with the winning of the lower working opening 37 as a trigger, and as a result of stopping the variable display, the internal lottery performed based on the winning of the lower working opening 37. to display the results of When the result of this internal lottery is the result corresponding to the transition to the opening/closing execution mode, the second result display section 45b displays a predetermined stop result. After that, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the opening/closing execution mode.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the upper operation port 36 and the lower operation port 37 function as starting ball entry means for allowing a game ball flowing down the game area to enter, and executing an internal lottery when the game ball enters. do.

The character object display unit 46 performs variable display of the pattern with the winning of each through gate 41 as a trigger, and as a result of stopping the variable display, the internal lottery performed based on the winning of each through gate 41. to display the results of The accessory display unit 46 displays a predetermined stop result when the result of the internal lottery is the result corresponding to the shift to the electric role open state. After that, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the electric role open state. In this electric operation open state, the electric accessory 37a provided in the lower operation opening 37 is opened in a predetermined manner.

In the present embodiment, the main display unit 45 and the character object display unit 46 are configured by a segment display device, a dot display device, or the like. It may also consist of other types of displays such as EL displays, CRTs, dot matrix, and the like. The patterns to be variably displayed on the main display unit 45 and the accessory display unit 46 include a configuration for variably displaying a plurality of types of characters, a configuration for variably displaying a plurality of types of symbols, and a configuration for variably displaying a plurality of types of characters. , or a configuration in which a plurality of colors are switched and displayed can be adopted.

The variable display unit 43 includes a pattern display device 47 that variably displays (variable display or switching display) a pattern, which is one type of pattern. Also, the variable display unit 43 has a center frame 48 arranged so as to surround the pattern display device 47 . The upper portion of the center frame 48 is provided so as to bulge toward the window panel 22 provided on the front side thereof. As a result, the pachinko machine 10 prevents the game balls from falling in front of the display screen G of the pattern display device 47, and does not cause the inconvenience that the visibility of the display screen G is lowered due to the falling of the game balls. It is configured.

The pattern display device 47 is configured as a liquid crystal display device having a liquid crystal display.
The symbol display device 47 starts the variable display of symbols based on the winning of the upper operation port 36 or the lower operation port 37 . That is, when the symbol display device 47 performs the variable display in the first result display section 45a of the main display section 45 and when the second result display section 45b of the main display section 45 performs the variable display, The variable display is executed accordingly.
The pattern display device 47 is not limited to a liquid crystal display device, and may be a plasma display device, an organic EL display device, or other display device such as a CRT.

The center frame 48 includes a first holding lamp portion 49a provided in the lower left region of the pattern display device 47, a second holding lamp portion 49b provided in the lower right region of the pattern display device 47, and a second holding lamp portion 49b. and a third holding lamp portion 49c provided in the region on the right side of the holding lamp portion 49b.

The first reservation lamp part 49a is a part that displays the number of reserved game balls that have won the upper operation opening 36, and is lit according to the number of reserved balls. The first holding lamp portion 49a can hold up to four game balls, and corresponds to the variable display of the first result display portion 45a and the symbol display device 47. FIG.
The second reservation lamp part 49b is a part that displays the number of reserved game balls that have won the lower operation opening 37, and lights up according to the number of reserved games. The second holding lamp portion 49b can hold up to four game balls, and corresponds to the variable display of the second result display portion 45b and the symbol display device 47. FIG.
The third reservation lamp portion 49c is a portion that displays the number of reserved game balls that have won each through gate 41, and lights up according to the number of reserved games. The third holding lamp portion 49 c can hold up to four game balls, and corresponds to the variable display of the accessory display portion 46 .
It should be noted that each of the holding lamp units 49a to 49c may have another configuration such as being displayed as an image on a part of the pattern display device 47. FIG.

FIG. 3 is a diagram showing a display screen of the pattern display device.
As shown in FIG. 3, the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 is divided into three columns of display areas. Column Z3 is displayed. In each pattern row Z1 to Z3, 8 kinds of patterns consisting of numbers "1" to "8" are arranged in ascending order from the bottom to the top, and "8" is followed by "1". configured as follows. In addition, in FIG. 3, the center line of each display area is shown by the dashed-dotted line.

The symbol display device 47 periodically scrolls the symbols of each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction (upward in this embodiment) based on the winning of the upper operation port 36 or the lower operation port 37. By starting the variable display of symbols, an effect for a game round is executed on the display screen G. - 特許庁The effect for this game round is switched from the variable display to the stop display in the order of the left symbol row Z1→right symbol row Z3→middle symbol row Z2, and finally, predetermined symbols are stopped and displayed on the effective line L. end with a state
In other words, the game cycle means the period from when the main display unit 45 and the pattern display device 47 start the variable display based on the wins to the operation ports 36 and 37 until the predetermined stop result is displayed.

It should be noted that the pattern display device 47 is not limited to this, and may be arbitrarily selected. For example, the number of symbol rows, the direction of scrolling of each symbol row, the number of symbols of each symbol row, etc. can be changed as appropriate. Also, the patterns in each pattern row may be a combination of a picture and a number instead of only numbers, or may be a picture only.

<Electrical Configuration of Pachinko Machine 10>
FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine.
As shown in FIG. 4, the pachinko machine 10 includes a main control device 60, a sound emission control device 90, and a display control device 100, and these devices are mounted on the back side of the inner frame. In addition, the pachinko machine 10 includes a payout control device 70 for executing payout control for causing the payout device 71 to pay out game balls, and a power source/power source for executing shooting control for causing the game ball shooting mechanism 81 to shoot game balls. and a launch control device 80, which are mounted on the back pack unit.

The main controller 60 includes a main control board 61 that controls the main control (main control) of the game, and a power outage monitoring board 65 that monitors the power supply. Note that the main controller 60 includes a board box that houses the main control board 61 and the like. The substrate box may comprise marking means for marking upon its opening and may comprise marking structures for marking upon its opening. Specifically, as trace means, a circuit board box is formed by connecting a plurality of case bodies, and a connecting part (crimped part) that requires breaking of a predetermined part when separating each case body is provided, or a structure that peels off At this time, it is possible to adopt a structure in which a sealing seal that leaves a trace of being peeled off because the adhesive layer remains on the object to be adhered is attached so as to straddle the boundary between the plurality of case bodies. Also, as the trace structure, it is possible to employ a configuration in which an adhesive is applied to the boundary between these case bodies.

The main control board 61 includes an MPU 62 mounted on the main control board 61 and a ROM 63 and a RAM 64 that constitute the MPU 62 . Here, the MPU 62 is an element in which, in addition to the ROM 63 and RAM 64, a CPU, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, a counter circuit as a random number generator, and the like are combined into a chip.
In this embodiment, the ROM 63 and the RAM 64 are integrated into one chip with respect to the MPU 62, but they may be integrated into individual chips. This also applies to the MPUs of other controllers other than the main controller 60 .

The ROM 63 is a memory for storing various control programs and fixed value data, and is non-volatile storage means that does not require power supply from the outside to hold stored information. The ROM 63 has various areas such as a success/failure table storage area 63a, a distribution table storage area 63b, an electric service success/failure table storage area 63c, and a reach table storage area 63d. These areas are described in detail later.
The RAM 64 is a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when executing the control program stored in the ROM 63, and is a volatile storage means that requires external power supply to hold the stored information. is. This RAM 64 has various areas such as a various counter area 64a, a reserved ball storage area 64b, and an electrical work reservation area 64c. These areas are described in detail later.

The MPU 62 has an input port and an output port. An input port of the MPU 62 is connected to a power failure monitoring board 65 provided in the main controller 60 and a plurality of detection sensors 40b to 40f. The output port of the MPU 62 is connected to the power failure monitoring board 65, the payout control device 70, and the sound emission control device 90. Further, the output ports of the MPU 62 include an electric accessory drive unit 37b that opens and closes the electric accessory 37a of the lower operation port 37, a variable winning drive unit 38c that opens and closes the opening and closing door 38b of the variable winning device 38, and a main display. 45 and the character object display unit 46 .

The main control board 61 has a driver circuit. The MPU 62 executes drive control of various drive units and the like through this driver circuit. Specifically, in the electric role open state, the MPU 62 executes drive control of the electric accessory drive unit 37b to open and close the electric accessory 37a. Further, in the open/close execution mode, the MPU 62 executes drive control of the variable winning driving section 38c to open and close the big winning opening 38a. Also, in each game round, the MPU 62 executes display control of the main display section 45 to display the results of the internal lottery performed based on the winnings to the operation ports 36 and 37 . Further, the MPU 62 executes display control of the accessory display section 46 to display the results of the internal lottery performed based on the winning of each through gate 41 .

The blackout monitoring board 65 relays the main control board 61 and the power supply/launch control device 80 having a function of supplying operating power, and monitors the stable DC voltage of 24 volts output from the power supply/launch control device 80. . Therefore, the MPU 62 receives power through the blackout monitoring board 65 .
The detection sensors 40b to 40f are provided in one-to-one correspondence with the upper operation opening 36, the lower operation opening 37, various winning openings of the variable winning device 38, the out opening 39, and each through gate 41. The MPU 62 performs prize winning determination (ball entry determination) to various prize winning ports, the out port 39, and each through gate 41 based on the detection results of the detection sensors 40b to 40f. In addition, the MPU 62 executes an internal lottery based on the winning determination for the upper operation port 36 or the lower operation port 37 .

The payout control device 70 executes payout control to cause the payout device 71 to pay out prize balls and rental balls (game balls to be lent to players during games) based on commands (control instructions) transmitted from the main control device 60. do.

The power supply/launch control device 80 is connected to, for example, a commercial power supply (external power supply) in a game arcade or the like. Then, the power supply/launch control device 80 generates the operating power required for each of the main control board 61 and the payout control device 70 based on the external power supplied from the commercial power supply, and the generated operation supply power. The power/launch control device 80 includes a power failure power supply unit such as a backup capacitor. This power-off power supply unit supplies power for memory retention to the RAM 64 of the main control unit 60 even when the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is interrupted.

In addition, the power supply/shooting control device 80 executes shooting control for causing the game ball shooting mechanism 81 to shoot game balls. Here, the game ball shooting mechanism 81 includes a shooting rail extending toward the guide rail 34 of the game board 31, a ball feeding device for supplying game balls stored in the upper tray 25a onto the shooting rail, and a and a solenoid that is an electric actuator that shoots the game ball supplied to the guide rail 34 toward the guide rail 34 . The power supply/launch control device 80 supplies a drive signal (launch permission signal) to the solenoid to launch the game ball when a predetermined launch condition is met.

<Electrical Configuration for Execution of Internal Lottery by MPU 62 of Main Control Unit 60>
FIG. 5 is a diagram showing the contents of each counter used for the internal lottery.
As shown in FIG. 5, the MPU 62 executes an internal lottery or the like by using the values (information) of the counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS and C4. Specifically, the MPU 62 uses the big win random number counter C1 for the lottery for the occurrence of the big win, uses the big win type counter C2 for the lottery for the type of the big win, and determines whether to generate the ready-to-win display. , the reach random number counter C3 is used. Also, the MPU 62 uses the random number initial value counter CINI to set the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1, and uses the variation type counter CS to determine the display continuation time on the main display section 45 and the symbol display device 47. Further, the MPU 62 uses the electric accessory open counter C4 for the lottery to determine whether or not the electric accessory 37a of the lower operation port 37 is set to the electric role open state. The counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS and C4 are provided in the various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64 (see FIG. 4).

Each of the counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value each time it is updated and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Each counter is periodically updated, and the updated value is appropriately stored in a lottery counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 64 . Of the values stored in the lottery counter buffer, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 are stored in the RAM 64 at the timing when the game ball enters the upper operating port 36 or the lower operating port 37. is stored in the reserved ball storage area 64b (see FIG. 4) provided as acquired information storage means. In addition, among the values stored in the lottery counter buffer, the value of the electric role product opening counter C4 is stored as the electric work holding information in the electric work holding area 64c of the RAM 64 (Fig. 4).

The reserved ball storage area 64b includes a first result display section reservation area Ra, a second result display section reservation area Rb, and an execution area AE.

The first result display section reservation area Ra provided as the first ball entering section storage means includes four storage areas, a first area Ra1 to a fourth area Ra4. Each of the areas Ra1 to Ra4 is set to have a storage capacity capable of storing a set of values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3. The MPU 62 uses a set of values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 as reservation information in time series to each area Ra1 to Ra4 in accordance with the winning of the game ball to the upper operation port 36. store it. Specifically, when the winning to the upper working port 36 occurs a plurality of times in succession, the MPU 62 outputs the pending information in the order of the first area Ra1→second area Ra2→third area Ra3→fourth area Ra4. Store in chronological order.

As described above, since the first result display portion reservation area Ra includes four storage areas, up to four winnings of game balls to the upper operation opening 36 are reserved. In addition, the first result display reserved area Ra includes storage areas for writing the reserved numbers stored in the areas Ra1 to Ra4.
In addition, the number of reservations related to the upper working port 36 is not limited to four, and may be any number, such as two, three, or five or more, and may be singular. may

The second result display section reservation area Rb provided as the second ball entering section storage means includes four storage areas, a first area Rb1 to a fourth area Rb4. Each of the areas Rb1 to Rb4 is set to have a storage capacity capable of storing a set of values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3. The MPU 62 uses a set of values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 as reservation information in time series to each area Rb1 to Rb4 in accordance with the winning of the game ball to the lower operation port 37. store it. Specifically, when the winning to the lower opening 37 occurs a plurality of times in succession, the MPU 62 outputs the pending information in the order of the first area Rb1→second area Rb2→third area Rb3→fourth area Rb4. Store in chronological order.

As described above, since the second result display portion reservation area Rb has four storage areas, up to four winnings of game balls into the lower operation opening 37 are reserved. The second result display portion reservation area Rb has a storage area for writing the number of reservations stored in each of the areas Rb1 to Rb4.
In addition, the number of reserves related to the lower working port 37 is not limited to four, and may be any number, such as two, three, or five or more, and may be singular. may

The execution area AE stores the pending information stored in the storage area of the first result display portion pending area Ra or the second result display portion pending area Rb when starting the variable display of each of the result display portions 45a and 45b. This is the area to move the .

Thus, in the present embodiment, the first result display holding area Ra includes a plurality of internal lottery information associated with the results of the internal lottery executed with the entry of the game ball into the upper working port 36 as a trigger. It functions as storage means for the first ball-entering section that stores (holding information).
Further, in the present embodiment, the holding area Rb for the second result display section includes a plurality of internal lottery information (holding information).

The electrician reservation area 64c includes four storage areas, like the first result display reservation area Ra and the second result display reservation area Rb. In addition, the electrical work holding area 64c includes an electrical work execution area (not shown) like the reserved ball storage area 64b. Therefore, the winning of game balls to each through gate 41 is reserved up to four.
The number of pending gates 41 is not limited to four, and may be any number, such as two, three, or five or more. may

<Detailed description of each counter>
The details of each counter will be described below.
First, the electric accessory release counter C4 will be described. For example, the electric accessory release counter C4 adds 1 to the previous value each time it is updated, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value of 65535, thereby becoming a loop counter that loops within the range of 0 to 65535. ing.
The electric accessory release counter C4 is periodically updated, and the updated value is stored in the electric role holding area 64c of the RAM 64 via the lottery counter buffer at the timing when the game ball wins in each through gate 41. be.
Then, based on the value of the electric role product open counter C4 stored in the electric role holding area 64c, the MPU 62 draws a lottery (electric role object release lottery).

FIG. 6 is a diagram showing an electric role right/wrong table storing values of random numbers for winning the electric accessory open lottery.
Among the values of the electric role release counter C4, the value of the random number that wins the electric role release lottery is stored in the electric role right/wrong table storage area of the ROM 63 provided as the electric right/wrong information group storage means, as shown in FIG. 63c (see FIG. 4) is stored as an electric service right/wrong table (electric power right/wrong information group).

Here, the pachinko machine 10 has a plurality of support modes with mutually different frequencies of enabling game balls to enter the lower operation opening 37 by setting the electric accessory 37a to the open state. Specifically, the pachinko machine 10 has a low frequency support mode (low frequency guide state) in which the frequency of setting the electric role product 37a to the open state is relatively low, and the frequency of setting the electric role product 37a to the open state is low. and a relatively high frequency support mode (high frequency guide state).

Specifically, the electric service acceptance/rejection table is divided into the low-frequency support mode acceptance/rejection table (low-frequency acceptance information group) shown in FIG. and a power supply propriety table for mode (high frequency power supply propriety information group).
The MPU 62 executes the electric role release lottery by comparing these electric role right/wrong tables with the value of the electric role product opening counter C4 stored in the electric role holding area 64c.

These electric role success/failure tables have a plurality of results (electric role success/failure results) of a plurality of electric role product open lotteries of "electric role open win" and "electric role open loss result".
Specifically, under the gaming state in which the electric role winning lottery for the low-frequency support mode is referred to, as shown in FIG. There is one random number value. Therefore, under the gaming state in which the electric role propriety table for the low-frequency support mode is referred to in the electric role open lottery, the probability of winning the "electric role open winning" is 1/65536.
On the other hand, in the game state in which the electric role winning lottery for the high-frequency support mode is referred to, as shown in FIG. There are 65535 random numbers. Therefore, under the gaming state in which the electric role right/wrong table for the high-frequency support mode is referred to in the electric role open lottery, the probability of winning the "electric role open winning" is 65535/65536. Here, the value of the random number that becomes "Electricity open winning" stored in the low-frequency support mode table is the "Electricity open winning" stored in the high-frequency support mode table. is included in the random number value.

In addition, the value and the number of random numbers stored in each electric role success/failure table are arbitrary. good. In addition, the value of the random number that becomes "Electricity open winning" stored in the high-frequency support mode table is the same as the "Electricity open winning" stored in the low-frequency support mode table. It does not have to include the random number value for the low frequency support mode.

Compared with the low-frequency support mode, the high-frequency support mode sets the electric accessory 37a to the open state more times when winning the electric accessory opening lottery, and sets the electric accessory 37a to the open state. The opening time of one time is also getting longer. In addition, in the high-frequency support mode, the closing time for setting the electric accessory 37a to the closed state between each opening in the one-time electrical open state is shorter than the opening time of one time. Furthermore, in the high-frequency support mode, compared to the low-frequency support mode, the minimum secured time (role The duration of one fluctuation display in the object display section 46) is shortened.

Therefore, in the high-frequency support mode, game balls are more likely to enter the lower operation opening 37 as compared with the low-frequency support mode. In other words, in the low frequency support mode, the game ball has a higher probability of winning in the upper working opening 36 than in the lower working opening 37 . In addition, in the high-frequency support mode, the probability that the game ball will enter the lower operating port 37 is higher than the upper operating port 36.例文帳に追加
When it is detected that a prize has been entered into the lower operating port 37, a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out. Therefore, in the high-frequency support mode, the player can play the game while not reducing the number of game balls. It can be carried out.

Thus, in this embodiment, the lower working port 37 has a low-frequency support mode and a high-frequency support mode. The low-frequency support mode functions as a non-enterable state in which a game ball flowing down the game area cannot be entered, and the high-frequency support mode allows a game ball flowing down the game area to enter. Acts as a possible state.

Note that the configurations of the low-frequency support mode and the high-frequency support mode are not limited to this. Specifically, the high-frequency support mode may be configured so that the frequency of setting the electric accessory 37a to the open state is relatively high compared to the low-frequency support mode, and the low-frequency support mode and The high-frequency support mode may have the same probability of winning the electric accessory open lottery. For example, a plurality of types of reserved time may be prepared, and the high-frequency support mode may be configured to make it easier to select a shorter reserved time than the low-frequency support mode, and the average of the selected reserved times may be shortened. It may be configured to Furthermore, by combining the conditions of the number of times the electric accessory 37a is set to the open state, the opening time, and the securing time, the high frequency support mode changes the frequency of setting the electric accessory 37a to the open state to the low frequency support mode. may be configured to be relatively high compared to .

Next, the jackpot random number counter C1 will be described. For example, the jackpot random number counter C1 is a loop counter that loops within the range of 0 to 59 by adding 1 to the previous value each time it is updated and returning to 0 after reaching the maximum value of 59. . Also, the jackpot random number counter C1 reads the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time as an initial value each time it loops. The random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter that loops within the range of 0 to 59, like the jackpot random number counter C1.

The jackpot random number counter C1 is periodically updated, and the updated value is transferred to the reserved ball storage area 64b of the RAM 64 via the lottery counter buffer at the timing when the game ball enters the upper operating port 36 or the lower operating port 37. stored in Specifically, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is stored in the first result display holding area Ra of the RAM 64 at the timing when the game ball wins the upper operation port 36, and the game ball wins the lower operation port 37. It is stored in the reservation area Rb for the second result display section of the RAM 64 at the timing.
Then, the MPU 62 executes a lottery for the occurrence of a big hit (win/fail lottery) based on the value of the big hit random number counter C1 stored in the reserved ball storage area 64b.

FIG. 7 is a diagram showing a success/failure table that stores values of random numbers for winning a jackpot.
Among the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the value of the random number that wins the jackpot is stored in the hit/fail table storage area 63a (see FIG. 4) of the ROM 63 provided as hit/fail information group storage means, as shown in FIG. (whether or not information group).

Here, the pachinko machine 10 has two winning lottery modes, a low probability mode (low probability state) in which it is difficult to win a big win and a high probability mode (high probability state) in which it is easy to win a big win. . The success/failure table includes the success/failure table for the low-probability mode (low-probability success/failure information group) shown in FIG. group).
The MPU 62 executes a lottery for the occurrence of a big hit by comparing these win/fail tables with the value of the big hit random number counter C1 stored in the reserved ball storage area 64b.

These hit/fail tables have lottery results (hit/fail results) of occurrence of a plurality of jackpots, such as "jackpot win", "special loss result", and "ordinary loss result".
Specifically, under the gaming state in which the success/failure table for the low-probability mode is referred to in the lottery for the occurrence of the big win, as shown in FIG. is. Therefore, under the gaming state in which the success/failure table for the low-probability mode is referred to for the lottery for the occurrence of the big win, the probability of winning the "big win" is 1/30.
On the other hand, under the gaming state in which the success/failure table for the high-probability mode is referred to at the time of the lottery for the occurrence of the big win, as shown in FIG. is. Therefore, in a gaming state in which the success/failure table for the high-probability mode is referred to for the lottery for the occurrence of the big win, the probability of winning the "big win" is 1/3.
Here, the value of the random number for "winning the jackpot" stored in the success/failure table for the low-probability mode is included in the value of the random number for "winning the jackpot" stored in the success/failure table for the high-probability mode. .

Thus, in this embodiment, the high-probability mode (second gaming state) executes an internal lottery with a winning probability higher than that of the low-probability mode (first gaming state).

The value and number of random numbers stored in each success/failure table are arbitrary, and it is sufficient that the high probability mode has a higher probability of winning a "big win" than the low probability mode. Further, the value of the random number for "winning the jackpot" stored in the success/failure table for the high-probability mode must not include the value of the random number for "winning the jackpot" stored in the success/failure table for the low-probability mode. Alternatively, it may include a part of the random number values that are stored in the success/failure table for the low-probability mode and become the "big win".

In addition, in each win/fail lottery mode, random numbers other than "big win winning" results in a loss without winning a big win.
Here, as described above, the pachinko machine 10 has two types of loss results, ie, the "special loss result (small win result)" and the "normal loss result". These outliers are common in that none of them serve as a trigger for shifting to the lottery mode or the support mode. However, the difference is that the "special deviation result" serves as a trigger for shifting to the opening/closing execution mode, whereas the "normal deviation result" does not trigger a transition to the opening/closing execution mode.

Next, the jackpot type counter C2 will be described. The jackpot type counter C2 is, for example, a loop counter that loops within the range of 0 to 29 by adding 1 to the previous value each time it is updated and returning to 0 after reaching the maximum value of 29. .
The jackpot type counter C2 is periodically updated, and the updated value is stored in the reserved ball storage area 64b of the RAM 64 via the lottery counter buffer at the timing when the game ball enters the upper operating port 36 or the lower operating port 37. stored in Specifically, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is stored in the reservation area Ra for the first result display portion of the RAM 64 at the timing when the game ball wins in the upper operating port 36, and the game ball wins in the lower operating port 37. It is stored in the reservation area Rb for the second result display section of the RAM 64 at the timing.
Then, based on the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the reserved ball storage area 64b, the MPU 62 executes a lottery (distribution lottery) for the jackpot type when the jackpot occurs.

FIG. 8 is a diagram showing an allocation table storing random number values relating to allocation destinations of types of jackpots.
As shown in FIG. 8, the random number value related to the allocation destination of the jackpot type is stored in the allocation table (see FIG. 4) in the allocation table storage area 63b (see FIG. 4) of the ROM 63 provided as the allocation information group storage means. minute information group). The distribution table includes a first distribution table (first distribution information group) shown in FIG. 8(a) and a second distribution table (second distribution information group) shown in FIG. 8(b). ing.
The MPU 62 executes a jackpot type lottery by comparing these distribution tables with the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the reserved ball storage area 64b.

In the first distribution table, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 shifted from the reservation area Ra for the first result display unit to the execution area AE, that is, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 based on the winning to the upper operation port 36 It is a table referred to when performing a lottery for the type of jackpot.
The first distribution table, as shown in FIG. Probability result)” and “Most advantageous result (special allocation result corresponding to high probability)” are assigned as allocation destinations. Specifically, in the first distribution table, among the values “0 to 29” of the jackpot type counter C2, “0 to 9” are distributed to “non-explicit small round high probability results”, and “10 to 19” It is sorted into ``high probability result of explicit few rounds'', and ``20 to 29'' is assigned to ``best result''.

In the second distribution table, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 shifted from the second result display portion reservation area Rb to the execution area AE, that is, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 based on the winning to the lower operation port 37 It is a table referred to when performing a lottery for the type of jackpot.
As shown in FIG. 8(b), the second distribution table assigns only the distribution result of the "best result". Specifically, in the second distribution table, among the values "0 to 29" of the jackpot type counter C2, "0 to 29" are distributed to the "best result".

Next, the reach random number counter C3 will be described. The reach random number counter C3 is, for example, a loop counter that loops within the range of 0 to 238 by adding 1 to the previous value each time it is updated and returning to 0 after reaching the maximum value of 238. .
The reach random number counter C3 is periodically updated, and the updated value is stored in the reserved ball storage area 64b of the RAM 64 via the lottery counter buffer at the timing when the game ball enters the upper operation port 36 or the lower operation port 37. stored in Specifically, the value of the reach random number counter C3 is stored in the first result display holding area Ra of the RAM 64 at the timing when the game ball enters the upper operating port 36, and the game ball enters the lower operating port 37. It is stored in the reservation area Rb for the second result display section of the RAM 64 at the timing.
Then, the MPU 62 executes a lottery (reach generation lottery) to determine whether to generate a reach display based on the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the reserved ball storage area 64b.

The ready-to-win display is an expectation effect that occurs when the winning lottery does not result in a "big win" but results in a "normal failure".
Specifically, the MPU 62 determines the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the reach table and the reserved ball storage area 64b when the result of the win/fail lottery does not result in a "big hit" but results in a "normal loss". By comparing with , a lottery is executed as to whether or not to generate a ready-to-win display, and when the ready-to-win display is to be generated in this lottery, the ready-to-win display is generated. The ready-to-win table is a table that stores values of random numbers relating to the generation of the ready-to-win display, and is stored in the ready-to-win table storage area 63d of the ROM 63 (see FIG. 4).

Here, in the case of "big win winning" in the lottery lottery and "most advantageous result" in the distribution lottery, the symbol display device 47 selects a combination of symbols having the same number as the stop result. Stop display on the effective line L. In addition, if it becomes "jackpot winning" in the winning lottery and is distributed to "unspecified small round high probability result" or "explicit small round high probability result" in the distribution lottery, or "jackpot winning" in the lottery lottery In the event that a "special failure result" is obtained without becoming, the symbol display device 47 selects a "normal failure result" in the winning lottery instead of a combination of symbols having the same number as the stop result. A special combination of symbols having numbers different from each other, which will never be displayed, is stopped on the activated line L. - 特許庁

In the reach display, when the combination of symbols with the same number is finally stopped and displayed (when it becomes a "big win" in the winning lottery and is distributed to the "best result" in the distribution lottery), It occurs regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3. In addition, the reach display is used when the combination of special symbols is finally stopped and displayed ("jackpot winning" in the winning lottery, "unspecified small round high probability result" or "explicit small round high probability" in the distribution lottery) In the case of being sorted to "probable result" or "special losing result" instead of "big hit winning" in the winning lottery), it does not occur regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3.

In the ready-to-win display mode, some of the plurality of symbol rows Z1 to Z3 displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 (for example, the symbol row Z1 and the symbol row Z3) are displayed on the activated line L. By causing the stationary display, the same combination of symbols is displayed to indicate the result of stopping, and in that state, the remaining symbol rows (for example, the symbol row Z2) are variably displayed.
Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 generates the ready-to-win display, after the variable display is started on the pattern display device 47, and before displaying the predetermined stop result, the winning lottery results in a "jackpot winning", It is possible to make the player expect that he or she has been sorted to the "best result" in the sorting lottery.

Note that the ready-to-win display mode is not limited to this, and a part of the symbol rows are stopped and displayed, and the remaining symbol rows are variably displayed, and a predetermined character or the like is displayed in the background as a moving image. Alternatively, each pattern row may be reduced or hidden, and a predetermined character or the like may be displayed on substantially the entire display screen G as a moving image.

Here, the pachinko machine 10 has an expected effect as a kind of variable display of the pattern display device 47. - 特許庁The expectation effect is such that the player expects that he or she has won a "big win" in the lottery after the start of the variable display on the symbol display device 47 and before the predetermined stop result is displayed. I mean performance. Specifically, the pachinko machine 10 has two types of expectation effects, namely, the aforementioned ready-to-win display and advance notice display.

The notice display will not be "jackpot winning" in the lottery if it becomes "jackpot winning" in the lottery, or if it becomes "special losing result" without becoming "jackpot winning" in the lottery lottery. This is an expected effect that makes the effect more likely to occur than in the case of the "normal deviation result". This advance notice display may make it easier to select an effect with a low appearance rate instead of making the effect more likely to occur, or may be combined.
While the lottery to determine whether or not to generate the ready-to-win display is performed by the main controller 60, the lottery to determine whether to generate the advance notice display is performed by the sound emission control device 90. .

The mode of the advance notice display is that of the plurality of symbol rows Z1 to Z3 displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 47, all of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are variably displayed, and some of the symbol rows (for example, symbol row Z1) is stopped on the activated line L, and a plurality of symbol rows (for example, symbol rows Z2 and Z3) are variably displayed or ready-to-win display is generated, a predetermined character etc. are displayed on the display screen G as moving images. This notice display occurs both when the reach display is generated and when the reach display is not generated, but it is set so that it is more likely to occur when the reach display is generated than when the reach display is not generated. It is
Note that the advance notice display is not limited to this, and for example, the background may be changed, and the pattern rows Z1 to Z3 may be changed and displayed.

Finally, the fluctuation type counter CS will be explained. For example, the fluctuation type counter CS is a loop counter that loops within the range of 0 to 198 by adding 1 to the previous value each time it is updated and returning to 0 after reaching the maximum value 198. .
The fluctuation type counter CS is updated at least once each time a normal process, which will be described later, is executed, and is stored in the lottery counter buffer each time it is updated.
Then, the MPU 62 determines the pattern display duration time on the main display section 45 and the pattern display duration time on the pattern display device 47 based on the value of the variation type counter CS stored in the lottery counter buffer.

<Regarding Various Processing Executed by Main Controller 60>
The MPU 62 of the main control device 60 executes timer interrupt processing and normal processing that advances the game, and main processing that is activated when the power is turned on. Timer interrupt processing, normal processing, and main processing will be described in order below.
In addition to timer interrupt processing, normal processing, and main processing, the MPU 62 executes NMI interrupt processing activated by input of a power failure signal to the NMI terminal (non-maskable terminal), but description of this processing will be omitted.

<Timer interrupt processing>
FIG. 9 is a diagram showing a flowchart of timer interrupt processing.
In timer interrupt processing, the MPU 62 periodically (for example, every 2 msec) executes steps S101 to S105, as shown in FIG.

In step S101, the MPU 62 executes reading processing of the plurality of detection sensors 40b to 40f. In this reading process, the MPU 62 reads the states of the plurality of detection sensors 40b to 40f, determines the states, and stores them in the RAM 64 as winning detection information. When the MPU 62 determines that the detection sensors 40b to 40d corresponding to various winning holes detect the winning of game balls, it sets a prize ball command for instructing the payout of the prize balls, and sets this set prize ball command. A command is transmitted to the payout control device 70 . For example, when the MPU 62 determines that the detection sensor 40d corresponding to the variable winning device 38 has detected the winning of game balls, a prize ball command for instructing 15 prize balls, which is a specific unit number to the payout control device 70.
The payout control device 70 performs payout control to cause the payout device 71 to pay out prize balls based on the prize ball command transmitted from the MPU 62 .

In step S102, the MPU 62 updates the random number initial value counter CINI. Specifically, as described above, the MPU 62 adds 1 to the previous value of the random number initial value counter CINI to update it, and stores the updated value in the lottery counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 64. do. Note that the MPU 62 returns the value of the random number initial value counter CINI to 0 and clears it if it reaches the maximum value when adding 1 to the previous value of the random number initial value counter CINI.

In step S103, the MPU 62 updates the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the electric accessory release counter C4. Specifically, as described above, the MPU 62 adds 1 to each of the previous values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the electric accessary product release counter C4 and updates them. The subsequent value is stored in a lottery counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 64 . Note that the MPU 62 returns the values of the counters C1 to C4 to 0 and clears them when the previous values of the counters C1 to C4 have reached the maximum value when 1 is added thereto.

In step S104, the MPU 62 executes the winning process for through. In this through winning process, when the MPU 62 determines that the detection sensor 40f corresponding to each through gate 41 has detected the winning of the game ball, the electric accessory opening counter C4 updated in step S103 is stored in the electric service reservation area 64c. Also, the MPU 62 sets a command for lighting the third suspension lamp portion 49 c and transmits the set command to the sound emission control device 90 .
In addition, the sound emission control device 90 turns on the third suspension lamp part 49c based on the command transmitted from the MPU 62 . Further, the number of reserved game balls that have won the through gate 41 is, as described above, a maximum of four, and the third reservation lamp portion 49c is lit by the number corresponding to this reserved number.

In step S105, the MPU 62 executes the winning process for the working opening.
The prize winning process for the operating port will be described in detail below.

<Winning process for operating port>
FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a flow chart of the winning process for the working opening.
In the winning process for the working opening, the MPU 62 executes steps S201 to S207 as shown in FIG.

In step S201, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the detection sensor 40b corresponding to the upper working port 36 has detected the winning of the game ball, thereby determining whether the game ball has won the upper working port 36 (start winning). determine whether When the MPU 62 determines in step S201 that the game ball has won in the upper working port 36, in step S202, the number of reserved balls stored in the first result display section reserved area Ra is grasped, and the reserved number is determined. The number is set in a predetermined storage area in the first result display section reservation area Ra as the first start-up reservation storage number RaN. Then, MPU62 performs the process after step S205.

On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S201 that the game ball has not entered the upper operating port 36, in step S203, the detection sensor 40c corresponding to the lower operating port 37 detects the winning of the game ball. is detected, it is determined whether or not the game ball has entered the lower operation opening 37 (start winning).
When the MPU 62 determines that the game ball has not entered the lower operation opening 37 in step S203, it ends the operation opening winning process. Further, when the MPU 62 determines that the game ball has won the lower operation opening 37 in step S203, in step S204, the number of reservations stored in the second result display section reservation area Rb is grasped, The pending number is set in a predetermined storage area in the second result display portion pending area Rb as a second start pending storage number RbN. Then, MPU62 performs the process after step S205.

After executing the process of step S202 or step S204, the MPU 62 determines in step S205 that the number of start suspension memories N (RaN or RbN) set in step S202 or step S204 is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment). Determine whether or not there is
When the MPU 62 determines in step S205 that the number N of start pending memories is not less than the upper limit value, the MPU 62 ends the prize winning process for the operating opening. Further, when the MPU 62 determines in step S205 that the start pending memory number N is less than the upper limit value, the MPU 62 adds 1 to the value of the start pending memory number N and updates it in step S206.

In step S207, the MPU 62 stores a set of values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 updated in step S103 of the timer interrupt process out of the empty storage area of the reservation area for the result display section. The suspension information is stored in the first storage area, that is, the storage area corresponding to the start suspension storage number N updated in step S206.

For example, when the MPU 62 sets the first start pending memory number RaN in step S202, each of the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, and reach random number counter C3 updated in step S103 of the timer interrupt process A set of values is stored as pending information in the first storage area of the empty storage areas in the first result display portion pending area Ra, that is, in the storage area corresponding to the first start pending storage number RaN updated in step S206. For example, when the MPU 62 sets "3" to the first start pending memory number RaN in step S202, the MPU 62 stores "4" in the first start pending memory number RaN updated in step S206. Hold information is stored in a certain fourth area Ra4.

Also, for example, when the MPU 62 sets the second start pending memory number RbN in step S204, the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, and reach random number counter C3 updated in step S103 of the timer interrupt process are stored as suspension information in the first storage area among the empty storage areas of the second result display section storage area Rb, that is, in the storage area corresponding to the second start suspension storage number RbN updated in step S206. do. For example, when the MPU 62 sets "3" to the second start pending memory number RbN in step S204, the MPU 62 stores the second start pending memory number RbN in the storage area corresponding to "4" updated in step S206. Hold information is stored in a certain fourth area Rb4.

Further, in step S207, the MPU 62 sets a command for turning on the first reservation lamp section 49a or the second reservation lamp section 49b, and transmits the set command to the sound emission control device 90. After that, the MPU 62 terminates the prize winning process for the operating port.
In addition, the sound emission control device 90 turns on the first reservation lamp section 49a or the second reservation lamp section 49b based on the command transmitted from the MPU 62 . In addition, the number of reserved game balls that have won the upper operation opening 36 or the lower operation opening 37 is, as described above, a maximum of four pieces, and the first reservation lamp portion 49a or the second reservation lamp portion 49b is this reservation number The corresponding number of lights up.

<Normal processing>
FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a flowchart of normal processing.
The MPU 62 executes a main process, which will be described later, which is activated when the power is turned on, and then executes a normal process, which is the main process for advancing the game. In this normal process, the MPU 62 executes steps S301 to S314 as shown in FIG. Specifically, the MPU 62 periodically executes steps S301 to S309 in a cycle of 4 msec, repeatedly executes steps S308 to S311 when a remaining time occurs, and executes step S312 and subsequent steps according to the determination result of step S308. Execute.

In step S301, the MPU 62 executes timer interrupt processing or external output processing for transmitting commands set in the previous normal processing to each sub-side control device. In this external output process, for example, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the prize ball command is set, and if it determines that the prize ball command is set, the prize ball command is sent to the payout control device 70 Send. Further, for example, the MPU 62 determines whether or not a command for effect such as a command corresponding to the effect for the game round or a command corresponding to the effect for the open/close execution mode is set, and the command for effect is determined. When it is determined that it is set, the command for that effect is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 .

In step S302, the MPU 62 updates the variation type counter CS. Specifically, as described above, the MPU 62 adds 1 to the previous value of the fluctuation type counter CS to update it, and stores the updated value in the lottery counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 64. . In addition, when the MPU 62 has reached the maximum value when adding 1 to the previous value of the fluctuation type counter CS, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS is returned to 0 and cleared.

In step S303, the MPU 62 executes game round control processing for advancing the game round. In the game round control process, the MPU 62 executes a win/fail lottery and a sorting lottery, determines information related to a pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on the pattern display device 47, and determines a pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on the main display unit 45. decision of information related to
In step S304, the MPU 62 executes game state transition processing for shifting the game state. In the game state transition processing, the MPU 62 executes transition processing to each game state such as an opening/closing execution mode, a high probability mode, and a high frequency support mode.
The game round control process in step S303 and the game state transition process in step S304 will be described later in detail.

In step S305, the MPU 62 executes demonstration display execution determination processing. In this demonstration display execution determination process, the MPU 62 determines whether or not a predetermined start waiting period (for example, 30 seconds) for starting a demonstration has elapsed without a new game round being started after the game round has ended. However, when it is determined that the start waiting period has elapsed, a demo command for starting the demo display is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 .
Note that the sound emission control device 90 starts the demonstration display execution process based on the demonstration command transmitted from the MPU 62 .

Here, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the start waiting period has passed by counting the number of times the process of step S305 is executed. For example, if the start waiting period is 30 sec and the interval for repeatedly executing the process of step S305 is 4 msec, the MPU 62 counts the number of times the process of step S305 is executed, and when it reaches 7500 times, the start waiting period is determined to have passed. Note that the configuration for measuring the start waiting period is arbitrary, and for example, the start waiting period may be measured using a real-time clock. In addition, when the MPU 62 starts a new game round while counting the number of execution times of the process of step S305, the count value is reset.

In step S<b>306 , the MPU 62 executes an electric support process for executing drive control of the electric accessory 37 a provided in the lower working port 37 . In this electric role support process, the MPU 62 executes the electric role product opening lottery based on the value of the electric role product opening counter C4 stored in the electric role holding area 64c of the RAM 64, and the electric role product opening lottery. When winning, the opening/closing process of the electric accessory 37a is executed. Further, the MPU 62 performs display control of the accessory display unit 46 so as to display the result of the electric accessory open lottery.
Note that the electric support processing in step S306 will be described later in detail.

In step S307, the MPU 62 executes game ball launch control processing. In this game ball shooting control process, the MPU 62 causes the power supply/shooting control device 80 to execute shooting control for shooting a game ball based on the rotation of the shooting handle 27 by the player. Specifically, the power supply/shooting control device 80 causes the game ball shooting mechanism 81 to shoot a game ball by exciting the solenoid of the game ball shooting mechanism 81 at a predetermined cycle (0.6 sec in this embodiment). . In addition, the solenoid is energized so as to shoot the game ball with a shooting intensity corresponding to the rotation operation amount of the shooting handle 27 . Further, the power supply/shooting control device 80 supplies a drive signal to the solenoid of the game ball shooting mechanism 81 to shoot the game ball when a predetermined shooting condition is met.

In step S308, the MPU 62 determines whether a power failure flag is set in a power failure flag storage area (not shown) of the RAM 64 or not. This power failure flag is set in the RAM 64 when a power failure signal is input from the power failure monitor board 65 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 62 . The power failure monitoring board 65 outputs this power failure signal when it confirms the occurrence of power failure. This power failure flag is cleared when the main process is executed next time.

Here, the pachinko machine 10 sets various flags by substituting 1 in a predetermined area of the RAM 64 or the like, and clears various flags by substituting 0. For example, the pachinko machine 10 sets the power outage flag by substituting 1 in the power outage flag storage area of the RAM 64 and clears the power outage flag by substituting 0 in the power outage flag storage area of the RAM 64 .

When the MPU 62 determines that the power failure flag is set in step S308, the MPU 62 executes the power failure processing of step S312 and subsequent steps without executing the processing of step S309 and subsequent steps. Specifically, in step S312, the MPU 62 prohibits the generation of timer interrupt processing. In step S313, the MPU 62 calculates and stores a RAM determination value (checksum of the RAM 64). In step S314, MPU62 prohibits the access to RAM64. After that, the MPU 62 continues the infinite loop until the power supply is completely cut off and the process cannot be executed.

On the other hand, if the MPU 62 determines in step S308 that the power failure flag has not been set, in step S309 it determines whether the timing for executing the next normal process has come, that is, whether the current normal process has It is determined whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in this embodiment) has passed since the start.
When the MPU 62 determines in step S309 that the timing for executing the next normal process has not yet arrived, that is, when the remaining time has occurred, in step S310 the random number initial value counter CINI is updated, and in step S311. , the fluctuation type counter CS is updated. The MPU 62 repeats steps S308 to S311 until it determines in step S309 that it is time to execute the next normal process.

On the other hand, if the MPU 62 determines in step S309 that the timing for executing the next normal process has come, that is, if the remaining time has not occurred, the next normal process is executed by executing step S301 again. Begin normal processing.

<Main processing>
FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the main processing.
In the main process, the MPU 62 executes steps S401 to S412 as shown in FIG.
In step S401, the MPU 62 executes start-up processing upon power-on. In this start-up process, the MPU 62 waits for a predetermined time (for example, about 500 msec) after the power is turned on in order to wait for the sub-side control board (such as the control board of the sound emission control device 90) to become operable. ) has passed.

In step S402, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the permission prohibition period of 1 sec has elapsed. When the MPU 62 determines that 1 sec has not passed in step S402, it repeats the process of step S402. Further, when the MPU 62 determines that 1 sec has passed in step S402, the MPU 62 executes the processing after step S403.

Here, the MPU 62 determines whether or not 1 sec has passed by counting the number of times the process of step S402 is executed. For example, if the interval for repeatedly executing the processing of step S402 is 0.1 msec, the MPU 62 counts the number of executions of the processing of step S402 and determines that 1 sec has elapsed when the number reaches 10000 times. Note that the configuration for measuring the permission prohibition period is arbitrary. For example, the permission prohibition period may be measured using a real-time clock.

In step S403, MPU62 permits the access to RAM64.
In step S404, the MPU 62 determines whether or not a RAM erase switch (not shown) provided in the power/emission control device 80 is turned on.
When the MPU 62 determines that the RAM erase switch is turned on in step S404, it executes the processing from step S409.
On the other hand, if the MPU 62 determines in step S404 that the RAM erase switch is not turned on, it determines in step S405 whether or not the power failure flag is set in the power failure flag storage area of the RAM 64. do.

When the MPU 62 determines that the power failure flag is not set in step S405, the MPU 62 executes the processing from step S409.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines that the power failure flag is set in step S405, it calculates the RAM determination value in step S406.
At step S407, the MPU 62 confirms the validity of the data stored in the RAM 64 by determining whether the RAM determination value calculated at step S406 is normal. Specifically, the MPU 62 compares the RAM determination value calculated in step S406 with the RAM determination value saved in step S313 (power failure processing) of the normal processing, and if they match, , the RAM determination value is determined to be normal, and if they do not match, the RAM determination value is determined to be abnormal.

When the MPU 62 determines that the RAM determination value is not normal in step S407, the MPU 62 executes the processing from step S409.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines that the RAM determination value is normal in step S407, it clears the power failure flag stored in the power failure flag storage area of the RAM 64 in step S408.

The validity of the data stored in the RAM 64 may be determined by a method different from the method of confirming the consistency of the RAM determination value. The validity of the data stored in the RAM 64 may be confirmed by determining in the main processing whether or not the keyword has been written normally.

As described above, if the MPU 62 determines that the RAM erase switch is turned on in step S404, determines that the power failure flag is not set in step S405, or determines that the RAM determination value is not normal, the processing from step S409 is executed.
Specifically, the MPU 62 clears the work area of the RAM 64 in step S409, and initializes the RAM 64 in step S410.

Therefore, for example, the administrator of the game hall can initialize the data stored in the RAM 64 by turning on the power of the pachinko machine 10 while pressing the RAM erase switch at the start of business of the game hall. Moreover, the pachinko machine 10 initializes the data stored in the RAM 64 when the occurrence of a power failure is not confirmed by the power failure monitoring board 65 or when the RAM determination value is abnormal.

After executing the process of step S408 or step S410, the MPU 62 transmits an initial command to the sub-side control board (such as the control board of the sound emission control device 90) in step S411, and timer interrupt in step S412. Allow the process to occur, and shift to the above-described normal process.
By receiving the initial command transmitted in step S411, the sub-side control board recognizes that communication with the main control board 61 is being performed normally, and executes its own initialization. do.

<Game Round Control Processing>
FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the game round control process.
In the game round control process, the MPU 62 executes steps S501 to S509 as shown in FIG.
In step S501, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the opening/closing execution mode is in progress. When the MPU 62 determines in step S501 that the open/close execution mode is in progress, it ends the game round control process without executing the processes after step S502. Therefore, when it is determined that the open/close execution mode is in progress, the MPU 62 does not start the progress of the game cycle regardless of whether or not the winning of the game ball to the operation ports 36 and 37 is detected.
The MPU 62 determines whether or not the opening/closing execution mode is in progress by referring to the opening/closing execution mode flag stored in the RAM 64 . The same applies to each of the following processes. The MPU 62 sets the opening/closing execution mode flag when shifting to the opening/closing execution mode, and clears the opening/closing execution mode flag when the opening/closing execution mode ends.

On the other hand, if the MPU 62 determines in step S501 that the open/close execution mode is not in progress, in step S502 it determines whether the main display section 45 is performing variable display. Determine whether or not
When the MPU 62 determines in step S502 that the main display section 45 is not performing the variable display, the MPU 62 executes the game round start processing in steps S503 to S505.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S502 that the main display section 45 is performing the variable display, the MPU 62 executes the game cycle progressing process in steps S506 to S509.

First, the processing for starting a game cycle in steps S503 to S505 will be described.
In step S503, the MPU 62 grasps the number of reservations stored in the first result display section reservation area Ra and the number of reservations stored in the second result display section reservation area Rb, and these numbers of reservations is equal to or less than "0". When the MPU 62 determines in step S503 that the total number CRN is equal to or less than "0", it ends the game round control process.

On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S503 that the total number CRN is not "0" or less, in step S504, the first result display section reservation area Ra or the second result display section reservation area A data setting process is executed for setting the pending information stored in Rb for completion of game rounds. After that, in step S505, the MPU 62 causes the main display unit 45 and the symbol display device 47 to start variable display, executes a variation start process for finishing the game round, and ends the game round control process.
The data setting process in step S504 and the variation start process in step S505 will be described in detail below.

FIG. 14 is a diagram showing a flowchart of data setting processing.
In the data setting process, the MPU 62 executes steps S601 to S611 as shown in FIG.
In step S601, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the second start reservation memory number RbN in the second result display section reservation area Rb set in step S204 of the operation port winning process is "0" or less. do. When the MPU 62 determines in step S601 that the second start pending memory number RbN is equal to or less than "0", the MPU 62 executes data setting processing for the first result display section in steps S602 to S606, and proceeds to step S601. If it is determined that the second start pending memory number RbN is not equal to or less than "0", data setting processing for the second result display section in steps S607 to S611 is executed.

In this way, the data setting process includes the data setting process for the first result display section for setting the reservation information stored in the reservation area Ra for the first result display section for completing the game cycle, and the data setting processing for the second result display section. and a data setting process for the second result display section for setting the reservation information stored in the reservation area Rb for completion of the game cycle.
When the MPU 62 determines in step S601 that the second start pending storage number RbN is not equal to or less than "0", the MPU 62 does not execute the data setting process for the first result display section. Execute the data setting process for In other words, when the MPU 62 determines that there is reservation information stored in the second result display section reservation area Rb based on the winning of the game ball to the lower operation opening 37, the operation to the upper operation opening 36 is performed. The reservation information stored in the second result display section reservation area Rb is preferentially played regardless of whether or not there is reservation information stored in the first result display section reservation area Ra based on the winning of the game ball. Set for one digestion.

First, data setting processing for the first result display section in steps S602 to S606 will be described.
In step S602, the MPU 62 subtracts 1 from the value of the first start pending storage number RaN in the first result display portion pending area Ra to update the value.
In step S603, the MPU 62 moves the pending information stored in the first area Ra1 of the first result display portion pending area Ra to the execution area AE.
In step S604, the MPU 62 executes data shift processing for shifting the pending information stored in the storage area of the first result display portion pending area Ra. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the pending information stored in each of the areas Ra1 to Ra4 to the first area Ra1 side. Specifically, the MPU 62 shifts the pending information in the second area Ra2 to the first area Ra1, shifts the pending information in the third area Ra3 to the second area Ra2, and shifts the pending information in the fourth area Ra4 to the third area Ra1. Shift to area Ra3.

At step S605, the MPU 62 clears the second result display flag stored in the RAM 64. FIG. This second result display section flag is a flag for specifying which main display section 45, out of the first result display section 45a and the second result display section 45b, starts the variable display when completing a game round. is. In this step S605, the MPU 62 clears the second result display section flag, so that when the game cycle is completed, the variable display is made on the first result display section 45a based on the winning of the game ball into the upper working hole 36. (first variable display).

In step S606, the MPU 62 sets a shift command for recognizing that the hold information has been shifted, transmits the set shift command to the sound emission control device 90, and ends the data setting process. This command at the time of shift indicates that the hold information stored in the hold area Ra for the first result display unit has been shifted based on the winning of the game ball to the upper operation port 36. It contains information for 90 to recognize.
In addition, the sound emission control device 90 changes the lighting state of the first holding lamp portion 49a based on the shift command transmitted from the MPU 62 . Specifically, the sound emission control device 90 reduces the lighting number of the first reservation lamp portion 49a as the number of reserved game balls that have won the upper operation opening 36 decreases.

Next, data setting processing for the second result display section in steps S607 to S611 will be described.
In step S607, the MPU 62 subtracts 1 from the value of the second start pending storage number RbN in the second result display portion pending area Rb to update it.
In step S608, the MPU 62 moves the pending information stored in the second area Rb1 of the second result display portion pending area Rb to the execution area AE.
In step S609, the MPU 62 executes data shift processing for shifting the pending information stored in the storage area of the second result display portion pending area Rb. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the pending information stored in each of the areas Rb1 to Rb4 to the first area Rb1 side. Specifically, the MPU 62 shifts the pending information of the second area Rb2 to the first area Rb1, shifts the pending information of the third area Rb3 to the second area Rb2, shifts the pending information of the fourth area Rb4 to the third Shift to area Rb3.

At step S610, the MPU 62 sets the second result display section flag in the RAM 64. FIG. In this step S610, the MPU 62 sets the second result display section flag, so that when the game cycle is completed, the second result display section 45b displays a variable display based on the winning of the game ball into the lower operation opening 37. (second variable display).

In step S611, the MPU 62 sets a shift command for recognizing that the hold information has been shifted, transmits the set shift command to the sound emission control device 90, and ends the data setting process. This command at the time of shift indicates that the hold information stored in the hold area Rb for the second result display unit has been shifted based on the winning of the game ball to the lower operation opening 37. It contains information for 90 to recognize.
In addition, the sound emission control device 90 changes the lighting state of the second holding lamp portion 49b based on the shift command transmitted from the MPU 62 . Specifically, the sound emission control device 90 reduces the lighting number of the second reservation lamp portion 49b as the number of reserved game balls that have entered the lower opening 37 decreases.

FIG. 15 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the fluctuation start process.
In the fluctuation start process, the MPU 62 executes steps S701 to S718 as shown in FIG.
In step S701, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the winning lottery mode is the high probability mode.
When the MPU 62 determines in step S701 that the win/loss lottery mode is not the high-probability mode, in step S702, the win/fail table for the low-probability mode (see FIG. 7A) is stored in the win/fail table storage area 63a of the ROM 63. If it is determined in step S701 that the win/loss lottery mode is the high-probability mode, the win/fail table for the high-probability mode (see FIG. 7B) is read out from the win/fail table storage area 63a of the ROM 63 in step S703. read out.

After executing the process of step S702 or step S703, the MPU 62 executes the suitability determination process in step S704. In this success/failure determination process, the MPU 62 compares the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE with the success/failure table read out in step S702 or step S703 to obtain the result of the success/failure lottery (result of success/failure). judge. In addition, as described above, the winning result is one of "big win winning", "special losing result", and "normal losing result". The same is true for

In step S705, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the win/loss result determined in step S704 is "big hit". If the MPU 62 determines in step S705 that the win/loss result is "jackpot winning", it executes the processing from step S706 onwards. , the processing after step S712 is executed.

First, in step S705, the process (process after step S706) when it is determined by the MPU 62 that the winning result is "big hit winning" will be described.
In step S706, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the second result display flag is set in the RAM 64. FIG.

When the MPU 62 determines in step S706 that the second result display section flag is not set in the RAM 64, the first result display section 45a based on the winning of the game ball to the upper operation opening 36 starts a variable display. Therefore, in step S707, the first distribution table (see FIG. 8A) is read from the distribution table storage area 63b of the ROM 63. FIG.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines that the second result display section flag is set in the RAM 64 in step S706, the second result display section 45b based on the winning of the game ball to the lower opening 37 , the second sorting table (see FIG. 8B) is read from the sorting table storage area 63b of the ROM 63 in step S708.

After performing the process of step S707 or step S708, MPU62 performs a distribution determination process in step S709. In this distribution determination process, the MPU 62 compares the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE with the distribution table read out in step S707 or step S708 to determine the result of the distribution lottery ( distribution result).

In step S710, the MPU 62 executes a stop result setting process for the jackpot result. In this stop result setting process for the jackpot result, the MPU 62 determines in step S709 the information related to the pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on the first result display section 45a or the second result display section 45b of the main display section 45. A decision is made according to the sorting result, and the decided information is stored in the RAM 64 . Here, the MPU 62 compares the allocation result determined in step S709 with the stop result table for the jackpot result stored in advance in the ROM 63, and determines the pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on the main display unit 45. Determine relevant information. The stop result table for the jackpot result defines the mode of the pattern to be stopped and displayed on the main display unit 45 so as to be different for each sorting result.

In step S711, the MPU 62 sets a flag in the RAM 64 according to the distribution result determined in step S709. Specifically, when the MPU 62 specifies that the distribution result is the "non-explicit small round high-probability result", the MPU 62 sets the non-explicit small-round high-probability result flag and sets the "explicit small round high-probability result , the explicit few-round high-probability result flag is set, and when the ``most favorable result'' is identified, the most favorable result flag is set. Then, MPU62 performs the process after step S716.
In addition, in each of the following processes, the MPU 62 executes determination of the distribution result by referring to these flags.

Next, the process (process after step S712) when it is determined by the MPU 62 that the win/loss result is not "big win winning" in step S705 will be described.
In step S712, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the win/loss result determined in step S704 is the "special losing result".
If the MPU 62 determines in step S712 that the win/loss result is the "special failure result", it executes the processing from step S713 onwards, and if it determines that the success/failure result is not the "special failure result" in step S712. , the process after step S715 is executed.

In step S713, the MPU 62 executes stop result setting processing for the special outlier result. In this stop result setting process for the special outlier result, the MPU 62 determines information related to the pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on the first result display section 45a or the second result display section 45b of the main display section 45, and The information obtained is stored in the RAM 64 . Here, the MPU 62 refers to the stop result table for special outlier results stored in advance in the ROM 63 to determine information related to the pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on the main display section 45 . The mode of the picture set in the stop result table for the special winning result is different from the mode of the picture set in the stop result table for the big win result.
At step S714, the MPU 62 sets a special out flag in the RAM 64. FIG.
In each of the following processes, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the win/loss result is a "special loss result" by referring to this special loss flag.

On the other hand, in step S715, the MPU 62 executes the stop result setting process for the normal deviation result. In this stop result setting process for the out-of-normal result, the MPU 62 determines information related to the pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on the first result display section 45a or the second result display section 45b of the main display section 45, and The information obtained is stored in the RAM 64 . Here, the MPU 62 refers to the stop result table for the normal outlier result stored in the ROM 63 in advance, thereby determining information related to the pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on the main display section 45 . The mode of the picture set in the stopping result table for the normal losing result is different from the mode of the picture set in the stopping result table for the jackpot result and the stopping result table for the special losing result.

After executing any of the processes of steps S711, S714, and S715, the MPU 62 executes a process of setting the display duration (display duration) in step S716.
In the display duration setting process, the MPU 62 acquires the value of the variation type counter CS stored in the variation type counter buffer in the lottery counter buffer of the RAM 64 .

In addition, in the display duration setting process, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the symbol display device 47 will display the ready-to-win state. Specifically, when the distribution result determined in step S709 is the "most favorable result", and the success/failure result determined in step S704 is the "normal outlier result", the reach generation lottery When winning, it is determined that the ready-to-win display occurs. In addition, as described above, the MPU 62 compares the reach table stored in advance in the reach table storage area 63d of the ROM 63 with the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the reserved ball storage area 64b. Run a reach generation lottery.

When determining that the reach display occurs, the MPU 62 refers to the reach generation display duration table stored in the reach table storage area 63 d of the ROM 63, so that the fluctuation type counter obtained from the fluctuation type counter buffer A display continuation time corresponding to the value of CS is determined, and the determined display continuation time is set in a display continuation time counter provided in various counter areas 64 a of the RAM 64 .
On the other hand, when it is determined that the reach display does not occur, the MPU 62 refers to the reach non-occurrence display duration table stored in the reach table storage area 63d of the ROM 63, so that the fluctuation type counter A display continuation time corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS acquired from the buffer is determined, and the determined display continuation time is set in a display continuation time counter provided in the various counter areas 64a of the RAM64.

Specifically, the reach non-occurrence display duration table is set so that the display duration is shortened as the pending number increases. Therefore, the display continuation time for consuming the pending information related to the upper working port 36 is set to be shorter as the number of pending items related to the upper working port 36 increases. Further, the display duration time when the pending information related to the lower working port 37 is consumed is set to be shorter as the number of pending items related to the lower working port 37 increases. Further, the reach non-occurrence display duration table is set so that the display duration is shorter when the support mode is the high-frequency support mode than when it is the low-frequency support mode. In other words, if the pending number is the same, the display duration time in the high-frequency support mode is shorter than that in the low-frequency support mode.
Furthermore, the display duration determined by referring to the reach occurrence display duration table is different from the display duration determined by referring to the reach non-occurrence display duration table.

In addition, the reach non-occurrence display duration table may be set to a relationship opposite to the above-described relationship, such as the display duration becomes longer as the number of holds increases, depending on the number of holds and support mode It may be configured so that it does not fluctuate. Alternatively, the display duration table may be set individually for each of the win/fail result and the sorting result.

In step S717, the MPU 62 sets the variation command and the type command. In step S301 of normal processing, the MPU 62 transmits the command for variation and the type command set in step S717 to the sound emission control device 90. FIG.
Note that the sound emission control device 90 executes predetermined processing based on the variation command and the type command transmitted from the MPU 62 . This processing will be described later in detail.

The variation command includes information related to display duration. Also, the variation command does not include information as to whether or not the ready-to-win display will occur.
Here, as described above, the display duration determined by referring to the reach generation display duration table and the display duration determined by referring to the reach non-occurrence display duration table different.
Therefore, even if the variation command does not include the information on whether or not the ready-to-win display occurs, the ready-to-win display is performed by the sound emission control device 90, which is the sub-side control device, based on the information on the display duration time. It is possible to determine whether or not it occurs. In this sense, it can be said that the variation command indirectly includes information as to whether or not the ready-to-win display will occur. Note that the variation command may directly include information as to whether or not the ready-to-win display will occur.

In addition, the variation command includes information on the lottery mode (low-probability mode or high-probability mode) and information on the support mode (low-frequency support mode or high-frequency support mode). Further, the variable command is variable display information for specifying which of the first result display section 45a and the second result display section 45b is caused to start the variable display when completing a game round. (first variable representation or second variable representation).

The type command includes information related to the win/fail result. In other words, the type command includes each piece of information related to "big win win", "special loss result", and "normal loss result" as information related to win/fail results. Also, the type command includes information related to sorting results. In other words, the type command includes, as information related to the sorting results, information related to "non-explicit few-round high-probability result", "explicit-few round high-probability result", and "best result".
In the following description, the win/fail result and the sorting result are collectively referred to as the game result. In other words, the type command contains information about the game result.

In step S718, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the second result display section flag is set in the RAM 64, and causes the main display section 45 to start variable display based on the determination result. After that, the MPU 62 ends the fluctuation start process.
Specifically, when the MPU 62 determines that the second result display section flag is not set in the RAM 64, the first Since it indicates that the result display section 45a is to start the variable display, the first result display section 45a is caused to start the variable display.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines that the second result display section flag is set in the RAM 64, the second Since it indicates that the result display section 45b is to start the variable display, the second result display section 45b is caused to start the variable display.

Returning to the description of the game round control process, the game round progressing process of steps S506 to S509 will be described with reference to FIG.
In step S502, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the main display unit 45 is performing variable display. Execute the process.

In step S506, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the display continuation time set in step S716 of the fluctuation start process has elapsed. Specifically, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the value set in the display continuation time counter of the RAM 64 has become "0" or less. The value of the display duration counter is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed.

When the MPU 62 determines in step S506 that the display continuation time has not elapsed, in step S507, the MPU 62 executes processing for variable display. In this process for variable display, the MPU 62 updates the display on the main display section 45 during variable display. After that, the MPU 62 ends the game round control process.

On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S506 that the display continuation time has elapsed, in step S508, the MPU 62 executes fluctuation end processing. In this fluctuation end processing, the MPU 62 stores the information (main (information related to the pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on the display unit 45). Then, at the end of the game cycle, the MPU 62 executes display control of the main display section 45 so as to display the pattern corresponding to the specified information on the main display section 45 during variable display (variation end execution processing). Note that the fluctuation end processing will be described later in detail.

Here, the pattern finally stopped and displayed on the main display section 45 differs for each type of game result. Therefore, the manager of the game hall or the like can confirm the game result by looking at the main display section 45 at the end of the game round. According to this, the manager of the game hall can easily check whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is being cheated to behave in the same manner as when winning a lottery for generating a big win. can be done systematically.
The display area of the main display section 45 is narrower than that of the display screen G of the pattern display device 47. Compared to Z1 to Z3, it is difficult for the player to recognize. Therefore, at the end of the game cycle, the player checks the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 instead of the main display unit 45 to determine whether or not the player has won the big win. Attention to the screen G can be increased.

In step S509, the MPU 62 sets a fluctuation end command. The MPU 62 transmits the fluctuation end command set in step S509 to the sound emission control device 90 in step S301 of normal processing. After that, the MPU 62 ends the game round control process.
In addition, the sound emission control device 90 executes processing for ending the effect of the game round based on the variation end command transmitted from the MPU 62 . Here, the sound emission control device 90 may be configured to independently end the effect of the game round without requiring reception of the variation end command.

Thus, in this embodiment, the MPU 62 notifies the result of the internal lottery associated with the plurality of pending information stored in the first result display portion pending area Ra or the second result display portion pending area Rb. .
Further, as described above, when the MPU 62 determines that there is reservation information stored in the second result display section reservation area Rb based on the winning of the game ball to the lower operation opening 37, the upper operation opening Priority is given to the reservation information stored in the second result display section reservation area Rb regardless of whether or not there is reservation information stored in the first result display section reservation area Ra based on the winning of the game ball to 36. It is generally set for digestion of game times. In other words, the MPU 62 puts the results of the internal lottery associated with the plurality of pieces of reservation information stored in the second result display section reservation area Rb into the plurality of pieces of reservation information stored in the first result display section reservation area Ra. The results of the internal lottery associated with the

<Electronic support processing>
FIG. 16 is a diagram showing a flowchart of processing for electric support.
In the electrician support process, the MPU 62 executes steps S801 to S809 as shown in FIG.
In step S801, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the character object display unit 46 is performing variable display, that is, whether or not an electric role game cycle is in progress.

When the MPU 62 determines in step S801 that the character object display unit 46 is not performing the variable display, the MPU 62 executes the processing from step S802 onward.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S801 that the character object display unit 46 is performing the variable display, the MPU 62 executes the processing from step S806.

First, the processing (processing after step S802) when it is determined in step S801 that the character object display unit 46 is not performing variable display will be described.
In step S802, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the opening/closing execution mode is in progress.

When the MPU 62 determines in step S802 that the opening/closing execution mode is in progress, the MPU 62 ends the electric support process without executing the processes after step S803. Therefore, when it is determined that the open/close execution mode is in progress, the MPU 62 does not start the progress of the electric role game cycle regardless of whether or not the winning of the game ball to each through gate 41 is detected.
The MPU 62 determines whether or not the opening/closing execution mode is in progress by referring to the opening/closing execution mode flag stored in the RAM 64 .

On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S802 that the open/close execution mode is not in progress, in step S803, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the number RcN of pending electrical work is "0" or less.
When the MPU 62 determines in step S803 that the number RcN of pending electricians is equal to or less than "0", it ends the electrician support process without executing the processes after step S804.
On the other hand, if the MPU 62 determines in step S803 that the number RcN of the electrical work on hold is not equal to or less than "0", then in step S804, the MPU 62 sends the electrical work on hold information stored in the electrical work holding area 64c. An electric role data setting process is executed for setting for the completion of the role game times. After that, in step S805, the MPU 62 causes the character product display unit 46 to start a variable display, executes an electric role fluctuation start process for completing the electric role game round, and ends the electric role support process.
The electric power data setting process in step S804 and the electric power change start process in step S805 will be described in detail below.

FIG. 17 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the electric service data setting process.
In the electrical service data setting process, the MPU 62 executes steps S901 to S904 as shown in FIG.
In step S901, the MPU 62 subtracts 1 from the value of the number RcN of the electrician pending in the electrician pending area 64c to update it.
In step S902, the MPU 62 moves the electrician pending information stored in the storage area of the electrician pending area 64c to the electrician execution area.
In step S903, the MPU 62 executes data shift processing for shifting the electrician pending information stored in the storage area of the electrician pending area 64c. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the electrician pending information stored in each storage area of the electrician pending area 64c to the electrician execution area side.

In step S904, the MPU 62 sets a shift-time command for recognizing that the shift of the electric work hold information has been executed, transmits this set shift-time command to the sound emission control device 90, and performs electric work data setting processing. exit. This command at the time of shift is a voice indicating that the shift of the electrical work holding information stored in the storage area of the electrical work holding area 64c is executed based on the winning of the game ball to each through gate 41. It contains information for the light emission control device 90 to recognize.
In addition, the sound emission control device 90 changes the lighting state of the third reservation lamp portion 49c based on the shift command transmitted from the MPU 62 . Specifically, the sound emission control device 90 reduces the lighting number of the third reservation lamp portion 49c as the number of the game balls winning the through gate 41 is reduced.

FIG. 18 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the electric duty change start process.
In the electric power fluctuation start process, the MPU 62 executes steps S1001 to S1010 as shown in FIG.
In step S1001, the MPU 62 determines whether the support mode is the high frequency support mode.
The MPU 62 determines whether the support mode is the high frequency support mode by determining whether the high frequency support flag is set in the RAM 64 . This high frequency support flag will be described later in detail.

If the MPU 62 determines in step S1001 that the support mode is not the high-frequency support mode (if it determines that the support mode is the low-frequency support mode), in step S1002, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the electrical work for the low-frequency support mode is appropriate. The table (see FIG. 6A) is read out from the electrical work propriety table storage area 63c of the ROM 63, and if it is determined in step S1001 that the support mode is the high frequency support mode, in step S1003, the high frequency support mode is selected. The electric work propriety table (see FIG. 6B) is read out from the electric work propriety table storage area 63c of the ROM 63. FIG.

After executing the processing of step S1002 or step S1003, the MPU 62 executes electric work propriety determination processing in step S1004. In this electric role right/wrong determination process, the MPU 62 compares the value of the electric role product opening counter C4 stored in the lottery counter buffer of the RAM 64 with the electric role right/wrong table read in step S1002 or step S1003. , Determine the result of the electric role open lottery (electric role right or wrong result).
Note that, as described above, the result of success or failure of the electric call is either "won an electric call open" or "result of an unopened electric call", and even if the support mode is the low-frequency support mode, the high-frequency support mode is selected. The same is true for

In step S1005, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the result of winning the electric role determined in step S1004 is "open winning".
When the MPU 62 determines in step S1005 that the electric role winning result is "electric role open winning", in step S1006, the MPU 62 executes stop result setting processing for electric role open winning. In this stopping result setting process for electric role open winning, the MPU 62 causes the RAM 64 to store information relating to the pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on the character object display section 46 . Here, the MPU 62 refers to the stop result table for electric role open winning stored in advance in the ROM 63 to determine information related to the pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on the character object display section 46 .

On the other hand, if the MPU 62 determines in step S1005 that the result of winning the electric role is not "winning the electric role open" (if it determines that the result is "unable to open the electric role"), in step S1007, Execute the stop result setting process for the result of disconnection of electric power. In this stop result setting process for the electric role release result, the MPU 62 causes the RAM 64 to store information relating to the pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on the character object display section 46 . Here, the MPU 62 refers to the stop result table for the result of unlocked electric power stored in the ROM 63 in advance, thereby determining information related to the pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on the character object display section 46 .

After executing the process of step S1006 or step S1007, the MPU 62 executes a setting process of the electric role display duration (electric role display duration) in step S1008.
In the processing for setting the electric duty display duration time, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the support mode is the high-frequency support mode.

When the MPU 62 determines that the support mode is the high-frequency support mode, the MPU 62 refers to the high-frequency support mode electric duty display duration table stored in the ROM 63 to determine the electric duty display duration. , the determined electric duty display duration time is set in the electric duty display duration counter provided in the various counter areas 64 a of the RAM 64 .
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines that the support mode is not the high-frequency support mode (when it determines that the support mode is the low-frequency support mode), The electric combination display duration time is determined by referring to the winning combination display duration table, and the determined electric combination display duration time is set in the electric combination display duration counter provided in the various counter areas 64 a of the RAM 64 .

Here, the electric duty display duration table for the high-frequency support mode is set so that the electric duty display duration time is shorter than the electric duty display duration table for the low-frequency support mode. In other words, the duration of the electric role display in the high-frequency support mode is shorter than that in the low-frequency support mode.
In addition, the telephone display duration determined by referring to the telephone display duration table for the high-frequency support mode is determined by referring to the telephone display duration table for the low-frequency support mode. It is different from the combination display duration time.
It should be noted that the electric role display continuation time may be configured so as not to vary according to the support mode. Further, the electric role display duration table for the high frequency support mode and the electric duty display duration table for the low frequency support mode may be the same.

In step S1009, the MPU 62 sets a power change command. This electric role change command includes information related to the electric role display duration time. The MPU 62 transmits the electric role change command set in step S1009 to the sound emission control device 90 in step S301 of normal processing.
In addition, the sound emission control device 90 executes a predetermined process based on the electric role change command transmitted from the MPU 62 .

In step S1010, the MPU 62 causes the character object display section 46 to start variable display.
After that, the MPU 62 terminates the power fluctuation start process.

Returning to the description of the electric support process, the processes after step S806 will be described with reference to FIG.
In step S801, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the character object display unit 46 is in the process of changing display. to run.

In step S806, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the electric duty display continuation time set in step S1008 of the electric duty change start process has elapsed. Specifically, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the value set in the electric role display continuation time counter of the RAM 64 has become "0" or less. It should be noted that the value of the electric role display continuation time counter is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt processing is executed.

When the MPU 62 determines in step S806 that the electric role display continuation time has not elapsed, in step S807, the MPU 62 executes an electric role change display process. In this electric role variable display processing, the MPU 62 updates the display of the character object display section 46 during variable display. After that, the MPU 62 terminates the electronic support process.

On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S806 that the electric duty display continuation time has passed, in step S808, the MPU 62 executes the electric duty fluctuation ending process. In this electric role variation ending process, the MPU 62 stores the information (the role item (information related to the pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on the display unit 46). Then, at the end of the electric role game cycle, the MPU 62 executes display control of the character object display unit 46 so that the pattern corresponding to the specified information is displayed on the character object display unit 46 during variable display ( power fluctuation end execution processing). Note that the electric duty fluctuation ending process will be described later in detail.

In step S809, the MPU 62 sets an electric duty change end command. In step S301 of the normal processing, the MPU 62 transmits the electric role change end command set in step S809 to the sound emission control device 90. FIG. After that, the MPU 62 terminates the electronic support process.
In addition, the sound emission control device 90 executes a process for ending the effect of the electric role game round based on the electric role variation end command transmitted from the MPU 62 . Here, the sound emission control device 90 may be configured so as to independently end the effect of the electric role game round without requiring reception of the electric role variation end command.

<Game state transition processing>
FIG. 19 is a diagram showing a flowchart of game state transition processing.
In the game state transition process, the MPU 62 executes steps S1101 to S1114 as shown in FIG.
In step S1101, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the opening/closing execution mode is in progress.
When the MPU 62 determines in step S1101 that the opening/closing execution mode is not in progress, the MPU 62 executes the processing from step S1102.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1101 that the opening/closing execution mode is in progress, the processing from step S1111 onwards is executed.

First, the processing (processing after step S1102) when it is determined in step S1101 that the MPU 62 is not in the opening/closing execution mode will be described.
In step S1102, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the variable display on the main display section 45 has ended. When the MPU 62 determines in step S1102 that the variable display on the main display section 45 has not ended, it ends the game state transition processing.
On the other hand, if the MPU 62 determines in step S1102 that the variable display on the main display section 45 has ended, it determines in step S1103 whether the win/fail result corresponds to the transition to the opening/closing execution mode. determine whether Specifically, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the win/loss result is "big win winning" or "special losing result".

When the MPU 62 determines in step S1103 that the result corresponds to the transition to the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 62 sets an opening/closing execution mode flag in the RAM 64, and then executes the processing from step S1104.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1103 that the win/fail result does not correspond to the transition to the opening/closing execution mode (if it determines that the win/fail result is the "normal deviation result"), the game Terminate state transition processing.

In step S1104, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the win/loss result is a "special loss result".
When the MPU 62 determines in step S1104 that the win/fail result is the "special loss result", in step S1105 the open/close counter SOC provided in the various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64 is set to "2". This opening/closing counter SOC is a counter for specifying the total number of times the MPU 62 opens and closes the big winning opening 38a of the variable winning device 38 when shifting to the opening/closing execution mode.

On the other hand, if the MPU 62 determines in step S1104 that the win/loss result is not the "special loss result", that is, if it determines that the win/loss result is "jackpot", in step S1106, the distribution result is a small-round high-probability result ("implicit small-round high-probability result" or "explicit small-round high-probability result").

When the MPU 62 determines in step S1106 that the result of allocation is a small round high probability result, in step S1107 the round counter RC provided in the various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64 is set to "2". Further, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1106 that the distribution result is not a high-probability result for a small number of rounds, that is, when it determines that the distribution result is the "best result", in step S1108, the round counter RC is set to "4". This round counter RC is a counter for specifying the number of round games by the MPU 62 when shifting to the opening/closing execution mode.

Here, the pachinko machine 10 has a plurality of opening/closing execution modes with mutually different end conditions. Specifically, the pachinko machine 10 has, as opening/closing execution modes, a number-of-rounds stipulation mode that shifts to when the win/fail result is a "jackpot win", and an opening/closing number mode to shift to when the win/fail result is a "special losing result". and a prescribed mode.

The round number regulation mode ends on the condition that a predetermined number of round games have been executed. Here, the number of round games corresponds to the value set in the round counter RC.
The opening/closing number regulation mode ends under the condition that the large winning opening 38a has been opened and closed a predetermined total number of times, or that a predetermined number of game balls have won the large winning opening 38a. Here, the total number of openings and closings of the big winning opening 38a corresponds to the value set in the opening/closing counter SOC. This opening/closing number regulation mode does not end under the condition of the number of executions of the round game.

In addition, the pachinko machine 10 executes opening and closing of the big winning opening 38a once per round game. Also, one round game continues until one of the following two conditions is satisfied. In other words, after setting the opening/closing door 38b to the open state, the pachinko machine 10 sets the opening/closing door 38b to the closed state again by satisfying one of the following two conditions.
(1) Elapse of a predetermined upper limit duration (upper limit duration) (2) The total winning number of game balls into the big winning opening 38a reaches a predetermined upper limit number

After executing any of the processes of steps S1105, S1107, and S1108, the MPU 62 sets the timer counter T provided in the various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64 as waiting time (waiting period) for opening in step S1109. Set "1000". The value set in the timer counter T is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed. Therefore, the waiting time for opening is 2 seconds. The waiting time for opening is not limited to this and is arbitrary.

As described above, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1103 that the win/fail result corresponds to the transition to the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 62 sets the waiting time for opening to the timer counter T regardless of the type of the game result. set. In other words, the waiting time for opening is the same regardless of the type of game result.
The waiting time for the opening is not limited to this, and for example, it may be configured to be subtly different according to the type of game result to such an extent that the player recognizes the same.
In addition, for example, the waiting time for the opening is greatly different depending on the type of game result, such as when the game result is the "best result" and when it is a game result other than these. It is good also as a structure which makes it different.

At step S1110, the MPU 62 sets an opening command. After that, the MPU 62 terminates the game state transition process. This opening command includes information on the game result that triggered the transition to the opening/closing execution mode. The MPU 62 transmits the opening command set in step S1110 to the sound emission control device 90 in step S301 of normal processing.
Note that the sound emission control device 90 recognizes the transition to the opening/closing execution mode based on the opening command transmitted from the MPU 62, and executes predetermined processing. This processing will be described later in detail.

Next, processing (processing after step S1111) when the MPU 62 determines in step S1101 that the open/close execution mode is in progress will be described.
In step S1111, the MPU 62 executes a big winning opening opening/closing process.

FIG. 20 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the big winning opening opening/closing process.
In the big winning opening opening/closing process, the MPU 62 executes steps S1201 to S1224 as shown in FIG.
In step S1201, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the big winning opening 38a is open.
When the MPU 62 determines in step S1201 that the large winning opening 38a is not open, it executes the processing from step S1202.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1201 that the big winning opening 38a is open, it executes the processing from step S1206.

First, in step S1201, the processing (processing after step S1202) when it is determined by the MPU 62 that the big winning opening 38a is not open will be described.
In step S1202, the MPU 62 determines whether the value of the open/close counter SOC is "0" or less and the value of the round counter RC is "0" or less.
When the MPU 62 determines in step S1202 that both the value of the opening/closing counter SOC and the value of the round counter RC are equal to or less than "0", the MPU 62 ends the big winning opening opening/closing process.

On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1202 that at least one of the value of the open/close counter SOC and the value of the round counter RC is not equal to or less than "0", in step S1203, the timer counter T Determines whether the value is less than or equal to "0".
When the MPU 62 determines in step S1203 that the value of the timer counter T is not equal to or less than "0", it ends the big winning opening opening/closing process.

On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1203 that the value of the timer counter T is equal to or less than "0", in step S1204, it executes a special winning opening opening process.
The special winning opening opening process of step S1204 will be described in detail below.

FIG. 21 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the big winning opening opening process.
In the big winning opening opening process, the MPU 62 executes steps S1301 to S1307 as shown in FIG.
In step S1301, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the hit/fail result is a "special loss result".

When the MPU 62 determines in step S1301 that the win/fail result is the "special loss result", in step S1302, the MPU 62 sets "8" to the winning counter PC provided in the various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64, and At S1303, the timer counter T is set to "85". As described above, the timer counter T is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed. Therefore, the time set in the timer counter T is 0.17 sec.

On the other hand, if the MPU 62 determines in step S1301 that the win/fail result is not the "special loss result", in step S1304, it sets the winning counter PC to "8", and in step S1305, the distribution result is a small-round high-probability result ("implicit small-round high-probability result" or "explicit small-round high-probability result").

When the MPU 62 determines in step S1305 that the result of allocation is the small round high probability result, it sets the timer counter T to "85" in step S1303.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1305 that the allocation result is not the small round high probability result, it sets the timer counter T to "15000" in step S1306. As described above, the timer counter T is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed. Therefore, the time set in the timer counter T is 30 seconds.

After executing the processing of step S1303 or step S1306, the MPU 62 executes opening execution processing of the big winning opening 38a in step S1307. In this opening execution process, the MPU 62 sets the open/close door 38b to the open state by executing the drive control of the variable winning driving section 38c. After that, the MPU 62 ends the big winning opening opening process.

The value set in the winning counter PC in step S1302 or step S1304 defines the upper limit of the total winning number of game balls into the big winning opening 38a.
Also, the value set in the timer counter T in step S1303 or step S1306 defines the upper limit duration time from when the opening/closing door 38b is set to the open state to when it is set to the closed state again. Therefore, the MPU 62 sets two types of upper limit duration time with different lengths by setting the timer counter T to "85" or "15000", as described above. Specifically, the MPU 62 has a long-time mode (long-term mode) in which the upper limit duration is set to 30 sec, and a short-time mode (short-term mode) in which the upper limit duration is set to 0.17 sec, which is shorter than that of the long-time mode. aspect).

Here, as described above, the pachinko machine 10 causes the game ball shooting mechanism 81 to shoot a game ball by exciting the solenoid of the game ball shooting mechanism 81 at a cycle of 0.6 sec. Further, as described above, the MPU 62 sets the upper limit of the total winning number of game balls to the big winning opening 38a to eight by setting the winning counter PC to "8".
Therefore, the upper limit duration of the long time mode is sufficiently longer than the product of the upper limit of the total winning number of game balls into the big winning hole 38a and the firing cycle of the game balls, so the upper limit of 8 game balls is easy to win in the big prize opening 38a.
On the other hand, the upper limit duration of the short-time mode is shorter than the product of the upper limit of the total winning number of game balls into the big winning hole 38a and the shooting cycle of the game balls. (shorter than the period), it is difficult to let the game ball enter the big winning hole 38a. Depending on the timing, it is possible to win about one game ball into the big winning hole 38a.

Returning to the explanation of the big winning opening opening/closing process, the processes after step S1205 will be explained with reference to FIG.
MPU62 sets an opening command in step S1205, after performing the big winning a prize opening opening process of step S1204. In addition, the MPU 62 transmits the open command set in step S1205 to the sound emission control device 90 in step S301 of normal processing. After that, the MPU 62 ends the big winning opening opening/closing process.
Based on the open command transmitted from the MPU 62, the sound emission control device 90 recognizes that the opening/closing door 38b has been set to the open state, and executes predetermined processing.

Next, the processing (processing after step S1206) when it is determined by the MPU 62 that the big winning opening 38a is being opened in step S1201 will be described.
In step S1206, the MPU 62 determines whether the value of the timer counter T is "0" or less. That is, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the upper limit continuation time set in the timer counter T in step S1303 or step S1306 of the special winning opening opening process has elapsed.

When the MPU 62 determines in step S1206 that the value of the timer counter T is not equal to or less than "0", it executes the processing from step S1207.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1206 that the value of the timer counter T is equal to or less than "0", it executes the processing from step S1218.

First, processing (processing after step S1207) when the MPU 62 determines in step S1206 that the value of the timer counter T is not equal to or less than "0" will be described.
In step S1207, the MPU 62 determines whether or not a prize has been awarded to the large prize winning opening 38a. It should be noted that the determination as to whether or not a prize has been awarded to the large winning opening 38a is executed based on the detection result of the detection sensor 40d corresponding to the large winning opening 38a.

When the MPU 62 determines in step S1207 that no prize has been awarded to the large winning opening 38a, the MPU 62 ends the large winning opening opening/closing process.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1207 that a prize has been awarded to the big prize opening 38a, in step S1208, the value of the prize counter PC is updated by subtracting 1 from it.

In step S1209, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the value of the winning counter PC is "0" or less.
When the MPU 62 determines in step S1209 that the value of the winning counter PC is not "0" or less, the MPU 62 ends the big winning opening opening/closing process.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1209 that the value of the winning counter PC is equal to or less than "0", in step S1210 the closing execution process is executed. In this closing execution process, the MPU 62 sets the open/close door 38b to the closed state by executing the drive control of the variable winning driving section 38c.

In step S1211, the MPU 62 sets a closing command. The MPU 62 transmits the closing command set in step S1211 to the sound emission control device 90 in step S301 of normal processing.
Based on the closing command transmitted from the MPU 62, the sound emission control device 90 recognizes that the opening/closing door 38b has been set to the closed state, and executes predetermined processing.

In step S1212, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the win/loss result is a "special loss result".
When the MPU 62 determines in step S1212 that the win/fail result is the "special loss result", the MPU 62 executes the processes after step S1223, which will be described later.

On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1212 that the win/fail result is not the "special loss result", it executes the processing from step S1213.
In step S1213, the MPU 62 subtracts 1 from the value of the round counter RC to update it.

In step S1214, the MPU 62 determines whether the value of the round counter RC is "0" or less.
When the MPU 62 determines in step S1214 that the value of the round counter RC is not "0" or less, it sets the value of the timer counter T to "500" in step S1215. After that, the MPU 62 ends the big winning opening opening/closing process.

Here, the value set in the timer counter T in step S1215 is the open standby time from when the open/close door 38b is set to the open state to the closed state until the open/close door 38b is set to the open state again. stipulates the time. In addition, in this embodiment, the release waiting time is 1 sec. This opening standby time is the same regardless of the type and progress of the opening/closing execution mode.

On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1214 that the value of the round counter RC is equal to or less than "0", it executes the processing from step S1216.
In step S1216, the MPU 62 sets the timer counter T to "2000" as the waiting time (waiting period) for ending. As described above, the value set in the timer counter T is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed. Therefore, the waiting time for the ending is 4 seconds. Note that the waiting time for the ending is not limited to this and is arbitrary.

The waiting time for the ending is the same regardless of the type of game result, like the waiting time for the opening. That is, the waiting time for this ending is the same regardless of the type of opening/closing execution mode.
The waiting time for the ending is not limited to this. For example, it may be configured to be slightly different according to the type of game result to the extent that the player recognizes the same.
In addition, for example, the waiting time for the ending is greatly different depending on the type of game result, such as when the game result is the "best result" and when the game result is other than this. It is good also as a structure which makes it different.

In step S1217, the MPU 62 sets an ending command. The MPU 62 transmits the ending command set in step S1217 to the sound emission control device 90 in step S301 of normal processing. After that, the MPU 62 ends the big winning opening opening/closing process.
The sound emission control device 90 recognizes the end of the opening/closing execution mode based on the ending command transmitted from the MPU 62, and executes predetermined processing.

Next, the processing (processing after step S1218) when the MPU 62 determines in step S1206 that the value of the timer counter T is "0" or less will be described.
In step S1218, the MPU 62 executes closing execution processing in the same manner as in step S1210 described above.
In step S1219, the MPU 62 sets a closing command as in step S1211 described above.

In step S1220, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the win/loss result is a "special loss result".
If the MPU 62 determines in step S1220 that the win/loss result is not the "special loss result", that is, if it determines that the win/loss result is the "big win", it executes the processing from step S1221 onwards.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1220 that the win/fail result is the "special loss result", it executes the processing from step S1223 onwards.

First, the processing (processing after step S1221) when the MPU 62 determines in step S1220 that the win/fail result is not the "special losing result" will be described.
In step S1221, the MPU 62 subtracts 1 from the value of the round counter RC to update it.

In step S1222, the MPU 62 determines whether the value of the round counter RC is "0" or less.
When the MPU 62 determines in step S1222 that the value of the round counter RC is not equal to or less than "0", it executes the processes after step S1215 described above.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1222 that the value of the round counter RC is equal to or less than "0", it executes the above-described processing from S1216 onward.

Next, processing (processing after step S1223) when the MPU 62 determines that the win/fail result is the “special losing result” in step S1212 or step S1220 will be described.
In step S1223, the MPU 62 subtracts 1 from the value of the open/close counter SOC to update it.

In step S1224, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the value of the open/close counter SOC is "0" or less.
When the MPU 62 determines in step S1224 that the value of the open/close counter SOC is not equal to or less than "0", the MPU 62 executes the processes after step S1215 described above.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1224 that the value of the open/close counter SOC is equal to or less than "0", it executes the processes from S1216 onward.

Returning to the description of the game state transition processing, the processing after step S1112 will be described with reference to FIG.
After executing the big winning opening opening/closing process in step S1111, the MPU 62 checks whether the value of the opening/closing counter SOC is "0" or less and the value of the round counter RC is "0" or less in step S1112. judge.

When the MPU 62 determines in step S1112 that at least one of the value of the open/close counter SOC and the value of the round counter RC is not "0" or less, it ends the game state transition processing.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1112 that both the value of the open/close counter SOC and the value of the round counter RC are less than or equal to "0", in step S1113 the value of the timer counter T becomes " 0” or less.

When the MPU 62 determines in step S1113 that the value of the timer counter T is not "0" or less, it ends the game state transition processing.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1113 that the value of the timer counter T is "0" or less, in step S1114, after clearing the opening/closing execution mode flag stored in the RAM 64, Execute transition processing at the end of open/close execution mode.
After that, the MPU 62 terminates the game state transition process.
The transition processing at the end of the opening/closing execution mode will be described in detail below.

FIG. 22 is a diagram showing a flowchart of transition processing when the opening/closing execution mode ends.
In the transition process at the end of the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 62 executes steps S1401 to S1406 as shown in FIG.
In step S1401, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the game result is a "special loss result".

When the MPU 62 determines in step S1401 that the game result is the "special loss result", the MPU 62 terminates the transition processing when the opening/closing execution mode ends without executing the processing after step S1402.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1401 that the game result is not the "special loss result" (when it determines that the game result is a "jackpot win"), in step S1402, the MPU 62 stores the 2 Determine whether the result display section flag is set.

When the MPU 62 determines that the second result display section flag is not set in the RAM 64 in step S1402, the first result display section 45a based on the winning of the game ball to the upper operation port 36 starts the variable display. Therefore, the first support mode setting process in step S1403 is executed. This first support mode setting process is a process of setting the support mode to the low-frequency support mode or the high-frequency support mode after the opening/closing execution mode, which has shifted to the upper working port 36 as a trigger for winning a prize, is ended.

On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines that the second result display section flag is set in the RAM 64 in step S1402, the second result display section 45b based on the winning of the game ball to the lower opening 37 , the second support mode setting process of step S1404 is executed. This second support mode setting process is a process of setting the support mode to the low-frequency support mode or the high-frequency support mode after the opening/closing execution mode, which has shifted to the lower opening 37 with the winning of a game ball as a trigger, ends.
The first support mode setting process in step S1403 and the second support mode setting process in step S1404 will be described in detail below.

FIG. 23 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the first support mode setting process.
In the first support mode setting process, the MPU 62 executes steps S1501 to S1512 as shown in FIG.
In step S1501, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the winning lottery mode is the high probability mode. When the MPU 62 determines in step S1501 that the win/fail lottery mode is the high probability mode, the MPU 62 executes support mode setting processing for the high probability mode in steps S1502 to S1507. If it is determined that the mode is not the probability mode, a support mode setting process for the low probability mode in steps S1508 to S1512 is executed.

First, support mode setting processing for the high probability mode in steps S1502 to S1507 will be described.
In step S1502, the MPU 62 determines whether the support mode is the high frequency support mode.

When the MPU 62 determines in step S1502 that the support mode is the high frequency support mode, the MPU 62 clears the high frequency support flag stored in the RAM 64 in step S1503. Thereby, the MPU 62 sets the support mode to the low-frequency support mode.
In step S1504, the MPU 62 sets the value of the number-of-games counter RTC provided in the various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64 to "0".

On the other hand, if the MPU 62 determines in step S1502 that the support mode is not the high-frequency support mode (if it determines that the support mode is the low-frequency support mode), in step S1505 the high-frequency support flag is set in the RAM 64. The MPU 62 maintains the high frequency support flag if it is already set in the RAM 64 . Thereby, the MPU 62 sets the support mode to the high frequency support mode.
In step S1506, the MPU 62 sets the value of the number-of-games counter RTC provided in the various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64 to "1".
In step S1507, the MPU 62 sets a short-term high-frequency support mode command. The MPU 62 transmits the short-term high-frequency support mode command set in step S1507 to the sound emission control device 90 in step S301 of normal processing.
Note that the sound emission control device 90 executes predetermined processing based on the short-term high-frequency support mode command transmitted from the MPU 62 . This processing will be described later in detail.

After executing the process of step S1504 or the process of step S1507, the MPU 62 ends the first support mode setting process.

Next, support mode setting processing for the low probability mode in steps S1508 to S1512 will be described.
In step S1508, the MPU 62 determines whether the support mode is the high frequency support mode.

When the MPU 62 determines in step S1508 that the support mode is the high frequency support mode, the MPU 62 sets a high frequency support flag in the RAM 64 in step S1509. The MPU 62 maintains the high frequency support flag if it is already set in the RAM 64 . Thereby, the MPU 62 sets the support mode to the high frequency support mode.
At step S1510, the MPU 62 sets the value of the number-of-games counter RTC provided in the various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64 to "34".

On the other hand, if the MPU 62 determines in step S1508 that the support mode is not the high-frequency support mode (if it determines that the support mode is the low-frequency support mode), in step S1511, the data stored in the RAM 64 clear the high-frequency support flag. Thereby, the MPU 62 sets the support mode to the low-frequency support mode.
At step S1512, the MPU 62 sets the value of the number-of-games counter RTC provided in the various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64 to "0".

After executing the process of step S1510 or the process of step S1512, the MPU 62 ends the first support mode setting process.

FIG. 24 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the second support mode setting process.
In the second support mode setting process, the MPU 62 executes steps S1601 to S1611 as shown in FIG.
In step S1601, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the winning lottery mode is the high probability mode. If the MPU 62 determines in step S1601 that the win/fail lottery mode is the high probability mode, the MPU 62 executes support mode setting processing for the high probability mode in steps S1602 to S1606. If it is determined that the mode is not the probability mode, a support mode setting process for the low probability mode in steps S1607 to S1611 is executed.

First, support mode setting processing for the high probability mode in steps S1602 to S1606 will be described.
In step S1602, the MPU 62 determines whether the support mode is the high frequency support mode.

When the MPU 62 determines in step S1602 that the support mode is the high frequency support mode, the MPU 62 sets a high frequency support flag in the RAM 64 in step S1603. The MPU 62 maintains the high frequency support flag if it is already set in the RAM 64 . Thereby, the MPU 62 sets the support mode to the high frequency support mode.
At step S1604, the MPU 62 sets the value of the number-of-games counter RTC provided in the various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64 to "34".

On the other hand, if the MPU 62 determines in step S1602 that the support mode is not the high-frequency support mode (if it determines that the support mode is the low-frequency support mode), in step S1605 the data stored in the RAM 64 clear the high-frequency support flag. Thereby, the MPU 62 sets the support mode to the low-frequency support mode.
In step S1606, the MPU 62 sets the value of the number-of-games counter RTC provided in the various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64 to "0".

After executing the process of step S1604 or the process of step S1606, the MPU 62 ends the second support mode setting process.

Next, support mode setting processing for the low probability mode in steps S1607 to S1611 will be described.
In step S1607, the MPU 62 determines whether the support mode is the high frequency support mode.

When the MPU 62 determines in step S1607 that the support mode is the high frequency support mode, the MPU 62 sets a high frequency support flag in the RAM 64 in step S1608. The MPU 62 maintains the high frequency support flag if it is already set in the RAM 64 . Thereby, the MPU 62 sets the support mode to the high frequency support mode.
In step S1609, the MPU 62 sets the value of the number-of-games counter RTC provided in the various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64 to "34".

On the other hand, if the MPU 62 determines in step S1607 that the support mode is not the high-frequency support mode (if it determines that the support mode is the low-frequency support mode), in step S1610 the high-frequency support flag is set in the RAM 64. The MPU 62 maintains the high frequency support flag if it is already set in the RAM 64 . Thereby, the MPU 62 sets the support mode to the high frequency support mode.
At step S1611, the MPU 62 sets the value of the number-of-games counter RTC provided in the various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64 to "34".

After executing the process of step S1609 or the process of step S1611, the MPU 62 ends the second support mode setting process.

FIG. 25 shows the value of the number-of-games counter set in the first support mode setting process or the second support mode setting process. Specifically, FIG. 25 shows the first variable display and the second variable display that triggered the transition to the opening/closing execution mode, the win/fail lottery mode and the support mode at the time of transition to the opening/closing execution mode, and the first support mode. It is a figure which shows the relationship with the value of the number-of-games counter RTC which is set in the mode setting process or the second support mode setting process.

The value of the number-of-games counter RTC that is set in the first support mode setting process (the process in the case of shifting to the open/close execution mode triggered by the winning of a game ball into the upper operating port 36) is shown in the left column of FIG. In addition, it differs depending on the combination of the lottery mode and the support mode.
In the case of the combination of the low probability mode and the high frequency support mode, the value of the number-of-games counter RTC is 34 times.
In the case of the combination of the high-probability mode and the low-frequency support mode, the value of the number-of-games counter RTC is one.
In the case of combinations other than these, the value of the number-of-games counter RTC becomes zero. In this case, since the high frequency support flag stored in the RAM 64 is cleared, the support mode is set to the low frequency support mode.

In addition, the value of the number-of-games counter RTC set in the second support mode setting process (the process when shifting to the open/close execution mode triggered by the winning of the game ball into the lower opening 37) is shown in the right column of FIG. As shown, it differs depending on the combination of the lottery mode and the support mode.
In the case of the combination of the high-probability mode and the low-frequency support mode, the value of the number-of-games counter RTC is 0 times. In this case, since the high frequency support flag stored in the RAM 64 is cleared, the support mode is set to the low frequency support mode.
In the case of combinations other than these, the value of the number-of-games counter RTC is 34 times.

Here, the high-frequency support mode continues until one or 34 games, which is the end reference number set in the game number counter RTC, is completed. The MPU 62 clears the high-frequency support flag when one game or 34 games have been completed. Thereby, the MPU 62 sets the support mode to the low-frequency support mode.
In the following description, the high-frequency support mode that continues until one game round, which is the end reference number set in the number-of-games counter RTC, is completed is also referred to as a short-term high-frequency support mode, and is set in the number-of-games counter RTC. The high-frequency support mode that continues until 34 game rounds, which is the end reference number of times, is completed is also referred to as a long-term high-frequency support mode.

The MPU 62 executes these processes in the above-described electric power fluctuation end process of step S808. Note that the electric power fluctuation end processing in step S808 will be described later in detail.

Returning to the description of the transition processing when the opening/closing execution mode ends, the processing after step S1405 will be described with reference to FIG.
After executing the first support mode setting process in step S1403 or the second support mode setting process in step S1404, the MPU 62 sets the high probability mode flag in the RAM 64 in step S1405. The MPU 62 maintains the high-probability mode flag if it has already been set in the RAM 64 . As a result, the MPU 62 sets the win/fail lottery mode to the high probability mode.
In step S1406, the MPU 62 sets "3" to the value of the highly accurate counter STC provided in the various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64. FIG. After that, the MPU 62 terminates the transition processing when the opening/closing execution mode ends.

When ending the transition process at the end of the open/close execution mode, the MPU 62 sets the flags (the non-explicit small round high-probability result flag, the explicit small-round high-probability result flag, and Most advantageous result flag) and special outlier flag are cleared. Further, in step S701 of the fluctuation start process described above, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the high probability mode flag is set in the RAM 64, thereby determining whether or not the win/loss lottery mode is the high probability mode. there is

Here, the high-probability mode continues until three game rounds, which is the end reference number set in the high-probability counter STC, are completed. The MPU 62 clears the high-probability mode flag when three games have been played. As a result, the MPU 62 sets the win/fail lottery mode to the low probability mode.
The MPU 62 executes these processes in the fluctuation end process of step S508 described above. The fluctuation end processing in step S508 will be described in detail below.

FIG. 26 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the fluctuation end processing.
In the fluctuation end process, the MPU 62 executes steps S1701 to S1709 as shown in FIG.
In step S1701, the MPU 62 stores information (main display unit 45, the information relating to the pattern to be finally stopped and displayed) is specified. Then, at the end of the game round, the MPU 62 executes display control of the main display section 45 so as to display the pattern corresponding to the specified information on the main display section 45 during the variable display (variation end execution processing).

In step S1702, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the winning lottery mode is the high probability mode.
When the MPU 62 determines in step S1702 that the lottery mode is not the high probability mode, the MPU 62 executes the processes from step S1706.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1702 that the win/fail lottery mode is the high probability mode, in step S1703, the high probability number set in step S1406 of the transition processing at the end of the opening/closing execution mode The value of the counter STC is decremented by 1 and updated. Here, the variation command set in step S717 described above includes the value of the high-precision number counter STC.
In step S1704, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the highly accurate number counter STC is "0" or less.

When the MPU 62 determines in step S1704 that the high-accuracy number counter STC is not "0" or less, it executes the processing after step S1706.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1704 that the high probability counter STC is "0" or less, it clears the high probability mode flag stored in the RAM 64 in step S1705. As a result, the MPU 62 sets the win/fail lottery mode to the low probability mode.

In this way, when a "big win" is won in the winning lottery, the game state shifts to the high probability mode after the opening/closing execution mode (that is, the round number regulation mode) ends regardless of the current game state. . The high-probability mode continues until three game rounds, which is the end reference number set in the high-probability counter STC, are completed.
Further, when the winning lottery does not result in a "big hit", that is, when the winning result in the winning lottery is a "special losing result" or a "normal losing result", the game state does not shift.

After executing the process of step S1705, if it is determined that the winning lottery mode is not the high probability mode at step S1702, or if it is determined that the high probability number counter STC is not "0" or less at step S1704, the MPU 62 determines in step S1706 whether the support mode is the high frequency support mode.
If the MPU 62 determines in step S1706 that the support mode is not the high-frequency support mode (if it determines that the support mode is the low-frequency support mode), the MPU 62 ends the fluctuation without executing the processing after step S1707. End the process.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1706 that the support mode is the high frequency support mode, in step S1707, the game set in the first support mode setting process or the second support mode setting process The value of the number counter RTC is decremented by 1 and updated. Here, the variation command set in step S717 described above includes the value of the number-of-games counter RTC.

In step S1708, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the number-of-games counter RTC is "0" or less.
When the MPU 62 determines in step S1708 that the number-of-games counter RTC is not equal to or less than "0", it ends the fluctuation end processing without executing the processing after step S1709.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1708 that the number-of-games counter RTC is "0" or less, it clears the high frequency support flag stored in the RAM 64 in step S1709. Thereby, the MPU 62 sets the support mode to the low-frequency support mode. After that, the MPU 62 terminates the fluctuation end processing.

In this way, when the high-frequency support flag is set in the RAM 64 as a result of a "jackpot win" in the winning lottery, the game state is the open/close execution mode (that is, the round number regulation mode) regardless of the current game state. After completion, transition to high-frequency support mode. The high-frequency support mode continues until one game or 34 games, which is the end reference number set in the game counter RTC, is completed.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the transition process and the variation end process at the end of the opening/closing execution mode function as a game state switching section for switching between the low probability mode and the high probability mode.
Specifically, the transition process and the fluctuation end process at the end of the opening and closing execution mode are performed when the result of the internal lottery executed with the entry of the game ball to the upper operation port 36 or the lower operation port 37 as a trigger is won. Switching to high probability mode.
Further, the transition processing and the fluctuation end processing at the end of the opening/closing execution mode are performed by determining the number of pieces of pending information (4 in this embodiment) stored in the second result display portion pending area Rb after switching to the high probability mode. Switching from the high-probability mode to the low-probability mode is triggered by notification of the result of the internal lottery associated with a predetermined number (three in the present embodiment) of pending information, which is less than the high-probability mode.

In this embodiment, the transition process and the fluctuation end process at the end of the opening/closing execution mode are executed as a result of the internal lottery triggered by the entry of the game ball into the upper operation port 36 or the lower operation port 37. When switching to the high-probability mode, and switching from the high-probability mode to the low-probability mode triggered by the notification of the result of the internal lottery associated with a predetermined number (3 in this embodiment) of the pending information, but other than these You may switch a low-probability mode and a high-probability mode based on the conditions of. In short, the game state switching section should switch between the first game state and the second game state.

Further, in the present embodiment, the transition processing and the fluctuation end processing at the end of the opening/closing execution mode are performed by temporarily switching the lower operation port 37 from the low-frequency support mode to the high-frequency support mode after switching to the high-probability mode. It also functions as a state switching unit.

Further, in the present embodiment, the main controller 60 performs opening and closing advantageous to the player based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the upper working opening 36 and the lower working opening 37. It functions as game state transition means for shifting the game state from the normal control state (low probability mode and high probability mode) to the mode.

FIG. 27 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the electric duty fluctuation ending process.
In the electric power fluctuation end process, the MPU 62 executes steps S1801 to S1805 as shown in FIG.
In step S1801, the information (final (information related to the pattern to be stopped and displayed). Then, at the end of the electric role game cycle, the MPU 62 executes display control of the character object display unit 46 so that the pattern corresponding to the specified information is displayed on the character object display unit 46 during variable display ( power fluctuation end execution processing).

In step S1802, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the result of winning the electric role is "Electrical role open winning".
When the MPU 62 determines in step S1802 that the electric role winning result is not "electric role open winning", it ends the electric role variation ending process without executing the processes after step S1803.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1802 that the electric role winning result is "electric role open winning", in step S1803 it determines whether the support mode is the high-frequency support mode. do.

When the MPU 62 determines in step S1803 that the support mode is the high-frequency support mode, in step S1804, the MPU 62 executes high-frequency electric power opening execution processing. In the high-frequency electric role opening execution process, the MPU 62 executes the opening/closing process of the electric role product 37a by executing drive control of the electric role product driving unit 37b.
On the other hand, if the MPU 62 determines in step S1803 that the support mode is not the high-frequency support mode (if it determines that the support mode is the low-frequency support mode), in step S1805, the MPU 62 Execute the role release execution process. In the low-frequency electric role opening execution process, the MPU 62 executes the opening/closing process of the electric role product 37a by executing drive control of the electric role product driving unit 37b.
After executing the high-frequency power supply opening execution process in step S1804 or the low-frequency power supply opening execution process in step S1805, the MPU 62 ends the power supply fluctuation end process.

Here, in the high-frequency electric role opening execution process, when the electric accessory opening lottery is won, the number of times the electric accessory 37a is set to the open state is greater than in the low-frequency electric role opening execution process. , the opening time for setting the electric accessory 37a to the open state is also longer. In addition, in the high-frequency power supply opening execution process, the closed time for setting the electric accessory 37a to the closed state between each opening in one power supply open state is shorter than the opening time of one time. ing.

Therefore, in the high-frequency support mode, game balls are more likely to enter the lower operation opening 37 as compared with the low-frequency support mode. In other words, in the low frequency support mode, the game ball has a higher probability of winning in the upper working opening 36 than in the lower working opening 37 . In addition, in the high-frequency support mode, the probability that the game ball will enter the lower operating port 37 is higher than the upper operating port 36.例文帳に追加
When it is detected that a prize has been entered into the lower operating port 37, a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out. Therefore, in the high-frequency support mode, the player can play the game while not reducing the number of game balls. It can be carried out.

<Electrical Configuration of Audio Light Emission Control Device 90 and Display Control Device 100>
FIG. 28 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the sound emission control device and the display control device.
As shown in FIG. 28, the sound emission control device 90 includes a sound emission control board 91, an MPU 92 mounted on the sound emission control board 91, and a ROM 93 and a RAM 94 that constitute the MPU 92. Here, the MPU 92 is an element in which a CPU, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, etc., as well as the ROM 93 and the RAM 94, are integrated into a chip.

The ROM 93 is a memory for storing various control programs and fixed value data, and is non-volatile storage means that does not require power supply from the outside to hold stored information.
The RAM 94 is a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the control program stored in the ROM 93, and is a volatile storage means that requires an external power supply to hold the stored information. is. This RAM 94 has various areas such as a command list storage area 94a.

The MPU 92 has an input port and an output port. The input port of the MPU 92 is connected to the main controller 60 as described above. The output port of the MPU 92 is connected to various lamp units 23, 49a to 49c, the speaker unit 24, and the display control device 100. FIG.
The MPU 92 executes driving control of various lamp units 23 , 49 a to 49 c and the speaker unit 24 based on commands sent from the main control device 60 .
Also, the MPU 92 transmits commands resulting from analysis of these commands to the display control device 100 . The sound emission control device 90 is electrically connected to the display control device 100 via a connector unit (connection unit) in which connectors are provided at both ends of a signal line.

The display control device 100 includes a display control board 101 , an MPU 102 , a program ROM 103 and a work RAM 104 that constitute the MPU 102 , a video display processor (VDP) 105 , a character ROM 106 and a video RAM 107 . Here, the MPU 102 is an element in which, in addition to the program ROM 103 and work RAM 104, a CPU, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, and the like are combined into a chip. MPU 102 , VDP 105 , character ROM 106 and video RAM 107 are mounted on display control board 101 .

The MPU 102 analyzes the command transmitted from the sound emission control device 90 and performs predetermined arithmetic processing based on this command to control the VDP 105 . Specifically, MPU 102 controls VDP 105 by generating commands for VDP 105 .

The program ROM 103 is a memory for storing various control programs and fixed value data, and is non-volatile storage means that does not require power supply from the outside for holding stored information.
The work RAM 104 is a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when executing the control program stored in the program ROM 103. The work RAM 104 is a volatile memory that requires power supply from the outside to hold the stored information. It is a memory means.

The VDP 105 is a kind of drawing circuit that directly operates an image processing device as a liquid crystal display driver incorporated in the pattern display device 47 . Since the VDP 105 is made into an IC chip, it is also called a "drawing chip", and its substance should be called a microcomputer chip containing firmware dedicated to drawing processing. The VDP 105 reads image data from the character ROM 106 based on the content of the command generated by the MPU 102 and stores the image data in the video RAM 107 .

The character ROM 106 functions as an image data library for storing character data such as designs displayed on the design display device 47 . The character ROM 106 holds bitmap format image data of various patterns, a color palette table and the like that are referred to when determining the expression color of each dot of the bitmap image.
The video RAM 107 is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on the pattern display device 47 , and the display contents of the pattern display device 47 are changed by rewriting the contents of the video RAM 107 .

<Regarding Timer Interrupt Processing Executed by Sound Emission Control Device 90>
FIG. 29 is a diagram showing a flowchart of timer interrupt processing executed by the sound emission control device.
The MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 executes timer interrupt processing for advancing the game. In this timer interrupt process, the MPU 92 periodically (for example, every 2 msec) executes steps S2001 to S2005 as shown in FIG.

In step S2001, the MPU 92 executes command storage processing. In this command storage process, when the MPU 92 receives a command from the MPU 62 , it stores the command in the RAM 94 . Specifically, the RAM 94 has a ring buffer for storing and reading commands received from the MPU 62 , and the MPU 92 stores the commands in the ring buffer according to the order received from the MPU 62 . The MPU 92 reads commands from the ring buffer in the order in which they are stored in the ring buffer.

In step S2002, the MPU 92 executes effect determination processing based on the command received from the MPU 62. FIG. In the effect determination process, the MPU 92 determines the effect for the game cycle, the effect for the open/close execution mode, and the like.
In step S2003, the MPU 92 executes an effect execution process based on the content of the effect determination process in step S2002. Specifically, in the effect execution process, the MPU 92 executes light emission control of various lamp units 23 and 49a to 49c, and executes sound control of the speaker unit 24. FIG.

In step S<b>2004 , the MPU 92 executes demonstration display execution processing based on the demonstration command received from the MPU 62 . In the demonstration display execution process, the MPU 92 executes the demonstration display when a predetermined start waiting period (for example, 30 sec) for the start of the demonstration elapses without a new game cycle being started after the game cycle ends. . Specifically, in the demonstration display execution process, the MPU 92 executes light emission control of various lamp units 23 and audio control of the speaker unit 24 .

In step S2005, command transmission processing for transmitting the command set in the effect determination processing in step S2002 to the display control device 100 is executed. In this command transmission process, the MPU 92 determines whether it is time to transmit various commands stored as a command list in the command list storage area 94 a of the RAM 94 to the display control device 100 , and transmits various commands to the display control device 100 . , the command is transmitted to the display control device 100 .
After that, the MPU 92 terminates the timer interrupt processing.

<Regarding effect determination processing executed by the sound emission control device 90>
FIG. 30 is a diagram showing a flowchart of effect determination processing.
The MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 executes an effect determination process in order to execute an effect for the game cycle, an effect for the opening/closing execution mode, and the like. In this effect determination process, the MPU 92 executes steps S2101 to S2116 as shown in FIG.

In step S2101, the MPU 92 determines whether or not the variation command and the type command transmitted from the MPU 62 have been received.
When the MPU 92 determines in step S2101 that each command has not been received, it executes the processing from step S2109 onward.
On the other hand, if the MPU 92 determines in step S2101 that each command has been received, in step S2102 it determines whether the game result is the "best result" based on the content of the type command. determine whether

When the MPU 92 determines in step S2102 that the game result is the "best result", in step S2103, the MPU 92 executes symbol determination processing corresponding to the type of game result. In this symbol determination process, when the MPU 92 determines that the game result is the "most advantageous result", the MPU 92 determines the combination of symbols having the same number as the stop result to be finally stopped and displayed on the activated line L. Determine information. The numbers are randomly determined by lottery or the like.

On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines in step S2102 that the game result is not the "best result", in step S2104, the game result is the "normal result" based on the content of the type command. Determine whether or not
When the MPU 92 determines in step S2104 that the game result is not the "normal result", that is, the game result is "special result", "non-explicit small round high probability result", and "explicit small round high probability result". If it is either, in step S2105, common symbol determination processing is executed. In this common symbol determination process, the MPU 92 determines information relating to a combination of special symbols as a stop result to be finally stopped and displayed on the activated line L. FIG. Specifically, the MPU 92 selects not a combination of symbols having the same number, but a special combination of symbols having different numbers (for example, "3-4-1"). It should be noted that this special symbol combination is the same regardless of the type of game result.

On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines in step S2104 that the game result is the "normal failure result", in step S2106, the MPU 92 executes symbol determination processing for normal failure. In this normal out-of-symbol determination process, the MPU 92 determines whether or not the ready-to-win display will occur based on the content of the variation command.

When the MPU 92 determines that the ready-to-win display will occur, the MPU 92 determines information relating to the combination of symbols for the ready-to-win display as the stop result to be finally stopped and displayed on the activated line L. FIG. It should be noted that the combination of symbols for the ready-to-win display is randomly determined by a lottery or the like.
On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines that the ready-to-win display does not occur, the MPU 92 provides information relating to a combination of symbols different from the above-described combination of symbols as a stop result to be finally displayed stop on the activated line L. decide. Specifically, the MPU 92 randomly determines a combination of symbols different from any of the combination of symbols having the same number, the special combination of symbols, and the combination of symbols in the ready-to-win display by lottery or the like.

After executing any one of steps S2103, S2105, and S2106, the MPU 92 executes a production pattern determination process in step S2107. In this effect pattern determination process, the MPU 92 selects an effect pattern corresponding to the variation command and the type command by referring to the effect table pre-stored in the ROM 93 . Specifically, the MPU 92 selects an effect continuation time (effect continuation period) and the content of the effect as the effect pattern. In step S2107, the MPU 92 also executes a lottery to determine whether or not to generate an advance notice display.

Further, the MPU 92 executes light emission control of the display lamp unit 23 and audio control of the speaker unit 24 in the above-described effect execution processing of step S2003 based on the selected effect pattern.
The effect pattern determination process in step S2107 will be described in detail below.

<Production Pattern Decision Processing>
FIG. 31 is a diagram showing a flow chart of the effect pattern determination process.
In the effect pattern determination process, the MPU 92 executes steps S2201 to S2210 as shown in FIG.
In step S2201, the MPU 92 determines whether or not the winning lottery mode is the high-probability mode based on the content of the variation command.

When the MPU 92 determines in step S2201 that the winning/failure lottery mode is the high probability mode, in step S2202 it determines whether or not a high probability suggestion flag is set in the RAM 94 . This high-probability suggestion flag is a flag for specifying whether or not to suggest to the player that the high-probability mode is set. The MPU 92 sets a high-probability suggestion flag in the RAM 94 when the game result that triggered the transition to the opening/closing execution mode is the "best result" or the "high-probability result of the low-explicit round." Round High Probability Result" is cleared, the high probability suggestion flag stored in the RAM 94 is cleared. Processing for setting or clearing the high probability suggestion flag will be described later.

When the MPU 92 determines in step S2202 that the high-probability suggestion flag is set in the RAM 94, in step S2203, the MPU 92 executes high-probability number of times notification determination processing. In this high-precision number-of-times notification determination process, the MPU 92 determines notification of the value of the high-precision number-of-times counter STC based on the content of the variation command.
On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines in step S2202 that the high probability suggestion flag is not set in the RAM 94, in step S2204, the support mode is changed to the high frequency support mode based on the content of the variation command. It is determined whether or not.

When the MPU 92 determines in step S2204 that the support mode is the high-frequency support mode, in step S2205, after setting the high-probability suggestion flag in the RAM 94, the high-probability number of times notification determination processing in step S2203 described above is performed. Execute.
In this way, even if the game result that triggered the transition to the opening/closing execution mode is the "non-explicit small round high probability result", if the support mode is the high frequency support mode, the MPU 92 , sets a high-probability suggestion flag in the RAM 94, and executes the high-probability number of times notification determination processing in step S2203.

MPU92, after executing the high probability number of times notification determination processing of step S2203, when it is determined that the lottery mode is not the high probability mode in step S2201 (when it is determined to be the low probability mode), or in step S2204 If it is determined that the support mode is not the high frequency support mode, it is determined in step S2206 whether or not the support mode is the high frequency support mode based on the content of the variation command.

When the MPU 92 determines in step S2206 that the support mode is the high-frequency support mode, in step S2207, the MPU 92 executes game count notification determination processing.
In this number-of-games notification determination process, the MPU 92 determines notification of the value of the number-of-games counter RTC based on the content of the variation command.
After executing the number-of-games notification determination process in step S2207, or when determining that the support mode is not the high-frequency support mode in step S2206 (when determining that it is the low-frequency support mode), the MPU 92 performs step S2208. , it is determined whether or not the variable display information is the second variable display.

When the MPU 92 determines in step S2208 that the variable display information is the second variable display, the MPU 92 executes the processing from step S2209.
On the other hand, if the MPU 92 determines in step S2208 that the variable display information is not the second variable display (determines that it is the first variable display), it executes the processing from step S2212. In addition, the MPU 92 determines whether or not the short-term high-frequency support mode command transmitted from the MPU 62 is received. Read and clear the short-term high-frequency support mode command from.

In step S2209, the MPU 92 determines whether or not the short-term high-frequency support mode command transmitted from the MPU 62 has been received.
When the MPU 92 determines in step S2209 that the short-term high-frequency support mode command has been received, in step S2210 the MPU 92 executes special game state notification determination processing. In this special game state notification determination process, the MPU 92 determines the notification of the special game state. This special game state will be described later in detail.
On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines in step S2209 that the short-term high-frequency support mode command has not been received, in step S2211 the win/loss lottery mode is the low-probability mode and the support mode is the low-frequency mode. Determine whether or not it is in support mode.

When the MPU 92 determines in step S2211 that the lottery mode is the low-probability mode and the support mode is the low-frequency support mode, the MPU 92 executes the special game state notification determination process of step S2210 described above.
On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines in step S2211 that the lottery mode is the low-probability mode and the support mode is not the low-frequency support mode, it executes the processes from step S2212.
In this way, when the MPU 92 determines that the variable display information is the second variable display in step S2208 during stay in the short-term high-frequency support mode or during stay in the low-probability mode and low-frequency support mode, step A special game state notification determination process of S2210 is executed.

After executing the special game state notification determination process in step S2210, the MPU 92 determines that the variation display information is not the second variation display in step S2208 (if it determines that it is the first variation display), or step S2211. If it is determined that the lottery mode is the low-probability mode and the support mode is not the low-frequency support mode, reach display setting processing is executed in step S2212.
In this ready-to-win display setting process, the MPU 92 determines whether or not to generate a ready-to-win display, and if it determines to generate a ready-to-win display, sets the type of ready-to-win display, effect duration, and the like.
Thereafter, the MPU 92 terminates the effect pattern determination process.

Returning to the description of the effect determination process, the processes after step S2108 will be described with reference to FIG.
In step S2108, the MPU 92, the value of the high probability number counter STC, the value of the number of games counter RTC, and the fluctuation start command including information related to the special game state, step S2103, step S2105, and any process of step S2106 Set a stop result command including information related to the stop result determined in . Then, the MPU 92 stores the variation start command and the stop result command in the command list stored in the command list storage area 94a of the RAM 94. FIG. These fluctuation start command and stop result command are transmitted to the display control device 100 in the command transmission processing of step S2005 described above.

The MPU 102 of the display control device 100 retrieves from the program ROM 103 a data table for starting the variable display and displaying the stop result on the pattern display device 47 based on the variable start command and the stop result command transmitted from the MPU 92 . read out. Then, the MPU 102 outputs a command to the VDP 105 based on this data table each time a predetermined image update timing (for example, every 20 msec) comes. As a result, the symbol display device 47 finally stops and displays the stop result determined by the MPU 92 on the effective line L after starting the variable display.

After executing the process of step S2108, or when determining in step S2101 that the variation command and the type command have not been received, the MPU 92 executes the process of step S2109 and subsequent steps.
In step S2109, the MPU 92 determines whether an opening command has been received.

When the MPU 92 determines in step S2109 that the opening command has not been received, it executes the processing from step S2116.
On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines in step S2109 that an opening command has been received, in step S2110 it determines the type of game result based on the content of the opening command.

In step S2111, the MPU 92 executes determination processing of the effect for the opening/closing execution mode corresponding to the type of game result determined in step S2110. In the processing for determining the effect for the opening/closing execution mode, if the MPU 92 determines in step S2110 that the game result is the "special loss result" or the "non-explicit small round high probability result", the opening/closing execution mode effect is determined. Effect A is selected as the effect. Further, when the MPU 92 determines that the game result is the “explicit small round high probability result”, the MPU 92 selects the effect B as the effect for the opening/closing execution mode. Further, when the MPU 92 determines that the game result is the "best result", the MPU 92 selects the effect C as the effect for the opening/closing execution mode.
The duration of the effects A and B corresponds to the time when the opening and closing of the big winning opening 38a is executed twice in a short period of time in the open/close execution mode. Further, the duration of the effect C corresponds to the time when the opening and closing of the big winning opening 38a is executed four times in the long-time manner in the opening and closing execution mode.

Further, the MPU 92 executes light emission control of the display lamp unit 23 and voice control of the speaker unit 24 in the above-described effect execution processing of step S2003 based on the selection result of the effects A to C.

In step S2112, the MPU 92 sets an opening/closing execution mode command including information relating to the effect for the opening/closing execution mode selected in step S2111. Then, the MPU 92 stores the open/close execution mode command in the command list stored in the command list storage area 94 a of the RAM 94 . This opening/closing execution mode command is transmitted to the display control device 100 in the command transmission processing of step S2005 described above.

The MPU 102 of the display control device 100 reads from the program ROM 103 a data table for executing the opening/closing execution mode effect on the pattern display device 47 based on the opening/closing execution mode command transmitted from the MPU 92 . Then, the MPU 102 outputs a command to the VDP 105 based on this data table each time a predetermined image update timing (for example, every 20 msec) comes. As a result, the pattern display device 47 executes an effect for the opening/closing execution mode selected by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 .

In step S2113, the MPU 92 determines whether or not the game result is the "highest advantage result" or the "explicit small round high probability result" based on the content of the opening command.

When the MPU 92 determines in step S2113 that the game result is the "highest advantage result" or the "high-probability result for a small number of explicit rounds", the MPU 92 sets a high-probability suggestion flag in the RAM 94 in step S2114.
On the other hand, if the MPU 92 determines in step S2113 that the game result is not the "most advantageous result" or the "explicit few rounds high probability result" (if the game result is the "non-explicit few rounds high probability result" If determined), the high probability suggestion flag stored in the RAM 94 is cleared in step S2115.

After executing the processing of step S2114 or step S2115, or when determining that the opening command has not been received in step S2109, the MPU 92 executes the processing of step S2116 and subsequent steps.
In step S2116, the MPU 92 executes other processing. In other processes, the MPU 92 executes processes for advancing the effects for the opening/closing execution mode based on the opening command, closing command, and ending command transmitted from the MPU 62, for example. After that, the MPU 92 terminates the effect determination process.

<Regarding the relationship between game results and game status>
The relationship between game results and game states based on the execution of various processes will be described below.
FIG. 32 is a diagram showing the relationship between game results and game states. Specifically, FIG. 32 is a diagram showing the relationship between the game results excluding the "normal failure result" and the game states, etc., in which the game results are arranged in the column direction and the game states, etc. are arranged in the row direction.
The pachinko machine 10, as shown in FIG. It has distribution results of "Few Rounds High Probability Results" and "Most Advantageous Results".

As shown in the second column of the table in FIG. 32, the "special loss result" is the game result selected when the "big win" is not won in the win/loss lottery (symbol x in the figure). Also, the sorting result is the game result selected when "big hit" is won in the winning lottery (symbol ◯ in the figure).
Hereinafter, the relationship between the game results other than the "normal result" and the game state will be described. In this embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 sets the relationship between the game result and the game state as follows. The contents of the game state and the like are arbitrary.

In the case of the "special failure result", the opening/closing execution mode shifts to the opening/closing number regulation mode instead of the round number regulation mode, and the opening/closing of the big winning hole 38a is executed twice in a short period of time. Also, in the "special losing result", the lottery mode does not shift.
In the "unspecified small round high probability result", the opening and closing execution mode shifts to the round number regulation mode in which the round game is performed with two times as the upper limit number of times, and the opening and closing of the big winning opening 38a is executed twice in a short time mode. be done. In addition, in the "non-explicit small round high probability result", the winning lottery mode shifts to the high probability mode.
In this way, the "special loss result" and the "non-explicit small round high probability result" are different in the type of opening and closing execution mode, but are common in that the opening and closing of the big winning opening 38a is executed twice in a short time mode. are doing.

In addition, in the "special failure result" and "non-explicit small round high probability result", the stop result is a combination of special symbols, and the effect for the opening/closing execution mode is effect A. Furthermore, in the "non-explicit small round high probability result", since the high probability suggestion flag stored in the RAM 94 in step S2115 is cleared, the symbol display device 47 displays the high probability No image is displayed on the display screen G to clearly indicate that the mode is the stochastic mode.

Therefore, the player cannot grasp whether the game result is the "special failure result" or the "non-explicit small round high probability result" by checking the stop result or the effect for the opening/closing execution mode. Can not. In other words, even if the distribution lottery results in the "non-explicit small round high probability result" and shifts to the high probability mode, the symbol display device 47 does not perform the winning lottery in the game round after the opening/closing execution mode ends. Disguise as if the mode has not changed.
Therefore, the player can play the game while enjoying the prediction of whether or not the winning lottery mode has shifted to the high-probability mode.
In addition, in the "high frequency support mode", since the high probability suggestion flag is set in the RAM 94 in step S2205, when the distribution lottery becomes "non-explicit small round high probability result" and shifts to the high probability mode Even so, the player can exceptionally grasp that the win/fail lottery mode has shifted to the high-probability mode.

In the "explicit small round high probability result", the opening and closing execution mode shifts to the round number regulation mode in which the round game is performed with two times as the upper limit number, and the opening and closing of the big winning opening 38a is executed twice in a short time mode. be. In addition, in the "explicit small round high probability result", the winning lottery mode shifts to the high probability mode. In addition, in the "clearly limited round high probability result", the stop result is a combination of special symbols, and the effect for the opening/closing execution mode is effect B. Furthermore, in the "express small round high probability result", since the high probability suggestion flag is set in the RAM 94 in step S2114, the symbol display device 47 is in the high probability mode in the game round after the open/close execution mode is finished. An image clearly indicating that is displayed on the display screen G.
Therefore, the player can understand that the game result is the "explicit small round high probability result" by confirming the stop result and the effect for the opening/closing execution mode.

In the "most advantageous result", the opening/closing execution mode shifts to the round number regulation mode in which the round game is performed with four times as the upper limit number of times, and the opening/closing of the big winning opening 38a is executed four times in a long time mode. In addition, in the "most advantageous result", the winning lottery mode shifts to the high probability mode. In addition, in the ``most advantageous result'', the stop result is a combination of symbols having the same number, the success/failure lottery mode shifts to a high probability mode, and the performance for the opening/closing execution mode is performance C. - 特許庁
Furthermore, in the "most advantageous result", since the high probability suggestion flag is set in the RAM 94 in step S2114, the symbol display device 47 clearly indicates that the high probability mode is set in the game round after the opening/closing execution mode ends. The image to be displayed is displayed on the display screen G.
Therefore, the player can understand that the game result is the "best result" by checking the stop result and the effect for the opening/closing execution mode.

As described above, the support mode is set in the first support mode setting process or the second support mode setting process based on the combination of the winning/failure lottery mode, the support mode, and the variable display information (Fig. 25).

<Regarding the flow at the time of transition to lottery mode and support mode>
FIG. 33 is a diagram showing a flow chart at the time of shifting between the lottery mode and the support mode.
As shown in FIG. 33, the pachinko machine 10 is operated when a "jackpot win" is achieved (refer to the solid line arrow in the figure) and when a prescribed number of game rounds is completed without "jackpot win" (see the dotted line arrow in the figure). ) to shift the lottery mode and support mode.
FIG. 33 shows a lottery mode of a high probability mode (high probability) and a low probability mode (low probability), a support mode of a high frequency support mode (high frequency) and a low frequency support mode (low frequency), and a high probability mode (low probability). Blocks BL11 to BL17 show the number of game rounds for staying in the probability mode and the high-frequency support mode.

FIG. 34 is a diagram showing the display screen of the symbol display device, the first suspension lamp section, and the second suspension lamp section when shifting to the win/fail lottery mode and the support mode. Specifically, FIG. 34A is a diagram showing the display screen G during the first variable display when the second holding lamp section is not lit and the low-probability mode and low-frequency support mode are in effect. be. FIG. 34(B) is a diagram showing the display screen G when the first variable display of FIG. 34(A) results in "best result". FIG. 34(C) is a diagram showing the display screen G during the first variable display in the case of the high-probability mode and low-frequency support mode after FIG. 34(B). FIG. 34(D) is a diagram showing the display screen G when the first variable display of FIG. 34(C) results in "best result". FIG. 34(E) is a diagram showing the display screen G during the first variable display in the high-probability mode and high-frequency support mode after FIG. 34(D).
Hereinafter, the flow at the time of shifting to the winning lottery mode and the support mode will be described with reference to FIGS. 33 and 34. FIG.

After the pachinko machine 10 executes the above-described main processing that is activated when the power is turned on, as shown in FIG. 33, the pachinko machine 10 enters the low-probability mode and low-frequency support mode (block BL11). In the low-frequency support mode, the game ball has a higher probability of entering the upper working opening 36 than the lower working opening 37, so that the game ball is shot from the game ball shooting mechanism 81 by rotating the shooting handle 27 by the player. The game ball enters the upper working port 36. - 特許庁Therefore, as shown in FIG. 34(A), the first reservation lamp portion 49a lights according to the number of reserved game balls that have entered the upper operation opening 36, and the game cycle is displayed in the first variable display. On the other hand, since the game ball hardly enters the lower operation opening 37, the second reservation lamp portion 49b is turned off. In addition, in FIG. 34A, the maximum number of lights of the first reservation lamp portion 49a is four.

In block BL11, when the first variable display results in the "best result" (see the solid line arrow in the figure), the symbol display device 47 displays the same stop result as shown in FIG. 34(B). (for example, 7.7.7) are stopped and displayed on the activated line L. Then, the pachinko machine 10 executes the effect for the opening/closing execution mode selected by the MPU92 based on the command for the opening/closing execution mode transmitted from the MPU92.
In the opening/closing execution mode, the opening/closing door 38b is set to an open state in which a game ball can win a prize. Prizes will be awarded to mouth 38a. Here, since the upper working port 36 is provided on the path for the game ball to enter the big winning port 38a, the game ball is fired from the game ball shooting mechanism 81 by rotating the shooting handle 27 by the player. The ball will enter the upper working port 36 as well.

On the other hand, the pachinko machine 10 stays in the block BL11 as it is when the "most advantageous result" is not obtained in the first variation display in the block BL11 (see the dotted line arrow in the figure).

After that, as shown in FIG. 33, the pachinko machine 10 enters the high probability mode and low frequency support mode (block BL12). Since the MPU 92 executes high-precision number notification determination processing in step S2203 in block BL12, the MPU 102 notifies the value of the high-precision number counter STC based on the contents of the variation start command transmitted from the MPU 92. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 34(C), the MPU 102 displays "3 more rotations during high probability" on the upper left of the display screen G of the pattern display device 47, thereby staying in the high probability mode. It informs that the number of rotations is 3 rotations. It should be noted that the number of game rounds staying in the high-probability mode decreases as the value of the high-probability number counter STC decreases.

In block BL12, when the first variable display results in the "best result" (see the solid line arrow in the figure), as shown in FIG. (for example, 7, 7, 7) are stopped and displayed on the activated line L. Then, the pachinko machine 10 executes the effect for the opening/closing execution mode selected by the MPU92 based on the command for the opening/closing execution mode transmitted from the MPU92. FIG. 34(D) shows the case where the "most advantageous result" is obtained in the first variation display of the first rotation after shifting to block BL12, so the MPU 102 causes the symbol display device 47 to display At the upper left of the screen G, "Two more rotations in high accuracy" is displayed.
On the other hand, the pachinko machine 10 proceeds to block BL11 when three game rounds have been completed without "winning a jackpot" in block BL12 (see the dotted line arrow in the figure).

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 33, the pachinko machine 10 enters the high probability mode and high frequency support mode (block BL13). In block BL13, the MPU 92 executes high-probability number-of-games notification determination processing in step S2203, and executes game number-of-times notification determination processing in step S2207. , the value of the high-precision number counter STC and the value of the game number counter RTC are notified. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 34(E), the MPU 102 displays "3 more rotations during high probability" on the upper left of the display screen G of the pattern display device 47, thereby allowing the game to stay in the high probability mode. It informs that the number of rotations is 3 rotations. In addition, the MPU 102 displays "One chance time left" at the bottom of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47, so that the number of game rotations during which the high-frequency support mode (short-term high-frequency support mode) stays is It informs that it is one rotation. In addition, the number of game rotations staying in the high probability mode decreases as the value of the high probability number counter STC decreases, and the number of game rotations staying in the high frequency support mode is the value of the game number counter RTC. decreases with the decrease of

In the high-frequency support mode, the game ball has a higher probability of entering the lower working port 37 than the upper working port 36, so the game ball is shot from the game ball shooting mechanism 81 by rotating the shooting handle 27 by the player. The game ball enters the lower operation opening 37. - 特許庁Therefore, the second reservation lamp portion 49b lights up according to the number of game balls that have entered the lower operation opening 37 and is reserved. In addition, in the high-frequency support mode, the game ball shot from the game ball shooting mechanism 81 by the player rotating the shooting handle 27 also enters the upper operation port 36.例文帳に追加In other words, the upper working port 36 and the lower working port 37 are arranged on the same path.
Therefore, the first reservation lamp portion 49a lights up according to the number of reserved game balls that have entered the upper operation opening 36. As shown in FIG. Note that in FIG. 34(E), the maximum number of lights of the first suspension lamp portion 49a and the second suspension lamp portion 49b is four.

FIG. 35 shows the display screen of the pattern display device at the time of transition to the winner lottery mode and the support mode when the "best result" is obtained during the stay in the short-term high-frequency support mode, the first suspension lamp part, and the second suspension It is a figure which shows a lamp|ramp part. Specifically, FIG. 35(A) is a view showing the display screen G in the case where the first variation display of the first rotation after the shift to block BL13 results in "best result". FIG. 35(B) is a diagram showing the display screen G during the second variable display in the high-probability mode and low-frequency support mode after FIG. 35(A). FIG. 35(C) is a view showing the display screen G when three game rounds have been completed without the "best result". FIG. 35(D) is a diagram showing the display screen G when the second variable display of FIG. 35(C) results in "best result". FIG. 35(E) is a diagram showing the display screen G during the first variable display in the high-probability mode and high-frequency support mode after FIG. 35(D).
Hereinafter, the flow at the time of shifting to the win/fail lottery mode and the support mode will be described with reference to FIGS. 33 and 35. FIG.

In block BL13, when the first variable display results in the "best result" (see the solid line arrow in the figure), as shown in FIG. (for example, 7.7.7) are stopped and displayed on the activated line L. Then, the pachinko machine 10 executes the effect for the opening/closing execution mode selected by the MPU92 based on the command for the opening/closing execution mode transmitted from the MPU92. FIG. 35(A) shows the case where the "most advantageous result" is obtained in the first variation display of the first rotation after moving to block BL13. "Two more rotations in high accuracy" is displayed on the upper left of the screen G.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 33, the pachinko machine 10 enters the high probability mode and low frequency support mode (block BL14). Since the MPU 92 executes high-precision number notification determination processing in step S2203 in block BL14, the MPU 102 notifies the value of the high-precision number counter STC based on the contents of the variation start command transmitted from the MPU 92. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 35(B), the MPU 102 displays "3 more rotations during high probability" on the upper left of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47, so that the game stays in the high probability mode. It informs that the number of rotations is 3 rotations. It should be noted that the number of game rounds staying in the high-probability mode decreases as the value of the high-probability number counter STC decreases.

Here, when the MPU 62 determines that there is the reservation information stored in the second result display section reservation area Rb based on the winning of the game ball to the lower operation opening 37, the game to the upper operation opening 36 Regardless of whether or not there is any pending information stored in the first result display holding area Ra based on the winning of the ball, the pending information stored in the second result holding area Rb is preferentially played. set for digestion of Therefore, the game cycle is during the second variable display.

The pachinko machine 10 enters the low-probability mode and low-frequency support mode as shown in FIG. mode (block BL15). MPU 102, in block BL15, when the reservation information stored in the second result display section reservation area Rb remains based on the winning of the game ball to the lower operation opening 37, that is, when the second variable display is in progress , based on the content of the variation start command transmitted from the MPU 92, it is notified that it is in the special game state. Specifically, in block BL15, the MPU 92 executes special game state notification determination processing in step S2210, so the MPU 102 displays the upper left corner of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 as shown in FIG. 35(C). The special game state is notified by displaying "Big Chance Zone!!" In addition, in FIG. 35(C), since the rest of the pending information stored in the second result display portion pending area Rb is one in the second variable display, the second pending lamp portion 49b is turned off. .
On the other hand, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to block BL12 again when "big hit" is won in block BL14 (see the solid line arrow in the figure).

In block BL15, when the second variable display results in the "best result" (see the solid line arrow in the figure), as shown in FIG. (for example, 7.7.7) are stopped and displayed on the activated line L. Then, the pachinko machine 10 executes the effect for the opening/closing execution mode selected by the MPU92 based on the command for the opening/closing execution mode transmitted from the MPU92.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 33, the pachinko machine 10 enters the high probability mode and high frequency support mode (block BL16). In block BL16, the MPU 92 executes high-probability number-of-games notification determination processing in step S2203, and executes game number-of-times notification determination processing in step S2207. , the value of the high-precision number counter STC and the value of the game number counter RTC are notified. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 35(E), the MPU 102 displays "3 more rotations during high probability" on the upper left of the display screen G of the pattern display device 47, thereby staying in the high probability mode. It informs that the number of rotations is 3 rotations. Further, the MPU 102 displays "34 rotations remaining in the chance time" at the bottom of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47, so that the number of game rotations during which the high-frequency support mode (long-term high-frequency support mode) stays is It informs that it is 34 revolutions. In addition, the number of game rotations staying in the high probability mode decreases as the value of the high probability number counter STC decreases, and the number of game rotations staying in the high frequency support mode is the value of the game number counter RTC. decreases with the decrease of

Then, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to block BL16 again when the first variable display or the second variable display results in a "jackpot win" (see the solid line arrow in the figure).
On the other hand, in the block BL15, the pachinko machine 10 does not obtain the "best result" in the second variation display (see the dotted line arrow in the figure), and in the block BL16, the first variation display or the second When 34 rounds of the game have been completed without becoming "big win" in the variable display (see the dotted line arrow in the figure), the process proceeds to block BL11.

In this way, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the long-term high-frequency support mode when the second variation display shows the "best result" in the special game state of the block BL15 (see the solid line arrow in the figure). . Therefore, the special game state is a state in which the transition to the long-term high-frequency support mode occurs when the second variable display results in the "best result".
In addition, in FIG. 34(E), the number of lighting of the second holding lamp portion 49b is the maximum four, so in the example of FIG. becomes.
Therefore, the winning probability of the second variable display in the special game state is 1/30 per rotation. In other words, in the example of FIG. 35, the pachinko machine 10 does not shift to the special game state unless the number of lighting of the second suspension lamp portion 49b is four or more during stay in the short-term high-frequency support mode.

FIG. 36 shows the display screen of the symbol display device at the time of transition to the winning lottery mode and the support mode when the "best result" is not obtained during the stay in the short-term high-frequency support mode, the first holding lamp part, and the second It is a figure which shows a reservation lamp part. Specifically, FIG. 36(A) is a view showing the display screen G when the first variation display of the first rotation after the shift to block BL13 does not result in the "best result". FIG. 36(B) is a view showing the display screen G when two game rounds have been completed without the "best result". FIG. 36(C) is a diagram showing the display screen G when the second variable display of FIG. 36(B) results in "best result". FIG. 36(D) is a diagram showing the display screen G during the second variable display in the case of the high-probability mode and high-frequency support mode after FIG. 36(C).
Hereinafter, the flow at the time of shifting to the winning lottery mode and the support mode will be described with reference to FIGS. 33 and 36. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 33, the pachinko machine 10, in the block BL13, when the first variation display does not result in the "best result" (see the dotted line arrow in the figure), the high probability mode and low frequency support mode (block BL17). Since the MPU 92 executes high-precision number notification determination processing in step S2203 in block BL17, the MPU 102 notifies the value of the high-precision number counter STC based on the content of the variation start command transmitted from the MPU 92. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 36(A), the MPU 102 displays "2 more rotations during high probability" on the upper left of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47, thereby allowing the game to stay in the high probability mode. It informs that the number of rotations is 2 rotations. It should be noted that the number of game rounds staying in the high-probability mode decreases as the value of the high-probability number counter STC decreases.

Here, when the MPU 62 determines that there is the reservation information stored in the second result display section reservation area Rb based on the winning of the game ball to the lower operation opening 37, the game to the upper operation opening 36 Regardless of whether or not there is any pending information stored in the first result display holding area Ra based on the winning of the ball, the pending information stored in the second result holding area Rb is preferentially played. set for digestion of Therefore, the game cycle is during the second variable display.

The pachinko machine 10 enters the low-probability mode and low-frequency support mode as shown in FIG. mode (block BL15). MPU 102, in block BL15, when the reservation information stored in the second result display section reservation area Rb remains based on the winning of the game ball to the lower operation opening 37, that is, when the second variable display is in progress , based on the content of the variation start command transmitted from the MPU 92, it is notified that it is in the special game state. Specifically, in block BL15, the MPU 92 executes special game state notification determination processing in step S2210, so the MPU 102 displays the upper left corner of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 as shown in FIG. 35(C). The special game state is notified by displaying "Big Chance Zone!!" In FIG. 36(B), since the remaining hold information stored in the hold area Rb for the second result display section is two including one in the second variable display, the second hold lamp section 49b The number of lighting of is one.
On the other hand, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to block BL12 again when "big win" is won in block BL17 (see the solid line arrow in the figure).

In block BL15, when the second variable display results in the "best result" (see the solid line arrow in the figure), as shown in FIG. (for example, 7.7.7) are stopped and displayed on the activated line L. Then, the pachinko machine 10 executes the effect for the opening/closing execution mode selected by the MPU92 based on the command for the opening/closing execution mode transmitted from the MPU92.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 33, the pachinko machine 10 enters the high probability mode and high frequency support mode (block BL16). In block BL16, the MPU 92 executes high-probability number-of-games notification determination processing in step S2203, and executes game number-of-times notification determination processing in step S2207. , the value of the high-precision number counter STC and the value of the game number counter RTC are notified. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 36(D), the MPU 102 displays "3 more rotations during high probability" on the upper left of the display screen G of the pattern display device 47, thereby allowing the game to stay in the high probability mode. It informs that the number of rotations is 3 rotations. Further, the MPU 102 displays "34 rotations remaining in the chance time" at the bottom of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47, so that the number of game rotations during which the high-frequency support mode (long-term high-frequency support mode) stays is It informs that it is 34 revolutions. In addition, the number of game rotations staying in the high probability mode decreases as the value of the high probability number counter STC decreases, and the number of game rotations staying in the high frequency support mode is the value of the game number counter RTC. decreases with the decrease of

Then, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to block BL16 again when the first variable display or the second variable display results in a "jackpot win" (see the solid line arrow in the figure).
On the other hand, in the block BL15, the pachinko machine 10 does not obtain the "best result" in the second variation display (see the dotted line arrow in the figure), and in the block BL16, the first variation display or the second When 34 rounds of the game are completed without becoming "big win" in the variable display (see the dotted line arrow in the figure), the process proceeds to block BL11.

In this way, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the long-term high-frequency support mode when the second variation display shows the "best result" in the special game state of the block BL15 (see the solid line arrow in the figure). . Therefore, the special game state is a state in which the transition to the long-term high-frequency support mode occurs when the second variable display results in the "best result".
In addition, in FIG. 34(E), since the number of lighting of the second holding lamp portion 49b is four at maximum, in the example of FIG. becomes.
Therefore, the winning probability of the second variable display in the special game state is 1/30 per rotation. In other words, in the example of FIG. 36, the pachinko machine 10 does not shift to the special game state unless the number of lighting of the second suspension lamp portion 49b is set to 3 or more during stay in the short-term high-frequency support mode.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the game state transition processing is performed after switching from the high probability mode to the low probability mode in the transition processing at the end of the opening/closing execution mode and the variation end processing, and then the second result display holding area Rb. functions as a most advantageous game state transition unit that transitions the game state to a long-term high frequency support mode (most advantageous game state) advantageous to the player when winning the result of the internal lottery associated with the hold information stored in the do.
In other words, the game state transition process is triggered by the entry of a game ball into the lower operation opening 37 after switching from the high probability mode to the low probability mode in the transition process at the end of the opening/closing execution mode and the fluctuation end process. A most advantageous game state transition unit for transferring a game state to a long-term high-frequency support mode (most advantageous game state) more advantageous to a player than a low-probability mode and a high-probability mode when the result of the executed internal lottery is won. function as

In addition, in the present embodiment, the game state transition processing is, after switching from the high probability mode to the low probability mode in the transition processing at the end of the opening and closing execution mode and the variation end processing, the game ball entering the lower operation opening 37 If you win the result of the internal lottery executed as a trigger, the game state is shifted to the long-term high-frequency support mode (most favorable game state) that is more advantageous to the player than the low probability mode and the high probability mode. , based on conditions other than this, the game state may be shifted to a long-term high-frequency support mode that is more advantageous to the player than the low-probability mode and the high-probability mode. In short, the game state transition process is, when winning the result of the internal lottery executed triggered by the entry of the game ball into the upper working port 36 and the lower working port 37, the upper working port 36 and the lower working port 37 , based on the combination of the low-probability mode and the high-probability mode, the game state may be shifted to the long-term high-frequency support mode which is more advantageous to the player than the low-probability mode and the high-probability mode.

Further, in this embodiment, the continuation rate of the long-term high-frequency support mode is set to be higher than the continuation rate of the high-probability mode.
Here, the continuation rate refers to the probability of continuing to stay in the game state. The transition processing and fluctuation end processing at the end of the opening/closing execution mode are switched to the high probability mode when winning the result of the internal lottery executed with the entry of the game ball into the upper operation port 36 or the lower operation port 37 as a trigger. , Triggered by notification of the result of the internal lottery associated with a predetermined number (three times in this embodiment) of the pending information that is smaller than the number of the plurality of pending information stored in the second result display portion pending area Rb. to switch from high-probability mode to low-probability mode. Therefore, the continuation rate of the high-probability mode is until the result of the internal lottery associated with a predetermined number of pending information less than the number of the plurality of pending information stored in the second result display portion pending area Rb is reported. This is the probability of winning the result of the internal lottery executed with the entry of the game ball into the upper operation port 36 or the lower operation port 37 as a trigger. Therefore, the continuation rate of the high-probability mode is the probability of winning the lottery of 1/3 within 3 rotations.

On the other hand, the continuation rate of the long-term high-frequency support mode is the sum of the probability of winning the lottery of 1/3 within 3 spins and the probability of winning the lottery of 1/30 within the remaining 31 spins. Therefore, the continuation rate of the long-term high-frequency support mode is set to be higher than the continuation rate of the high-probability mode.

In addition, in the present embodiment, by setting the continuation rate of the long-term high-frequency support mode to be higher than the continuation rate of the high-probability mode, the long-term high-frequency support mode can be played more than the low-probability mode and the high-probability mode. Although the game state is advantageous to the player, the game state may be advantageous to the player by setting conditions other than the continuation rate. In short, the most advantageous game state should be a game state more advantageous to the player than the first game state and the second game state.

FIG. 37 is a diagram showing a flowchart at the time of shifting to the win/fail lottery mode and the support mode when the first holding lamp section is not lit.
As shown in FIG. 37, the pachinko machine 10 is operated when a "jackpot win" is achieved (refer to the solid line arrow in the figure) and when a prescribed number of games is completed without "jackpot win" (see the dotted line arrow in the figure). ) to shift the lottery mode and support mode.
FIG. 37 shows a lottery mode of high probability mode (high probability) and low probability mode (low probability), support mode of high frequency support mode (high frequency) and low frequency support mode (low frequency), and high Blocks BL21 to BL26 show the number of game rounds for staying in the probability mode and the high-frequency support mode.

FIG. 38 is a diagram showing the display screen of the symbol display device, the first reservation lamp section, and the second reservation lamp section at the time of transition to the winning lottery mode and the support mode when the first reservation lamp section is not lit. Specifically, FIG. 38A is a diagram showing the display screen G during the first variable display when the second holding lamp section is not lit and the low probability mode and low frequency support mode are in effect. be. FIG. 38(B) is a diagram showing the display screen G when the first variable display of FIG. 38(A) results in "best result". FIG. 38(C) is a diagram showing the display screen G during the first variable display in the case of the high-probability mode and low-frequency support mode after FIG. 38(B). FIG. 38(D) is a diagram showing the display screen G when the first variable display of FIG. 38(C) results in "best result". FIG. 38(E) is a diagram showing the display screen G during the first variable display in the high-probability mode and high-frequency support mode after FIG. 38(D).
Hereinafter, the flow at the time of shifting to the lottery mode and the support mode will be described with reference to FIGS. 37 and 38. FIG.

After the pachinko machine 10 executes the above-described main processing that is activated upon power-on, as shown in FIG. 37, the pachinko machine 10 enters the low-probability mode and low-frequency support mode (block BL21). In the low-frequency support mode, the game ball has a higher probability of entering the upper working opening 36 than the lower working opening 37, so that the game ball is shot from the game ball shooting mechanism 81 by rotating the shooting handle 27 by the player. The game ball enters the upper working port 36. - 特許庁Therefore, as shown in FIG. 38(A), the first reservation lamp portion 49a lights according to the number of reserved game balls that have entered the upper operation opening 36, and the game cycle is displayed in the first variable display. On the other hand, since the game ball hardly enters the lower operation opening 37, the second reservation lamp portion 49b is turned off. In addition, in FIG. 38(A), the number of lighting of the 1st reservation lamp part 49a is 0 pieces.

In block BL21, when the first variable display results in the "best result" (see the solid line arrow in the figure), the symbol display device 47 displays the same stop result as shown in FIG. 38(B). (for example, 7.7.7) are stopped and displayed on the activated line L. Then, the pachinko machine 10 executes the effect for the opening/closing execution mode selected by the MPU92 based on the command for the opening/closing execution mode transmitted from the MPU92.
In the opening/closing execution mode, the opening/closing door 38b is set to an open state in which a game ball can win a prize. Prizes will be awarded to mouth 38a. Here, since the upper operation port 36 is provided on the path for winning the game ball to the big winning port 38a, the game ball is fired from the game ball shooting mechanism 81 by rotating the shooting handle 27 by the player. The ball will enter the upper working port 36 as well.

On the other hand, the pachinko machine 10 stays in the block BL21 as it is when the "most advantageous result" is not obtained in the first variation display in the block BL21 (see the dotted line arrow in the figure).

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 37, the pachinko machine 10 enters the high probability mode and low frequency support mode (block BL22). Since the MPU 92 executes high-precision number notification determination processing in step S2203 in block BL22, the MPU 102 notifies the value of the high-precision number counter STC based on the content of the variation start command transmitted from the MPU 92. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 38(C), the MPU 102 displays "3 more rotations during high probability" on the upper left of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47, thereby allowing the game to stay in the high probability mode. It informs that the number of rotations is 3 rotations. It should be noted that the number of game rounds staying in the high-probability mode decreases as the value of the high-probability number counter STC decreases.
In addition, in FIG. 38(C), in the opening/closing execution mode of FIG. 38(B), since the game ball did not enter the upper operation opening 36, the number of lights of the first holding lamp portion 49a becomes 0. ing.

In block BL22, when the first variable display results in the "best result" (see the solid line arrow in the figure), as shown in FIG. (for example, 7.7.7) are stopped and displayed on the activated line L. Then, the pachinko machine 10 executes the effect for the opening/closing execution mode selected by the MPU92 based on the command for the opening/closing execution mode transmitted from the MPU92. FIG. 38(D) shows the case where the "most advantageous result" is obtained in the first variation display of the first rotation after moving to block BL22. "Two more rotations in high accuracy" is displayed on the upper left of the screen G.
On the other hand, the pachinko machine 10 proceeds to block BL21 when three game rounds have been completed without "winning a jackpot" in block BL22 (see the dotted line arrow in the figure).

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 37, the pachinko machine 10 enters the high probability mode and high frequency support mode (block BL23). In block BL23, the MPU 92 executes high-probability number-of-games notification determination processing in step S2203, and executes game number-of-games notification determination processing in step S2207. , the value of the high-precision number counter STC and the value of the game number counter RTC are notified. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 38(E), the MPU 102 displays "3 more spins during high probability" on the upper left of the display screen G of the pattern display device 47, thereby staying in the high probability mode. It informs that the number of rotations is 3 rotations. In addition, the MPU 102 displays "One chance time left" at the bottom of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47, so that the number of game rotations during which the high-frequency support mode (short-term high-frequency support mode) stays is It informs that it is one rotation. In addition, the number of game rotations staying in the high probability mode decreases as the value of the high probability number counter STC decreases, and the number of game rotations staying in the high frequency support mode is the value of the game number counter RTC. decreases with the decrease of

In the high-frequency support mode, the game ball has a higher probability of entering the lower working port 37 than the upper working port 36, so the game ball is shot from the game ball shooting mechanism 81 by rotating the shooting handle 27 by the player. The game ball enters the lower operation opening 37. - 特許庁Therefore, the second reservation lamp portion 49b lights up according to the number of game balls that have entered the lower operation opening 37 and is reserved. In addition, in the high-frequency support mode, the game ball shot from the game ball shooting mechanism 81 by the player rotating the shooting handle 27 also enters the upper operation port 36.例文帳に追加In other words, the upper working port 36 and the lower working port 37 are arranged on the same path.
Therefore, the first reservation lamp portion 49a lights up according to the number of reserved game balls that have entered the upper operation opening 36. As shown in FIG. In addition, in FIG. 38(E), during the stay in the short-term high-frequency support mode and in the opening/closing execution mode of FIG. The number of lighting of is 0. In addition, the maximum number of lights of the second suspension lamp portion 49b is four.

Here, when the MPU 62 determines that there is the reservation information stored in the second result display section reservation area Rb based on the winning of the game ball to the lower operation opening 37, the game to the upper operation opening 36 Regardless of whether or not there is any pending information stored in the first result display holding area Ra based on the winning of the ball, the pending information stored in the second result holding area Rb is preferentially played. set for digestion of Therefore, the game cycle is during the second variable display.

MPU 102, in block BL23, when the reservation information stored in the second result display section reservation area Rb remains based on the winning of the game ball to the lower operation opening 37, that is, when the second variable display is in progress , based on the content of the variation start command transmitted from the MPU 92, it is notified that it is in the special game state. Specifically, since the MPU 92 executes the special game state notification determination process in step S2210 in the block BL23, the MPU 102, as shown in FIG. The special game state is notified by displaying "Big Chance Zone!!"

FIG. 39 shows the display screen of the symbol display device, the first suspension lamp portion, and the second suspension at the time of transition to the success or failure lottery mode and the support mode when the "best result" is obtained during the stay in the short-term high-frequency support mode. It is a figure which shows a lamp|ramp part. Specifically, FIG. 39(A) is a view showing the display screen G in the case where the second variable display of the first rotation after shifting to block BL23 results in "best result". FIG. 39(B) is a diagram showing the display screen G during the second variable display in the high probability mode and high frequency support mode after FIG. 39(A).
Hereinafter, the flow at the time of shifting to the win/fail lottery mode and the support mode will be described with reference to FIGS. 37 and 39. FIG.

In block BL23, when the second variable display results in the "best result" (see the solid line arrow in the figure), as shown in FIG. (for example, 7.7.7) are stopped and displayed on the activated line L. Then, the pachinko machine 10 executes the effect for the opening/closing execution mode selected by the MPU92 based on the command for the opening/closing execution mode transmitted from the MPU92.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 37, the pachinko machine 10 enters the high probability mode and high frequency support mode (block BL24). In block BL24, the MPU 92 executes high-probability number-of-games notification determination processing in step S2203, and executes game number-of-games notification determination processing in step S2207. , the value of the high-precision number counter STC and the value of the game number counter RTC are notified. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 39(B), the MPU 102 displays "3 more spins during high probability" on the upper left of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47, thereby allowing the game to stay in the high probability mode. It informs that the number of rotations is 3 rotations. Further, the MPU 102 displays "34 rotations remaining in the chance time" at the bottom of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47, so that the number of game rotations during which the high-frequency support mode (long-term high-frequency support mode) stays is It informs that it is 34 revolutions. In addition, the number of game rotations staying in the high probability mode decreases as the value of the high probability number counter STC decreases, and the number of game rotations staying in the high frequency support mode is the value of the game number counter RTC. decreases with the decrease of

Then, in the block BL24, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the block BL24 again when "jackpot win" is obtained in the first variable display or the second variable display (see the solid line arrow in the figure).
On the other hand, in the block BL24, the pachinko machine 10 completes 34 spins without a "jackpot winning" in the first variation display or the second variation display (see the dotted arrow in the figure). moves to block BL21.

In this way, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the long-term high-frequency support mode when the second variation display shows the "best result" in the special game state of the block BL23 (see the solid line arrow in the figure). . Therefore, the special game state is a state in which the transition to the long-term high-frequency support mode occurs when the second variable display results in the "best result".
The winning probability of the second variable display in the special game state during stay in the short-term high-frequency support mode is 1/3.

FIG. 40 shows the display screen of the symbol display device at the time of transition to the winning lottery mode and the support mode when the "best result" is not obtained during the stay in the short-term high-frequency support mode, the first holding lamp part, and the second It is a figure which shows a reservation lamp part. Specifically, FIG. 40(A) is a view showing the display screen G when the second variable display of the first rotation does not result in the "best result" after moving to block BL23. FIG. 40(B) is a view showing the display screen G when two rounds of the game are completed without the "best result". FIG. 40(C) is a diagram showing the display screen G when the second variable display of FIG. 40(B) results in "best result". FIG. 40(D) is a diagram showing the display screen G during the second variable display in the high-probability mode and high-frequency support mode after FIG. 40(C).
Hereinafter, the flow at the time of shifting to the win/fail lottery mode and the support mode will be described with reference to FIGS. 37 and 40. FIG.

In block BL23, if the second variation display does not result in the "best result" (see the dotted line arrow in the figure), the pachinko machine 10 enters the high-probability mode and low-frequency support mode as shown in FIG. (block BL25). Since the MPU 92 executes high-precision number notification determination processing in step S2203 in block BL25, the MPU 102 notifies the value of the high-precision number counter STC based on the content of the variation start command transmitted from the MPU 92. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 40(A), the MPU 102 displays "two more spins during high probability" on the upper left of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47, thereby allowing the game to stay in the high probability mode. It informs that the number of rotations is 2 rotations. It should be noted that the number of game rounds staying in the high-probability mode decreases as the value of the high-probability number counter STC decreases.

The pachinko machine 10 enters the low-probability mode and low-frequency support mode as shown in FIG. mode (block BL26). The MPU 102, in block BL26, when the reservation information stored in the second result display section reservation area Rb remains based on the winning of the game ball to the lower operation opening 37, that is, when the second variable display is being performed. , based on the content of the variation start command transmitted from the MPU 92, it is notified that it is in the special game state. Specifically, since the MPU 92 executes the special game state notification determination process in step S2210 in the block BL26, the MPU 102, as shown in FIG. The special game state is notified by displaying "Big Chance Zone!!" In addition, in FIG. 40(B), since the rest of the pending information stored in the second result display portion pending area Rb is two including one in the second variable display, the second pending lamp portion 49b The number of lighting of is one.
On the other hand, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to block BL22 again when "big hit" is won in block BL25 (see the solid line arrow in the figure).

In block BL26, when the second variable display results in the "best result" (see the solid line arrow in the figure), as shown in FIG. (for example, 7.7.7) are stopped and displayed on the activated line L. Then, the pachinko machine 10 executes the effect for the opening/closing execution mode selected by the MPU92 based on the command for the opening/closing execution mode transmitted from the MPU92.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 37, the pachinko machine 10 enters the high probability mode and high frequency support mode (block BL24). In block BL24, the MPU 92 executes high-probability number-of-games notification determination processing in step S2203, and executes game number-of-games notification determination processing in step S2207. , the value of the high-precision number counter STC and the value of the game number counter RTC are notified. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 40(D), the MPU 102 displays "3 more rotations during high probability" on the upper left of the display screen G of the pattern display device 47, thereby staying in the high probability mode. It informs that the number of rotations is 3 rotations. Further, the MPU 102 displays "34 rotations remaining in the chance time" on the right side of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47, so that the number of rotations of the game to stay in the high-frequency support mode (long-term high-frequency support mode) is It informs that it is 34 revolutions. In addition, the number of game rotations staying in the high probability mode decreases as the value of the high probability number counter STC decreases, and the number of game rotations staying in the high frequency support mode is the value of the game number counter RTC. decreases with the decrease of

Then, in the block BL24, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the block BL24 again when the first variable display or the second variable display results in a "jackpot win" (see the solid line arrow in the figure).
On the other hand, in the block BL26, the pachinko machine 10 does not obtain the "best result" in the second variation display (see the dotted line arrow in the figure), and in the block BL24, the first variation display or the second When the 34 rounds of the game are completed without becoming "big hit" in the variable display (see the dotted line arrow in the figure), the process proceeds to block BL21.

In this way, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the long-term high-frequency support mode when the second variation display shows the "best result" in the special game state of the block BL26 (see the solid line arrow in the figure). . Therefore, the special game state is a state in which the transition to the long-term high-frequency support mode occurs when the second variable display results in the "best result".
In addition, in FIG. 38(E), the number of lighting of the second holding lamp part 49b is four at maximum, so in the example of FIG. becomes.
Therefore, the winning probability of the second variable display in the special game state is 1/30 per rotation. In other words, in the example of FIG. 40, the pachinko machine 10 does not shift to the special game state of block BL26 unless the number of lighting of the second suspension lamp portion 49b is set to 3 or more during stay in the short-term high-frequency support mode.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the first holding lamp portion 49a is not lit, the game state transition processing is performed after switching to the high probability mode in the transition processing at the end of the opening/closing execution mode and the fluctuation end processing. When the result of the internal lottery associated with the reservation information stored in the reservation area Rb for the second result display part is won first, the game state is set to a long-term high frequency support mode (most advantageous game state) advantageous to the player. It functions as a most advantageous game state transition unit that transitions.

Here, as described above, the high-probability mode executes an internal lottery with a winning probability higher than that of the low-probability mode. The probability of winning increases when the result is reported (block BL25), and the probability of winning decreases when the result of the internal lottery associated with the remaining pending information is reported in the subsequent low probability mode (block BL26). ). Also, when the result of the internal lottery associated with the first hold information is notified in the high probability mode, the winning probability increases (block BL23). According to this, the player most expects to win when notified of the result of the internal lottery associated with the first pending information in the high-probability mode.

According to this embodiment, the following functions and effects can be obtained.
(1) The game state transition process is executed when a game ball enters the lower operation opening 37 after switching from the high probability mode to the low probability mode in the transition process at the end of the open/close execution mode and the fluctuation end process. The game state is shifted to a long-term high-frequency support mode which is more advantageous to the player than the low-probability mode and the high-probability mode when winning the internal lottery. According to this, the player pays attention to the result of the internal lottery executed with the entry of the game ball into the lower operation opening 37 as a trigger. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can increase the attention of the player to the game.

(2) The transition process and the variable end process at the end of the opening/closing execution mode are performed after switching to the high-probability mode, by performing a predetermined number of The high-probability mode is switched to the low-probability mode when the result of the internal lottery associated with the hold information is notified. According to this, the player expects non-winning when notified of the result of the internal lottery associated with the predetermined number of pending information in the high probability mode, and then the remaining pending information in the low probability mode. If you are notified of the results of the internal lottery associated with the , you expect to win. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can increase the attention of the player to the game.

(3) The pachinko machine 10 selects the results of the internal lottery associated with the plurality of pieces of reservation information stored in the second result display section reservation area Rb from the plurality of pieces of reservation information stored in the first result display section reservation area Ra. Since the notification is given with priority over the result of the internal lottery associated with the information, regardless of whether the reservation information is stored in the first result display reservation area Ra, the second result display reservation area Rb The result of the internal lottery associated with a plurality of pieces of pending information stored in can be preferentially notified. Therefore, the player pays attention only to the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the lower working hole 37, so the pachinko machine 10 increases the player's attention to the game. can be improved.

(4) Since the high-probability mode executes an internal lottery with a winning probability higher than that of the low-probability mode, the winning probability is will be higher and the odds of winning will be lower when the subsequent low probability mode announces the results of the internal lottery associated with the remaining pending information. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can increase the attention of the player to the game.
(5) Since the continuation rate of the long-term high-frequency support mode is higher than the continuation rate of the high-probability mode, the player receives the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the lower operation opening 37. Will pay more attention. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can increase the attention of the player to the game.
(6) Since the upper working port 36 and the lower working port 37 are arranged on the same path, the player can shoot the game ball on the same path, thereby You can enter the game ball in. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 allows the player to play comfortably.

(7) In the game state transition process, when the result of the internal lottery executed with the entry of the game ball into the upper working port 36 or the lower working port 37 is won, the upper working port 36 and the lower working port 37 and, based on the combination of the low-probability mode and the high-probability mode, the game state is shifted to the long-term high-frequency support mode which is more advantageous to the player than the low-probability mode and the high-probability mode. According to this, when the player wins the result of the internal lottery executed with the entry of the game ball into the upper working port 36 or the lower working port 37, the upper working port 36 and the lower working port 37 and combinations with low-probability and high-probability modes. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can increase the attention of the player to the game.

(8) When the first holding lamp portion 49a is not turned on, the game state transition processing is, after switching to the high probability mode in the transition processing at the end of the open/close execution mode and the fluctuation end processing, displaying the second result first. When the result of the internal lottery associated with the reservation information stored in the reservation area Rb is won, or after switching from the high probability mode to the low probability mode in the transition processing at the end of the opening and closing execution mode and the fluctuation end processing , the game state is changed to a long-term high-frequency support mode which is more advantageous to the player than the low-probability mode and the high-probability mode when winning the internal lottery result triggered by the entry of the game ball into the lower operating port 37. to migrate. According to this, the player pays attention to the result of the internal lottery executed with the entry of the game ball into the lower operation opening 37 as a trigger. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can increase the attention of the player to the game.

(9) When the first holding lamp portion 49a is not turned on, the transition processing at the end of the opening/closing execution mode and the fluctuation end processing are stored in the holding area Rb for the second result display portion after switching to the high probability mode. The high-probability mode is switched to the low-probability mode when the result of the internal lottery associated with a predetermined number of pieces of reservation information less than the number of the pieces of reservation information is notified. According to this, when the player is notified of the result of the internal lottery associated with the predetermined number of hold information from the second time onward in the high probability mode, the player expects not to win, and then in the low probability mode Winning is expected when the result of the internal lottery associated with the remaining pending information is notified, or when the result of the internal lottery associated with the first pending information is notified in the high probability mode. . Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can increase the attention of the player to the game.

[Second embodiment]
A second embodiment of the present invention will be described below with reference to the drawings.
In the following description, the same reference numerals are given to the parts that have already been described, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 41 is a front view of a game board according to the second embodiment of the invention.
In the first embodiment, the game board 31 has the first reservation lamp portion 49a. On the other hand, in this embodiment, the game board 31A differs from the first embodiment in that it does not include the first reservation lamp portion 49a.
In the description of the game board 31A, components having the same functions as those of the first embodiment, but having different shapes and arrangements are given the same reference numerals.

The variable winning device 38 drives a large winning opening 38a that opens upward to allow game balls flowing down the game area to enter, an open/close door 38b for opening and closing the large winning opening 38a, and an open/close door 38b. A variable winning drive unit 38c is provided.
In addition, the player hits to the right by maximizing the amount of rotational operation of the shooting handle 27, and changes the arrival position of the game ball in the upper part of the game area from the side where the exit portion of the guide rail 34 is formed to the opposite side. By shifting to the side, the game ball can be led to the variable winning device 38 avoiding the variable display unit 43 (right-handed route).

Here, the game board 31A has a first route (left-handed route) that makes it easy for the game ball to enter the upper operating port 36 and makes it difficult for the game ball to enter the lower operating port 37, There is also a second route (right-handed route) that makes it easy for the game ball to enter the lower operation port 37 and makes it difficult for the game ball to enter the upper operation port 36.例文帳に追加

Here, the game board 31A has a cover 381 provided so as to cover the front side of the variable winning device 38. As shown in FIG. The cover 381 includes a transparent (or semi-transparent) portion 381a formed to make the variable winning device 38 visible from the front side, and an opaque portion 381a formed around the transparent portion 381a. and a portion 381b.
Therefore, the player can see the variable winning device 38 from the front through the transparent portion 381a and the window portion 21. FIG.

The big winning opening 38a is provided in an opening formed in the game area so as to pass through in the front-rear direction by applying router processing. As described above, the big winning opening 38a is equipped with a detection sensor 40d for detecting the entry of a game ball. The pachinko machine 10 pays out a predetermined number of prize balls based on the detection result.

The opening/closing door 38b is formed in a rectangular plate shape, and is provided on the game board 31A so as to close the opening of the big winning opening 38a. The opening/closing door 38b advances toward the window panel 22 and protrudes from the game board 31A, thereby closing the opening of the big winning opening 38a. It has an open state in which the opening of the big winning opening 38a is opened by being buried in 31A.
The variable winning driving unit 38c sets the opening/closing door 38b to either an open state or a closed state by driving the opening/closing door 38b.

Specifically, the opening/closing door 38b is normally set to a closed state in which game balls cannot win. When the internal lottery wins the transition to the opening/closing execution mode and the opening/closing execution mode is entered, the opening/closing door 38b is set to an open state in which a game ball can win a prize.
The opening/closing execution mode (specific control state) refers to a mode in which the opening/closing door 38b is set to an open state and a game ball can be entered into the big winning opening 38a. In addition, in the opening/closing execution mode, after the opening/closing door 38b is set to the open state, it is called one round game until it is set to the closed state again.

The variable display unit 43 includes a pattern display device 47 that variably displays (variable display or switching display) a pattern, which is one type of pattern. Also, the variable display unit 43 has a center frame 48 arranged so as to surround the pattern display device 47 . The upper portion of the center frame 48 is provided so as to bulge toward the window panel 22 provided on the front side thereof. As a result, the pachinko machine 10 prevents the game balls from falling in front of the display screen G of the pattern display device 47, and does not cause the inconvenience that the visibility of the display screen G is lowered due to the falling of the game balls. It is configured.

The pattern display device 47 is configured as a liquid crystal display device having a liquid crystal display.
The symbol display device 47 starts the variable display of symbols based on the winning of the upper operation port 36 or the lower operation port 37 . That is, when the symbol display device 47 performs the variable display in the first result display section 45a of the main display section 45 and when the second result display section 45b of the main display section 45 performs the variable display, The variable display is executed accordingly.
The pattern display device 47 is not limited to a liquid crystal display device, and may be a plasma display device, an organic EL display device, or other display device such as a CRT.

The center frame 48 includes a second holding lamp portion 49b provided in the lower right region of the pattern display device 47 and a third holding lamp portion 49c provided in the upper region of the pattern display device 47. .

The second reservation lamp part 49b is a part that displays the number of reserved game balls that have won the lower operation opening 37, and lights up according to the number of reserved games. The second holding lamp portion 49b can hold up to four game balls, and corresponds to the variable display of the second result display portion 45b and the symbol display device 47. FIG.
The third reservation lamp portion 49c is a portion that displays the number of reserved game balls that have won the respective through gates 41, and lights up according to the number of reserved games. The third holding lamp portion 49 c can hold up to four game balls, and corresponds to the variable display of the accessory display portion 46 .
It should be noted that the holding lamp portions 49b and 49c may have other configurations such as being displayed as an image on a portion of the pattern display device 47, which will be described later.

<Electrical Configuration for Execution of Internal Lottery by MPU 62 of Main Control Unit 60>
FIG. 42 shows the contents of each counter used for the internal lottery.
As shown in FIG. 42, the MPU 62 executes an internal lottery by using the values (information) of the counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS and C4. Specifically, the MPU 62 uses the big win random number counter C1 for the lottery for the occurrence of the big win, uses the big win type counter C2 for the lottery for the type of the big win, and determines whether to generate the ready-to-win display. , the reach random number counter C3 is used. Also, the MPU 62 uses the random number initial value counter CINI to set the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1, and uses the variation type counter CS to determine the display continuation time on the main display section 45 and the symbol display device 47. Further, the MPU 62 uses the electric accessory open counter C4 for the lottery to determine whether or not the electric accessory 37a of the lower operation port 37 is set to the electric role open state. The counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS and C4 are provided in the various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64 (see FIG. 4).

Each of the counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value each time it is updated and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Each counter is periodically updated, and the updated value is appropriately stored in a lottery counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 64 . Of the values stored in the lottery counter buffer, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 are stored in the RAM 64 at the timing when the game ball enters the upper operating port 36 or the lower operating port 37. is stored in the reserved ball storage area 64b (see FIG. 4) provided as acquired information storage means. Further, among the values stored in the lottery counter buffer, the value of the electric accessary product release counter C4 is stored in the electric role holding area 64c (see FIG. 4) of the RAM 64 at the timing when the game ball wins the through gate 41. be done.

The reserved ball storage area 64b includes a first result display section reservation area Ra, a second result display section reservation area Rb, and an execution area AE.

The first result display section reservation area Ra provided as the first ball entering section storage means includes one storage area. The first result display portion reservation area Ra is set to have a storage capacity capable of storing a set of values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3. The MPU 62 uses a set of values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 as reservation information in accordance with the winning of the game ball to the upper operation port 36 in the reservation area Ra for the first result display unit. Store.

The second result display section reservation area Rb provided as the second ball entering section storage means includes four storage areas, a first area Rb1 to a fourth area Rb4. Each of the areas Rb1 to Rb4 is set to have a storage capacity capable of storing a set of values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3. The MPU 62 uses a set of values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 as reservation information in time series to each area Rb1 to Rb4 in accordance with the winning of the game ball to the lower operation port 37. store it. Specifically, when the winning to the lower opening 37 occurs a plurality of times in succession, the MPU 62 outputs the pending information in the order of the first area Rb1→second area Rb2→third area Rb3→fourth area Rb4. Store in chronological order.

As described above, since the second result display portion reservation area Rb has four storage areas, up to four winnings of game balls into the lower operation opening 37 are reserved. The second result display portion reservation area Rb has a storage area for writing the number of reservations stored in each of the areas Rb1 to Rb4.
In addition, the number of reserves related to the lower working port 37 is not limited to four, and may be any number, such as two, three, or five or more, and may be singular. may

The execution area AE stores the pending information stored in the storage area of the first result display portion pending area Ra or the second result display portion pending area Rb when starting the variable display of each of the result display portions 45a and 45b. This is the area to move the .

The electrician reservation area 64c includes four storage areas, like the first result display reservation area Ra and the second result display reservation area Rb. Further, the electrical work holding area 64c includes an electrical work execution area (not shown), similar to the reserved ball storage area 64b. Therefore, the winning of game balls to each through gate 41 is reserved up to four.
The number of pending gates 41 is not limited to four, and may be any number, such as two, three, or five or more. may

Further, in this embodiment, the main controller 60 executes processing different from that in the first embodiment. Specifically, in the present embodiment, the prize winning process and the game round control process for the activation port are different from those in the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the contents of the prize winning process and the game cycle control process for the operation port in this embodiment will be described.

<Winning process for operating port>
FIG. 43 is a diagram showing a flow chart of the winning process for the working opening.
In the winning process for the working opening, the MPU 62 executes steps S201 to S208A as shown in FIG.

In step S201, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the detection sensor 40b corresponding to the upper working port 36 has detected the winning of the game ball, thereby determining whether the game ball has won the upper working port 36 (start winning). determine whether When the MPU 62 determines in step S201 that the game ball has entered the upper operation port 36, in step S208A, the jackpot random number counter C1 and jackpot type counter C2 updated in step S103 of the timer interrupt process, and the reach A set of each value of the random number counter C3 is stored as reservation information in the reservation area Ra for the first result display section. After that, the MPU 62 terminates the prize winning process for the operating port.

On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S201 that the game ball has not entered the upper operating port 36, in step S203, the detection sensor 40c corresponding to the lower operating port 37 detects the winning of the game ball. is detected, it is determined whether or not the game ball has entered the lower operation opening 37 (start winning).
When the MPU 62 determines in step S203 that the game ball has not entered the lower working opening 37, it ends the winning processing for the working opening. In addition, when the MPU 62 determines that the game ball has won the lower operation opening 37 in step S203, in step S204, the number of reservations stored in the second result display section reservation area Rb is grasped, The pending number is set in a predetermined storage area in the second result display portion pending area Rb as the second start pending storage number RbN.

At step S205A, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the second start pending memory number RbN set at step S204 is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment).
When the MPU 62 determines in step S205A that the second start pending memory number RbN is not less than the upper limit value, the MPU 62 terminates the winning process for the operating opening. Further, when the MPU 62 determines in step S205A that the second start-holding memory number RbN is less than the upper limit value, in step S206A, the value of the second start-holding memory number RbN is updated by adding 1. .

In step S207, the MPU 62 stores a set of values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 updated in step S103 of the timer interrupt process in the second result display holding area Rb. The suspension information is stored in the first storage area of the areas, that is, the storage area corresponding to the second start suspension storage number RbN updated in step S206.
For example, when the MPU 62 sets "3" to the second start pending memory number RbN in step S204, the MPU 62 stores the second start pending memory number RbN in the storage area corresponding to "4" updated in step S206. Hold information is stored in a certain fourth area Rb4.

Further, in step S207, the MPU 62 sets a command for lighting the second suspension lamp portion 49b and transmits the set command to the sound emission control device 90. FIG. After that, the MPU 62 terminates the prize winning process for the operating port.
In addition, the sound emission control device 90 turns on the second reservation lamp part 49b based on the command transmitted from the MPU 62 . Further, the number of reserved game balls that have won the lower operation opening 37 is, as described above, a maximum of four, and the second reservation lamp portion 49b is lit by the number corresponding to this reserved number.

<Game Round Control Processing>
FIG. 44 is a diagram showing a flowchart of game round control processing.
In the game round control process, the MPU 62 executes steps S501 to S509 as shown in FIG.
In step S501, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the opening/closing execution mode is in progress. When the MPU 62 determines in step S501 that the open/close execution mode is in progress, it ends the game round control process without executing the processes after step S502. Therefore, when it is determined that the open/close execution mode is in progress, the MPU 62 does not start the progress of the game cycle regardless of whether or not the winning of the game ball to the operation ports 36 and 37 is detected.
The MPU 62 determines whether or not the opening/closing execution mode is in progress by referring to the opening/closing execution mode flag stored in the RAM 64 . The same applies to each of the following processes. The MPU 62 sets the opening/closing execution mode flag when shifting to the opening/closing execution mode, and clears the opening/closing execution mode flag when the opening/closing execution mode ends.

On the other hand, if the MPU 62 determines in step S501 that the open/close execution mode is not in progress, in step S502 it determines whether the main display section 45 is performing variable display. Determine whether or not
When the MPU 62 determines in step S502 that the main display section 45 is not performing the variable display, the MPU 62 executes the game round start processing in steps S503A to S505.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S502 that the main display section 45 is performing the variable display, the MPU 62 executes the processing for game turn progress in steps S510A to S509.

First, the processing for starting a game cycle in steps S503A to S505 will be described.
In step S503A, the MPU 62 determines whether or not pending information is stored in the first result display portion pending area Ra or the second result display portion pending area Rb. When the MPU 62 determines in step S503A that the reservation information is not stored in the first result display section reservation area Ra or the second result display section reservation area Rb, it ends the game round control process.

On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S503A that the pending information is stored in the first result display portion pending area Ra or the second result display portion pending area Rb, in step S504A, A data setting process for setting the reservation information stored in the reservation area Ra for the first result display section or the reservation area Rb for the second result display section for completion of the game cycle is executed. After that, in step S505, the MPU 62 causes the main display unit 45 and the symbol display device 47 to start variable display, executes a variation start process for finishing the game round, and ends the game round control process.
The data setting process in step S504A will be described in detail below.

FIG. 45 is a diagram showing a flowchart of data setting processing.
In the data setting process, the MPU 62 executes steps S601 to S611 as shown in FIG.
In step S601, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the second start reservation memory number RbN in the second result display section reservation area Rb set in step S204 of the operation port winning process is "0" or less. do. When the MPU 62 determines in step S601 that the second start pending memory number RbN is equal to or less than "0", the MPU 62 executes data setting processing for the first result display section in steps S603 and S605, and proceeds to step S601. If it is determined that the second start pending memory number RbN is not equal to or less than "0", data setting processing for the second result display section of steps S607 to S611 is executed.

In this way, the data setting process includes the data setting process for the first result display section for setting the reservation information stored in the reservation area Ra for the first result display section for completing the game cycle, and the data setting processing for the second result display section. and a data setting process for the second result display section for setting the reservation information stored in the reservation area Rb for completion of the game cycle.
When the MPU 62 determines in step S601 that the second start pending storage number RbN is not equal to or less than "0", the MPU 62 does not execute the data setting process for the first result display section. Execute the data setting process for In other words, when the MPU 62 determines that there is reservation information stored in the second result display section reservation area Rb based on the winning of the game ball to the lower operation opening 37, the upper operation opening 36 The reservation information stored in the second result display section reservation area Rb is preferentially played regardless of whether or not there is reservation information stored in the first result display section reservation area Ra based on the winning of the game ball. Set for one digestion.

First, data setting processing for the first result display section in steps S603 and S605 will be described.
In step S603, the MPU 62 moves the pending information stored in the first result display pending area Ra to the execution area AE.
At step S605, the MPU 62 clears the second result display flag stored in the RAM 64. FIG. This second result display section flag is a flag for specifying which main display section 45, out of the first result display section 45a and the second result display section 45b, starts the variable display when completing a game round. is. In this step S605, the MPU 62 clears the second result display section flag, so that when the game cycle is completed, the variable display is made on the first result display section 45a based on the winning of the game ball into the upper working hole 36. (first variable display).

Next, data setting processing for the second result display section in steps S607 to S611 will be described.
In step S607, the MPU 62 subtracts 1 from the value of the second start pending storage number RbN in the second result display portion pending area Rb to update it.
In step S608, the MPU 62 moves the pending information stored in the second area Rb1 of the second result display portion pending area Rb to the execution area AE.
In step S609, the MPU 62 executes data shift processing for shifting the pending information stored in the storage area of the second result display portion pending area Rb. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the pending information stored in each of the areas Rb1 to Rb4 to the first area Rb1 side. Specifically, the MPU 62 shifts the pending information of the second area Rb2 to the first area Rb1, shifts the pending information of the third area Rb3 to the second area Rb2, shifts the pending information of the fourth area Rb4 to the third Shift to area Rb3.

At step S610, the MPU 62 sets the second result display section flag in the RAM 64. FIG. In this step S610, the MPU 62 sets the second result display section flag, so that when the game cycle is completed, the second result display section 45b displays a variable display based on the winning of the game ball into the lower operation opening 37. (second variable display).

In step S611, the MPU 62 sets a shift command for recognizing that the hold information has been shifted, transmits the set shift command to the sound emission control device 90, and ends the data setting process. This command at the time of shift indicates that the hold information stored in the hold area Rb for the second result display unit has been shifted based on the winning of the game ball to the lower operation opening 37. It contains information for 90 to recognize.
In addition, the sound emission control device 90 changes the lighting state of the second holding lamp portion 49b based on the shift command transmitted from the MPU 62 . Specifically, the sound emission control device 90 reduces the lighting number of the second reservation lamp portion 49b as the number of reserved game balls that have entered the lower opening 37 decreases.

Returning to the description of the game round control process, the game round progressing process of steps S510A to S509 will be described with reference to FIG.
In step S502, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the main display section 45 is performing variable display. Execute the process.

In step S510A, the MPU 62 clears the pending information stored in the first result display pending area Ra. In other words, when the MPU 62 determines in step S502 that the main display section 45 is performing the variable display, the MPU 62 does not store the reservation information in the first result display section reservation area Ra.

In step S506, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the display continuation time set in step S716 of the fluctuation start process has elapsed. Specifically, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the value set in the display continuation time counter of the RAM 64 has become "0" or less. The value of the display duration counter is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed.

When the MPU 62 determines in step S506 that the display continuation time has not elapsed, in step S507, the MPU 62 executes processing for variable display. In this process for variable display, the MPU 62 updates the display on the main display section 45 during variable display. After that, the MPU 62 ends the game round control process.

On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S506 that the display continuation time has elapsed, in step S508, the MPU 62 executes fluctuation end processing. In this fluctuation end processing, the MPU 62 stores the information (main (information related to the pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on the display unit 45). Then, at the end of the game cycle, the MPU 62 executes display control of the main display section 45 so as to display the pattern corresponding to the specified information on the main display section 45 during variable display (variation end execution processing).

Here, the pattern finally stopped and displayed on the main display section 45 differs for each type of game result. Therefore, the manager of the game hall or the like can confirm the game result by looking at the main display section 45 at the end of the game round. According to this, the manager of the game hall can easily check whether or not the pachinko machine 10 behaves in the same manner as in the case of winning a lottery to generate a big win. can be done systematically.
The display area of the main display section 45 is narrower than that of the display screen G of the pattern display device 47. Compared to Z1 to Z3, it is difficult for the player to recognize. Therefore, at the end of the game cycle, the player checks the display screen G of the pattern display device 47 instead of the main display unit 45 to determine whether or not the player has won the big win. Attention to the screen G can be increased.

In step S509, the MPU 62 sets a fluctuation end command. The MPU 62 transmits the fluctuation end command set in step S509 to the sound emission control device 90 in step S301 of the normal process. After that, the MPU 62 ends the game round control process.
In addition, the sound emission control device 90 executes processing for ending the effect of the game round based on the variation end command transmitted from the MPU 62 . Here, the sound emission control device 90 may be configured to independently end the effect of the game round without requiring reception of the variation end command.

According to this embodiment, similarly to the case where the first holding lamp portion 49a is not lit in the first embodiment, the game state transition processing is performed in the transition processing at the end of the opening/closing execution mode and the fluctuation end processing. After switching to the high-probability mode, a long-term high-frequency support mode ( It functions as a most advantageous game state transition unit that shifts the game state to the most advantageous game state.

Here, as described above, the high-probability mode executes an internal lottery with a winning probability higher than that of the low-probability mode. The probability of winning increases when the result is reported (block BL25), and the probability of winning decreases when the result of the internal lottery associated with the remaining pending information is reported in the subsequent low probability mode (block BL26). ). Also, when the result of the internal lottery associated with the first hold information is notified in the high probability mode, the winning probability increases (block BL23). According to this, the player most expects to win when notified of the result of the internal lottery associated with the first pending information in the high-probability mode.

According to this embodiment, the following functions and effects can be obtained.
(1) The game state transition process is executed when a game ball enters the lower operation opening 37 after switching from the high probability mode to the low probability mode in the transition process at the end of the open/close execution mode and the fluctuation end process. The game state is shifted to a long-term high-frequency support mode which is more advantageous to the player than the low-probability mode and the high-probability mode when winning the internal lottery. According to this, the player pays attention to the result of the internal lottery executed with the entry of the game ball into the lower operation opening 37 as a trigger. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can increase the attention of the player to the game.

(2) The transition process and the variable end process at the end of the opening/closing execution mode are performed after switching to the high-probability mode, by performing a predetermined number of The high-probability mode is switched to the low-probability mode when the result of the internal lottery associated with the hold information is notified. According to this, the player expects non-winning when notified of the result of the internal lottery associated with the predetermined number of pending information in the high probability mode, and then the remaining pending information in the low probability mode. If you are notified of the results of the internal lottery associated with the , you expect to win. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can increase the attention of the player to the game.

(3) Since the high-probability mode executes an internal lottery with a higher probability of winning than the low-probability mode, when the result of the internal lottery associated with a predetermined number of pending information is notified in the high-probability mode, the probability of winning will be higher and the odds of winning will be lower when the subsequent low probability mode announces the results of the internal lottery associated with the remaining pending information. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can increase the attention of the player to the game.
(4) Since the continuation rate of the long-term high-frequency support mode is higher than the continuation rate of the high-probability mode, the player receives the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the lower operation opening 37. Will pay more attention. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can increase the attention of the player to the game.
(5) The player can make it easier for the game ball to enter the upper working hole 36 by shooting the game ball in the left-handed route, and by shooting the game ball in the right-handed route. , the game ball can be easily caused to enter the lower operation opening 37.例文帳に追加Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can surely reflect the player's intentions and allow the player to play comfortably.

(6) In the game state transition process, when the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the upper working port 36 or the lower working port 37 is won, the upper working port 36 and the lower working port 37 and, based on the combination of the low-probability mode and the high-probability mode, the game state is shifted to the long-term high-frequency support mode which is more advantageous to the player than the low-probability mode and the high-probability mode. According to this, when the player wins the result of the internal lottery executed with the entry of the game ball into the upper working port 36 or the lower working port 37, the upper working port 36 and the lower working port 37 and combinations with low-probability and high-probability modes. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can increase the attention of the player to the game.

(7) The game state transition process is associated with the reservation information first stored in the second result display section reservation area Rb after switching to the high probability mode in the transition process at the end of the opening/closing execution mode and the variation end process. When winning the result of the internal lottery, or after switching from the high probability mode to the low probability mode in the transition processing at the end of the opening and closing execution mode and the fluctuation end processing, the entry of the game ball to the lower operation port 37 is prohibited. When the result of the internal lottery executed as a trigger is won, the game state is shifted to a long-term high-frequency support mode more advantageous to the player than the low-probability mode and the high-probability mode. According to this, the player pays attention to the result of the internal lottery executed with the entry of the game ball into the lower operation opening 37 as a trigger. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can increase the attention of the player to the game.

(8) The transition process and the variable end process at the end of the opening/closing execution mode are performed after switching to the high-probability mode, by performing a predetermined number of The high-probability mode is switched to the low-probability mode when the result of the internal lottery associated with the hold information is notified. According to this, when the player is notified of the result of the internal lottery associated with the predetermined number of hold information from the second time onward in the high probability mode, the player expects not to win, and then in the low probability mode Winning is expected when the result of the internal lottery associated with the remaining pending information is notified, or when the result of the internal lottery associated with the first pending information is notified in the high probability mode. . Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can increase the attention of the player to the game.

[Third embodiment]
A third embodiment of the present invention will be described below with reference to the drawings.
In the following description, the same reference numerals are given to the parts that have already been described, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 46 is a front view of a game board according to the third embodiment of the invention.
In the first embodiment, the game board 31 has the through gates 41 provided on the left side of the central portion and the right side of the central portion.
On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the game board 31B is different from the first embodiment in that it has one through gate 41 provided above the upper operating port 36 .

According to this embodiment, when a game ball is entered into the through gate 41 in order to set the electric accessory 37a to the open state, the game ball is always entered into the upper operation opening 36. The situation is the same as in the case of turning on the first reservation lamp portion 49a in the first embodiment.
Specifically, the game state transition process is stored in the second result display holding area Rb after switching from the high probability mode to the low probability mode in the transition process at the end of the opening/closing execution mode and the fluctuation end process. It functions as a most advantageous game state transition section for shifting the game state to a long-term high-frequency support mode (most advantageous game state) advantageous to the player when the result of the internal lottery associated with the reservation information is won.
In other words, the game state transition process is triggered by the entry of a game ball into the lower operation opening 37 after switching from the high probability mode to the low probability mode in the transition process at the end of the opening/closing execution mode and the fluctuation end process. A most advantageous game state transition unit for transferring a game state to a long-term high-frequency support mode (most advantageous game state) more advantageous to a player than a low-probability mode and a high-probability mode when the result of the executed internal lottery is won. function as

According to this embodiment, the following functions and effects can be obtained.
(1) The game state transition process is executed when a game ball enters the lower operation opening 37 after switching from the high probability mode to the low probability mode in the transition process at the end of the open/close execution mode and the fluctuation end process. The game state is shifted to a long-term high-frequency support mode which is more advantageous to the player than the low-probability mode and the high-probability mode when winning the internal lottery. According to this, the player pays attention to the result of the internal lottery executed with the entry of the game ball into the lower operation opening 37 as a trigger. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can increase the attention of the player to the game.

(2) The transition process and the variable end process at the end of the opening/closing execution mode are performed after switching to the high-probability mode, by performing a predetermined number of The high-probability mode is switched to the low-probability mode when the result of the internal lottery associated with the hold information is notified. According to this, the player expects non-winning when notified of the result of the internal lottery associated with the predetermined number of pending information in the high probability mode, and then the remaining pending information in the low probability mode. If you are notified of the results of the internal lottery associated with the , you expect to win. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can increase the attention of the player to the game.

(3) The pachinko machine 10 selects the results of the internal lottery associated with the plurality of pieces of reservation information stored in the second result display section reservation area Rb from the plurality of pieces of reservation information stored in the first result display section reservation area Ra. Since the notification is given with priority over the result of the internal lottery associated with the information, regardless of whether the reservation information is stored in the first result display reservation area Ra, the second result display reservation area Rb The result of the internal lottery associated with a plurality of pieces of pending information stored in can be preferentially notified. Therefore, the player pays attention only to the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the lower working hole 37, so the pachinko machine 10 increases the player's attention to the game. can be improved.

(4) Since the high-probability mode executes an internal lottery with a winning probability higher than that of the low-probability mode, the winning probability is will be higher and the odds of winning will be lower when the subsequent low probability mode announces the results of the internal lottery associated with the remaining pending information. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can increase the attention of the player to the game.
(5) Since the continuation rate of the long-term high-frequency support mode is higher than the continuation rate of the high-probability mode, the player receives the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the lower operation opening 37. Will pay more attention. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can increase the attention of the player to the game.
(6) Since the upper working port 36 and the lower working port 37 are arranged on the same path, the player can shoot the game ball on the same path, thereby You can enter the game ball in. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 allows the player to play comfortably.

(7) In the game state transition process, when the result of the internal lottery executed with the entry of the game ball into the upper working port 36 or the lower working port 37 is won, the upper working port 36 and the lower working port 37 and, based on the combination of the low-probability mode and the high-probability mode, the game state is shifted to the long-term high-frequency support mode which is more advantageous to the player than the low-probability mode and the high-probability mode. According to this, when the player wins the result of the internal lottery executed with the entry of the game ball into the upper working port 36 or the lower working port 37, the upper working port 36 and the lower working port 37 and combinations with low-probability and high-probability modes. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can increase the attention of the player to the game.

[Fourth Embodiment]
A fourth embodiment of the present invention will be described below with reference to the drawings.
In the following description, the same reference numerals are given to the parts that have already been described, and the description thereof will be omitted.

In this embodiment, the main controller 60 executes processing different from that in the third embodiment. Specifically, in this embodiment, the first support mode setting process and the electric duty fluctuation end process are different from those in the third embodiment. The contents of the first support mode setting process and the electric duty fluctuation end process in this embodiment will be described below.

FIG. 47 is a diagram showing a flowchart of first support mode setting processing according to the fourth embodiment of the present invention.
In the first support mode setting process, the MPU 62 executes steps S1501 to S1512 as shown in FIG.
In step S1501, the MPU 62 determines whether the winning lottery mode is the high probability mode. If the MPU 62 determines in step S1501 that the win/fail lottery mode is the high probability mode, the MPU 62 executes support mode setting processing for the high probability mode in steps S1502 to S1513C. If it is determined that the mode is not the probability mode, a support mode setting process for the low probability mode in steps S1508 to S1512 is executed.

First, support mode setting processing for the high probability mode in steps S1502 to S1513C will be described.
In step S1502, the MPU 62 determines whether the support mode is the high frequency support mode.

When the MPU 62 determines in step S1502 that the support mode is the high frequency support mode, the MPU 62 clears the high frequency support flag stored in the RAM 64 in step S1503. Thereby, the MPU 62 sets the support mode to the low-frequency support mode.
In step S1504, the MPU 62 sets the value of the number-of-games counter RTC provided in the various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64 to "0".

On the other hand, if the MPU 62 determines in step S1502 that the support mode is not the high-frequency support mode (if it determines that the support mode is the low-frequency support mode), in step S1505 the high-frequency support flag is set in the RAM 64. The MPU 62 maintains the high frequency support flag if it is already set in the RAM 64 . Thereby, the MPU 62 sets the support mode to the high frequency support mode.
In step S1506, the MPU 62 sets the value of the number-of-games counter RTC provided in the various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64 to "1".

In step S1507, the MPU 62 sets a short-term high-frequency support mode command. The MPU 62 transmits the short-term high-frequency support mode command set in step S1507 to the sound emission control device 90 in step S301 of normal processing.
Note that the sound emission control device 90 executes predetermined processing based on the short-term high-frequency support mode command transmitted from the MPU 62 .

In step S1513C, the MPU 62 executes processing for setting the special electric worker opening time.
In this special electric role open time setting process, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the distribution result is the "best result".
When the MPU 62 determines in step S1513C that the distribution result is the "best result", it sets the special electric worker open time flag in the RAM 64. FIG.
On the other hand, if the MPU 62 determines in step S1513C that the distribution result is not the "most favorable result" If it is determined to be present), the special electric worker open time flag stored in the RAM 64 is cleared. This special electrician opening time flag is a flag for specifying execution of special electrician opening execution processing. The special electric role opening execution processing will be described later in detail.

After executing the process of step S1504 or the process of step S1513C, the MPU 62 ends the first support mode setting process.

Next, support mode setting processing for the low probability mode in steps S1508 to S1512 will be described.
In step S1508, the MPU 62 determines whether the support mode is the high frequency support mode.

When the MPU 62 determines in step S1508 that the support mode is the high frequency support mode, the MPU 62 sets a high frequency support flag in the RAM 64 in step S1509. The MPU 62 maintains the high frequency support flag if it is already set in the RAM 64 . Thereby, the MPU 62 sets the support mode to the high frequency support mode.
At step S1510, the MPU 62 sets the value of the number-of-games counter RTC provided in the various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64 to "34".

On the other hand, if the MPU 62 determines in step S1508 that the support mode is not the high-frequency support mode (if it determines that the support mode is the low-frequency support mode), in step S1511, the data stored in the RAM 64 clear the high-frequency support flag. Thereby, the MPU 62 sets the support mode to the low-frequency support mode.
At step S1512, the MPU 62 sets the value of the number-of-games counter RTC provided in the various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64 to "0".

After executing the process of step S1510 or the process of step S1512, the MPU 62 ends the first support mode setting process.

FIG. 48 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the electric duty fluctuation ending process.
In the electric duty change ending process, the MPU 62 executes steps S1801 to S1805 as shown in FIG.
In step S1801, the information (final (information related to the pattern to be stopped and displayed). Then, at the end of the electric role game cycle, the MPU 62 executes display control of the character object display unit 46 so that the pattern corresponding to the specified information is displayed on the character object display unit 46 during variable display ( power fluctuation end execution processing).

In step S1802, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the result of winning the electric role is "Electrical role open winning".
When the MPU 62 determines in step S1802 that the electric role winning result is not "electric role open winning", it ends the electric role variation ending process without executing the processes after step S1803.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1802 that the electric role winning result is "electric role open winning", in step S1803 it determines whether the support mode is the high-frequency support mode. do.

When the MPU 62 determines in step S1803 that the support mode is the high-frequency support mode, in step S1806C it determines whether or not the special electric worker open time flag is set in the RAM 64 .
When the MPU 62 determines in step S1806C that the special electric worker opening time flag is set in the RAM 64, it sets a special electric worker opening execution command in step S1807C. The MPU 62 transmits the special electric role opening execution command set in step S1807C to the sound emission control device 90 in step S301 of the normal processing.
In addition, the sound emission control device 90 executes a predetermined process based on the special electric role release execution command transmitted from the MPU 62 . This processing will be described later in detail.
In step S1808C, the MPU 62 executes a special electrician opening execution process. In the special electric role opening execution process, the MPU 62 executes the opening/closing process of the electric role product 37a by executing drive control of the electric role product driving unit 37b.

On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1806C that the special electric service opening time flag is not set in the RAM 64, it executes high-frequency electric service opening execution processing in step S1804. In the high-frequency electric role opening execution process, the MPU 62 executes the opening/closing process of the electric role product 37a by executing drive control of the electric role product driving unit 37b.
After executing the special electrician opening execution process in step S1808C or the high-frequency electricty electricty opening execution process in step S1804, the MPU 62 ends the electrician fluctuation ending process.

On the other hand, if the MPU 62 determines in step S1803 that the support mode is not the high-frequency support mode (if it determines that the support mode is the low-frequency support mode), in step S1805, the MPU 62 Execute the role release execution process. In the low-frequency electric role opening execution process, the MPU 62 executes the opening/closing process of the electric role product 37a by executing drive control of the electric role product driving unit 37b. After that, the MPU 62 terminates the power fluctuation end process.

Here, in the high-frequency electric role opening execution process, when the electric accessory opening lottery is won, the number of times the electric accessory 37a is set to the open state is greater than in the low-frequency electric role opening execution process. , the opening time for setting the electric accessory 37a to the open state is also longer. In addition, in the high-frequency power supply opening execution process, the closed time for setting the electric accessory 37a to the closed state between each opening in one power supply open state is shorter than the opening time of one time. ing.

Therefore, in the high-frequency support mode, game balls are more likely to enter the lower operation opening 37 as compared with the low-frequency support mode. In other words, in the low frequency support mode, the game ball has a higher probability of winning in the upper working opening 36 than in the lower working opening 37 . In addition, in the high-frequency support mode, the probability that the game ball will enter the lower operating port 37 is higher than the upper operating port 36.例文帳に追加
When it is detected that a prize has been entered into the lower operating port 37, a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out. Therefore, in the high-frequency support mode, the player can play the game while not reducing the number of game balls. It can be carried out.

Further, in the special electric role opening execution process, when the electric role item opening lottery is won, the number of times the electric role item 37a is set to the open state is larger than that in the high-frequency electric role opening execution process. The opening time for setting the object 37a to the open state is also longer. Specifically, the opening time of the special electric service opening execution process is set to 5 seconds (long-term electric service opening time). Also, the release time of the high-frequency electric service release execution process is set to 2 seconds (short-term service release time). In addition, in the special electric role opening execution process, the closing time for setting the electric accessory 37a to the closed state between each opening in one electric role open state is shorter than the opening time of one time. .
Therefore, in the special electric role opening execution process, the game ball is more likely to enter the lower operation opening 37 as compared with the high-frequency electric role opening execution process.

Further, in the present embodiment, the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 execute processing different from that in the third embodiment. Specifically, in this embodiment, the effect determination process is different from that in the third embodiment. The contents of the effect determination process in this embodiment will be described below.

<Regarding effect determination processing executed by the sound emission control device 90>
FIG. 49 is a diagram showing a flowchart of effect determination processing.
The MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 executes an effect determination process in order to execute an effect for the game cycle, an effect for the open/close execution mode, and the like. In this effect determination process, steps S2101 to S2116 are executed in substantially the same manner as in the third embodiment. The present embodiment differs from the first embodiment in that the MPU 92 executes steps S2117C to 2119C before executing step S2116, as shown in FIG.

In step S2117C, the MPU 92 determines whether or not the special electrician release execution command transmitted from the MPU 62 has been received.
When the MPU 92 determines in step S2117C that it has received the special electric worker release execution command, it executes a special electric worker release notification process in step S2118C.
In this special electric role opening notification process, the MPU 92 decides to inform the special electric role opening.
Further, the MPU 92 executes light emission control of the display lamp unit 23 and audio control of the speaker unit 24 in the above-described effect execution processing of step S2003 based on the determination of the special electric role opening notification.

In step S2119C, a special electric service opening notification command related to the special electric service opening notification process determined in the special electric service opening notification process of step S2118C is set. Then, the MPU 92 stores the special electric service release notification command in the command list stored in the command list storage area 94a of the RAM 94. FIG. This special electric role release notification command is transmitted to the display control device 100 in the above-described command transmission processing of step S2005.

The MPU 102 of the display control device 100 reads from the program ROM 103 a data table for executing the special electric role opening notification effect on the symbol display device 47 based on the special electric role opening notification command transmitted from the MPU 92 . Then, the MPU 102 outputs a command to the VDP 105 based on this data table each time a predetermined image update timing (for example, every 20 msec) comes. As a result, the symbol display device 47 executes the special electric role opening notification effect.

After executing the process of step S2119C, or if it is determined in step S2117C that the special electrician opening execution command has not been received, the MPU 92 executes the process of step S2116 and subsequent steps, as in the third embodiment. do.

<Regarding the flow at the time of transition to lottery mode and support mode>
FIG. 50 shows the display screen of the symbol display device, the first suspension lamp section, and the second suspension during the transition to the winning lottery mode and the support mode when the "best result" is obtained when transitioning to the short-term high-frequency support mode. It is a figure which shows a lamp|ramp part. Specifically, FIG. 50(A) is a diagram showing the display screen G during the first variable display when the second holding lamp section is not lit and in the low probability mode and low frequency support mode. be. FIG. 50(B) is a diagram showing the display screen G when the first variable display of FIG. 50(A) results in "most advantageous result". FIG. 50(C) is a diagram showing the display screen G during the first variable display in the high-probability mode and low-frequency support mode after FIG. 50(B). FIG. 50(D) is a diagram showing the display screen G when the first variable display of FIG. 50(C) results in "best result". FIG. 50(E) is a diagram showing the display screen G during the first variable display in the high-probability mode and high-frequency support mode after FIG. 50(D).
Hereinafter, the flow at the time of shifting to the winning lottery mode and the support mode will be described with reference to FIGS. 33 and 50. FIG.

After the pachinko machine 10 executes the above-described main processing that is activated when the power is turned on, as shown in FIG. 33, the pachinko machine 10 enters the low-probability mode and low-frequency support mode (block BL11). In the low-frequency support mode, the game ball has a higher probability of entering the upper working opening 36 than the lower working opening 37, so that the game ball is shot from the game ball shooting mechanism 81 by rotating the shooting handle 27 by the player. The game ball enters the upper working port 36. - 特許庁Therefore, as shown in FIG. 50(A), the first reservation lamp portion 49a is lit according to the number of reserved game balls that have entered the upper operation opening 36, and the game cycle is displayed in the first variable display. On the other hand, since the game ball hardly enters the lower operation opening 37, the second reservation lamp portion 49b is turned off. In addition, in FIG. 50A, the maximum number of lights of the first reservation lamp portion 49a is four.

In block BL11, when the first variable display results in the "best result" (see the solid line arrow in the figure), the symbol display device 47 displays the same stop result as shown in FIG. 50(B). (for example, 7.7.7) are stopped and displayed on the activated line L. Then, the pachinko machine 10 executes the effect for the opening/closing execution mode selected by the MPU92 based on the command for the opening/closing execution mode transmitted from the MPU92.
In the opening/closing execution mode, the opening/closing door 38b is set to an open state in which a game ball can win a prize. Prizes will be awarded to mouth 38a. Here, since the upper operation port 36 is provided on the path for winning the game ball to the big winning port 38a, the game ball is fired from the game ball shooting mechanism 81 by rotating the shooting handle 27 by the player. The ball will enter the upper working port 36 as well.

On the other hand, the pachinko machine 10 stays in the block BL11 as it is when the "most advantageous result" is not obtained in the first variation display in the block BL11 (see the dotted line arrow in the figure).

After that, as shown in FIG. 33, the pachinko machine 10 enters the high probability mode and low frequency support mode (block BL12). Since the MPU 92 executes high-precision number notification determination processing in step S2203 in block BL12, the MPU 102 notifies the value of the high-precision number counter STC based on the contents of the variation start command transmitted from the MPU 92. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 50(C), the MPU 102 displays "3 more rotations during high probability" on the upper left of the display screen G of the pattern display device 47, thereby staying in the high probability mode. It informs that the number of rotations is 3 rotations. It should be noted that the number of game rounds staying in the high-probability mode decreases as the value of the high-probability number counter STC decreases.

In block BL12, when the first variable display results in the "best result" (see the solid line arrow in the figure), as shown in FIG. (for example, 7.7.7) are stopped and displayed on the activated line L. Then, the pachinko machine 10 executes the effect for the opening/closing execution mode selected by the MPU92 based on the command for the opening/closing execution mode transmitted from the MPU92. FIG. 50(D) shows the case where the "most advantageous result" is obtained in the first variation display of the first rotation after shifting to block BL12, so the MPU 102 causes the symbol display device 47 to display "Two more rotations in high accuracy" is displayed on the upper left of the screen G.
On the other hand, the pachinko machine 10 proceeds to block BL11 when three game rounds have been completed without "winning a jackpot" in block BL12 (see the dotted line arrow in the figure).

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 33, the pachinko machine 10 enters the high probability mode and high frequency support mode (block BL13). In block BL13, the MPU 92 executes high-probability number-of-games notification determination processing in step S2203, and executes game number-of-times notification determination processing in step S2207. , the value of the high-precision number counter STC and the value of the game number counter RTC are notified. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 50(E), the MPU 102 displays "high probability middle 3 rotations" on the upper left of the display screen G of the pattern display device 47, thereby staying in the high probability mode. It informs that the number of rotations is 3 rotations. In addition, the MPU 102 displays "One chance time left" at the bottom of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47, so that the number of game rotations during which the high-frequency support mode (short-term high-frequency support mode) stays is It informs that it is one rotation. In addition, the number of game rotations staying in the high probability mode decreases as the value of the high probability number counter STC decreases, and the number of game rotations staying in the high frequency support mode is the value of the game number counter RTC. decreases with the decrease of

In the high-frequency support mode, the game ball has a higher probability of entering the lower working port 37 than the upper working port 36, so the game ball is shot from the game ball shooting mechanism 81 by rotating the shooting handle 27 by the player. The game ball enters the lower operation opening 37. - 特許庁Therefore, the second reservation lamp portion 49b lights up according to the number of game balls that have entered the lower operation opening 37 and has been reserved. In addition, in the high-frequency support mode, the game ball shot from the game ball shooting mechanism 81 by the player rotating the shooting handle 27 also enters the upper operation port 36.例文帳に追加Therefore, the first reservation lamp portion 49a lights up according to the number of reserved game balls that have entered the upper operation opening 36. As shown in FIG. In FIG. 50(E), the maximum number of lights of the first reservation lamp portion 49a and the second reservation lamp portion 49b is four.

Further, when the MPU 92 determines in step S1513C that the distribution result is the "best result", in block BL13, the special electric role opening notification process is executed in step S2118C. Based on the contents of the special electric role opening notification command transmitted from, the special electric role opening information production is executed. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 50(E), the MPU 102 displays "Opening for a long time!" It informs that it is set to high-frequency support mode of open time.
The subsequent flow is the same as in the third embodiment (see FIGS. 33, 35, and 36).

FIG. 51 shows the display screen of the symbol display device at the time of transition to the winning lottery mode and the support mode in the case of the "explicit small round high probability result" at the time of transition to the short-term high frequency support mode, the first holding lamp part, and It is a figure which shows a 2nd reservation lamp part. Specifically, FIG. 51(A) is a diagram showing the display screen G during the first variable display when the second holding lamp section is not lit and in the low probability mode and low frequency support mode. be. FIG. 51(B) is a diagram showing the display screen G when the first variable display of FIG. 51(A) results in "best result". FIG. 51(C) is a diagram showing the display screen G during the first variable display in the high-probability mode and low-frequency support mode after FIG. 51(B). FIG. 51(D) is a diagram showing the display screen G when the first variation display in FIG. FIG. 51(E) is a diagram showing the display screen G during the first variable display in the case of the high-probability mode and high-frequency support mode after FIG. 51(D).
Hereinafter, the flow at the time of shifting to the win/fail lottery mode and the support mode will be described with reference to FIGS. 33 and 51. FIG.

After the pachinko machine 10 executes the above-described main processing that is activated when the power is turned on, as shown in FIG. 33, the pachinko machine 10 enters the low-probability mode and low-frequency support mode (block BL11). In the low-frequency support mode, the game ball has a higher probability of entering the upper working opening 36 than the lower working opening 37, so that the game ball is shot from the game ball shooting mechanism 81 by rotating the shooting handle 27 by the player. The game ball enters the upper working port 36. - 特許庁Therefore, as shown in FIG. 51(A), the first reservation lamp portion 49a lights according to the number of reserved game balls that have entered the upper operation opening 36, and the game cycle is displayed during the first variable display. On the other hand, since the game ball hardly enters the lower operation opening 37, the second reservation lamp portion 49b is turned off. In addition, in FIG. 51A, the maximum number of lights of the first reservation lamp portion 49a is four.

In block BL11, when the first variable display results in the "best result" (see the solid line arrow in the figure), the symbol display device 47 displays the same stop result as shown in FIG. 51(B). (for example, 7.7.7) are stopped and displayed on the activated line L. Then, the pachinko machine 10 executes the effect for the opening/closing execution mode selected by the MPU92 based on the command for the opening/closing execution mode transmitted from the MPU92.
In the opening/closing execution mode, the opening/closing door 38b is set to an open state in which a game ball can win a prize. Prizes will be awarded to mouth 38a. Here, since the upper operation port 36 is provided on the path for winning the game ball to the big winning port 38a, the game ball is fired from the game ball shooting mechanism 81 by rotating the shooting handle 27 by the player. The ball will enter the upper working port 36 as well.

On the other hand, the pachinko machine 10 stays in the block BL11 as it is when the "most advantageous result" is not obtained in the first variation display in the block BL11 (see the dotted line arrow in the figure).

After that, as shown in FIG. 33, the pachinko machine 10 enters the high probability mode and low frequency support mode (block BL12). Since the MPU 92 executes high-precision number notification determination processing in step S2203 in block BL12, the MPU 102 notifies the value of the high-precision number counter STC based on the contents of the variation start command transmitted from the MPU 92. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 51(C), the MPU 102 displays "3 more rotations during high probability" on the upper left of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47, thereby allowing the game to stay in the high probability mode. It informs that the number of rotations is 3 rotations. It should be noted that the number of game rounds staying in the high-probability mode decreases as the value of the high-probability number counter STC decreases.

In block BL12, when the first variable display results in "clearly small round high probability result" (see the solid line arrow in the figure), as shown in FIG. , a special combination of symbols (for example, "3, 4, 1") is stopped and displayed on the activated line L. Then, the pachinko machine 10 executes the effect for the opening/closing execution mode selected by the MPU92 based on the command for the opening/closing execution mode transmitted from the MPU92. Note that FIG. 51(D) shows the case where the first variation display of the first rotation after the transition to block BL12 results in the "high probability result in a small number of explicit rounds", so the MPU 102 is a symbol display device. At the upper left of the display screen G of 47, "high accuracy middle 2 more rotations" is displayed.
On the other hand, the pachinko machine 10 proceeds to block BL11 when three game rounds have been completed without "winning a jackpot" in block BL12 (see the dotted line arrow in the figure).

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 33, the pachinko machine 10 enters the high probability mode and high frequency support mode (block BL13). In block BL13, the MPU 92 executes high-probability number-of-games notification determination processing in step S2203, and executes game number-of-times notification determination processing in step S2207. , the value of the high-precision number counter STC and the value of the game number counter RTC are notified. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 51(E), the MPU 102 displays "3 more rotations during high probability" on the upper left of the display screen G of the pattern display device 47, thereby allowing the game to stay in the high probability mode. It informs that the number of rotations is 3 rotations. In addition, the MPU 102 displays "One chance time left" at the bottom of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47, so that the number of game rotations during which the high-frequency support mode (short-term high-frequency support mode) stays is It informs that it is one rotation. In addition, the number of game rotations staying in the high probability mode decreases as the value of the high probability number counter STC decreases, and the number of game rotations staying in the high frequency support mode is the value of the game number counter RTC. decreases with the decrease of

In the high-frequency support mode, the game ball has a higher probability of entering the lower working port 37 than the upper working port 36, so the game ball is shot from the game ball shooting mechanism 81 by rotating the shooting handle 27 by the player. The game ball enters the lower operation opening 37. - 特許庁Therefore, the second reservation lamp portion 49b lights up according to the number of game balls that have entered the lower operation opening 37 and has been reserved. In addition, in the high-frequency support mode, the game ball shot from the game ball shooting mechanism 81 by the player rotating the shooting handle 27 also enters the upper operation port 36.例文帳に追加Therefore, the first reservation lamp portion 49a lights up according to the number of reserved game balls that have entered the upper operation opening 36. As shown in FIG. In addition, in FIG. 51(E), the maximum number of lights of the first reservation lamp portion 49a is four. Also, the number of lighting of the second reservation lamp portion 49b is two.

Also, when the MPU 92 determines in step S1513C that the distribution result is not the "most favorable result" If so), the MPU 102 does not execute the special electric role opening notification effect because the special electric role opening notification process is not executed in step S2118C in block BL13. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 51(E), the MPU 102 does not display "Long open!" It informs that it is set to high-frequency support mode of open time.
The subsequent flow is the same as in the third embodiment (see FIGS. 33, 35, and 36).

Thus, in the present embodiment, the high-frequency support mode is a high-frequency support mode (first ball-enterable state) with a short-term opening time in which game balls flowing down the game area can be temporarily entered. A high frequency of long-term open time that allows game balls flowing down the game area to enter temporarily, and allows more game balls to enter than the high-frequency support mode of short-term open time. It has a support mode (second entry possible state).
In addition, the high-frequency support mode of the long-term opening time is set to a longer duration than the high-frequency support mode of the short-term opening time, so that more games can be played than the high-frequency support mode of the short-term opening time. It is possible to enter the ball.

In this embodiment, the high-frequency support mode for the long-term open time is set to a longer duration than the high-frequency support mode for the short-term open time. For example, by increasing the number of times the electric accessory 37a is set to the open state, more game balls than in the high-frequency support mode of the short-term electric role open time can be entered. It may be possible to enter the ball. In short, the second ball-enterable state should allow more game balls to enter than the first ball-enterable state.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the transition processing and the fluctuation end processing at the end of the opening/closing execution mode are the result of the internal lottery executed with the entry of the game ball into the upper operation port 36 after switching to the high probability mode. , the lower working port 37 is switched from the low-frequency support mode to the high-frequency support mode with short-term open time or the high-frequency support mode with long-term open time.
Specifically, the transition processing and the fluctuation end processing at the end of the opening and closing execution mode are executed when the game ball enters the upper operation port 36. In the case of the "non-explicit small round high probability result" (first winning result), the lower operation port 37 is switched from the low frequency support mode to the high frequency support mode of the short-term opening time, and the "best result" When (second winning result) is obtained, the lower operation port 37 is switched from the low-frequency support mode to the high-frequency support mode with long-term open time.

In this embodiment, the transition process and the fluctuation end process at the end of the opening and closing execution mode are executed when the game ball enters the upper operation port 36. ” or “Unexplained small round high probability result”, switch to high-frequency support mode for short-term opening time, and if “best result”, high-frequency support for long-term opening time However, based on the results of internal lottery other than this, the mode may be switched to the short-term open time high-frequency support mode or the long-term open time high-frequency support mode. In short, the transition processing and the fluctuation end processing at the end of the opening and closing execution mode are based on the result of the internal lottery executed with the entry of the game ball into the upper operation port 36, and the lower operation port 37 is set to the low frequency support mode. , to a high-frequency support mode with short-term open time or a high-frequency support mode with long-term open time.

According to this embodiment, in addition to the same effects and effects as those of the third embodiment, the following effects and effects can be achieved.
(8) Transition processing and fluctuation end processing at the end of the opening/closing execution mode are, after switching to the high-probability mode, shifting the lower operating port 37 from the low-frequency support mode to the high-frequency support mode with short-term open time or long-term open time. Switch to time high frequency support mode. In addition, the game state transition process is a long-term process that is more advantageous to the player than the low-probability mode and the high-probability mode when winning the result of the internal lottery executed with the entry of the game ball into the lower operating hole 37 as a trigger. The game state is shifted to the high-frequency support mode. According to this, the player expects to be switched to the high-frequency support mode of the long-term opening time in the transition process and the fluctuation end process at the end of the opening/closing execution mode. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can increase the attention of the player to the game.

(9) The high-frequency support mode of the long-term open time is set to have a longer duration than the high-frequency support mode of the short-term open time, so that more than the high-frequency support mode of the short-term open time Since it is possible to enter a game ball, it is possible to simplify the configuration of the high-frequency support mode for the short-term opening time and the high-frequency support mode for the long-term opening time.
(10) The transition processing and fluctuation end processing at the end of the opening/closing execution mode support the lower operation port 37 at a low frequency based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the upper operation port 36. Since the mode is switched to the high-frequency support mode of the short-term opening time or the high-frequency support mode of the long-term opening time, the player can perform the internal lottery executed with the entry of the game ball into the upper working port 36 as a trigger. will pay attention to the results of Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can increase the attention of the player to the game.

(11) The transition process and the fluctuation end process at the end of the opening and closing execution mode are performed when the result of the internal lottery executed with the entry of the game ball into the upper operation port 36 is "explicit small round high probability result" or "non In the case of a clear small round high probability result” (first winning result), the lower operation port 37 is switched from the low frequency support mode to the high frequency support mode with short-term opening time, and the “best result” (first 2 winning result), the lower operation port 37 is switched from the low-frequency support mode to the high-frequency support mode with a long-term opening time, so that the player can enter the opening/closing execution mode with the "best result". It is expected that switching to the high-frequency support mode of the long-term open time is possible in the transition process at the time of termination and the variable termination process. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can increase the attention of the player to the game.

In the present embodiment, the transition processing and the fluctuation end processing at the end of the opening/closing execution mode are the result of the internal lottery executed with the entry of the game ball into the upper operation port 36 after switching to the high probability mode. , the lower working port 37 is switched from the low-frequency support mode to the high-frequency support mode with short-term open time or the high-frequency support mode with long-term open time.
On the other hand, for example, the transition processing and the fluctuation end processing at the end of the opening and closing execution mode are performed when the result of the internal lottery executed with the entry of the game ball into the upper operation port 36 is won. Based on the content of the expected effect (for example, the type of reach display) executed by the control device 90 and the display control device 100, the lower operation opening 37 is switched from the low-frequency support mode to the high-frequency support mode with short-term opening time or You may switch to the high frequency support mode of long-term electric work opening time.

Specifically, for example, the content of the expectation effect executed by the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 includes a first ready-to-win display (first expectation effect) and a second ready-to-win display different from the first reach display. 2 reach display, and the transition processing and fluctuation end processing at the end of the opening/closing execution mode are performed when the first reach display is executed by the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100, and the lower operation opening 37 is opened. When the low-frequency support mode is switched to the high-frequency support mode with the short-term electric service open time, and the second reach display is performed by the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100, the lower operation port 37 is set to the low-frequency support mode. You may switch from to the high frequency support mode of the long-term electric work opening time.
Thus, in this modification, the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 enter the opening/closing execution mode based on the result of the internal lottery executed with the entry of the game ball into the upper operation opening 36 as a trigger. It functions as expected performance executing means for executing expected performance making the player expect that the game state will be changed.
In this modified example, the content of the expected effect is the type of ready-to-win display, but it may be the degree of expectation of the ready-to-win display, or the content of other expected effect such as the type of advance notice display.

According to such a modified example, instead of (10) and (11) in the fourth embodiment, the following functions and effects can be obtained.
(12) Transition processing and fluctuation end processing at the end of the opening and closing execution mode are executed when the result of the internal lottery executed with the entry of the game ball into the upper operation port 36 as a trigger is won, the sound emission control device 90 and Based on the content of the expected effect executed by the display control device 100, the lower operation port 37 is switched from the low-frequency support mode to the high-frequency support mode with short-term open time or the high-frequency support mode with long-term open time. Therefore, the player pays attention to the content of the expected effect executed by the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 . Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can increase the attention of the player to the game.

(13) Transition processing and fluctuation end processing at the end of the opening/closing execution mode are performed when the first reach display is performed by the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100, and the lower operation opening 37 is changed from the low frequency support mode. When switching to the high-frequency support mode for the short-term service opening time and executing the second ready-to-reach display by the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100, the lower working port 37 is opened from the low-frequency support mode for the long-term service. Switch to time high frequency support mode. According to this, when the player wins the result of the internal lottery executed with the entry of the game ball into the upper operating hole 36 as a trigger, the player uses the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 to select It is expected that the reach display will be executed, and that the switching to the high-frequency support mode of the long-term opening time will be performed in the transition processing at the end of the opening/closing execution mode and the fluctuation end processing. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can increase the attention of the player to the game.

[Modification of each embodiment]
It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiments, and includes modifications, improvements, etc. within the scope of achieving the object of the present invention.
(1) In each of the above-described embodiments, the pachinko machine 10 executes opening and closing of the big winning hole 38a once per round game. On the other hand, the pachinko machine 10 may open and close the big winning opening 38a a plurality of times for one round game.
(2) In each of the above embodiments, the pachinko machine 10 sets the opening/closing door 38b to the open state, and then the predetermined upper limit duration (upper limit duration) elapses, or the game to the big winning opening 38a When the total winning number of balls reaches a predetermined upper limit number, the door 38b is closed again. On the other hand, for example, the upper limit number may be changed according to the upper limit duration time, and the condition for setting the open/close door 38b to the closed state again is arbitrary.

(3) In each of the above embodiments, the pachinko machine 10 sets the opening/closing door 38b to the open state, and then the total winning number of game balls into the big winning opening 38a reaches eight, which is the predetermined upper limit number. As a result, the opening/closing door 38b is set to the closed state again. On the other hand, for example, the pachinko machine 10 may set the upper limit number to any number other than eight. Further, for example, the pachinko machine 10 may set different upper limit numbers according to the distribution result. Further, for example, the pachinko machine 10 may set different upper limit numbers for each round in one open/close execution mode.

(4) In each of the above embodiments, the pachinko machine 10 opens and closes when the total winning number of game balls into the big winning opening 38a reaches a predetermined upper limit after setting the opening/closing door 38b to the open state. The door 38b was set to the closed state again. On the other hand, for example, the pachinko machine 10 is provided with an end trigger port for setting the opening/closing door 38b to a closed state when a game ball enters, and when a predetermined time elapses, this end trigger port is provided. It may be configured to allow the ball to enter the trigger hole.
(5) In each of the above-described embodiments, after the pachinko machine 10 sets the opening/closing door 38b to the open state, the predetermined upper limit duration (upper limit duration) elapses, and the opening/closing door 38b is closed again. was set to On the other hand, for example, after setting the opening/closing door 38b to the open state, the pachinko machine 10 opens the opening/closing door 38b when a predetermined time elapses from the time when the winning to the big winning opening 38a occurs. It may be set to the closed state again.

(6) In each of the above embodiments, the pachinko machine 10 sets the opening/closing door 38b to the closed state after setting the opening/closing door 38b to the open state. On the other hand, for example, after setting the opening/closing door 38b to the open state, the pachinko machine 10 may shift to the next round game without setting the opening/closing door 38b to the closed state again.
(7) In each of the above-described embodiments, the upper limit duration of the short time mode is set shorter than the game ball launch cycle. On the other hand, for example, the upper limit duration of the short-time mode is a time equal to or longer than the firing cycle of the game ball and less than or equal to n times (n=1, 2, or 3) the firing cycle of the game ball. It may be set to time.

(8) In each of the above embodiments, the pachinko machine 10 has two types of open/close execution modes.
Specifically, the pachinko machine 10 has an opening/closing execution mode in which the round game is executed twice with the upper limit duration of the short-time mode, and an opening/closing execution mode in which the round game is executed 15 times with the upper limit duration of the long-time mode. had. On the other hand, the pachinko machine 10 may have an opening and closing execution mode different from these regarding the form of the upper limit duration time and the number of round game executions. In addition, the pachinko machine 10 differs in the mode of the upper limit duration time, instead of setting a plurality of types of opening/closing execution modes, by varying the degree of opening of the opening/closing door 38b, such as half-opening or full-opening. , a configuration in which a plurality of types of opening/closing execution modes are set. Furthermore, the form of the upper limit duration may be set so that the exact form of the upper limit duration is different, although the form appears to be the same from the player's point of view.

(9) In each of the above embodiments, the game result and the effect for the opening/closing execution mode are set in advance so as to correspond one-to-one. On the other hand, for example, the effect for the opening/closing execution mode may be set by randomly selecting from a plurality of types of effects without corresponding to the game result, or may be selected from a plurality of types of effects by lottery or the like. , and the selection rate may be changed according to the game result.

(10) In each of the above embodiments, the MPU 92 is effective when the game result is one of the "special loss result", "non-explicit small round high probability result", and "explicit small round high probability result" Information relating to a special combination of symbols is determined as a stop result to be finally stopped and displayed on the line L, and this special combination of symbols is the same regardless of the type of game result.
On the other hand, the MPU 92 may randomly determine the information related to the stop result so that it is difficult for the player to grasp which game result it is.

(11) In each of the above embodiments, the MPU 62 uses the jackpot random number counter C1 for the jackpot generation lottery, and uses the jackpot type counter C2 for the jackpot type lottery when the jackpot is generated. On the other hand, when a big win occurs, the MPU 62 may use the big win random number counter C1 for the lottery of the type of the big win. In this case, the jackpot type counter C2 may not be provided in the various counter areas 64a of the RAM64.

(12) In each of the above embodiments, the pachinko machine 10 has two types of loss results, ie, the "special loss result" and the "normal loss result", and the MPU 62 stores the value of the random number that wins the jackpot. A lottery for generating a big hit is executed by comparing the success/failure table and the value of the big hit random number counter C1 stored in the reserved ball storage area 64b. In other words, the MPU 62 used the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 to execute the lottery for the "special losing result". On the other hand, the MPU 62 uses a new counter different from the jackpot random number counter C1 provided in the various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64 to execute the lottery related to the "special loss result". A lottery related to "result" may be executed.

(13) In each of the above-described embodiments, under the game state in which the success/failure table for the low-probability mode is referred to in the lottery for the occurrence of the big win, the value of the random number that becomes the "special loss result" is two, and the occurrence of the big win. Under the game state in which the success/failure table for the high-probability mode is referred to in the lottery of (1), the value of the random number that becomes the "special loss result" is one. In other words, the probability of a "special failure result" is set to be higher in the low-probability mode than in the high-probability mode. On the other hand, the probability of becoming a "special outlier result" may be set lower in the low probability mode than in the high probability mode, and set to be the same in the low probability mode and the high probability mode. may have been Also, the probability of the "special failure result" may be set to 0 in at least one of the low-probability mode and the high-probability mode.

(14) In each of the above-described embodiments, the pachinko machine 10 creates advantageous game states and disadvantageous game states for the player by setting the win/fail lottery mode and the support mode. By setting the states, the player may create favorable and unfavorable playing states. For example, the pachinko machine 10 may create an advantageous game state and a disadvantageous game state for the player by varying the number of game rounds for continuing the high-frequency support mode after the end of the opening/closing execution mode. Further, for example, the pachinko machine 10 may create an advantageous game state and a disadvantageous game state for the player depending on whether or not to shift to the high frequency support mode after the end of the opening/closing execution mode. Further, for example, the pachinko machine 10 may create advantageous and unfavorable game states for the player by varying the number of game rounds in which the high-probability mode is continued after the end of the opening/closing execution mode. .

(15) In each of the above-described embodiments, the pachinko machine 10 stores the reservation information related to the upper working opening 36 in the first result display section reservation area Ra, and stores the reservation information related to the lower working opening 37 in the second result display section. By storing in the reserved area Rb, the reserved information regarding the upper working port 36 and the reserved information regarding the lower working port 37 are separately stored. On the other hand, the pachinko machine 10 may store the hold information relating to the upper working opening 36 and the holding information relating to the lower working opening 37 together.
(16) In each of the above-described embodiments, the MPU 62 preferentially sets the reservation information related to the lower operation opening 37 for completing the game round regardless of whether or not there is the reservation information related to the upper operation opening 36. . On the other hand, the MPU 62 may set the reservation information related to the upper operation port 36 and the reservation information related to the lower operation port 37 for completion of the game cycle in the winning order of the respective reservation information.

(17) In each of the above embodiments, the main controller 60 transmits a command to the audio light emission control device 90, and the audio light emission control device 90 transmits a command as a result of analyzing the command to the display control device 100. The control of the display control device 100 was executed by. In response to this, the main control device 60 transmits a command to the display control device 100, and the display control device 100 transmits a command as a result of analyzing the command to the sound emission control device 90, thereby performing sound emission control. Control of device 90 may be performed. The commands sent from the main control device 60 to the sound emission control device 90 and the commands sent from the sound emission control device 90 to the display control device 100 are not limited to the commands described in the above embodiments, and are arbitrary. .
(18) In each of the above embodiments, the pachinko machine 10 includes the main control device 60, the sound emission control device 90, and the display control device 100 as separate control devices. On the other hand, for example, the audio emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 may be provided as the same control device, and at least one of the audio emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 is the main control device. It may be provided as the same control device as the control device 60 .

(19) In each of the above-described embodiments, the symbol display device 47 periodically scrolls the symbols of each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction based on the winning of the upper operation port 36 or the lower operation port 37. Then, by starting the variable display of symbols, an effect for a game cycle is executed on the display screen G.例文帳に追加On the other hand, the effects for game rounds are not limited to the effects described in the above embodiments, and are optional. For example, the pachinko machine 10 may execute an effect for a game cycle by operating a combination of a movable decorative member provided on the game board 31 and the symbol display device 47 . Further, for example, the pachinko machine 10 may execute an effect for a game round by operating a combination of light-emitting means provided on the game board 31 and the symbol display device 47 . Further, for example, the pachinko machine 10 may execute a game round effect by combining these decorative members and light emitting means with the pattern display device 47 to operate.

(20) In each of the above-described embodiments, the pachinko machine 10 executes an internal lottery (win/fail lottery and sorting lottery) based on the winning to the upper working port 36 or the lower working port 37, and then the main display section 45 And the symbol display device 47 executes the variable display, and displays the result of the internal lottery performed based on the winning in the upper operation port 36 or the lower operation port 37 as a result of stopping the variable display. On the other hand, for example, the main display unit 45 and the pattern display device 47 start the variable display before executing the internal lottery, and as a result of stopping the variable display, the internal lottery performed after the start of the variable display may display the results of In this case, after starting the variable display, before stopping the variable display, an internal lottery may be executed and the stop result and the like may be set.

(21) In each of the above embodiments, the pachinko machine 10 is provided with the main display unit 45, and the main display unit 45 executes the variable display of the pattern and displays the result of the internal lottery as a result of stopping the variable display. Was. On the other hand, for example, the main display unit 45 may display the same stop result as the stop result of the variable display regardless of the result of the internal lottery. The result of the lottery may be made unidentifiable.
Further, for example, the pachinko machine 10 does not have to include the main display section 45 .

(22) In each of the above embodiments, the symbol display device 47 periodically scrolls the symbols of each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction based on the winning of the upper operation port 36 or the lower operation port 37. Then, by starting the variable display of symbols, an effect for a game cycle is executed on the display screen G.例文帳に追加On the other hand, the symbol display device 47 may execute an effect for a game round on the display screen G by displaying a symbol (design) that indicates the result of the internal lottery.

For example, the pattern display device 47 displays a predetermined area in at least one of an area narrower than the area for displaying the patterns of each of the pattern rows Z1 to Z3 and a peripheral area of the area for displaying the patterns of each of the pattern rows Z1 to Z3. When the variable display of the symbols in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is stopped, a symbol indicating the result of the internal lottery may be displayed in the predetermined area. The symbols to be displayed in the predetermined area may be variably displayed or may not be displayed during the variably displayed symbols of each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3.

Here, the pattern displayed in the predetermined area may employ letters, colors, or patterns that are difficult for the player to distinguish, or may employ a combination of these. In addition, even if characters, colors, and patterns that are difficult for the player to identify are not used, mutually similar patterns or combinations thereof may be used to make it difficult for the player to identify. According to this, the administrator of the game parlor, for example, looks at the pattern display device 47 without looking at the main display section 45 at the end of the game round, in the same way as in the case of winning a big win lottery. It is possible to easily confirm whether or not a fraudulent act is being performed to cause the pachinko machine 10 to perform the behavior of .

(23) In each of the above embodiments, the pachinko machine 10 was configured to operate independently, but it may be configured to transmit and receive information by linking with an external device such as a mobile phone. . For example, a game machine is configured so that an optical code can be output by a player operating a button or the like provided on the game machine, and information on the optical code is transmitted to a camera provided on a mobile phone or the like. The game machine may be configured so that the information of the game machine can be transmitted to the web server by capturing and reading the image at the , and accessing the website. In addition, the gaming machine is configured so that the information of the web server can be received by the player accessing the website and entering the password issued by operating the button etc. provided on the gaming machine into the gaming machine. You may

(24) In each of the above-described embodiments, the pachinko machine 10 has been exemplified and explained as the gaming machine of the present invention. On the other hand, the gaming machine of the present invention may be a pachinko machine of another type different from the pachinko machine 10. For example, the gaming machine of the present invention may be configured such that when a game ball enters a specific area, It may be a pachinko machine that opens an electric accessory a predetermined number of times, or a pachinko machine that generates a jackpot right when a game ball enters a specific area. Also, the gaming machine of the present invention may be an arrangement ball machine or other types of gaming machines such as majang ball machines.

[Group of Inventions Extracted from Each Embodiment]
The features of the group of inventions extracted from the above embodiments will be described below. Among the features of the group of inventions, the corresponding configurations in each of the above-described embodiments are shown in parentheses, but the features of the group of inventions are not limited to the above-described embodiments, and the features of the group of inventions Modifications, improvements, etc., and combinations of features within the range that can achieve the purpose are included in the features of the present invention group.

<Characteristic group A> Characteristic A1.
A shooting means (shooting handle 27) for shooting a game ball toward a game area formed in front of the game board, a game ball flowing down the game area is entered, and an internal lottery is performed when the game ball enters. Based on the starting ball entry means (upper operation opening 36 and lower operation opening 37) to be executed and the result of the internal lottery executed with the entry of the game ball into the starting ball entry means as a trigger, it is advantageous for the player. A game machine (pachinko machine 10) comprising game state transition means (main controller 60) for shifting the game state from the normal control state to the specific control state,
The normal control state is
A first gaming state (low probability mode);
A second game state (high probability mode) different from the first game state,
The starting ball entry means is
a first starting ball entry portion (upper working port 36);
A second start-up ball entry portion (lower operation port 37) different from the first start-up ball entry portion,
The second starting ball entrance portion is
A state (low-frequency support mode) in which a game ball flowing down the game area cannot be entered, and
A ball entry possible state (high frequency support mode) in which a game ball flowing down the game area can be entered,
The game state transition means is
a game state switching unit for switching between the first game state and the second game state (transition processing and variation end processing at the end of the opening/closing execution mode);
After switching to the second game state by the game state switching unit, the ball entering state switching unit (opening/closing execution mode end transition processing and change end processing),
After switching from the second game state to the first game state in the game state switching unit, the result of the internal lottery executed with the entry of the game ball into the second start ball entry unit as a trigger A most advantageous game state transition unit (game state transition processing) for shifting the game state to a most advantageous game state more advantageous to the player than the first game state and the second game state when winning. A gaming machine characterized by:

Here, the non-enterable state of the second start-up ball entry section is not only a state in which a game ball flowing down the game area cannot be entered completely, but also a state in which a game ball flowing down the game area can be temporarily entered. It may include the state of In addition, the ball-enterable state of the second start-up ball-entering part is not only a state in which a game ball flowing down the game area can be completely entered, but also a game ball flowing down the game area is temporarily disabled. It may also include the state of In short, in the ball-enterable state, compared with the ball-enterable state, the game ball flowing down the game area should be easier to enter the second start ball-entering portion.

According to the feature A1 of the present invention group, the most advantageous game state transition unit switches the game state from the second game state to the first game state by the game state switching unit, and then the game ball to the second start ball entry unit. The game state is shifted to the most advantageous game state more advantageous to the player than the first game state and the second game state when winning the result of the internal lottery executed with the entry of a ball as a trigger. According to this, the player pays attention to the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the second starting ball entering section. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of the player to the game.

Feature A2.
In the gaming machine described in feature A1 of the invention group,
Storage means for second ball entry unit (second 2 Equipped with a result display area reservation area Rb),
After switching to the second game state, the game state switching unit associates the game state with a predetermined number of internal lottery information that is smaller than the number of the plurality of internal lottery information stored in the second ball-entering unit storage means. Switching from the second game state to the first game state triggered by notification of the result of the internal lottery received,
After switching from the second game state to the first game state by the game state switching unit, the most advantageous game state transition unit performs the internal lottery stored in the second ball entry unit storage means. This game machine is characterized by shifting a game state to a most advantageous game state advantageous to a player when winning the result of an internal lottery associated with information.

According to feature A2 of the present invention group, after switching to the second game state, the game state switching unit selects a predetermined number less than the number of pieces of internal lottery information stored in the second ball-entering unit storage means. Triggered by notification of the result of the internal lottery associated with the internal lottery information, the game state is switched from the second game state to the first game state. According to this, when the player is notified of the result of the internal lottery associated with the predetermined number of internal lottery information in the second game state, he/she expects that he/she will not win the lottery, and then enters the first game state. When the result of the internal lottery associated with the rest of the internal lottery information is reported by the player, the player expects to win the lottery. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of the player to the game.

Feature A3.
In the gaming machine described in feature A2 of the invention group,
Storage means for the first ball entry unit (second 1 result display unit holding area Ra),
The result of the internal lottery associated with the plurality of internal lottery information stored in the second ball-entering unit storage means is associated with the plurality of internal lottery information stored in the first ball-entering unit storage unit. A game machine characterized in that notification is given with priority over the result of an internal lottery.

According to feature A3 of the present invention group, the gaming machine stores, in the first ball-entering unit storage means, the internal lottery results associated with a plurality of pieces of internal lottery information stored in the second ball-entering unit storage means. Since the result of the internal lottery associated with the plurality of internal lottery information is reported with priority, regardless of whether or not the internal lottery information is stored in the storage means for the first ball entering section, the second lottery The result of the internal lottery associated with the plurality of internal lottery information stored in the storage means for the ball portion can be preferentially notified. Therefore, the player pays attention only to the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the second start ball entry section. can be improved.

Feature A4.
In the gaming machine described in feature A2 or feature A3 of the present invention group,
A game machine characterized in that, in the second game state, an internal lottery with a winning probability higher than that in the first game state is executed.

According to feature A4 of the present invention group, the second gaming state executes an internal lottery with a winning probability higher than that of the first gaming state. The probability of winning is high when the result of the internal lottery that has been received is notified, and the probability of winning is low when the result of the internal lottery associated with the remaining internal lottery information is notified in the subsequent first game state. Become. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of the player to the game.

Feature A5.
In the gaming machine described in feature A4 of the invention group,
The game state switching unit switches the game state to the second game state when the result of the internal lottery executed with the entry of the game ball to the first start ball entry unit or the second start ball entry unit as a trigger is won. switch to
The gaming machine is characterized in that the continuation rate of the most advantageous game state is higher than the continuation rate of the second game state.

Here, the continuation rate refers to the probability of continuing to stay in the game state. The game state switching unit switches to the second game state when winning the internal lottery result triggered by the entry of the game ball into the first start ball entry unit or the second start ball entry unit, and switches to the second game state. Triggered by notification of the result of the internal lottery associated with a predetermined number of internal lottery information smaller than the number of the plurality of internal lottery information stored in the storage means for the 2-ball entry part, the second game state is changed to the first. Switch to the game state of . Therefore, the continuation rate of the second gaming state informs the result of the internal lottery associated with the predetermined number of internal lottery information that is smaller than the number of the plurality of internal lottery information stored in the second ball entry storage means. It is the probability of winning the result of the internal lottery executed with the entry of the game ball into the first start ball entry section or the second start ball entry section.

According to feature A5 of the present invention group, since the continuation rate of the most advantageous gaming state is higher than the continuation rate of the second gaming state, the player is encouraged to enter the game ball into the second start ball entering section. Further attention will be given to the results of the internal lottery that was triggered. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of the player to the game.

Feature A6.
In the gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A5 of the invention group,
The ball-enterable state is
A first ball-enterable state (high-frequency support mode for short-term electric role open time) in which a game ball flowing down the game area can be temporarily entered;
A second ball-enterable state (long-term ball-enterable state) in which game balls flowing down the game area are temporarily allowed to enter and more game balls than the first ball-enterable state are allowed to enter Open time high frequency support mode) and
The ball-entering state switching unit switches the second start-up ball-entering unit from the non-enterable state to the first possible state or the A game machine characterized by switching to a second ball-enterable state.

According to feature A6 of the group of the present inventions, the ball-entering state switching unit switches the second starting ball-entering unit from the ball-entering impossible state to the first ball-entering state after the game state switching unit switches to the second game state. Switch to the possible state or the second ball-enterable state. Further, the most advantageous gaming state transition section changes the first gaming state and the second gaming state when winning the internal lottery result triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second start ball entering section. The game state is shifted to the most advantageous game state more advantageous to the player than the game state. According to this, the player expects to be switched to the second ball-enterable state by the ball-enterable state switching unit. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of the player to the game.

Feature A7.
In the gaming machine described in feature A6 of the invention group,
The second ball-enterable state is set to have a longer duration than the first ball-enterable state, thereby allowing more game balls to enter than the first ball-enterable state. A game machine characterized by

According to the feature A7 of the present invention group, the second ball-enterable state is set to have a longer duration than the first ball-enterable state, so that the number of game balls is greater than that of the first ball-enterable state. can be entered, the configurations of the first enterable state and the second enterable state can be simplified.

Feature A8.
In the gaming machine described in feature A6 or feature A7 of the present invention group,
The ball entry state switching unit switches the second start ball entry unit from the non-enterable state based on the result of an internal lottery executed with the entry of a game ball into the first start ball entry unit. A gaming machine characterized by switching to the first ball-enterable state or the second ball-enterable state.

According to feature A8 of the present invention group, the ball entry state switching unit selects the second start ball entry unit based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the first start ball entry unit. is switched from the ball-unable to enter state to the first ball-enterable state or the second ball-enterable state, the player can enter the internal lottery executed with the entry of the gaming ball into the first start ball-entering section as a trigger. will pay attention to the results of Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of the player to the game.

Feature A9.
In the gaming machine described in feature A8 of the invention group,
The result of the internal lottery executed with the entry of the game ball to the first start ball entry section as a trigger is
The first winning result (“explicit small round high probability result” or “non-explicit small round high probability result”);
A second winning result ("best result") different from the first winning result;
The ball-entering state switching unit switches the second start-up ball-entering unit from the ball-entering impossible state to the first ball-enterable state when the first winning result is obtained, and the second winning state is achieved. A game machine characterized by switching the second starting ball-entering section from the ball-entering impossible state to the second ball-entering possible state when a result is obtained.

According to feature A9 of the present invention group, the ball-entering state switching unit switches the second start-up ball-entering unit from the ball-entering impossible state to the ball-entering possible state when the first winning result is obtained, When the second winning result is obtained, the second starting ball entry part is switched from the state where the ball cannot be entered to the second ball entry possible state, so that the player can switch the entering state as the second winning result. It is expected that it will be switched to the second ball entry possible state at the part. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of the player to the game.

Feature A10.
In the gaming machine described in feature A6 or feature A7 of the present invention group,
An expectation that makes the player expect that the game state will be shifted to the specific control state based on the result of the internal lottery executed with the entry of the game ball into the first start ball entry section. Equipped with expected effect execution means (sound emission control device 90 and display control device 100) for executing the effect,
The ball-entering state switching unit, when winning the result of the internal lottery executed with the entry of the game ball into the first starting ball-entering unit, the expected effect executed by the expected effect executing means. a gaming machine characterized in that the second start-up ball-entering section is switched from the ball-entering impossibility state to the first ball-entering possible state or the second ball-entering possible state based on the contents of .

According to the feature A10 of the present invention group, the ball entry state switching unit, when winning the result of the internal lottery executed with the entry of the game ball to the first start ball entry unit as a trigger, the expected effect execution means Since the second start ball-entering portion is switched from the ball-entering impossibility state to the ball-entering possible state or the ball-entering possible state based on the content of the expected effect executed in , the player can expect the expected effect Attention will be paid to the content of the expected performance executed by the execution means. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of the player to the game.

Feature A11.
In the gaming machine described in feature A10 of the invention group,
The content of the expected effect executed by the expected effect executing means is
a first expected effect (first reach display);
A second expected effect (second reach display) different from the first expected effect is provided,
The ball-entering state switching unit switches the second start-up ball-entering unit from the ball-entering impossible state to the first ball-entering possible state when the expected effect executing means executes the first expected effect. When the second expected effect is executed by the expected effect executing means, the second starting ball-entering section is switched from the state where the ball cannot be entered to the second ball-enterable state. game machine.

According to feature A11 of the present invention group, the ball-entering state switching unit switches the second starting ball-entering unit from the state where the ball cannot be entered to the first ball-entering state when the expected effect executing means executes the first expected effect. When the state is switched to the ball possible state and the second expected performance is executed by the expected performance executing means, the second starting ball entering part is switched from the ball entering impossible state to the second ball entering possible state. According to this, when the player wins the result of the internal lottery executed with the entry of the game ball into the first start ball entering section, the expected effect executing means performs the second expected effect. After execution, it is expected that the ball-entering state switching unit will switch to the second ball-enterable state. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of the player to the game.

Feature A12.
In the gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A11 of the present invention group,
The gaming machine, wherein the first starting ball-entering section and the second starting ball-entering section are arranged on the same path.

According to the feature A12 of the present invention group, the first starting ball-entering part and the second starting ball-entering part are arranged on the same path, so that the player can shoot the game ball on the same path. By, it is possible to enter the game ball into the first start ball entering section and the second start ball entering section. Therefore, the gaming machine can allow players to play games comfortably.

Feature A13.
In the gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A11 of the present invention group,
A first route (left-handed route) that makes it easy for the game ball to enter the first start ball entry part and makes it difficult for the game ball to enter the second start ball entry part;
A second route (right-handed route) that makes it easy for the game ball to enter the second starting ball entering part and makes it difficult for the game ball to enter the first starting ball entering part. A game machine characterized by

According to feature A13 of the present invention group, the player can make it easier for the game ball to enter the first starting ball entering section by launching the game ball along the first path. By causing the game ball to be launched along the second path, it is possible to make it easier for the game ball to enter the second starting ball entering section. Therefore, the gaming machine can reliably reflect the player's intentions and allow the player to play games comfortably.

According to the characteristic group A of the present invention, since it is possible to improve the attention of the player to the game, the following problems can be solved.

Conventionally, a shooting means for shooting a game ball toward a game area formed in front of a game board is provided, and an internal lottery such as a jackpot lottery is performed by entering a game ball into an operation opening (starting ball entry means). A game machine that executes is known. For example, when winning a jackpot lottery, the gaming machine shifts the game state from the normal control state to a specific control state advantageous to the player. In this specific control state, the gaming machine pays out a large number of game balls, for example, by shifting the variable winning device to a state in which game balls can enter.
By the way, since the normal control state has a plurality of game states with different probabilities of winning the jackpot lottery, the player can play the game while enjoying the transition of the game state.

However, there is a problem that the player's attention to the game is lowered because the transition of the game state is determined by a lottery when the jackpot lottery is won.

<Feature B Group> Feature B1.
A shooting means (shooting handle 27) for shooting a game ball toward a game area formed in front of the game board, a game ball flowing down the game area is entered, and an internal lottery is performed when the game ball enters. Based on the starting ball entry means (upper operation opening 36 and lower operation opening 37) to be executed and the result of the internal lottery executed with the entry of the game ball into the starting ball entry means as a trigger, it is advantageous for the player. A game machine (pachinko machine 10) comprising game state transition means (main controller 60) for shifting the game state from the normal control state to the specific control state,
The normal control state is
A first gaming state (low probability mode);
A second game state (high probability mode) different from the first game state,
The starting ball entry means is
a first starting ball entry portion (upper working port 36);
A second start-up ball entry portion (lower operation port 37) different from the first start-up ball entry portion,
The game state transition means is
a game state switching unit for switching between the first game state and the second game state (transition processing and variation end processing at the end of the opening/closing execution mode);
When winning the result of the internal lottery executed with the entry of the game ball to the first start ball entry section or the second start ball entry section, the first start ball entry section and the second start ball entry section A most advantageous gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state and the second gaming state based on the combination of the starting ball-entering portion and the first gaming state and the second gaming state. A game machine characterized by comprising a most advantageous game state transition section (game state transition processing) for transitioning the game state to .

According to feature B1 of the present invention group, the most advantageous gaming state transition section is based on the result of an internal lottery executed when a game ball enters the first start ball entry section or the second start ball entry section. When winning, from the first game state and the second game state based on the combination of the first start ball entry portion and the second start ball entry portion and the first game state and the second game state Also, the game state is shifted to the most advantageous game state advantageous to the player. According to this, when the player wins the result of the internal lottery executed with the entry of the game ball into the first start ball entry section or the second start ball entry section, the first start entry Attention will be paid to the combination of the ball portion and the second starting ball entry portion with the first and second playing states. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of the player to the game.

Feature B2.
In the gaming machine described in feature B1 of the invention group,
The second starting ball entrance portion is
A state (low-frequency support mode) in which a game ball flowing down the game area cannot be entered, and
A ball entry possible state (high frequency support mode) in which a game ball flowing down the game area can be entered,
The game state transition means is
After switching to the second game state by the game state switching unit, the ball entering state switching unit (opening/closing execution mode end transition processing and variable end processing),
The most advantageous game state transition unit switches from the second game state to the first game state by the game state switching unit, and is triggered by the entry of a game ball into the second start ball entry unit. A game characterized by shifting the game state to the most advantageous game state which is more advantageous to the player than the first game state and the second game state when winning the result of the internal lottery executed as machine.

Here, the non-enterable state of the second start-up ball entry section is not only a state in which a game ball flowing down the game area cannot be entered completely, but also a state in which a game ball flowing down the game area can be temporarily entered. It may include the state of In addition, the ball-enterable state of the second start-up ball-entering part is not only a state in which a game ball flowing down the game area can be completely entered, but also a game ball flowing down the game area is temporarily disabled. It may also include the state of In short, in the ball-enterable state, compared with the ball-enterable state, the game ball flowing down the game area should be easier to enter the second start ball-entering portion.

According to the feature B2 of the group of inventions, the most advantageous game state transition unit switches the game state from the second game state to the first game state by the game state switching unit, and then the game ball to the second start ball entry unit. The game state is shifted to the most advantageous game state more advantageous to the player than the first game state and the second game state when winning the result of the internal lottery executed with the entry of a ball as a trigger. According to this, the player pays attention to the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the second starting ball entering section. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of the player to the game.

Feature B3.
In the gaming machine described in feature B2 of the invention group,
Storage means for second ball entry unit (second 2 Equipped with a result display area reservation area Rb),
After switching to the second game state, the game state switching unit associates the game state with a predetermined number of internal lottery information that is smaller than the number of the plurality of internal lottery information stored in the second ball-entering unit storage means. Switching from the second game state to the first game state triggered by notification of the result of the internal lottery received,
After switching from the second game state to the first game state by the game state switching unit, the most advantageous game state transition unit performs the internal lottery stored in the second ball entry unit storage means. This game machine is characterized by shifting a game state to a most advantageous game state advantageous to a player when winning the result of an internal lottery associated with information.

According to feature B3 of the present invention group, after switching to the second game state, the game state switching unit selects a predetermined number less than the number of the plurality of pieces of internal lottery information stored in the second ball-entering unit storage means. Triggered by notification of the result of the internal lottery associated with the internal lottery information, the game state is switched from the second game state to the first game state. According to this, when the player is notified of the result of the internal lottery associated with the predetermined number of internal lottery information in the second game state, he/she expects that he/she will not win the lottery, and then enters the first game state. When the result of the internal lottery associated with the rest of the internal lottery information is reported by the player, the player expects to win the lottery. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of the player to the game.

Feature B4.
In the gaming machine described in feature B3 of the invention group,
Storage means for the first ball entry unit (second 1 result display unit holding area Ra),
The result of the internal lottery associated with the plurality of internal lottery information stored in the second ball-entering unit storage means is associated with the plurality of internal lottery information stored in the first ball-entering unit storage unit. A game machine characterized in that notification is given with priority over the result of an internal lottery.

According to feature B4 of the present invention group, the gaming machine stores, in the first ball-entering unit storage means, the internal lottery results associated with a plurality of pieces of internal lottery information stored in the second ball-entering unit storage means. Since the result of the internal lottery associated with the plurality of internal lottery information is reported with priority, regardless of whether or not the internal lottery information is stored in the storage means for the first ball entering section, the second lottery The result of the internal lottery associated with the plurality of internal lottery information stored in the storage means for the ball portion can be preferentially notified. Therefore, the player pays attention only to the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the second start ball entry section. can be improved.

Feature B5.
In the gaming machine described in Feature B3 or Feature B4 of the present invention group,
A game machine characterized in that, in the second game state, an internal lottery with a winning probability higher than that in the first game state is executed.

According to feature B5 of the present invention group, the second gaming state executes an internal lottery with a winning probability higher than that in the first gaming state. The probability of winning is high when the result of the internal lottery that has been received is notified, and the probability of winning is low when the result of the internal lottery associated with the remaining internal lottery information is notified in the subsequent first game state. Become. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of the player to the game.

Feature B6.
In the gaming machine described in feature B5 of the invention group,
The game state switching unit switches the game state to the second game state when the result of the internal lottery executed with the entry of the game ball to the first start ball entry unit or the second start ball entry unit as a trigger is won. switch to
The gaming machine is characterized in that the continuation rate of the most advantageous game state is higher than the continuation rate of the second game state.

Here, the continuation rate refers to the probability of continuing to stay in the game state. The game state switching unit switches to the second game state when winning the internal lottery result triggered by the entry of the game ball into the first start ball entry unit or the second start ball entry unit, and switches to the second game state. Triggered by notification of the result of the internal lottery associated with a predetermined number of internal lottery information smaller than the number of the plurality of internal lottery information stored in the storage means for the 2-ball entry part, the second game state is changed to the first. Switch to the game state of . Therefore, the continuation rate of the second gaming state informs the result of the internal lottery associated with the predetermined number of internal lottery information that is smaller than the number of the plurality of internal lottery information stored in the second ball entry storage means. It is the probability of winning the result of the internal lottery executed with the entry of the game ball into the first start ball entry section or the second start ball entry section.

According to feature B6 of the present invention group, since the continuation rate of the most advantageous gaming state is higher than the continuation rate of the second gaming state, the player is encouraged to enter the game ball into the second start ball entering section. Further attention will be given to the results of the internal lottery that was triggered. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of the player to the game.

Feature B7.
In the gaming machine according to any one of feature B1 to feature B6 of the present invention group,
The gaming machine, wherein the first starting ball-entering section and the second starting ball-entering section are arranged on the same path.

According to feature B7 of the present invention group, the first starting ball-entering part and the second starting ball-entering part are arranged on the same path, so that the player can shoot the game ball on the same path. By, it is possible to enter the game ball into the first start ball entering section and the second start ball entering section. Therefore, the gaming machine can allow players to play games comfortably.

Feature B8.
In the gaming machine according to any one of feature B1 to feature B6 of the present invention group,
A first route (left-handed route) that makes it easy for the game ball to enter the first start ball entry part and makes it difficult for the game ball to enter the second start ball entry part;
A second route (right-handed route) that makes it easy for the game ball to enter the second starting ball entering part and makes it difficult for the game ball to enter the first starting ball entering part. A game machine characterized by

According to feature B8 of the present invention group, the player can make it easier for the game ball to enter the first starting ball entering section by launching the game ball along the first path. By launching the game ball to the second path, it is possible to make it easier for the game ball to enter the second starting ball entering section. Therefore, the gaming machine can reliably reflect the player's intentions and allow the player to play comfortably.

According to the characteristic group B of the present invention, since it is possible to improve the attention of the player to the game, the following problems can be solved.

Conventionally, a shooting means for shooting a game ball toward a game area formed in front of a game board is provided, and an internal lottery such as a jackpot lottery is performed by entering a game ball into an operation opening (starting ball entry means). A game machine that executes is known. For example, when winning a jackpot lottery, the gaming machine shifts the game state from the normal control state to a specific control state advantageous to the player. In this specific control state, the gaming machine pays out a large number of game balls, for example, by shifting the variable winning device to a state in which game balls can enter.
By the way, since the normal control state has a plurality of game states with different probabilities of winning the jackpot lottery, the player can play the game while enjoying the transition of the game state.

However, there is a problem that the player's attention to the game is lowered because the transition of the game state is determined by a lottery when the jackpot lottery is won.

<Characteristic group C> Characteristic C1.
A shooting means (shooting handle 27) for shooting a game ball toward a game area formed in front of the game board, a game ball flowing down the game area is entered, and an internal lottery is performed when the game ball enters. Based on the starting ball entry means (upper operation opening 36 and lower operation opening 37) to be executed and the result of the internal lottery executed with the entry of the game ball into the starting ball entry means as a trigger, it is advantageous for the player. A game machine (pachinko machine 10) comprising game state transition means (main controller 60) for shifting the game state from the normal control state to the specific control state,
The normal control state is
A first gaming state (low probability mode);
A second game state (high probability mode) different from the first game state,
The starting ball entry means is
a first starting ball entry portion (upper working port 36);
A second start-up ball entry portion (lower operation port 37) different from the first start-up ball entry portion,
The second starting ball entrance portion is
A state (low-frequency support mode) in which a game ball flowing down the game area cannot be entered, and
A ball entry possible state (high frequency support mode) in which a game ball flowing down the game area can be entered,
The game machine is
Storage means for second ball entry unit (second 2 Equipped with a result display area reservation area Rb),
The game state transition means is
After switching between the first gaming state and the second gaming state, and after switching to the second gaming state, the number of the plurality of internal lottery information stored in the second ball-entering unit storage means Triggered by notification of the result of the internal lottery associated with a predetermined number of internal lottery information, the game state switching unit (transition at the end of the open/close execution mode) switches from the second game state to the first game state. processing and variable termination processing);
After switching to the second game state by the game state switching unit, the ball entering state switching unit (opening/closing execution mode end transition processing and change end processing),
After switching to the second game state by the game state switching unit, when winning the result of the internal lottery associated with the internal lottery information stored in the storage means for the second ball entry unit for the first time, Alternatively, after switching from the second game state to the first game state by the game state switching unit, the internal lottery associated with the internal lottery information stored in the second ball entry unit storage means A gaming machine comprising a most advantageous game state transition section (game state transition processing) for shifting a game state to a most advantageous game state advantageous to a player when a result is won.

Here, the non-enterable state of the second start-up ball entry section is not only a state in which a game ball flowing down the game area cannot be entered completely, but also a state in which a game ball flowing down the game area can be temporarily entered. It may include the state of In addition, the ball-enterable state of the second start-up ball-entering part is not only a state in which a game ball flowing down the game area can be completely entered, but also a game ball flowing down the game area is temporarily disabled. It may also include the state of In short, in the ball-enterable state, compared with the ball-enterable state, the game ball flowing down the game area should be easier to enter the second start ball-entering portion.

According to the feature C1 of the present invention group, the most advantageous game state transition unit, after switching to the second game state by the game state switching unit, first uses the internal lottery stored in the storage means for the second ball entry unit. When the result of the internal lottery associated with the information is won, or after switching from the second game state to the first game state in the game state switching unit, the game ball is entered into the second start ball entry unit. When winning the result of the internal lottery executed with this as a trigger, the game state is shifted to the most advantageous game state which is more advantageous to the player than the first game state and the second game state. According to this, the player pays attention to the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the second starting ball entering section. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of the player to the game.

Further, after switching to the second game state, the game state switching unit is associated with a predetermined number of internal lottery information that is less than the number of the plurality of internal lottery information stored in the second ball-entering unit storage means. Triggered by notification of the result of the internal lottery, the game state is switched from the second game state to the first game state. According to this, when the player is notified of the result of the internal lottery associated with the predetermined number of internal lottery information for the second and subsequent times in the second gaming state, the player expects that he or she will not win the lottery. When the result of the internal lottery associated with the remaining internal lottery information is notified in the game state of , or the result of the internal lottery associated with the first internal lottery information is notified in the second game state In that case, you will expect to be elected. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of the player to the game.

Feature C2.
In the gaming machine described in feature C1 of the invention group,
Storage means for the first ball entry unit (second 1 result display unit holding area Ra),
The result of the internal lottery associated with the plurality of internal lottery information stored in the second ball-entering unit storage means is associated with the plurality of internal lottery information stored in the first ball-entering unit storage unit. A game machine characterized in that notification is given with priority over the result of an internal lottery.

According to feature C2 of the present invention group, the gaming machine stores, in the first ball-entering unit storage means, the internal lottery results associated with a plurality of pieces of internal lottery information stored in the second ball-entering unit storage means. Since the result of the internal lottery associated with the plurality of internal lottery information is reported with priority, regardless of whether or not the internal lottery information is stored in the storage means for the first ball entering section, the second lottery The result of the internal lottery associated with the plurality of internal lottery information stored in the storage means for the ball portion can be preferentially notified. Therefore, the player pays attention only to the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the second start ball entry section. can be improved.

Feature C3.
In the gaming machine described in feature C1 or feature C2 of the invention group,
A game machine characterized in that, in the second game state, an internal lottery with a winning probability higher than that in the first game state is executed.

According to feature C3 of the present invention group, the second game state executes an internal lottery with a winning probability higher than that in the first game state. The winning probability increases when the result of the internal lottery associated with the lottery information is notified, and when the result of the internal lottery associated with the remaining internal lottery information is notified in the first game state after that. the odds of winning are lower. Further, when the result of the internal lottery associated with the first internal lottery information is reported in the second game state, the probability of winning increases. According to this, the player most expects winning when the result of the internal lottery associated with the first internal lottery information is notified in the second game state. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of the player to the game.

Feature C4.
In the gaming machine described in feature C3 of the invention group,
The game state switching unit switches the game state to the second game state when the result of the internal lottery executed with the entry of the game ball to the first start ball entry unit or the second start ball entry unit as a trigger is won. switch to
The gaming machine is characterized in that the continuation rate of the most advantageous game state is higher than the continuation rate of the second game state.

Here, the continuation rate refers to the probability of continuing to stay in the game state. The game state switching unit switches to the second game state when winning the internal lottery result triggered by the entry of the game ball into the first start ball entry unit or the second start ball entry unit, and switches to the second game state. Triggered by notification of the result of the internal lottery associated with a predetermined number of internal lottery information smaller than the number of the plurality of internal lottery information stored in the storage means for the 2-ball entry part, the second game state is changed to the first. Switch to the game state of . Therefore, the continuation rate of the second gaming state informs the result of the internal lottery associated with the predetermined number of internal lottery information that is smaller than the number of the plurality of internal lottery information stored in the second ball entry storage means. It is the probability of winning the result of the internal lottery executed with the entry of the game ball into the first start ball entry section or the second start ball entry section.

According to feature C4 of the present invention group, since the continuation rate of the most advantageous gaming state is higher than the continuation rate of the second gaming state, the player is encouraged to enter the game ball into the second start ball entering section. Further attention will be given to the results of the internal lottery that was triggered. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of the player to the game.

Feature C5.
In the gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C4 of the invention group,
The ball-enterable state is
A first ball-enterable state (high-frequency support mode for short-term electric role open time) in which a game ball flowing down the game area can be temporarily entered;
A second ball-enterable state (long-term ball-enterable state) in which game balls flowing down the game area are temporarily allowed to enter and more game balls than the first ball-enterable state are allowed to enter Open time high frequency support mode) and
The ball-entering state switching unit switches the second start-up ball-entering unit from the non-enterable state to the first possible state or the A game machine characterized by switching to a second ball-enterable state.

According to feature C5 of the present invention group, the ball-entering state switching unit switches the second start-up ball-entering unit from the ball-entering impossible state to the first ball-entering state after switching to the second game state by the game state switching unit. Switch to the possible state or the second ball-enterable state. Further, the most advantageous gaming state transition section changes the first gaming state and the second gaming state when winning the internal lottery result triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second start ball entering section. The game state is shifted to the most advantageous game state more advantageous to the player than the game state. According to this, the player expects to be switched to the second ball-enterable state by the ball-enterable state switching unit. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of the player to the game.

Feature C6.
In the gaming machine described in feature C5 of the invention group,
The second ball-enterable state is set to have a longer duration than the first ball-enterable state, thereby allowing more game balls to enter than the first ball-enterable state. A game machine characterized by

According to the feature C6 of the present invention group, the second ball-enterable state is set to have a longer duration than the first ball-enterable state, so that the number of game balls is greater than that of the first ball-enterable state. can be entered, the configurations of the first enterable state and the second enterable state can be simplified.

Feature C7.
In the gaming machine described in feature C5 or feature C6 of the invention group,
The ball entry state switching unit switches the second start ball entry unit from the non-enterable state based on the result of an internal lottery executed with the entry of a game ball into the first start ball entry unit. A gaming machine characterized by switching to the first ball-enterable state or the second ball-enterable state.

According to the feature C7 of the present invention group, the ball entry state switching unit selects the second start ball entry unit based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the first start ball entry unit. is switched from the ball-unable to enter state to the first ball-enterable state or the second ball-enterable state, the player can enter the internal lottery executed with the entry of the gaming ball into the first start ball-entering section as a trigger. will pay attention to the results of Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of the player to the game.

Feature C8.
In the gaming machine described in feature C7 of the invention group,
The result of the internal lottery executed with the entry of the game ball to the first start ball entry section as a trigger is
The first winning result (“explicit small round high probability result” or “non-explicit small round high probability result”);
A second winning result ("best result") different from the first winning result;
The ball-entering state switching unit switches the second start-up ball-entering unit from the ball-entering impossible state to the first ball-enterable state when the first winning result is obtained, and the second winning state is achieved. A game machine characterized by switching the second starting ball-entering section from the ball-entering impossible state to the second ball-entering possible state when a result is obtained.

According to feature C8 of the present invention group, the ball-entering state switching unit switches the second start-up ball-entering unit from the ball-entering impossible state to the ball-entering possible state when the first winning result is obtained, When the second winning result is obtained, the second starting ball entry part is switched from the state where the ball cannot be entered to the second ball entry possible state, so that the player can switch the entering state as the second winning result. It is expected that it will be switched to the second ball entry possible state at the part. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of the player to the game.

Feature C9.
In the gaming machine described in feature C5 or feature C6 of the invention group,
An expectation that makes the player expect that the game state will be shifted to the specific control state based on the result of the internal lottery executed with the entry of the game ball into the first start ball entry section. Equipped with expected effect execution means (sound emission control device 90 and display control device 100) for executing the effect,
The ball-entering state switching unit selects the desired effect executed by the expected effect executing means when the result of the internal lottery executed with the entry of the game ball into the first starting ball-entering unit as a trigger is won. A gaming machine characterized by switching the second starting ball-entering section from the state where the ball-entering is impossible to the state where the ball-entering is impossible to the state where the ball-entering is possible or the state where the ball-entering is possible.

According to feature C9 of the present invention group, the ball-entering state switching unit switches to the expected effect executing means when winning the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the first start ball-entering unit. Since the second start ball-entering portion is switched from the ball-entering impossibility state to the first ball-entering possible state or the second ball-entering possible state based on the content of the expected performance executed by the player, the player can execute the expected performance. Attention will be paid to the content of the expected performance executed by the means. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of the player to the game.

Feature C10.
In the gaming machine described in feature C9 of the invention group,
The content of the expected effect executed by the expected effect executing means is
a first expected effect (first reach display);
A second expected effect (second reach display) different from the first expected effect is provided,
The ball-entering state switching unit switches the second start-up ball-entering unit from the ball-entering impossible state to the first ball-entering possible state when the expected effect executing means executes the first expected effect. When the second expected effect is executed by the expected effect executing means, the second starting ball-entering section is switched from the state where the ball cannot be entered to the second ball-enterable state. game machine.

According to the feature C10 of the present invention group, the ball-entering state switching unit changes the second start-ball-entering unit from the state where the ball cannot be entered to the first ball-entering state when the expected effect executing means executes the first expected effect. When switching to the ball possible state and executing the second expected effect by the expected effect execution means, the second start ball entering part is switched from the ball entering impossible state to the second ball entering possible state, so that the player can: When winning the result of the internal lottery executed with the entry of the game ball into the first start ball entering section as a trigger, the second expected production is executed by the expected production execution means, and the ball entry state switching section executes the second expected production. It expects to be switched to the second ball-enterable state. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of the player to the game.

Feature C11.
In the gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C10 of the invention group,
The gaming machine, wherein the first starting ball-entering section and the second starting ball-entering section are arranged on the same path.

According to the feature C11 of the present invention group, the first starting ball-entering part and the second starting ball-entering part are arranged on the same path, so that the player can shoot the game ball on the same path. By, it is possible to enter the game ball into the first start ball entering section and the second start ball entering section. Therefore, the gaming machine can allow players to play games comfortably.

Feature C12.
In the gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C10 of the invention group,
A first route (left-handed route) that makes it easy for the game ball to enter the first start ball entry part and makes it difficult for the game ball to enter the second start ball entry part;
A second route (right-handed route) that makes it easy for the game ball to enter the second starting ball entering part and makes it difficult for the game ball to enter the first starting ball entering part. A game machine characterized by

According to feature C12 of the present invention group, the player can make it easier for the game ball to enter the first starting ball entering section by launching the game ball along the first path. By causing the game ball to be launched along the second path, it is possible to make it easier for the game ball to enter the second starting ball entering section. Therefore, the gaming machine can reliably reflect the player's intentions and allow the player to play games comfortably.

According to the characteristic group C of the present invention, since it is possible to improve the attention of the player to the game, the following problems can be solved.

Conventionally, a shooting means for shooting a game ball toward a game area formed in front of a game board is provided, and an internal lottery such as a jackpot lottery is performed by entering a game ball into an operation opening (starting ball entry means). A game machine that executes is known. For example, when winning a jackpot lottery, the gaming machine shifts the game state from the normal control state to a specific control state advantageous to the player. In this specific control state, the gaming machine pays out a large number of game balls, for example, by shifting the variable winning device to a state in which game balls can enter.
By the way, since the normal control state has a plurality of game states with different probabilities of winning the jackpot lottery, the player can play the game while enjoying the transition of the game state.

However, there is a problem that the player's attention to the game is lowered because the transition of the game state is determined by a lottery when the jackpot lottery is won.

<Feature D Group> Feature D1.
A shooting means (shooting handle 27) for shooting a game ball toward a game area formed in front of the game board, a game ball flowing down the game area is entered, and an internal lottery is performed when the game ball enters. Based on the starting ball entry means (upper operation opening 36 and lower operation opening 37) to be executed and the result of the internal lottery executed with the entry of the game ball into the starting ball entry means as a trigger, it is advantageous for the player. A game machine (pachinko machine 10) comprising game state transition means (main controller 60) for shifting the game state from the normal control state to the specific control state,
The normal control state is
A first gaming state (low probability mode);
A second game state (high probability mode) different from the first game state,
The starting ball entry means is
a first starting ball entry portion (upper working port 36);
A second start-up ball entry portion (lower operation port 37) different from the first start-up ball entry portion,
The second starting ball entrance portion is
A state (low-frequency support mode) in which a game ball flowing down the game area cannot be entered, and
A ball entry possible state (high frequency support mode) in which a game ball flowing down the game area can be entered,
The ball-enterable state is
A first ball-enterable state (high-frequency support mode for short-term electric role open time) in which a game ball flowing down the game area can be temporarily entered;
A second ball-enterable state (long-term ball-enterable state) in which game balls flowing down the game area are temporarily allowed to enter and more game balls than the first ball-enterable state are allowed to enter Open time high frequency support mode) and
The game state transition means includes a game state switching unit (transition processing and variation end processing at the end of the opening/closing execution mode) for switching between the first game state and the second game state;
After switching to the second game state by the game state switching unit, the second start ball entering unit is changed from the state where the ball cannot be entered to the state where the ball can be entered or the state where the ball can be entered. A ball entry state switching unit that temporarily switches (transition processing and fluctuation end processing at the end of the opening and closing execution mode);
After switching from the second game state to the first game state in the game state switching unit, the result of the internal lottery executed with the entry of the game ball into the second start ball entry unit as a trigger A most advantageous game state transition unit (game state transition processing) for shifting the game state to a most advantageous game state more advantageous to the player than the first game state and the second game state when winning. A gaming machine characterized by:

Here, the non-enterable state of the second start-up ball entry section is not only a state in which a game ball flowing down the game area cannot be entered completely, but also a state in which a game ball flowing down the game area can be temporarily entered. It may include the state of In addition, the ball-enterable state of the second start-up ball-entering part is not only a state in which a game ball flowing down the game area can be completely entered, but also a game ball flowing down the game area is temporarily disabled. It may also include the state of In short, in the ball-enterable state, compared with the ball-enterable state, the game ball flowing down the game area should be easier to enter the second start ball-entering portion.

According to the feature D1 of the present invention group, the most advantageous game state transition unit switches the game state from the second game state to the first game state by the game state switching unit, and then the game ball to the second start ball entry unit. The game state is shifted to the most advantageous game state more advantageous to the player than the first game state and the second game state when winning the result of the internal lottery executed with the entry of a ball as a trigger. According to this, the player pays attention to the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the second starting ball entering section. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of the player to the game.

Further, after switching to the second game state by the game state switching unit, the ball-entering state switching unit switches the second start-up ball-entering unit from the ball-entering impossible state to the first ball-entering possible state or the second ball-entering state. switch to enabled. Further, the most advantageous gaming state transition section changes the first gaming state and the second gaming state when winning the internal lottery result triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second start ball entering section. The game state is shifted to the most advantageous game state more advantageous to the player than the game state. According to this, the player expects to be switched to the second ball-enterable state by the ball-enterable state switching unit. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of the player to the game.

Feature D2.
In the gaming machine described in feature D1 of the invention group,
The second ball-enterable state is set to have a longer duration than the first ball-enterable state, thereby allowing more game balls to enter than the first ball-enterable state. A game machine characterized by

According to feature D2 of the group of the present invention, the second ball-enterable state is set to have a longer duration than the first ball-enterable state, so that the number of game balls is greater than that of the first ball-enterable state. can be entered, the configurations of the first enterable state and the second enterable state can be simplified.

Feature D3.
In the gaming machine described in feature D1 or feature D2 of the invention group,
The ball entry state switching unit switches the second start ball entry unit from the non-enterable state based on the result of an internal lottery executed with the entry of a game ball into the first start ball entry unit. A gaming machine characterized by switching to the first ball-enterable state or the second ball-enterable state.

According to feature D3 of the group of inventions, the ball entry state switching unit selects the second start ball entry unit based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the first start ball entry unit. is switched from the ball-unable to enter state to the first ball-enterable state or the second ball-enterable state, the player can enter the internal lottery executed with the entry of the gaming ball into the first start ball-entering section as a trigger. will pay attention to the results of Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of the player to the game.

Feature D4.
In the gaming machine described in feature D3 of the invention group,
The result of the internal lottery executed with the entry of the game ball to the first start ball entry section as a trigger is
The first winning result (“explicit small round high probability result” or “non-explicit small round high probability result”);
A second winning result ("best result") different from the first winning result;
The ball-entering state switching unit switches the second start-up ball-entering unit from the ball-entering impossible state to the first ball-enterable state when the first winning result is obtained, and the second winning state is achieved. A game machine characterized by switching the second starting ball-entering section from the ball-entering impossible state to the second ball-entering possible state when a result is obtained.

According to feature D4 of the present invention group, the ball-entering state switching unit switches the second start-up ball-entering unit from the ball-entering impossible state to the ball-entering possible state when the first winning result is obtained, When the second winning result is obtained, the second starting ball entry part is switched from the state where the ball cannot be entered to the second ball entry possible state, so that the player can switch the entering state as the second winning result. It is expected that it will be switched to the second ball entry possible state at the part. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of the player to the game.

Feature D5.
In the gaming machine described in feature D1 or feature D2 of the invention group,
An expectation that makes the player expect that the game state will be shifted to the specific control state based on the result of the internal lottery executed with the entry of the game ball into the first start ball entry section. Equipped with expected effect execution means (sound emission control device 90 and display control device 100) for executing the effect,
The ball-entering state switching unit selects the desired effect executed by the expected effect executing means when the result of the internal lottery executed with the entry of the game ball into the first starting ball-entering unit as a trigger is won. A gaming machine characterized by switching the second starting ball-entering section from the state where the ball-entering is impossible to the state where the ball-entering is impossible to the state where the ball-entering is possible or the state where the ball-entering is possible.

According to feature D5 of the present invention group, the ball-entering state switching unit switches to the expected effect executing means when winning the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the first start ball-entering unit. Since the second start ball-entering portion is switched from the ball-entering impossibility state to the first ball-entering possible state or the second ball-entering possible state based on the content of the expected performance executed by the player, the player can execute the expected performance. Attention will be paid to the content of the expected performance executed by the means. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of the player to the game.

Feature D6.
In the gaming machine described in feature D5 of the invention group,
The content of the expected effect executed by the expected effect executing means is
a first expected effect (first reach display);
A second expected effect (second reach display) different from the first expected effect is provided,
The ball-entering state switching unit switches the second start-up ball-entering unit from the ball-entering impossible state to the first ball-entering possible state when the expected effect executing means executes the first expected effect. When the second expected effect is executed by the expected effect executing means, the second starting ball-entering section is switched from the state where the ball cannot be entered to the second ball-enterable state. game machine.

According to feature D6 of the present invention group, the ball-entering state switching unit switches the second start-ball-entering unit from the state where the ball cannot be entered to the first ball-entering state when the expected effect execution means executes the first expected effect. When switching to the ball possible state and executing the second expected effect by the expected effect execution means, the second start ball entering part is switched from the ball entering impossible state to the second ball entering possible state, so that the player can: When winning the result of the internal lottery executed with the entry of the game ball into the first start ball entering section as a trigger, the second expected production is executed by the expected production execution means, and the ball entry state switching section executes the second expected production. It expects to be switched to the second ball-enterable state. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of the player to the game.

Feature D7.
In the gaming machine described in any one of features D1 to D6 of the present invention group,
The gaming machine, wherein the first starting ball-entering section and the second starting ball-entering section are arranged on the same path.

According to feature D7 of the present invention group, the first starting ball-entering section and the second starting ball-entering section are arranged on the same path, so that the player can shoot the game ball along the same path. By, it is possible to enter the game ball into the first start ball entering section and the second start ball entering section. Therefore, the gaming machine can allow players to play games comfortably.

Feature D8.
In the gaming machine described in any one of features D1 to D6 of the present invention group,
A first route (left-handed route) that makes it easy for the game ball to enter the first start ball entry part and makes it difficult for the game ball to enter the second start ball entry part;
A second route (right-handed route) that makes it easy for the game ball to enter the second starting ball entering part and makes it difficult for the game ball to enter the first starting ball entering part. A game machine characterized by

According to feature D8 of the present invention group, the player can make it easier for the game ball to enter the first starting ball entering section by launching the game ball along the first path. By causing the game ball to be launched along the second path, it is possible to make it easier for the game ball to enter the second starting ball entering section. Therefore, the gaming machine can reliably reflect the player's intentions and allow the player to play games comfortably.

According to the characteristic group D of the present invention, since it is possible to improve the attention of the player to the game, the following problems can be solved.

Conventionally, a shooting means for shooting a game ball toward a game area formed in front of a game board is provided, and an internal lottery such as a jackpot lottery is performed by entering a game ball into an operation opening (starting ball entry means). A game machine that executes is known. For example, when winning a jackpot lottery, the gaming machine shifts the game state from the normal control state to a specific control state advantageous to the player. In this specific control state, the gaming machine pays out a large number of game balls, for example, by shifting the variable winning device to a state in which game balls can enter.
By the way, since the normal control state has a plurality of game states with different probabilities of winning the jackpot lottery, the player can play the game while enjoying the transition of the game state.

However, there is a problem that the player's attention to the game is lowered because the transition of the game state is determined by a lottery when the jackpot lottery is won.
<Others>
Conventionally, a shooting means for shooting a game ball toward a game area formed in front of a game board is provided, and an internal lottery such as a jackpot lottery is performed by entering a game ball into an operation opening (starting ball entry means). A game machine that executes is known (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2005-074175). For example, when winning a jackpot lottery, the gaming machine shifts the game state from the normal control state to a specific control state advantageous to the player. In this specific control state, the gaming machine pays out a large number of game balls, for example, by shifting the variable winning device to a state in which game balls can enter.
By the way, since the normal control state has a plurality of game states with different probabilities of winning the jackpot lottery, the player can play the game while enjoying the transition of the game state.
However, there is a problem that the player's attention to the game is lowered because the transition of the game state is determined by a lottery when the jackpot lottery is won.
An object of the present technical idea is to provide a gaming machine capable of increasing the attention of the player to the game.
<Means>
The gaming machine of this technical idea comprises a shooting means for shooting a game ball toward a game area formed in front of a game board, and a game ball flowing down the game area can enter the ball. and game state transition means capable of shifting the game state from the normal control state to the specific control state advantageous to the player based on the result of the predetermined lottery. In the gaming machine, the normal control state has a first game state, a second game state different from the first game state, and a continuation rate higher than the continuation rate of the second game state, a third game state advantageous to the player, the starting ball-entering means comprises a first starting ball-entering means and a second starting ball-entering means different from the first starting ball-entering means, and a second starting ball-entering means. The means comprises a ball-entering impossible state in which a game ball flowing down the game area cannot be entered, and a ball-enterable state in which a game ball flowing down the game area is allowed to enter, and the gaming machine performs a second start. A storage means for second ball entry means for storing a plurality of pieces of lottery information associated with results of a predetermined lottery based on the entry of a game ball into the ball entry means, wherein the game state transition means changes the game state to the first game state. and switching the second game state, and after switching to the second game state, a predetermined A game state switching means is provided for switching from the second game state to the first game state when the result of the lottery is notified, and the game state is switched to the second game state by the game state switching means. , when a predetermined lottery result associated with the lottery information stored in the second ball entry means storage means is first won, and the game state switching means switches from the second game state to the first game state. After that, it is possible to shift to the third game state in both cases of winning a predetermined lottery result associated with the lottery information stored in the second ball-entering means storage means. do.
<effect>
According to this technical idea, it is possible to improve the attention of the player to the game.

INDUSTRIAL APPLICABILITY As described above, the present invention can be suitably used for game machines such as pachinko game machines.

10... Pachinko machine, 36... Upper operation opening, 37... Lower operation opening, 38... Variable winning device, 38a...
Grand winning opening 38b Open/close door 38c Variable winning driving section 39 Out opening 51 Symbol display device 60 Main control device 62 MPU 90 Sound emission control device 92 MPU 10
0... Display control device, 102... MPU.

Claims (1)

A shooting means for shooting a game ball toward a game area formed in front of a game board, a game ball flowing down the game area can be entered, and a predetermined lottery can be executed based on the entered ball. and game state transition means capable of transitioning the game state from the normal control state to the specific control state advantageous to the player based on the result of the predetermined lottery, wherein
The normal control state is
a first gaming state;
a second game state different from the first game state;
a third game state that has a continuation rate higher than the continuation rate of the second game state and is advantageous to the player;
The starting ball entry means is
a first starting ball entry means;
A second start-up ball entry means different from the first start-up ball entry means,
The second starting ball entry means
A state where a game ball flowing down the game area cannot be entered, and
A ball entry possible state in which a game ball flowing down the game area can be entered,
The game machine is
a storage means for second ball entry means for storing a plurality of pieces of lottery information associated with the result of the predetermined lottery based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting ball entry means;
The game state transition means is
After switching between the first game state and the second game state and switching to the second game state, the number is less than the maximum number of the plurality of lottery information that can be stored in the second ball entering means storage means. A game state switching means for switching from the second game state to the first game state when the result of the predetermined lottery associated with a predetermined number of lottery information is notified,
After switching to the second game state by the game state switching means, the game state is the result of the predetermined lottery associated with the lottery information first stored in the second ball entering means storage means. and after switching from the second game state to the first game state by the game state switching means, the lottery information associated with the lottery information stored in the second ball entry means storage means A game machine characterized in that it is possible to shift to the third game state in both cases of winning the predetermined lottery result.

Images